ARCC BUILDING HVAC RENOVATION

ARCC BUILDING HVAC RENOVATION

11400 Robinwood Drive Hagerstown, Maryland 21742

Washington County

SPECIFICATIONS

ISSUED FOR BID

July 21, 2020

Contract No. HCC21002

catwood

Typewritten Text

See Specification Bulletin 1 for changes to Specifications tagged with "B1".

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Hagerstown Community College 7/21/2020 ARCC Building HVAC Renovation Issued for Bid

Contract No. HCC21002 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL (See separate document)

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 13 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 60 00 GROUT

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 91 00 PAINTING

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19.13 MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING METAL BUILDING SYSTEM

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 14 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 19 DUCT SILENCERS 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 40 00 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES 23 51 00 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 52 33.13 FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 23 64 26 ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELEC 26 05 03 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS



26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 28 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.19 WIREWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 16.13 LOW-VOLTAGE ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CIRCUITS 26 50 00 LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 71 19 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS



Contract No. HCC21002 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Contractor's use of site and premises.4. Coordination with occupants.5. Work restrictions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations andprocedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: As indicated in the Request for Proposal.

1. Project Location: As indicated in the Request for Proposal.

B. Owner: As indicated in the Request for Proposal.

1. Owner's Representative: As indicated in the Request for Proposal.

C. Engineer/Architect: Gannett Fleming, Inc., Camp Hill, PA 17011.

1. Architect's Representative: Robert Weidner.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and includes, but is notlimited to, the following:

1. As described in the Request for Proposal.

B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Restricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for constructionoperations as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do notdisturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits on Use of Site: Confine construction operations to areas as designated byOwner.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep roads, driveways, loading areas, andentrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, andemergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storageof materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances byconstruction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage ofmaterials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected byconstruction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.Repair damage caused by construction operations.

D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Except for the areas where Work is to occur, maintainportions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by constructionoperations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by constructionoperations.

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises, and some public uses mayoccur, during the construction period, with the exception of areas under construction.Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts andfacilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner'soperations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Owner occupancy and public use of the facility may be minimized due torestrictions resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic and related orders andregulation by public authorities. Coordinate accordingly with Owner.

2. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied orused facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied orused facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities havingjurisdiction.

3. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affectOwner's operations.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way, and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to daytime hours agreed to with Owner, Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated or approved. Work hours may be modified to meet Project requirements if approved by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging for temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than 10 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.2. Obtain written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, Dust, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, dust, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: As indicated in Request for Proposals.

F. Employee Identification: As indicated in Request for Proposals.

G. Employee Screening: As indicated in Request for Proposals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line


catwood

Typewritten Text

B1 - ADD NEW SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES BETWEEN SECTIONS 01 10 00 and 01 25 00.

catwood

Rectangle


Contract No. HCC21002 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting

comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of constructionfrom those required by the Contract Documents.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due tochanged Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes,or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner thatare not required to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage toContractor or Owner.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. During the bid period, substitution requests for convenience will not be considered, butsubstitution requests for cause will be considered if received no later than 10 days priorto the bid due date. Such requests must be submitted by a prime contract bidder or aprincipal mechanical or electrical subcontract bidder.

B. During construction, substitution requests for convenience must be made within the first30 days after Notice to Proceed.

C. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication orinstallation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title andDrawing numbers and titles.1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installationmethod cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions neededto other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and



separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions withthose of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicableSpecification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such asperformance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable designcharacteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated.Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products andfabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and

addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from ICC-ES or similar organization acceptable to Architect orCode Official.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposedsubstitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on theoverall Contract Time. If specified product or method of constructioncannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter frommanufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt ofpurchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the ContractSum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies withrequirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitutionrequest, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate forapplications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that maysubsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitutionto produce indicated results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information ordocumentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request forsubstitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection ofproposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receiptof additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Contract Amendment or, if no net change in cost ortime, Architect's or Owner’s supplemental instructions for minor changes inthe Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of aproposed substitution within time allocated.



c. Non-acceptance of any proposed alternatives or substitutions shall notentitle the successful Bidder to any additional compensation, nor shall itform the basis for any claim of delay or any extension of time to completethe work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposedsubstitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency toperform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.5 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of theapproved substitutions.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery ofneed for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation andreview of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when thefollowing conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliancewith these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and willproduce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction

schedule.d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction.e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work.g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, isuniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptableto all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Will consider requests if received within 30 days afterthe Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejectedat discretion of Architect.



1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when thefollowing conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliancewith these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additionalresponsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilitiesmay include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluationservices, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similarconsiderations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the ContractDocuments.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and willproduce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction

schedule.f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction.g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work,

including, but not limited to, matching of existing materials and conditionsor maintaining existing warranties where applicable.

h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of theWork.

i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty, or if none is specified,provides a warranty no less than manufacturer’s warranty on the specifiedproduct.

j. If requested substitution involves more than one trade or contractor,requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of theWork, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and isacceptable to all contractors involved, and Contractor will cover the cost ofresulting changes.



END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare andprocess Applications for Payment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of theContract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewingContractor's Applications for Payment.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation ofContractor's construction and submittal schedules.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicatedas separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Owner at earliest possible date, but no later thanseven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Application forPayment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish lineitems for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each SpecificationSection.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule ofvalues:a. Project name and location.b. Owner's name.c. Owner's Project number.d. Name of Architect/Engineer.e. Architect's/Engineer’s Project number.f. Contractor's name and address.g. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicatethe following for each item listed:a. Related Specification Section or division.



b. Description of the Work.c. Name of subcontractor.d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.e. Name of supplier.f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to

nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollaramounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum.1) Labor.2) Materials/Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continuedevaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multipleline items for principal subcontract amounts.

4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Workwhere Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased orfabricated and stored, but not yet installed.a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

5. Allowances (if any): Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values foreach allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of theunit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in theContract Documents to determine quantities.

6. Overhead Costs, Proportional Distribution: Include total cost and proportionateshare of general overhead and profit for each line item.

7. Temporary Facilities: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major costitems that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items.

8. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principalsubcontracts. Include separate line item for operation and maintenance manuals.

9. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when changes resultin an authorized change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate lineitem for each authorized change.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall beconsistent with previous applications and payments, as approved and paid by Owner.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Applications for Payment at regular monthlyintervals, unless otherwise agreed, on dates as directed by Owner and indicated in theOwner/Contractor Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date forreview by Owner.



C. Application for Payment Forms: Use form as directed by Owner.

1. Other Application for Payment forms proposed by the Contractor may beacceptable to Owner. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of scheduleof values.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by aperson authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will returnincomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's constructionschedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for workcompleted at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of authorized cost changes issued before last day of constructionperiod covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requestedproject acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials orequipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiatebetween items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, andconsent of surety to payment for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paidinvoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; donot include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date ofprevious Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previousApplication for Payment and on or before date of current Application forPayment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Paymentand remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit two signed and notarized original copies of each Application forPayment to Owner by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shallinclude waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recordingappropriate information about application.



G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that mustprecede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include thefollowing:

1. List of subcontractors.2. Schedule of values.3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).4. Products list (preliminary if not final).5. Construction waste management plan, including preliminary cost data.6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.9. Copies of building permits if not furnished by Owner or Architect/Engineer.10. Copies of any other authorizations and licenses from authorities having

jurisdiction for performance of the Work.11. Initial progress report.12. Report of preconstruction conference.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect/Engineer or Ownerissues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Paymentshowing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantiallycomplete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially completeand a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

a. Complete administrative actions, submittals, and Work preceding thisapplication, as described in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submitfinal Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation required byOwner but not previously submitted and accepted. These may include, but not belimited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.2. Certification of completion of final punch list items.3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.5. AIA Document G706.6. AIA Document G706A.7. AIA Document G707.8. Evidence that claims have been settled.9. Final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of date of Substantial

Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility forcorresponding elements of the Work.

10. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.



11. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations are paid.12. Other waivers and releases.



END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operationson Project including, but not limited to, the following:1. Coordination drawings.2. Requests for Information (RFIs).3. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas ofresponsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from eachother during construction.

1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance withrequirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown onShop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or ifcoordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricatedor installed by more than one entity.1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large

enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings onstandard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination

drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describerelationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordinationdrawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides forcoordination of the information and resolution of conflicts betweeninstalled components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components ofarchitectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipatedreplacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealeddampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural

elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electricalWork. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acousticalceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where requiredto adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub framing for support of ceiling and wall systems,mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate componentswithin ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated onDrawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and othercomponents.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical roomsshowing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, firealarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for alldisciplines.

5. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs,

including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers,

access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

6. Electrical Work: Show the following:a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger.b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and

other fire alarm locations.c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator,

and motor control center locations.d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column

center lines.7. Fire Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, andsprinkler heads.

8. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Workis being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are theContractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordinationdrawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwisedeficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changesas directed and resubmit. The owner will also be notified.

9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints inaccordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."



C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files inaccordance with the following requirements:1. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version 2007 File Format or newer, operating

in Microsoft Windows operating system.2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Drawings for

use in preparing coordination digital data files.a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

digital data files as they relate to the Drawings.b. Digital Data Software Program: The Drawings are available in <2007

AutoCAD for Microsoft Windows XP>.c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA

Document C106.

1.04 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information orinterpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFIin the form specified.1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.3. Architect reserves the right to bill contractor directly for time spent on frivolous

or unnecessary RFI’s

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needinginformation or interpretation and the following:1. Project name.2. Project number.3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessaryto fully describe items needing interpretation.a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, andrespond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIsreceived by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the followingworking day.1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in whichcase Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additionalinformation.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time orthe Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposalaccording to Contract modification procedures.a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days ofreceipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute theRFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within sevendays if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFInumber. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.7. Date Architect's response was received.8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal

Request, as appropriate.

1.05 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unlessotherwise indicated.1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner andArchitect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invitedattendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significantdiscussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes toeveryone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of themeeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: A preconstruction conference before startingconstruction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 daysafter execution of the Agreement.1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning

Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent;major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend theconference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project andauthorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including thefollowing:a. Tentative construction schedule.b. Phasing.c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.e. Lines of communications.f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.g. Procedures for RFIs.h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.k. Submittal procedures.l. Sustainable design requirements.m. Preparation of record documents.n. Use of the premises.o. Work restrictions.p. Working hours.q. Owner's occupancy requirements.r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.u. Construction waste management and recycling.v. Parking availability.w. Office, work, and storage areas.x. Equipment deliveries and priorities.y. First aid.z. Security.aa. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distributemeeting minutes.



C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project sitebefore each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integrationwith other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shallattend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority,of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations forthe particular activity under consideration, including requirements for thefollowing:a. Contract Documents.b. Options.c. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Purchases.f. Deliveries.g. Submittals.h. Review of mockups.i. Possible conflicts.j. Compatibility problems.k. Time schedules.l. Weather limitations.m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.n. Warranty requirements.o. Compatibility of materials.p. Acceptability of substrates.q. Temporary facilities and controls.r. Space and access limitations.s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.t. Testing and inspecting requirements.u. Installation procedures.v. Coordination with other work.w. Required performance results.x. Protection of adjacent work.y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to otherparties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfullyconcluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments toperformance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference,at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to thescheduled date of Substantial Completion.



1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related toProject closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's CommissioningAuthority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent;major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend themeeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project andauthorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Projectcloseout, including the following:a. Preparation of record documents.b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for

final inspection for acceptance.c. Submittal of written warranties.d. Retain first subparagraph below for projects with LEED or other

sustainable design documentation requirements.e. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation.f. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.g. Requirements for demonstration and training.h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial

Completion and for final payment.j. Submittal procedures.k. Retain first subparagraph below for projects with separate contracts that

may impact Contractor's work and procedures at project closeout.l. Coordination of separate contracts.m. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.n. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.o. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meetingminutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.2. Revise first subparagraph below if attendance by other known entities is

necessary.3. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning

Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and otherentity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, orperformance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. Allparticipants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized toconclude matters relating to the Work.

4. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topicsfor discussion as appropriate to status of Project.a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.



Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review schedule for next period.c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the

following:Interface requirements.Sequence of operations.Status of submittals.Deliveries.Off-site fabrication.Access.Site utilization.Temporary facilities and controls.Progress cleaning.Quality and work standards.Status of correction of deficient items.Field observations.Status of RFIs.Status of proposal requests.Pending changes.Status of Change Orders.Pending claims and disputes.Documentation of information for payment requests.

5. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record anddistribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiringinformation.a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made orrecognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of eachmeeting.

F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at appropriateintervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held forother purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning

Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and otherentity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, orperformance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. Allparticipants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized toconclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordinationmeeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since

the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on



time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction scheduleafter each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have beenmade or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report ofeach meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including thefollowing:Interface requirements.Sequence of operations.Status of submittals.Deliveries.Off-site fabrication.Access.Site utilization.Temporary facilities and controls.Work hours.Hazards and risks.Progress cleaning.Quality and work standards.Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone inattendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from eachmeeting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting theprogress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.2. Construction schedule updating reports.3. Daily construction reports.4. Site condition reports.


1. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for schedule of tests and inspections.2. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for schedule of values and requirements

for use of cost-loaded schedule for Applications for Payment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in aconstruction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on theplanned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF file, sized no larger than for 11 x 17 paper.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entireschedule for entire construction period.

C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Retain in records at project site and have available forreview by Owner during normal weekday work hours.



E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply withrequirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Reviewmethods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule andContractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.3. Discuss potential constraints, including work stages, area separations, and partial

Owner occupancy.4. Review submittal requirements and procedures.5. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.6. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and

inspecting agencies.7. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures,

including commissioning activities.8. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.9. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, submittalschedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work fromentities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities, andschedule them in proper sequence.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a programthat has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work todate of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule thatshows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for eachmain element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unlessspecifically allowed by Owner.



2. Temporary Facilities: Indicate start and completion dates for the following asapplicable:

a. Securing of approvals and permits required for performance of the Work.b. Temporary facilities.c. Construction of mock-ups, prototypes and samples.d. Regulatory agency approvals.e. Punch list.

3. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead-timeitems and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separateactivities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to,submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

4. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated inSection 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittalreview times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.

5. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 5 days for startup and testing.6. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 5 days for commissioning.7. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's/Engineer’s and Owner’sadministrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

8. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completionof punch list items and Final Completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the ContractDocuments and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work isaffected.

1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:a. Coordination with existing construction.b. Limitations of continued occupancies.c. Uninterruptible services.d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.e. Use-of-premises restrictions.f. Seasonal variations.g. Environmental control.

2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion ofthe Work, including, but not limited to, the following:a. Subcontract awards.b. Submittals.c. Purchases.d. Fabrication.e. Sample testing.f. Deliveries.g. Installation.h. Tests and inspections.



i. Adjusting.j. Curing.k. Startup and placement into final use and operation.l. Commissioning.

3. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each majorportion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major areamust be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide forthe following:

a. Structural and metal building wall system alterations.b. Mechanical Room.c. Outside work at north end of building.d. Work in Gym.e. Completion of mechanical installation.f. Completion of electrical installation.g. Substantial Completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actualcosts. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as ofplanned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and paymentprocedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled tooccur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize thefollowing issues:

1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.4. Notations on returned submittals.5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule toreflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularlyscheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisionshave been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with thereport of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, butnot limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activitydurations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Final Completion percentage for each activity.



H. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendardays behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery scheduleindicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required toachieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

I. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect/Engineer and Owner,testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and

post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they havecompleted their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved inperformance of construction activities.

1.7 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 21 days of date established forcommencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify firstworkday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete,indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within timebar.

1.8 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the followinginformation concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.3. Equipment at Project site.4. Material deliveries.5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of

rain or snow.6. Testing and inspection.7. Accidents.8. Meetings and significant decisions.9. Unusual events.10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.11. Meter readings and similar recordings.12. Emergency procedures.13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.



14. Contract Amendments and other authorized changes received and implemented.15. Services connected and disconnected.16. Equipment or system tests and startups.17. Partial completions and occupancies.18. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between siteconditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submitwith a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differingconditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.



END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1

SECTION 01 32 33

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:1. Preconstruction photographs.2. Periodic construction photographs.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 02 Section "Selective Site Demolition" for photographic

documentation before selective site demolition operations commence.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantagepoints marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation orstory of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographicdocumentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.2. Format: Minimum 1600 by 1200 pixels, 400 dpi minimum, in unaltered

original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date- and time- stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image descriptionin file metadata tag:a. Name of Project.b. Name of Contractor.c. Date photograph was taken.d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass

point), and elevation or story of construction.4. Digital images to be backed up and stored on an auxiliary hard drive or other

portable device5. Digital images should be saved to a FTP or shared web storage share that can be

access by the owner.


A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as aprofessional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1.04 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary servicesrequested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, includingtemporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs.

B. HCC Staff – HCC will be allowed to periodically take pictures of the project to beused for campus correspondence with students, faculty, staff and community.

1.05 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimitedreproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera withminimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than1600 by 1200 pixels and 400 dpi.

B. Provide images to Owner and Architect on CD-ROM or post the images to a projectspecific and restricted access FTP web site. Images shall be cataloged in folders bydate they were taken.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that arein focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areaswill not be accepted.1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each

photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digitalcamera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office

at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the samemanner as those submitted to Architect.



D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, takephotographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items toremain during construction, from different vantage points.1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before

starting the Work.3. Take 20 exterior photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining

property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.4. Take at least 20 interior photographs of existing building conditions to

accurately record physical conditions at the start of construction.5. Video recording should be made of the interior and exterior of existing

buildings prior to construction.6. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of

adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.7. Ariel views of the construction site should be taken prior to construction to

show existing conditions.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing eachmonth adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application forPayment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress sincelast photographs were taken.1. The owner may require more extensive photographic files of the project should

specific circumstances require it.

F. Copyrights1. The photographer shall submit a letter to the Architect and Owner providing

them release of copyrights and full use of the photos and negatives forreprinting and publication.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle



Contract No. HCC21002 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative andprocedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, andother submittals. Electronic submission of shop drawings, product data, samples andother submittals is required whenever possible.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Paymentand the schedule of values.

2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submittingschedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation andmaintenance manuals.

4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,record Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordingsof demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that requireArchitect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated inindividual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that donot require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complyingwith requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individualSpecification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by AdobeSystems used for representing documents in a device-independent and displayresolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

D. Deferred Submittals: A submittal for review by a Code Official of the AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction. The deferred submittal is listed on the Drawings and reviewed in asequential manner.




A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological orderby dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additionaltime required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect andadditional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Includesubmittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittalsrequired to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required earlybecause of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal ofContractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status andtiming for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.b. Specification Section number and title.c. Submittal category: Action; informational.d. Name of subcontractor.e. Description of the Work covered.f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.g. Scheduled date of fabrication.h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.i. Scheduled dates for installation.j. Activity or event number.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings willbe provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of selectviveContract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness ofdigital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available inAutoCAD.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form ofAIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.



d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriatediscipline:1) Structural plans.2) Mechanical plans.3) Electrical plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance ofconstruction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, othersubmittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrentlyunless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approvedsubmittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the sameSpecification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of theWork so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittalsconcurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiringcoordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, asfollows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. Noextension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmitsubmittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allowadditional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architectwill advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed forcoordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in samemanner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's

consultants, Owner, or deferred reviews by other parties is indicated on theDrawings, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item foridentification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to

record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.



b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Name of subcontractor.f. Name of supplier.g. Name of manufacturer.h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed bya decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 10 00.01).Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimalpoint (e.g., 06 10 00.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.l. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal,and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the ContractDocuments, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually andappropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using atransmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received fromsources other than Contractor.a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the

following information:

1) Project name.2) Date.3) Destination (To:).4) Source (From:).5) Name and address of Architect/Engineer.6) Name of Contractor.7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.9) Category and type of submittal.10) Submittal purpose and description.11) Specification Section number and title.12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic

name for each of multiple items.13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.14) Indication of full or partial submittal.15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.17) Remarks.



18) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittalfile as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporatingsubmittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form withlinks enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revisionidentifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section numberfollowed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after anotherdecimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review andapproval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable toArchitect, containing the following information:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect/Engineer.d. Name of Contractor.e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.g. Category and type of submittal.h. Submittal purpose and description.i. Specification Section number and title.j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items.k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.m. Related physical samples submitted directly.n. Indication of full or partial submittal.o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.q. Other necessary identification.r. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronicsubmittal file metadata:

a. Project name.b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.c. Manufacturer name.



d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared onContractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions otherthan those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations fromrequirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initialsubmittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from

Architect's action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessaryfor performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use onlyfinal action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's actionstamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required byindividual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individualSpecification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files to cloud storage website ortransmit directly to Architect/Engineer by email, as directed byArchitect/Engineer for Project.

a. Architect/Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copyof file as an electronic Project record document file.

b. Color samples and other submittals requiring physical review shall belogged into the system and delivered by mail or courier.

B. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature ofentity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be



signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

C. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element ofconstruction and type of product or equipment. Submit only pertinent pages. Referencespecification section and article number.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standardpublished data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as ProductData.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options areapplicable.

3. Identify country of origin for products and their major components.4. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.c. Standard color charts.d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e. Testing by recognized testing agency.f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.g. Notation of coordination requirements.h. Availability and delivery time information.i. Manufacturer’s Instructions: When required in the Specifications, submit

manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, handling,assembly, installation, start-up, adjustment and finishing in quantitiesspecified for other Product Data.

5. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying

Shop Drawings.

6. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.7. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do notbase Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printeddata, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwisepermitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include thefollowing information, as applicable:



a. Identification of products.b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submitShop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check ofthese characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristicsbetween submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessoriestogether in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes thefollowing:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital imagefile illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available forquality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associatedwith each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individualSpecification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition attime of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated asOwner's property, are the property of Contractor.



5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting ofunits or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patternsavailable.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices wherecolor, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selectedfrom manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal withoptions selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished inmanner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed foruse, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samplesinclude, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured orfabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units ofrepetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; colorrange sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will return twoSample sets. One of the approved copies returned to the Contractor shall beretained and protected in the Contractor’s field office for the duration of theProject, for reference by Owner, Architect, Contractor, Subcontractor oranother entity.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similarcharacteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherentin material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least threesets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a writtensummary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in theContract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.3. Number and name of room or space.4. Location within room or space.5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


G. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified inSection 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.”



H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified inSection 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation."

I. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specifiedin Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

J. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Complywith requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

K. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirementsspecified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

L. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operationand Maintenance Data."

M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities andexperience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names andaddresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other informationspecified.

N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures andpersonnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record ofWelding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms.Include names of firms and personnel certified.

O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingthat Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, whererequired, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterheadcertifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingthat product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingthat material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testingagency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material forcompliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product producedby manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reportson evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testingagency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect forProject. Include the following information:1. Name of evaluation organization.2. Date of evaluation.3. Time period when report is in effect.4. Product and manufacturers' names.5. Description of product.6. Test procedures and results.7. Limitations of use.

V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, ontesting agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performedbefore installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in theContract Documents.

W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, ontesting agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility testsperformed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primersand substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of fieldtests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in itsfinal location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but notlimited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, andcalculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and asummary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version ofsoftware, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certificationsby a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the ContractDocuments, provide products and systems complying with specific performance anddesign criteria indicated.1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,

submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed andsealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specificallyassigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteriain the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used inperforming these services.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordinationwith other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Notecorrections and field dimensions. Mark with Contractor’s stamp before submitting toArchitect.

1. Additional submittals shall be prepared and submitted upon request by Architect.2. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing of

any deviation in the Submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.3. Where resubmittal is required, the Contractor shall make corrections required by

the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of ShopDrawings, Product Data, or new Samples until accepted.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements inSection 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Contractor’s Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform stamp. Include Project nameand location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name ofreviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has beenreviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicatecorrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal withan action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal for compliance with therequirements of the Contract Documents. Architect will forward each submittal toappropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use ofpartial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will bereturned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architectwithout action.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance andquality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirementsspecified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility forcompliance with the Contract Document requirements.1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities.Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's otherquality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with theContract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control servicesrequired by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited byprovisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a

schedule of required tests and inspections.2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed beforeand during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies andsubstantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions duringand after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into theWork and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not includecontract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups areconstructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrateaesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to reviewcoordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; andto demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are notSamples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard bywhich the Work will be judged. Mockups will remain intact in a secure location untilthe project is completed unless otherwise indicated.



1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erectedseparately from the building but on the project site, consisting of multipleproducts, assemblies and subassemblies.

2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor,and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties,furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Projectbefore products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance orcompliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP,or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specifiedrequirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at thesource, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site forinstallation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor asan employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular constructionoperation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require

that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionizedindividuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade ortrades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means havingsuccessfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, andextent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and havingcomplied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.03 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and thestandards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities orquality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflictingrequirements in writing, that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for adecision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown orspecified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may



comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, andelevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two

dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel.

B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities havingjurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authoritieshaving jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed

in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by theArchitect.

2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in thewind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof ofqualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by arecognized authority.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Noticeto Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit informat acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance andquality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personneltrained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance andquality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance withrequirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicatequalifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.



D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule ofWork requiring testing or inspection, including the following:1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed

tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections andContractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated onthe "Statement of Special Inspections."

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspectionduring construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition totesting and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required tobring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contractrequirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports includinglog of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated asnonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bringnonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirementsof authorities having jurisdiction. Do not include nonconforming work in applicationfor payment.

1.07 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare writteninformation documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests andinspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of

product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written informationdocumenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests andinspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service

representative making report.2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents,established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance ofthe Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualificationlevels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products orsystems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successfulin-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce requiredunits.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to thoseindicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, aswell as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, orassembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for thisProject, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-serviceperformance and is an authorized representative by the manufacturer for bothinstallation and maintenance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legallyqualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced inproviding engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services aredefined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that aresimilar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agencywith the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, asdocumented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified inindividual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that isacceptable to authorities.1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorizedrepresentative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer toobserve and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorizedrepresentative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect



installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Retain first paragraph below if preconstruction testing is required. Indicate inindividual Specification Sections whether Owner or Contractor engages testingagency.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to performpreconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performanceand test methods, comply with the following:1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products andconstruction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing andanalyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, andlaboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products tocomply with performance requirements.

d. First subparagraph below attempts to ensure that tested assemblies will berepresentative of actual construction. This requirement may complicatetesting and add cost.

e. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who willperform same tasks for Project.

f. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, andmethods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

g. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; donot reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy toContractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whethertested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the ContractDocuments.

1.09 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Ownerare Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities requiredto verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those

required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control servicesrequired of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified ornot.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualifiedtesting agency to perform these quality-control services.a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed

to in writing by Owner.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work thatrequires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility,submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the ContractDocuments are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities havingjurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01Section "Submittal Procedures."

C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer'stechnical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technicalrepresentative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation ofInstaller activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal ofwritten reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections wereContractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting andreinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with theContract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor inperformance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests andinspections.1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services.2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ

tests are conducted.3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested

and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or

approve or accept any portion of the Work.6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services asrequested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignmentof personnel. Provide the following:1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.



3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testingand inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Retain first subparagraph below if required or is not common practice in Project

vicinity.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control

by testing agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate requiredquality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessityof removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required byauthorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and inStatement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control

procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures toperform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficienciesobserved in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similarquality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at SubstantialCompletion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested andinspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provideaccess to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



3.02 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restorepatched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams thatare as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirementsfor cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment ofresponsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and securityand protection facilities.

1.02 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall beincluded in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. All buildings should bemetered and renovations submetered to show usage of utilities. A meter is to beinstalled by the contractor on each utility that cannot be reset or overridden at the end ofthe project. The College will record the meter readings and apply that to their utilityrates accordingly and invoice the contractor for payment.

B. Sewer Service: Contractor will pay sewer service use charges to owner for sewerusage by all entities for construction operations. Sewer is based on water service.

C. Water Service: Contractor will pay water service use charges to owner for water usedby all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Contractor will pay electric power service to owner for usagecharges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areasfor construction personnel. This information will be determined by the owner.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements ofEPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is morestringent.

C. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrativethat indicates the dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposedlocations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options ifproposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations fortemporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1



B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspecteach temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Retain paragraph below for addition and renovation work that affects egress fromoccupied portions of the facility.

D. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA AccessibilityGuidelines.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent serviceto assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanentservice during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardlessof previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel,chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts;minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.

2.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes,temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. The office shouldbe in good condition and should not

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate projectmeetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.Furnish and equip offices as follows:1. Furnish the room with sufficient meeting space sufficient enough size to

accommodate meetings of 12 individuals with chairs.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped toaccommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.1. Store combustible materials apart from building.2. Long term storage will be housed in the backside of the campus near the baseball

field. The Owner will give specific location.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

D. ......

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line



2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as requiredby locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system,provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individualspace thermostatic control.1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type

heating units is prohibited.2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimuminterference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as requiredby progress of the Work.1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section

"Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove untilfacilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completedpermanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.1. Arrange with Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted,

if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.2. Utility interruptions will not be tolerated. Every effort must be made to provide

backup utilities.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities

having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean andmaintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At SubstantialCompletion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water foruse of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures andfacilities.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required byconstruction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protectinginstalled construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity.Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations orelements being installed.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors fromentering occupied areas.1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be

performed in accordance with approved coordination drawings.a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems

servicing occupied areas.b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air

filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partitionconstruction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions iscomplete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachmentson dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas usingportable dust containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved,HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required byconstruction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protectinginstalled construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment thatwill not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required andminimize energy consumption.1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture

levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service.Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system ofsufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.1. Install electric power service underground, unless otherwise indicated.2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by

Owner.

J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequateillumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and trafficconditions.1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection

requirements without operating entire system.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities foruse by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each fieldoffice.

b. Attachment point will be provided by the college.2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.b. Ambulance service.c. Contractor's home office.d. Architect's office.e. Engineers' offices.f. Owner's office.g. Campus Security Departmenth. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for usewhen away from field office.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within

construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustibleaccording to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completioninspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining afterSubstantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, underconditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and

utilities.2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.3. All construction traffic and deliveries will enter campus on Academic Boulevard

and make the first left onto Scholar Drive and a right into the construction site. Noconstruction vehicles are permitted to turn right onto Scholar Drive. Contractto post signs directing all construction traffic in this direction.

C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, andconduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to preventflooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.1. Stormwater Controls should prevent mud and water from covering pathways and

roadways that are accessed.

C. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

D. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimizeattraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to performextermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pestsand their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner forat least one year post construction. Perform control operations lawfully, usingenvironmentally safe materials.

E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and installproject site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals fromeasily entering site except by entrance gates.1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings.2. Perform routine inspections of the fencing.3. Option in subparagraph below is only for projects connected to existing

construction.4. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to

authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.5. Site enclosures fence blocks primary access to any of our building not under

construction they will need to provide an alternate entrance.6. Fencing may need to moved as the different phasing of the project progresses.

3.05 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work.Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction with pictures andshow remediation efforts to remove mold damaged construction materials.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materialsare subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:1. Protect porous materials from water damage.2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with

concrete.4. Remove standing water from decks.5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line

catwood

Line



C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers butbefore full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are stillsubject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items

with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic

matter.4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.5. Do not install material that is wet.6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry

before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of thebuilding enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems,maintain as follows:1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in

conditions.2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative

humidity, and exposure to water limits.a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and

gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of constructionand remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and should beremoved and replaced immediately.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moistureduring construction operations or after installation. Record daily readingsover a forty-eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisturelevels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufacturedmoisture level within 48 hours.

3.06 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimizewaste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intendeduses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieveindicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary securityand protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.



D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its servicehas ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or nolater than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanentconstruction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporaryfacility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction thatcannot be satisfactorily repaired.1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identificationsigns.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities usedduring construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specifiedin Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of productsfor use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standardwarranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased forProject or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes theterms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer'spublished product literature, which is current as of date of the ContractDocuments.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into anotherproject or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are notconsidered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved throughsubmittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and othercharacteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specificmanufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words “base manufacturer”or "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, toestablish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-serviceperformance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes ofevaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in thespecification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparableproduct. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in

"Comparable Products" Article.



2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information ordocumentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable productrequest. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposedcomparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days ofreceipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.a. Form of Approval of Submittal: As specified in Division 01 Section

"Submittal Procedures."b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements inDivision 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two ormore products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previouslyselected, even if previously selected products were also options.

B. Product stolen or damaged while on site will not be paid for by the owner andcontractors are responsible for their construction site security.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer'swritten instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive todeterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer'soriginal sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels andinstructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the ContractDocuments and to determine that products are undamaged and properlyprotected.

5. Deliver product in a manner to avoid peak traffic hours on campus.6. All deliveries will enter Academic Boulevard and then turn right onto Scholar

Drive.

C. Storage:1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting

of units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.



3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in aweathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to preventcondensation.

4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary forperiod of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7. Provide a secure location at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by

Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.06 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers andlimitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations underrequirements of the Contract Documents.1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturerto Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents toprovide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms andidentification, ready for execution.1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific

information and properly executed.2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,

prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and

particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "CloseoutProcedures."

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the ContractDocuments, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time ofinstallation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other

items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard

options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been producedand used successfully in similar situations on other projects.



3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not inconflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will makeselection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in theSpecifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "orequal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

7. Any and All products including but not limited to, equipment, drives, motors,pumps, control systems, fire alarm, etc. shall not be proprietary and shall be ableto be serviced and programmed by any qualified service technician.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Owner prefers American-made products. NoChinese-made pipe, valves, fittings or motors will be acceptable unless alternativesources are not available.1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product,

provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparableproducts or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer orsource, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complieswith requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor'sconvenience will not be considered.

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of bothmanufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies withrequirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor'sconvenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.a. Neither comparable products or a substitution will be permitted for primary

equipment. Use one of the named manufacturers and products.4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of

both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, oran unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply withrequirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamedproduct.

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list ofmanufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed thatcomplies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions forContractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.a. Neither comparable products nor a substitution will be permitted for

primary equipment. Use one of the named manufacturers.6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of

available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, ora product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements.Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration ofan unnamed manufacturer's product.

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to aproduct indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the



specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

8. Any and All products including but not limited to, equipment, drives, motors,pumps, control systems, fire alarm, etc. shall not be proprietary and shall be ableto be serviced and programmed by any qualified service technician.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect'ssample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect'ssample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with

other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selectedby Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product thatcomplies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, ortexture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premiumitems.

2.02 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will considerContractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions aresatisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requestswithout action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract

Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce theindicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with thosenamed in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes,such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight,dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features andrequirements.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, ifrequested.

5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governingexecution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. Installation of the Work.4. Cutting and patching.5. Progress cleaning.6. Starting and adjusting.7. Protection of installed construction.8. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey

with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations fromindicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

3. Section 07 84 00 “Firestopping” for closure of penetrations through interiorpartitions/walls and elevated slabs.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation orperformance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to originalconditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location andelevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed toaccept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit three copies signed by land surveyor.




A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualifiedto practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providingland-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer'swritten recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

C. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting andpatching of construction elements.1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when

encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structuralfunction is not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting andawait directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and supportstructural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structuralelements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increasedeflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and relatedcomponents in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform asintended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life orsafety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elementsor components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, thatresults in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results inincreased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other constructionelements include but are not limited to the following:a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Equipment supports.d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.e. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results invisual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposedconstruction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building'saesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut andpatched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

D. Coordination of Cutting and Patching: Upon commencement of Project beforeproceeding, meet at Project site as part of the preconstruction conference with partiesinvolved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades andOwner. Review Work requiring cutting and patching, including areas of potentialinterference and conflict. Coordinate sequencing, scheduling, procedures and resolvepotential conflicts before proceeding. Before proceeding with specific cutting andpatching activities, reconvene as necessary during the progress of the work to reviewand resolve specific cutting and patching issues that arise.



1.05 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut ordamaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and withmaterials so as not to void existing warranties.1. There is currently an existing warranty on the membrane roofing system. Contact

holder of existing warrant to obtain requirements for continuation of warranty forthe work required. Comply with said requirements, including engaging awarrantor-approved roofer to perform the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. Forexposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to thefullest extent possible.1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual andfunctional performance of in-place materials. Use materials that are notconsidered hazardous.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilitiesand construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanicaland electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;underground electrical services, telecommunications, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by publicutilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each componentof the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicatorpresent where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerancesand other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:a. Description of the Work.b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.d. Recommended corrections.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line



2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibilitywith existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actuallocations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products andsystems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces andconditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary toadjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or otherutility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate withauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Workare indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction byfield measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule withconstruction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items showndiagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery ofthe need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing fieldconditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information toArchitect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management andCoordination."

E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations forpreparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shownon Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. Ifdiscrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Owner promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveyingpractices.1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to

obtain required dimensions.3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.



4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Workprogresses.

5. Notify Architect and Owner when deviations from required lines and levelsexceed allowable tolerances.

6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standardestablished by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required formechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use withcontrol lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from requiredlines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weatherconditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments andtapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and propertycorners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similarreference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanentbenchmarks and control points during construction operations.1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior

written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarksor control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarksor control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly.Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks onProject site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply withauthorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked

construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, andother work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showingdimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property surveyshowing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey acertification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels ofProject are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities,

existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage,grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recordedby or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment andelevation, as indicated.1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90

inches in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations and factorystandards for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possibleresults. Maintain conditions required for product performance until SubstantialCompletion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damagingoperations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions ofoccupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noiselevels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specifiedto be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work toconfirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products tocomply with indicated requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners ofadequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accuratelylocated and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type ofattachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount

components at heights directed by Architect.2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, anddirections for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchorbolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete ormasonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are notindicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together toform hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are notconsidered hazardous.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cuttingand patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restoresurfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut ordamaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and withmaterials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to preventdamage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Projectthat might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas orinterruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting andpatching in accordance with Owner’s requirements.

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existingservices/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass suchservices/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.Coordinate interruption scheduled with Owner at least 10 days in advance.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damageelements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedureswith original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openingswhen not in use.



2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealedsurfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or adiamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sectionswhere required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitionsto be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduitto prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting arecomplete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similaroperations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are asinvisible as practicable, as judged by Architect. Provide materials and comply withinstallation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminateevidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finishedarea into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, ifnecessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply

primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch,and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch,corner to corner of wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additionalcoats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide aneven-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Sealing of Through-Penetrations in Interior Partitions and Elevated Slabs: Referto Division 07 Section “Firestopping.”

6. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restoresenclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrityof building enclosure.

7. Where existing mechanical or electrical work (equipment, ductwork, piping,conduits, etc.) is being removed from a wall, floor, ceiling or roof area that isintended to be otherwise undisturbed, the remaining opening shall be closed,filled, patched and repaired unless indicated otherwise.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Removepaint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.



3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforcerequirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

materials and debris.2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three

days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other

waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according toregulations.a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installerhas worked.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanlinessnecessary for proper execution of the Work.1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum

the entire work area, as appropriate.3. Mechanical and Electrical Room spaces are to be kept clean on a daily basis.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according towritten instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using onlycleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are notrecommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property andthat will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessaryto ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash wastematerials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirementsin Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. Three paragraphs below reduce or eliminate the need for similar provisions in otherSections. Insert other provisions needed because of unusual Project conditions.Specify unusual provisions for specific work in the individual Section.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress andadjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required toensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessarythrough the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operablecomponents to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of theconstruction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, orotherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.08 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components withrequirements in Division 23 - HVAC and Division 26 - Electrical.

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Removemalfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for properoperation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls andsafeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01Section "Quality Requirements."

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is withoutdamage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates andfinishes.1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,

touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipmentto the satisfaction of the architect / or the owner.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot berepaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operatingcomponents that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



F. Repair or replace all chipped or broken brick and exposed CMU

G. Repair roof membrane damaged during the demolition and removal of existingequipment and installation of new rooftop equipment.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 02 Section "Selective Site Demolition" for disposition of waste

resulting from partial site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade siteimprovements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid wasteresulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting fromdemolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing inpreparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reusein another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequentincorporation into the Work.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course ofthe Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste fromlandfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including thefollowing to the extent encountered and affected by the demolition work:1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphaltic concrete paving.



b. Concrete.c. Concrete reinforcing steel.d. Brick.e. Concrete masonry units.f. Wood studs.g. Wood joists.h. Plywood and oriented strand board.i. Wood paneling.j. Wood trim.k. Structural and miscellaneous steel.l. Rough hardware.m. Roofing.n. Insulation.o. Doors and frames.p. Door hardware.q. Windows.r. Glazing.s. Metal studs.t. Gypsum board.u. Acoustical tile and panels.v. Carpet.w. Carpet pad.x. Demountable partitions.y. Equipment.z. Cabinets.aa. Plumbing fixtures. bb. Piping. cc. Supports and hangers.dd. Valves.ee. Sprinklers. ff. Mechanical equipment. gg. Refrigerants. hh. Electrical conduit. ii. Copper wiring.jj. Lighting fixtures. kk. Lamps. ll. Ballasts.mm. Electrical devices.nn. Switchgear and panelboards. oo. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste:a. Site-clearing waste.b. Masonry and CMU.c. Lumber.d. Wood sheet materials.e. Wood trim.



f. Metals.g. Roofing.h. Insulation.i. Carpet and pad.j. Gypsum board.k. Piping.l. Electrical conduit.m. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminatedpackaging materials:1) Paper.2) Cardboard.3) Boxes.4) Plastic sheet and film.5) Polystyrene packaging.6) Wood crates.7) Plastic pails.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for theNotice to Proceed.


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,submit report. Include the following information:1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.3. Total quantity of waste in tons.4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of

total waste.

B. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recoverytechnician.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record ofsuccessful waste management coordination of Projects with similar requirements.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approvedcertification program.



C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction.

D. In paragraph below, identify specific participants not mentioned in Division 01.

E. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply withrequirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Reviewmethods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, thefollowing:1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste

management coordinator.2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its

disposition.3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of

containers and bins needed to avoid delays.4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling

and disposal facilities.5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 andrequirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, wastereduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition andconstruction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units ofmeasure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolitionsite-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimatedquantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged,recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation,total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handlingand transportation procedures.1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in

this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials beforeincorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals andorganizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. If desired, list local charitable organizations such as Habitat for Humanity in firstsubparagraph below.

4. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated toindividuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, andtelephone numbers.



5. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type ofrecycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephonenumbers.

6. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of.Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incineratorfacility.

7. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used forseparating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, anddesignated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no wastemanagement plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementingwaste management plan. Include the following:1. Total quantity of waste.2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and

cost of collection containers for each type of waste.3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).4. Revenue from salvaged materials.5. Revenue from recycled materials.6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each

type of waste.9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling,containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implementwaste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for

operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste managementprocedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of

submittal return.2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.

Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, anddisposal.



C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations toensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacentoccupied and used facilities.1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating

materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for

controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.02 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until installation.4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materialsnecessary to make items functional for use indicated.

6. Cabinetry in the current Science Building need to be stored and reused in theLearning Center at the end of construction.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing doorclosers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs.Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

F. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

G. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.

H. Hagerstown Community College’s Facilities and Maintenance Department has firstright of refusal to any and all but not limited to materials, products, piping, wiring,equipment, etc. Contractor shall allow for the HCC’s Facilities and MaintenanceDepartment walkthrough the project site and identify any and all items they want tosalvage during the demolition phase of the project.

3.03 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers and theproject site must be kept clean of these items at all times.



B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentivesreceived for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according torecycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recyclingprocess.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practicalaccording to approved construction waste management plan.1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste

until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable andunacceptable materials at each container and bin.a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated

materials if found.2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to preventwindblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip lineof remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling

receiver or processor.

3.04 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 4-inch size.1. Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in

Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for use will be determined by the College forlocation on campus.

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with othermetals.1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch size.2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 Section

"Earth Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase to be determined bythe College for location on campus

C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort withother metals.1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 4-inch size.2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.



3.05 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and

store in a dry location.2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets

from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets intocomponent wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply withrequirements for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.1. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants" for use of chipped

organic waste as organic mulch.

C. Wood Materials:1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of cleansawdust as organic mulch.

3.06 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill orincinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be

disposed of accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Burning of waste materials is not permitted on Owner's property.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose ofthem.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including, but not limited to, the following:1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record

Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for

instructing Owner's personnel.5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date ofSubstantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incompletewith request.1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of

items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.2. For first two subparagraphs below, see Evaluations.3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service

agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.5. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and

access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operatingcertificates, and similar releases.

6. Delete first subparagraph below if submittal of final record information isdelayed until final acceptance.

7. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenancemanuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage orsettlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to locationdesignated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model numberwhere applicable.

9. Coordinate first subparagraph below with Division 08 door hardware Sections.Revise if Owner makes final changeover or if key-control system manufacturerdelivers keys directly to Owner.

10. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. AdviseOwner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

11. Complete startup testing of systems.12. Submit test/adjust/balance records.13. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with

mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.14. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.15. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,

and maintenance.16. Delete both subparagraphs below if Project does not include these items or if they

are delayed until final acceptance.17. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.18. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. Onreceipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor ofunfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of SubstantialCompletion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor'slist or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or correctedbefore certificate will be issued.1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final

completion.3. If the reinspection is considered frivolous it may be charged back at to the

contractor.

1.03 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining finalcompletion, complete the following:1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section

"Payment Procedures."2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of

items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect.The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed orotherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying withinsurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance ofproducts, equipment, and systems.

6. Submit Operator and Maintenance Manuals.

1.04 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affectedby construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correctionincluding, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits ofconstruction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for

ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:a. Three paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.

1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designatedportions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date ofSubstantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contentsof the Project Manual.1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separatewarranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typeddescription of the product or installation, including the name of the product andthe name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittalpackage into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigationto each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenancemanuals.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufactureror fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that arepotentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable,

use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximumallowable VOC levels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations tocomply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental andantipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial buildingcleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion ofProject:a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, wastematerial, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, andother foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-texturedsurface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materialfrom Project site.

e. Remove all temporary construction lighting from the building.f. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.g. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoiddisturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflectivesurfaces to their original condition.

h. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, includingroofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, andsimilar spaces.

i. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.j. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



k. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors andwindows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and otherdamaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not toscratch surfaces.

l. Remove labels that are not permanent.m. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorilyrepaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,

including mechanical and electrical nameplates.n. Revise seven subparagraphs below to suit Project. Check for conflict or

duplication with provisions in other Sections, particularly Divisions 20through 29.

o. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortardroppings, and other foreign substances.

p. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that mayimpede operation or reduce longevity.

q. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, includingstains resulting from water exposure.

r. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Cleanexposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

s. First subparagraph below describes a major work item that requirescoordination with other closeout procedures.

t. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters duringconstruction or that display contamination with particulate matter uponinspection.

u. Retain first subparagraph below in environments with demanding HVACsystem cleaning standards or for special contamination issues. Below willadd significantly to cleaning cost.

v. Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.Provide written report as well as visual proof (pictures or videos) uponcompletion of cleaning.

w. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with fullefficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed byhours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercuryvapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

x. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.y. Protect areas cleaned by locking doors or otherwise sealing off the area.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a finalinspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.Continue pest control contract for one year after product closeout

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements inDivision 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



E. Coordinate with Owner’s custodial supervisor any cleaning and waxing trainingneeded on the products needed to maintain surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operationand maintenance manuals, including the following:1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Emergency manuals.3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.4. Product maintenance manuals.5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.6. Training DVD’s if applicable7. All warranty information

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regularinteraction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to

modifications and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following formats:1. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.

Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

2. Electronic copy. As specified in 2.02-E.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.



1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and CommissioningAgent's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days ofreceipt of Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments and prior tocommencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references tooperation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically bysystem. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, andmaintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenancemanual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with samedesignation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign adesignation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating andMaintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separatesection for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece ofequipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, inthe order listed:1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.



7. Name and contact information for Architect.8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent.9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that

designed the systems contained in the manuals.10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Sectionnumber in Project Manual.1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes ineach volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contentsalphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assembleinstructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a singlethree ring binder.

E. Manuals, Paper Copy and Electronic Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes, plus an appropriately indexed and searchable electroniccopy in PDF on USB flash drive.1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; withclear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pocketsinside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system,

organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and relatedcomponents. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provideessential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment orsystem.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subjectmatter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom ofspine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of themanual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products andmajor components of equipment included in the section on each divider,cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclosediagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with

text.a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages

and use as foldouts.b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in

labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate



locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.03 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.4. Emergency contact information including phone numbers and email addresses

for emergency contacts.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,and component:1. Fire.2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, errormessages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner'soperating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintainwarranties. Please include appropriate business phone numbers, cell phone numbers,email addresses for emergency notifications of the above.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.04 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data requiredin individual Specification Sections and the following information:1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems

and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.



6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on

Contract Documents.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.10. Routine and special maintenance instructions.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagramcontrols as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where requiredfor identification.

2.05 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, andfinish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by productname and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual anddrawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.



C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and thefollowing:1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materialsand related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists ofcircumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.06 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenanceprocedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as describedbelow.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included inmanual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier andmaintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and titlein Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenancedocumentation including the following information for each component part or pieceof equipment:1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detailessential maintenance procedures:1. Test and inspection instructions.



2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements,list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive androutine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,

monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenancedocumentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements withname and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists ofcircumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manualthat provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenancemanuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicatingprocedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel fortypes of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance dataindicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated intothe Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation andmaintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem,and piece of equipment not part of a system.1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare

information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of asystem.



2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of aninstructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet toidentify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include morethan one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references fromthe Contract Documents (specification section, title and drawing number). Identifydata applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not

available and where the information is necessary for proper operation andmaintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustratethe relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate controlsequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information containedin record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals.2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01

Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submittingoperation and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project recorddocuments, including the following:1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey.2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record

documents of the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record printsand one set(s) of plots from corrected record digital data files. Architectwill indicate whether general scope of changes, additional informationrecorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Revise number of sets in two subparagraphs below to suit Project.Architect should retain a set of record Drawings for future reference onProject. Carefully evaluate postoccupancy services, liability defense, andsimilar considerations when establishing the number required.

c. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record prints.Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional informationwere recorded.

d. Retain subparagraph above or subparagraph below with "Initial Submittal"Subparagraph above. Retain below when submitting plots from correctedrecord digital data files.

e. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record prints,one set(s) of record digital data files, and three set(s) of record digital datafile plots. Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additionalinformation were recorded.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, includingaddenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance

manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections formiscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with variousconstruction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated in Project recorddocuments concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealedconditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawingsand Shop Drawings.1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity whoobtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, orsimilar entity, to provide information for preparation of correspondingmarked-up record prints.a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would

be difficult to identify or measure and record later.b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the

following:a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Retain second option in first subparagraph below if using

EJCDC Document C-700.k. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



l. Changes made following Architect's written orders.m. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.n. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.o. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production ofmarked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors todistinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at samelocation.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically oromitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Ordernumbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

2.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation whereinstallation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contractmodifications.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,

and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information

necessary to provide a record of selections made.4. Retain first subparagraph below if required.5. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been

submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as recordProduct Data.

6. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings whereapplicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

2.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation whereinstallation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.3. If possible, a Change Order proposal should include resubmitting updated

Product Data. This eliminates the need to mark up the previous submittal.4. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number

and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections formiscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance ofthe Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continueduse and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification

section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneousrecord submittals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period forproject record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project recorddocuments as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents andSamples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain recorddocuments in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected fromdeterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect'sreference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner'spersonnel, including the following:1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. Related Sections:1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and

training for products in those Sections.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration andtraining, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times,length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Includelearning objective and outline for each training module.1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced

demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, andproducts in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

2. Video recording of live instructional module is acceptable if manufacturerstraining video is not available.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and lengthof instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results anddocumentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit three copies within sevendays of end of each training module.1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following

information:a. Name of Project.b. Name and address of videographer.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.



f. Date of video recording.2. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in

heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identificationon front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same labelinformation as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project anddate of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educatingmaintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to thatindicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with arecord of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complyingwith requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced inoperation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experiencedphotographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply withrequirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Reviewmethods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but notlimited to, the following:1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational

materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed toavoid delays.

3. Coordinate the schedule of the owners personnel to accommodate4. Review required content of instruction.5. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as requiredto minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length ofinstruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program untiloperation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual trainingmodules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required byindividual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for eachmodule. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant isexpected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following asapplicable to the system, equipment, or component:1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design

responsibility.c. Operating standards.d. Regulatory requirements.e. Equipment function.f. Operating characteristics.g. Limiting conditions.h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:a. Emergency manuals.b. Operations manuals.c. Maintenance manuals.d. Project record documents.e. Identification systems.f. Warranties and bonds.g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error

messages.b. Instructions on stopping.c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f. Special operating instructions and procedures.g. Contact information for manufacturer’s representative, including office

number, cell phone number and email address.4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.c. Routine and normal operating instructions.d. Regulation and control procedures.e. Control sequences.



f. Safety procedures.g. Instructions on stopping.h. Normal shutdown instructions.i. Operating procedures for emergencies.j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:a. Alignments with documentation.b. Checking adjustments.c. Noise and vibration adjustments.d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:a. Diagnostic instructions.b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:a. Inspection procedures.b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.d. Procedures for routine cleaninge. Procedures for preventive maintenance.f. Procedures for routine maintenance.g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:a. Diagnosis instructions.b. Repair instructions.c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.f. Review of warranty level repairs versus the non-warranty repairs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentationand training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized incoordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and MaintenanceData."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.



3.02 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, andmaintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.1. Architect / Contractor will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system

design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment thatrequires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.1. Schedule training with Owner with at least ten days' advance notice.

C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner.Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to conditionexisting before initial training use.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 41 13 - 1

SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The abandonment and removal work, as specified herein, is notintended to be performed as a wrecking operation but as preparatory work relative tothe performance of the various construction operations of the Project.1. In general, the extent of the removal work is as indicated on the Drawings.2. Removal of existing vegetation.3. Clearing and grubbing.4. Removing existing above-grade improvements.5. Removing existing below-grade improvements.6. Removing existing above-grade structures.

B. Work shall be conducted in accordance with the General Conditions, SupplementaryConditions, Division 1, and the requirements of this Section.

C. Related Sections:1. Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving.2. Section 31 22 00: Grading.3. Section 31 22 19: Finish Grading.4. Section 31 23 33: Trenching for Site Utilities.5. Section 31 25 00: Erosion and Sedimentation Controls.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. ASTM C 32, Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (made from Clay or

Shale).2. ASTM C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.3. ASTM C 270, Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.4. ASTM C 478, Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

B. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PENNDOT),Specifications Publication 408, as supplemented.1. PENNDOT Section 703.3 Select Granular Material (2RC).

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC).




A. Experience: Demolition contractor shall demonstrate a minimum or five yearsexperience on similar projects.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1926 (29 CFR 1926) – Safety and

Health Regulations for Construction.2. 29 CFR 1910 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards.3. 40 CFR 61.145 – National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants.

C. Other Requirements: Comply with the proposed Health and Safety Plan and WorkPlan.

D. Safety Meetings: Conduct daily safety meetings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation1. Copy of request to utility companies owning or agency controlling services and

appurtenances affected by demolition work for discontinuance of services orrelocation of services. Submit copies to the Contracting Officer.

B. Work Plan of proposed procedures for the demolition and removal work. Include asequence of operations, equipment to be used and name and address of all proposeddisposal and recycling facilities.


A. Existing Conditions: The information presented on the Drawings is based on visualfield examination of the site. While the information provided is believed to be correct,no assurance is implied relative to its total completeness or accuracy. Reportdiscrepancies to the Contracting Officer before disturbing existing installations.1. The Drawings are intended to indicate the general nature of the demolition work

required. Every facility appurtenant to those items designated for removal maynot be indicated. Field verify dimensions, quantity, type material, location, meansof anchorages and support, interconnection with other facilities, and otherpertinent characteristics of facilities which will be removed or demolished toaccommodate new facilities.

2. The Contractor hereby distinctly agrees that neither the Government nor theContracting Officer is responsible for the correctness or sufficiency of theinformation given and after the Contractor’s own Site Investigation:a. Shall have no claim for delay or extra compensation or damage against the

Government or the Contracting Officer on account of the information given.



b. Shall have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility under theContract with respect to the above stated stipulations.

B. Protection: Exercise care during demolition and removal work to confine demolitionoperations to facilities as indicated on the Drawings. Physical means and methodsused for protection are discretionary; however, assume complete responsibility forreplacement and restitution work of whatever nature and at no expense to theContracting Officer.1. Additionally, if public safety is endangered during progress of demolition work,

provide adequate protective measures to protect public pedestrian and vehiculartraffic on streets and walkways.

2. Signs, signals, and barricades to conform to requirements of Federal, State, andlocal laws, rules, regulations, precautions, orders, and decrees.

C. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to preventdamage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

D. Protect improvements of Government’s property.

E. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable toGovernment and including soil and debris tracked onto existing paving.

F. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference withparking, roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do notclose or obstruct streets, drive, walks, or other occupied or used facilities withoutpermission from the Contracting Officer or authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Dust Control: To prevent unnecessary spread of dust during performance of the workof this Section, thoroughly moisten surfaces and debris as required to prevent dustbeing a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other workon the site. Water for use in dust control shall be obtained from Contractor’s ownsource.

H. Explosives and Blasting: Not allowed in performance of demolition work.

I. Environmental Requirements: Maintain soil erosion and sediment control measures asrequired in Section 31 25 00.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Unfinished Work:1. Sequence and schedule work with consideration for the stability of the areas of

the structure not intended for removal or are intended for removal at a later time.



2. Provide and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports to shore unstable areascreated as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work.

1.07 EXISTING SERVICES

A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations beforecommencing work.

B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services.Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting thisWork.

C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines andcapping locations on Project Record Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Temporary Materials: Materials needed or required for temporary protection in theform of barricades, fences, enclosures, etc., may be used construction materials ofsound condition and reasonably clean. However, the condition of these materials shallmeet or exceed the requirements of governing agencies or approving bodies as may beinvolved with the work.

B. Equipment: Equipment, machinery and apparatus (motorized or otherwise) used toperform the demolition and removal work may be used as chosen at the Contractor’sdiscretion, but which will perform the work within the limits of the Contractrequirements.1. Select Earth Backfill: On site excavated material free of plant life, lumber, metal,

refuse and rocks or similar hard objects larger than three inches in any dimension.2. Aggregate Backfill: Conforming to PENNDOT Type 2A Section 703.2.3. Sand: Natural or manufactured sand conforming to ASTM C 33.4. Concrete: Class B 210.9 Kg/cm2 [3000 psi] as specified in Section 03 30 00.5. Lean Concrete: 140.6 Kg/cm2 [2000 psi] compressive strength at 28 days with

minimum cement content per cubic yard in accordance with current ready-mixplant standard practice.a. Reduced Aggregate: Aggregate with particle size not less than 3mm [1/8-

inch] or more than 13mm [1/2-inch] in any dimension and a maximum of fivepercent of the particles passing a No. 8 sieve.



6. Pipe Plug Materials: Where existing storm or sanitary piping is being abandonedin place construct pipe plugs in the open ends of such pipe using the followingmaterials:a. Manhole Brick: Commercially manufactured brick made from clay or shale

and burned, conforming to ASTM C 32, Grade MS.b. Waterproofed Mortar: Conforming to requirements of ASTM C 270 for

Type M, 175.8Kg/cm2 [2500 psi]. Parts by volume include: One partcement, 1/4 part lime, and sand at not less than 2-1/4 nor more than 3 timesthe sum of the volumes of cement and lime used and of the followingmaterials:1) Waterproofing Agent: Medusa Waterproofing Powder by Medusa

Portland Cement Co.; Hydratite by Grace Construction Materials; orHydrolox by Chem-Master Corp. Add the Medusa product in the ratioof two pounds per bag of cement; add the other products permanufacturer’s recommendations.

2) Portland Cement: Conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I.3) Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S.4) Sand: Conforming to ASTM C 144.5) Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and

organic materials.7. All required plugs, caps, flanges and other items required for disconnected

utilities shall be approved by the appropriate utility companies.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. The means and methods of performing demolition (and removal) operations are thesole responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Demolition activities shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, 29 CFR 1910 and 40CFR 61.145.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Field Inspection: Prior to performance of the actual work, carefully inspect the sites ofthe indicated and annotated demolition work and locate those objects, structures, andpartitions designated to be demolished and removed.1. Verify with the Contracting Officer the objects, structures, and partitions to be

demolished and removed.2. Subsurface conditions



a. Any available data concerning subsurface materials or conditions has beenobtained by the retained Engineer for its own use in designing this project.Its accuracy or completeness is not guaranteed by the Government or theContracting Officer and in no event is it to be considered as part of thecontract plans or specifications. Contractors must assume all risks inexcavating for this project and shall not be entitled to rely on any subsurfaceinformation obtained from the retained Engineer. Bidders shall thereforemake their own investigation of existing subsurface conditions and if they donot do so, the Government will not be responsible in any way for theconsequences.

b. The contract drawings show information obtained by the Contracting Officerregarding the location of pipes, conduits, storm sewers and other structureswhich exist along the lines of work below the surface of the ground. Thisinformation is shown for the convenience of the Contractor who must verifyin advance the information given to his own satisfaction. Should unchartedor incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered duringexcavation, notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Cooperate with theContracting Officer and utility companies in keeping their respective servicesand facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of theutility owner. Do not interrupt existing utilities servicing facilities occupiedor those being used except when services have been provided. No extras willbe paid for additional utilities encountered or utilities shown in the wronglocation.

B. Utilities: Locate existing exposed and buried active utilities and determine therequirement for their protection, or their disposition with respect to the demolitionwork.1. Electrical: Disconnect or de-energize on-site electrical wiring close to or entering

structures to be demolished. Coordinate with the Electric Company for necessaryrelocation of utilities.

2. Water: Disconnect or cap on-site water lines close to or entering structures to bedemolished. Protect existing fire control hydrants and repair damaged hydrants.Coordinate with the Water Company for necessary relocation of utilities.

3. Natural Gas: Disconnect or cap on-site gas lines and mains close to or enteringstructures to be demolished. Coordinate with the local gas utility company fornecessary relocation of utilities.

4. Sanitary and Storm Sewers: Disconnect or cap sanitary sewers and storm drainsclose to or exiting structures to be demolished.

5. Coordinate all utility relocation with the Contracting Officer and utility company.Cap all utilities in a location approved by the Contracting Officer. Use approvedcap materials.



C. Exterior Dust Control: To minimize unnecessary spread of dust during performanceof exterior demolition work, thoroughly moisten surfaces and debris as required toprevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance ofother work on the site. Water for use in dust control shall be obtained fromContractor's own source and shall be potable water.

D. Protection of Public:1. If public safety could be endangered during the progress of the demolition work,

provide adequate protective measures to protect public pedestrian and vehiculartraffic on streets and walkways.

2. Signs, signals, and barricades used shall conform to requirements of Federal, Stateand local laws, rules, regulations, precautions, orders, and decrees.

E. Explosives and Blasting: Not allowed in performance of demolition work.

F. Asbestos: Cease work immediately and notify the Contracting Officer if suspectedasbestos is encountered that has not been previously identified.

G. Remediation: Conduct required remediation prior to commencing with work. Ifcontaminated materials are encountered that have not been previously identified, ceasework immediately, and notify Contracting Officer.

H. Clearing: Clear vegetation only as necessary to complete work. Additional clearingnot required to complete the work shall be as approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services.Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting thisWork.

B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines andcapping locations on Project Record Documents.

C. General Requirements: The means and methods of performing demolition andremoval operations are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. However, equipmentused, and methods of demolition and removal will be subject to approval of TheGovernment and Contracting Officer.1. When removing concrete slabs, saw cut such slabs at the limits of removal to

assure a smooth, uniform joint with new concrete installation.2. Perform removal of masonry and concrete debris, keeping such debris dampened

during removal.



D. Excavation and Backfilling: Perform work in accordance with the requirements ofSections 31 20 00, 31 22 00, 31 23 33.1. Should the Contractor, in demolishing or removing existing facilities, such as

existing pipelines, excavate below the subgrade for new facilities, he will berequired to backfill the area excavated below the subgrade with AggregateBackfill, at no increase in Contract Price.

2. Backfill substructure cavities using Select Earth Backfill. Restore surfaces in thearea of demolished structures to match the surrounding area.

E. Salvage: The Contracting Officer has the right to claim as salvage any of the materialsand equipment removed under the work of this Section.1. Existing removed materials and equipment not claimed as salvage by the

Contracting Officer shall become the property of the Contractor and be disposedof in a lawful manner off site.

F. Substructure Penetrations: As a general practice in the demolition work, and toprevent the future accumulation of water in the remaining portions of below gradestructures after backfilling operations, break through the bottoms of such structures tothe extent that water drainage readily occurs.

G. Abandoned Equipment and Machinery: Existing equipment and machinery in or onthe structures, not claimed as salvage by the Contracting Officer, shall also become theproperty of the Contractor and shall be removed and disposed of in a lawful manneroff site.

H. Capping Existing Facilities:1. Cap cut ends of water mains to be abandoned.2. Close existing corporation stops on water services to be abandoned except those

on abandoned mains.3. Cap ends of gas mains that are to be abandoned.

I. Removal and Filling Existing Valve Boxes:1. Remove top section of valve boxes indicated to be abandoned.2. Fill with aggregate backfill in layers not to exceed six inches in depth after

compaction.a. Perform compaction by hand.b. Puddling or jetting compacting methods are not permitted.

J. Plugging Existing Pipelines: Provide watertight seals by constructing pipe plugs inthe open ends of pipelines being abandoned in place. Use Manhole Brick andWaterproofed Mortar to construct the pipe plugs.



K. Plugging Existing Facilities: Provide watertight seals using Class B concrete. Forlarge openings use Manhole Brick and Waterproofed Mortar.1. Plug openings in manholes that are to be abandoned or filled.2. Plug the ends of pipe sewers that are to be abandoned or filled.

L. Filling Sewers to be Abandoned: Fill abandoned sewers with Lean Concrete.

M. Structure Foundations: Remove all structure foundations entirely and backfill withSelect Earth Backfill.

3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. General Requirements: At Contractor’s expense, repair or replace damaged structures,appurtenances, and vegetation not specified for removal.

B. Excavation and Fill: Fill pits and voids created by the work in accordance withSection 31 20 00.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contracting Officer’s Observation: Completely remove demolition debris from thesite. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer prior to commencing with nextphase of work.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Debris: Remove or store debris daily to prevent accumulation. Disposal of debrisshall be conducted in a lawful manner.

B. Final Cleaning: Clean and restore work areas to the pre-work condition or better.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Removal: Protect structures, site areas, and vegetation not designated for removalfrom damage during work.

B. Demolition: Protect existing utilities not scheduled for demolition.

3.08 SITE CLEARING

A. General: Remove grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, asrequired, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhereon site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. All debris removed from the site shall be hauledoff-site and disposed of in a licensed landfill or recycling area.



B. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except forthose indicated to be left standing.1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground

surface.2. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil

material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.3. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 152mm [6 inches] loose

depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density of 100 percent of themaximum dry density under walkway and pavement footprints and do notcompact in planting areas.

C. Demolition and Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.1. Saw cut edges of existing bituminous and concrete paving to be removed. Saw

cuts are to be straight and clean.2. Demolish and remove all indicated existing site structures, such as footings,

curbs, and foundation walls, completely.3. Demolish and remove all indicated existing walks completely to subgrade.4. Demolish and remove all indicated bituminous concrete paving and curbs

completely to subgrade.

D. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits is indicated ondemolition and site preparation plan. Remove abandoned underground piping orconduits interfering with construction as indicated on the plans.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section covers the concrete formwork for construction of all concrete structuresset forth on the Drawings and in these Specifications.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms:1. ACA: An acronym for Ammoniacal Copper Arsenate, a leach-resistant

waterborne wood preservative.2. CCA: An acronym for Chromated Copper Arsenate, a leach-resistant waterborne

wood preservative.3. VOC: An acronym for volatile organic compounds, generally meant to refer to

organic chemical compounds that have high enough vapor pressures under normalconditions to significantly vaporize and enter the atmosphere.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. ACI 347: Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

C. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standards:1. PS-1, Construction and Industrial Plywood.2. PS-20, American Softwood Lumber.

D. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA):1. Western Lumber Grading Rules.

E. APA-The Engineered Wood Association (APA):1. Engineered Wood Handbook and Grade Glossary.

F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB):1. Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Form Coating: Submit manufacturer's descriptive product data and currentspecification covering named product.

B. Form Ties: Submit manufacturer's descriptive product data, current specificationcovering named product.



1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Design the formwork and falsework in accordance with ACI 347 and with thefollowing:1. Capacities:

a. In the design, include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight ofmoving equipment operated on the formwork, temporary constructionmaterial, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and such otherfactors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction.

2. Design the formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damageto cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent construction.

3. Design the formwork to conform to the concrete sections indicated on theContract Drawings, and provide concrete within the following ACI 347tolerances:a. Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Public View: Class A tolerance.b. Concrete Surfaces Not Exposed to Public View: Class C tolerance.c. Where stricter tolerances are indicated on the Contract Drawings, they

supersede the ACI tolerances specified herein.4. Include the factors pertinent to the safety of personnel during construction in the

design.5. Types of Formwork and Falsework Permitted:

a. Exposed Finish Concrete:1) Design and furnish formwork of metal, fiberglass, or other materials that

provide a smooth, uniform concrete surface texture.2) Do not design and furnish formwork of materials having a raised grain,

torn surfaces, worn edges, or other defects that will impair the concretesurface texture.

b. Unexposed Finish Concrete:1) Design and furnish formwork of plywood, lumber, metal, or another

acceptable material.c. Earth forms are not permitted.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Protection:1. Protect formwork materials before, during, and after erection to ensure acceptable

finished concrete work. Also protect in-place materials and work of other tradesin connection with concrete work.

2. In event of damage to erected forms, make necessary repairs or replacementsprior to concrete pours. Perform such corrective work at no increase in ContractPrice.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Lumber:



1. Form framing, sheathing, struts, braces, and shoring in conformance with WWPAGrading Rules or SPIB Grading Rules.

2. Rough Structural and Dimension Lumber: Provide lumber of allowable species,surfaced four sides as applicable, and grade stamped with the appropriate WWPAor SPIB stamp indicating product compliance with PS-20.

3. Use lumber free of material defects that would deform the finished concreteproduct.

B. Plywood:1. Form Sheathing and Panels: Not less than 5/8 inch thick Exterior Type B-B

Plywood Class I and II conforming to U.S. Product Standard PS-1.a. Use Class II only on surfaces not exposed to view.

C. Steel:1. Metal Forms of a pre-engineered standard design, conforming to the concrete

sections indicated on the Drawings, may be used in lieu of wood forms.

D. Form Ties:1. Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable, or snap-off metal form

ties conforming to ACI 347.a. Do not fabricate wire ties, flat bands, or form ties on the Site.

2. Removable Ties:a. For ties that are designed to be completely removed, taper the ties over their

full length that passes through the concrete.1) For building foundation walls where ground is located on one side only,

install tapered ties so the large end of the taper is on the ground side ofthe concrete wall.

b. Do not use removable type ties that leave holes larger than one inch indiameter.

3. Snap-off Metal Ties:a. Provide snap-off metal ties with ends that break at least 1½ inches from the

face of the wall.4. Do not use wood spacers.5. To construct structures designed to exclude groundwater, use ties designed to

prevent seepage or flow of water along the embedded tie.

E. Form Coatings:1. Provide commercial formulation VOC-compliant form-coating compounds that

do not bond with, stain, or affect concrete surfaces.a. Provide form-coating compounds that do not impair subsequent treatment of

concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, or impede the wetting ofsurfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to placement of concrete, inspect forms for cleanliness and accuracy ofalignment.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Apply form coatings in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

B. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms.

C. Do not allow form coatings to come in contact with construction joints and reinforcingsteel.

3.03 ERECTION

A. General: Construct forms in accordance with ACI 347 to required dimensions, plumb,straight, mortar tight, and paste tight where appearance is important.1. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement, bowing, and pillowing,

and to safely support imposed concrete load.2. Provide offsets, keyways, recesses, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads,

anchorages and inserts, and such other features as required. Use selectedmaterials to obtain above requirements.

3. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concretesurfaces.

4. Form intersecting planes to provide true, clean-cut corners with edge grain ofplywood not exposed to concrete.

5. Build into forms, or otherwise secure in forms, items such as inserts, anchors,miscellaneous metal items, and such other embedded items as indicated onDrawings.

6. Wet forms sufficiently to prevent joints in wood forms from opening prior toconcrete pour.

7. Do not use stay-in-place metal forms.

B. Openings: Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork isinaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placementof concrete.1. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent the loss of

concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms in as inconspicuouslocation as possible consistent with the requirements of the work.

2. Provide openings in concrete formwork of the correct size and in the properlocation to accommodate other items and operations of construction work passingthrough forms. Accurately place and securely support items to be built intoforms.

C. Earth Forms: Earth forms are not permitted.



3.04 REMOVAL

A. Form Removal1. Remove forms in accordance with ACI 347 without damage to concrete and in a

manner to ensure complete safety and serviceability of the structure.a. Do not cut form ties back from the face of the concrete.b. Concrete surface shall not contain residual form coating that will interfere

with other materials or coatings to be applied.c. Concrete containing ground granulated blast furnace slag tends to develop

strength slower then a concrete containing 100 percent Portland Cement.2. Do not remove supporting forms or shoring until the members have acquired

sufficient strength to safely support their weight and the anticipated constructionloads without distortion or excessive deflection. Consent to remove forms doesnot relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of the work.

3. When the atmospheric temperature at the site has been continuously above 50degrees F. from the time of the pour, the forms shall be removed at the earliestpractical time within the limits set forth in this paragraph, and wet curing shallcontinue without delay.a. Forms for walls and other vertical faces may be carefully removed 24 hours

after the last portion of concrete in the section involved has been placed,provided the concrete has sufficiently hardened to preclude damage resultingfrom form removal, and provided these members are not subjected to loadsfor a period of 14 days.

b. Maintain horizontal forms in place for a minimum of 14 days or until theconcrete, as determined by job-cured cylinders, has attained a compressivestrength of 3,000 p.s.i.

c. When a water-reducing retarder is used in the concrete mix, the normal timeperiods for removing forms may need to be increased.

4. When the atmospheric temperature at the site drops below 50 degrees F., leave allforms in place for at least 5 days regardless of the temperature within theprotective covering or enclosure.

5. Notify the engineer upon removal of each concrete form so a review of the newlystripped surfaces may be made before patching takes place.

3.05 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. Forms for re-use shall meet new form requirements with respect to effect on pouredconcrete appearance and structural stability.

B. Do not delay or change the concrete pour schedule as a result of reusing formscompared to the schedule obtainable if all forms were new (in the case of wood forms)or if the total required forms were available (in the case of metal forms).

3.06 SITE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections:



1. Prior to placement of concrete, inspect the forms for shape, location, anddimension of the concrete member being formed.a. Provide lumber free of material defects that would unacceptably deform the

finished concrete product or cause visible imperfections on surfaces exposedto public view.

2. Prior to placement of concrete, verify the items to be embedded are properlyplaced and anchored.

B. Non-Conforming Work:1. If formwork is found to be out of alignment, or requires residual or other

detrimental material to be removed from the forms or pour area, realign the formsand/or remove the detrimental material from the formwork before pouringconcrete into the form.

3.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or similar items on the ground or buried inbackfill.1. Do not burn scrap on the Work Site.

a. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.2. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-

generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing and installing reinforcementfor concrete structures.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. ACI 315: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.2. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement.2. ASTM A663: Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,

Mechanical Properties.3. ASTM A1064: Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:1. Prepare shop drawings of concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315.2. Provide drawings showing all fabrication dimensions and locations for placing

reinforcement and bar supports; indicate bending diagrams, splicing and lap ofrods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing, and accessories.

3. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s descriptive product data and currentspecification for each product specified herein, include installation instructions.

B. Test Reports:1. Submit copies of reports showing the results of tests, conducted in accordance

with ASTM Specifications.2. Test Requirements may be waived based upon certified copies of mill test reports.




A. Storage of Materials:1. Store reinforcing materials in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling

with dirt, grease, and other bond-breaking coatings.a. Store the reinforcement and accessories aboveground on platforms, skids, or

other supports.b. Cover reinforcement and accessories.

2. Identify bundles of reinforcing steel with tags wired to steel.3. Protect reinforcement from deforming, bending, kinking, and other injury.


A. Protection: Protect in-place reinforcement from excessive construction traffic andother work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel:1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed steel.2. Wire: ASTM A1064.3. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185.4. Metal Accessories: CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

B. Fiber Concrete Reinforcement: First quality, 100% virgin polypropylene fiberscontaining no reprocessed olefin materials such as Fibermesh as manufactured by SIConcrete Systems, or equal.1. Fiber material shall be mixed at rate of 1.5 pounds of fiber to 1 cubic yard of

concrete.2. Add fibrous reinforcement to concrete material at the time concrete is batched.

Mix concrete in strict accordance with fiber reinforcement manufacturer’sinstructions in order to achieve uniform three-dimensional distribution.

3. Fiber reinforcement to be provided in concrete sidewalks.

C. Metal Accessories:1. Provide metal accessories in accordance with the requirements of the CRSI

Manual of Standard Practice.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate reinforcement to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings andwithin the tolerances given in ACI 315. Perform bending of steel reinforcement by thecold bending method.1. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not indicated on Drawings.2. Perform bar shape fabrication in a manner that will not injure the material or

lessen the member strength.



3. Use a designed bending machine, either hand- or power-operated.4. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete unless approved by the

Engineer.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:1. Materials specified in this Section require advance examination or laboratory

testing according to the methods referenced herein.2. The Testing and Inspection Agency will perform the source testing specified in

this Paragraph, unless the testing is not required as specified.a. The tests specified in Subparagraphs 2.03.A.3 through 2.08.A.9 may be

waived if certified copies of mill test reports are submitted showing completecompliance with the specified requirements.

b. If the certified mill test reports are not submitted the Testing and InspectionAgency must perform the specified tests.

3. Deformed Steel Reinforcement Tests:a. Test Procedure:

1) The following properties of the deformed steel bar reinforcement will bedetermined using the methods specified in ASTM A615:a) The carbon, manganese, phosphorus, and sulfur content of the dowel

bar material.b) The tensile strength, yield strength, and percentage elongation.

2) The bend test will be performed on the deformed steel bar reinforcementusing the methods specified in ASTM A615.

b. Acceptance Criteria:1) Deformed steel bar reinforcement that exhibit the chemical composition,

tensile strength, yield strength, percent reduction of area, and weight(mass) per unit length within the ranges specified in ASTM A615, andthat pass the bend test for the bar size, as specified in ASTM A615 areacceptable.

4. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement Tests:a. Test Procedure:

1) The tensile strength, yield strength, and percent reduction of area will bedetermined, and the bend test for steel welded wire reinforcement will beperformed in accordance with the methods specified in ASTM A1064.

b. Acceptance Criteria:1) Steel wire used to fabricate the steel welded wire reinforcement that

exhibits the tensile strength, yield strength, and percent reduction of areawithin the ranges specified, and that passes the bend test for the wire sizeas specified in ASTM A1064 are acceptable.

5. Non-Conforming Work:a. Do not use concrete reinforcement that fails the testing.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Placing Concrete Reinforcement:1. Place metal concrete reinforcement accurately and in accordance with ACI 318.

a. Do not lay metal reinforcement on formwork.b. Terminate reinforcement 2 inches from the face of expansion joints.c. Continue reinforcement across or through construction joints except for

keyed control joints in slab-on-grade.d. Place additional concrete reinforcement around openings in slabs and walls

as detailed on the Contract Drawings.e. Provide reinforcing accessories to securely brace the reinforcement against

displacement outside of permitted tolerances.2. Slab Reinforcement Placement:

a. Install welded wire reinforcement (flat sheets or mats) as indicated, lappingjoints eight inches with the overlap being measured between the outermostcross wires of each reinforcement sheet and securely wiring the jointstogether.

b. Extend welded wire reinforcement to within 2 inches of sides and ends ofslabs.

c. To support slab reinforcement from the ground, place the reinforcement onconcrete blocks of the correct height and having a compressive strength equalto or greater than the specified compressive strength of the concrete beingplaced.1) Use concrete blocks not larger than 3 inches by 3 inches and of a height

equal to required bottom steel cover.d. To support slab reinforcement from formwork, place the reinforcement on

bar chairs made of plastic or metal.1) If the slab surface is exposed to view, provide supports with legs

protected by plastic or stainless steel.3. Field weld deformed bar anchors to slab edge steel bent plate as shown on the

Contract Drawings.

B. Concrete Reinforcement Field Bends:1. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete.2. When obstructions interfere with the placement of reinforcement, pass such

obstructions by placing reinforcement around it.a. Do not bend the reinforcement to clear the obstructions.

C. Shortening Concrete Reinforcement:1. Shorten (trim) concrete reinforcement, if required, by shearing or sawing.2. Shortening concrete reinforcement using an acetylene torch may be acceptable,

but only if the location of the shortening is approved by the Engineer in writing inadvance.

D. Welding Concrete Reinforcement:



1. Do not weld concrete reinforcement.

E. Splicing Concrete Reinforcement:1. Splice reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and as indicated on the Contract

Drawings.2. Secure reinforcement at intersections with not less than 16 gauge annealed wire or

appropriately sized clips.a. Where bar spacing is less than 12 inches, tie alternate intersections.b. Do not tack-weld crossing bars.


A. An Testing and Inspection Agency shall be engaged by Owner to perform inspections.1. Written reports on all tests and inspections shall be provided immediately after

work is performed. The reports shall state test specimens either comply withrequirements or deviate from them.

B. Inspections:1. Notify the Engineer at least 10 days prior to scheduled concrete placement

operations so the placement of reinforcement can be inspected.2. Prior to placing concrete, inspect the reinforcement size, location, spacing, clear

distance between bars, and to the outside face of the concrete, and thereinforcement will not be displaced during the placement of concrete.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean or otherwise protect metal reinforcement so that at the time the concrete isplaced, the reinforcement is free from rust, scale, or other coatings that could destroyor reduce the concrete to steel bond.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for concrete reinforcement during concrete pours in accordancewith ACI 318, unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

B. Protect in-place reinforcement from excessive construction traffic and other work.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The work specified in this Section consists of designing mix, furnishing, placing,testing, and curing Portland cement concrete, reinforced and unreinforced, asindicated.


A. Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forms and Accessories.

B. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Work Provided Under Other Contracts: Items to be embedded in concrete are asspecified in the various Sections of this Contract and other Contracts for this Project.The responsibility for coordinating concrete pours with embedded items rests solelywith the Contractor.

D. Work Specified Under Other Sections: Items to be embedded in concrete are asspecified in the various Sections of this Contract Specification. The responsibility forcoordinating concrete pours with embedded items rests solely with the Contractor.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms:1. VOC: An acronym for volatile organic compounds, generally meant to refer to

organic chemical compounds that have high enough vapor pressures under normalconditions to significantly vaporize and enter the atmosphere.

B. Definitions:1. Cementitious Material: Mixture of cement and one type of a cement replacement

material.

C. Reference Standards:1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. AASHTO M 182; Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute orKenaf and Cotton Mats.

b. AASHTO M 235M/M 235; Standard Specifications for Epoxy ResinAdhesives.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):a. ACI 117/117R; Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials and Commentary.



b. ACI 211.1; Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete – Procedure for Mix Design.

c. ACI 211.2; Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for StructuralLightweight Concrete.

d. ACI 301; Specifications for Structural Concrete.e. ACI 304R; Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete.f. ACI 304.2R; Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.g. ACI 305R; Guide to Hot Weather Concreting.h. ACI 306R; Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.i. ACI 308R; Guide to Curing Concrete.j. ACI 318/318R; Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary.3. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC):

a. AISC 303; Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings andBridges.

4. ASTM International (ASTM):a. ASTM C31/C31M; Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field.b. ASTM C33; Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.c. ASTM C39/C39M; Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.d. ASTM C42/C42M; Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled

Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.e. ASTM C78; Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using

Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).f. ASTM C94/C94M; Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.g. ASTM C138/C138M; Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),

Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.h. ASTM C143/C143M; Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement

Concrete.i. ASTM C150; Standard Specification for Portland Cement.j. ASTM C156; Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar

Specimen] Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds forConcrete.

k. ASTM C157/C157M - Standard Test Method for Length Change ofHardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete.

l. ASTM C171; Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for CuringConcrete.

m. ASTM C172; Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.n. ASTM C173/C173M; Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.o. ASTM C192/C192M; Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete

Test Specimens in the Laboratory.p. ASTM C231; Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete by the Pressure Method.



q. ASTM C260; Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures forConcrete.

r. ASTM C309; Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-FormingCompounds for Curing Concrete.

s. ASTM C494/C494M; Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures forConcrete.

t. ASTM C618; Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or CalcinedNatural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

u. ASTM C881/C881M; Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base BondingSystems for Concrete.

v. ASTM C882; Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-ResinSystems Used With Concrete by Slant Shear.

w. ASTM C989; Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concreteand Mortars.

x. ASTM C1077; Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete andConcrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing AgencyEvaluation.

y. ASTM C1116/C1116M; Standard Specification for Fiber-ReinforcedConcrete.

z. ASTM C1315; Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-FormingCompounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.

aa. ASTM D1751; Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

bb. ASTM D1752; Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

5. United States Government:a. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1) 40 CFR 51; Requirements for Preparation, Adoption, and Submittal ofImplementation Plans.

6. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specifications (USACE):a. USACE CRD-C 572; Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.

7. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA):a. NRMCA Plant Certification Checklist – Section 3.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Before concrete is to be placed, give a 10-day advance notice to those performing

other construction work related to the concrete pours, such as to those performingwork that must be supported by or embedded in concrete, to allow such items tobe introduced or furnished before the concrete is placed.

2. Coordinate with the Independent Quality Assurance Testing and InspectionAgency to ensure notification is received sufficiently early to allow them ampletime to schedule and perform the required testing and inspection.



B. Pre-Installation Meetings:1. Prior to placement of concrete, convene an onsite meeting to establish and

coordinate procedures that will enable the Contractor to provide the best possibleproduct under anticipated field conditions.

2. Required attendees to this meeting include representatives of organizations andmaterial suppliers involved with the design and construction of concrete elements.

C. Scheduling:1. A minimum of 30 days prior to placing concrete, submit a schedule showing

proposed construction methods, construction joint locations, and the sequence ofpouring for approval.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive product data and currentspecifications for the concrete accessories specified herein; include installationinstructions.

B. Samples: Submit samples of materials being used when requested by the Engineerincluding names, sources, and descriptions.

C. Design Mix: Prior to production of concrete, submit for approval, on form attached atthe end of this Section, all mix designs proposed for project. Include with the mixdesign a standard deviation analysis or trial mixture test data in accordance with ACI301 Section 4. Use materials in such proposed design mix as specified herein. Makesuch adjustments in the proposed design mix as directed by the Engineer. Make suchadjustments at no increase in contract price.1. Water shall not be added to concrete mix at the project site unless it is withheld

from the mix at the batch mixing plant. Indicate amounts of mix water to bewithheld for later addition at project site. If water is added to mix at the Site,perform additional revolutions at the mixing speed to adequately incorporate theadditional water into the mixture.

D. Test Reports:1. Submit concrete test reports specified in Part 3 of this Specification.

E. Certificates:1. Furnish the Engineer and local authorities requiring same, certificates originated

by the batch mixing plant certifying ready mixed concrete, as manufactured anddelivered, to be in conformance with ASTM C94.

F. Delivery Tickets: A delivery ticket shall accompany each load of concrete from thebatch plant.1. Tickets must be signed by the Contractor's representative, noted as to time and

place of pour, and kept in a record at the site. Make such records available forinspection upon request.



2. Information presented on the ticket to include the tabulation covered by ASTMC94, Section 16, as well as any additional information the local codes mayrequire.

G. Schedule: Submit schedule showing methods, construction joint locations, andsequence of pouring a minimum of 30 days prior to placing concrete.

H. Independent Testing and Inspection Agency (Approved Agency) shall submitinspection and testing reports required by this Specification.


A. ACI Compliance: Cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to ACI 301 except asmodified by these Specifications or the Drawings.

B. Concrete Encasement of Pipes and Conduits: Encase pipes under structures andbuildings indicated by the Drawings to be encased in concrete for the full length of thepipe run under the structure.

C. Concrete Encasement of Conduits: Encase conduit runs as indicated and detailed onthe Drawings as work of Electrical Sections.

D. Equipment Bases: Construct reinforced concrete bases for equipment and pipingunder this contract at no increase in contract price.

1.07 SEQUENCING

A. Where other construction work is relative to concrete pours, or must be supported byor embedded in concrete, those performing such related work must be given 10 days’notice to introduce or furnish embedded items before concrete is placed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cement:1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 of the following Type:

a. Type I, Normal.2. Only one brand and manufacturer of approved cement shall be used for exposed

concrete.3. Cementitious material is a mixture of cement and one type of a cement

replacement material.

B. Cement Replacement Materials:1. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GGBFS): Conforms to ASTM C989,

Grade 120. Use GGBFS at the rate of 25% to 35% by weight of the totalcementitious material

2. Fly-Ash: Conform to ASTM C618 Type F.



a. Maximum rate of 15% to 25% by weight of total cementitious material.b. Maximum Loss of Ignition: Not to exceed 4%.

3. Provide only one type of cement replacement material for entire project. Thematerial selected shall be obtained from one source.

C. Normalweight Concrete Aggregate: Process aggregate meeting requirements ofASTM C33 and subject to the following limitations.1. Coarse Aggregate Size: Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed the

following requirements but in no case larger than 1½ inches.a. One-fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms within which concrete

is to be cast.b. Three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.c. One-third the slab thickness for unreinforced slabs.

D. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organicmaterials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.

E. Concrete Admixtures:1. Prohibited Admixtures: Use only non-corrosive, non-chloride admixtures.2. Provide admixtures produced and serviced by established, reputable

manufacturers and use in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.3. Air-Entraining Admixture: Use a product conforming to requirements of ASTM

C260.4. Water-Reducing Admixture: Use a product conforming to requirements of

ASTM C494/C494M Type A. (Use this for all concrete except where anadmixture listed below is used).a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Eucon WR-75; The Euclid Chemical Company.2) Pozzolith 220N; BASF The Chemical Company.3) Plastocrete 161; Sika Corporation.4) Or approved equal.

5. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Use a product conforming torequirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Eucon Retarder-75; The Euclid Chemical Company.2) Pozzolith 100XR; BASF The Chemical Company.3) Plastiment; Sika Corporation.4) Or approved equal.

6. Water-Reducing and Acceleration Admixture: Use a product conforming torequirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Types C or E.a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Accelguard 80; The Euclid Chemical Company.2) Pozzutec 20; BASF The Chemical Company.3) Plastocrete 161 FL; Sika Corporation.4) Or approved equal.

7. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: Use a product conforming torequirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.



a. Acceptable manufacturers:1) Eucon 1037; The Euclid Chemical Company.2) Glenium; BASF The Chemical Company.3) Sikament 610; Sika Corporation.4) Or approved equal.

8. Store admixtures in a manner to prevent contamination, evaporation, moisturepenetration, or damage. Do not use products stored longer than 6 months.

9. Prior to the mix design review by the Engineer, provide written conformance tothe specified requirements of the admixture.

F. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers:1. Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types (for exterior use in pavements and

sidewalks only): ASTM D1751.2. Sponge Rubber and Cork Type: ASTM D1752.3. Self Expanding Cork Type: ASTM D1752.4. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. The Euclid Chemical Company/Tamms Industries, Inc.b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.c. APS Supply Company.d. Greenstreak.e. Or approved equal.

G. Curing Materials: Use curing materials that will not stain or affect concrete finish orlessen the concrete strength and comply with the following requirements:1. Burlap: Materials conforming to AASHTO M 182.2. Sheet Materials: Material conforming to ASTM C171.3. Liquid Curing Compound.

a. Use material meeting the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 which arenontoxic and free of taste, odor, and complies with low VOC requirements.

b. Where a finish material is to be applied over concrete with architecturalfinish, provide certification by the product manufacturer stating the curingcompound as non-detrimental to the bond of the finish material.

c. Ensure curing compound is compatible with future concrete coatings andsurface treatments.

d. Acceptable manufacturers:1) L&M Cure; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.2) Masterkure, BASF The Chemical Company.3) Kurez DR, Euclid Chemical Company.4) Or approved equal.

H. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound:1. Provide a liquid clear curing and sealing compound conforming to the

requirements for Type I, Class A, specified in ASTM C1315.2. Provide liquid clear curing and sealing compounds which complies with low

volatile organic compound (VOC) requirements.3. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Lumiseal WB Plus, L&M Construction Chemical, Inc.



b. Kure-N-Seal® 25LV, BASF The Chemical Company.c. Super Diamond Clear VOX, Euclid Chemical Co.d. Approved equal.

I. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Provide a high-modulus, low-viscosity, moisture-insensitive epoxy adhesive conforming when mixed to the requirements for Type II,Grade 2, Classes B and C as specified in ASTM C881/C881M; and having thefollowing properties:1. Compressive Strength (Minimum): 8,000 psi at 28 days when measured in ASTM

D695.2. Tensile Properties:

a. Tensile Strength (Minimum): 4,000 psi at 14 days when measured inaccordance with the requirements of ASTM D638.

b. Elongation at Break: One to three percent when measured in accordancewith the requirements of ASTM D638.

c. Modulus of Elasticity: 3 x 105 psi when measured in accordance with therequirements of ASTM C882.

3. Bond Strength, ASTM C882:a. Plastic concrete to hardened concrete at 14 days (moist cure): 1,700 psi. min.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod; Sika Corporation.b. Euco Epoxy #452 MV or #620; Euclid Chemical Company.c. Fosroc, Inc.; Notobond 881.d. Or approved equal.

J. Epoxy Adhesive (for grouting dowels): Provide a moisture- insensitive epoxyadhesive of thick (gel) consistency conforming to the requirements for Type IV,Grades 2 and 3; Classes A, B, and C, except for gel times, as specified in ASTMC881/C881M; complying with the requirements for Type IV Grade 3, Class A, B, andC except for gel times as specified in AASHTO M 325, Type IV Grade 3, Class A, B,and C except for gel times, and having the following properties:1. Compressive Strength (Minimum): 10,000 psi. min. at 28 days when measured in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM D695.2. Tensile Properties:

a. Tensile Strength (Minimum): 3,000 psi at 14 days when measured inaccordance with the requirements of ASTM D638.

3. Minimum Bond Strength (Hardened Concrete to Hardened Concrete) 2000 psi at14 days (moist cure) when measured in accordance with the requirements ofASTM C882.

4. Mixed epoxy resin adhesive shall conform to ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3, ClassB and C.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Hit-RE 500-SD; Hilti.b. Simpson Set XP; Simpson Anchors.c. Or approved equal.



K. Construction Joint Device: Integral galvanized steel formed to tongue and grooveprofile for slab-on-grade construction.1. For exposed concrete areas, provide plastic joint cap strip that can be removed for

placement sealant.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Heckman Building Products, Inc.b. Or approved equal.

L. Contraction Joint Insert: Two-piece plastic preassembled preformed contraction joint;depth of embedment equal to ¼ of the slab thickness.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. W.R. Meadows: SPEED-E-JOINT®.b. Or approved equal.

M. Construction and Control Joint Filler for Slab-on-Grade: A two-component epoxyjoint filler.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Sika Corporation: Sikadur 51 Sl.b. Euclid Chemical Company: Euro 700.c. Master Builders: Masterfill® 300.d. Or approved equal.

2.02 MIXES

A. Selection of Proportions of Normalweight Concrete: ACI 211.1.

B. Proportions of Ingredients: Establish proportions, including water-cement ratio on thebasis of either laboratory trial mixture tests or standard deviation analysis, with thematerials specified herein.1. Laboratory Trial Mixture Test: ACI 301, Section 4 and ACI 318, Section 5.2. Standard Deviation Analysis: ACI 301, Section 4 and ACI 318, Section 5.

C. Classes of Concrete:1. Class A: 4,500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days; 564 pounds per

cubic yard minimum cementitious material.2. Class B: 3,000 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days; 517 pounds per

cubic yard minimum cementitious material.3. Class C: 2,000 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days; minimum

cementitious material per cubic yard in accordance with current ready-mix plantstandard practice.

D. Water-Cement (Cementitious) Ratio:1. Class A Concrete shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio of

0.45.2. Class B Concrete shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio of

0.55.3. Proportion Class C Concrete to meet the strength requirement.



E. Slump:1. Concrete, at the point of delivery, shall have a slump of 4 inches (± 1 inch) as

determined by ASTM C143; slump value may be increased 1 inch for methods ofconsolidation other than vibration.

2. Pumped concrete shall have a maximum slump of 5 inches measured prior topumping.

3. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture shall have an 8-inchmaximum slump after admixture is added to concrete with a 2- to 4-inch slump.

2.03 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entraining: Provide air-entrained concrete for each concrete pour except whereindicated otherwise on the Drawings or specified herein. Total air content required asfollows:

Maximum-size coarse Air content aggregate, inches: percent by volume:

1½ 5 ± 1 3/4 or 1 6 ± 1

B. Water-Reducing Admixture: Unless high temperatures occur or placing conditionsdictate a change, use concrete containing a water-reducing admixture.

C. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: When high temperatures occur or placingconditions dictate, the water-reducing admixture (Type A) may be replaced with awater-reducing and retarding admixture (Type D). Notify the Engineer of such changeand submit product data prior to placement of concrete.

D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: When low temperatures occur orplacing conditions dictate, the water-reducing admixture (Type A) can be replacedwith a water-reducing and accelerating admixture (Type C or E). Notify the Engineerof such change and submit product data prior to placement of concrete.


A. Laboratory Tests: Materials stated herein require advance examination or testingaccording to methods referenced, or as required by the Engineer.

B. Compression Test Cylinders: For laboratory trial batches, make in accordance withAmerican Concrete Institute ACI 301.

C. Flexural Strength Beams: For laboratory trial batches, make in accordance withAmerican Concrete Institute ACI 301. Test to consist of three flexural strength beams(6 x 6 inches) for Class A concrete only, with one broken at seven days and twobroken at 28 days; ASTM C192 and ASTM C78. Perform this test for vehiclepavement slabs only.

D. Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections:

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1. Notify the code-required Approved Agency responsible for performing specialinspections when concrete for this Contract is being mixed, placed, and/or tested.

2. Cooperate with the code-required Approved Agency when they are performingrequired material verifications and other special inspections and provide fullaccess to the work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect work to receive cast-in-place concrete for deficiencies, which would preventproper execution of the finished work. Do not proceed with placement until suchdeficiencies have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Joints1. General: Only the location of critical joints throughout the structures are

indicated on the Drawings.a. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, select additional joint locations in walls,

slabs, beams, and footings as required.1) Submit requests for approval of joint locations a minimum of 30 days

prior to scheduled concrete pours.2) Do not make concrete pours unless joint locations have been approved

by the Engineer.3) No exceptions are permitted to the specified requirements for joints

unless written approval is given by the Engineer.2. Construction Joints: Placement of additional joint locations shall meet the

following:a. Locate such joints to least impair the strength of the structure.b. When concreting is to be discontinued for more than 45 minutes, install

keyways and embed dowels in the concrete before initial hardening.1) Place dowels in joint one splice length into concrete section and one

splice length into next concrete pour.2) Use waterstops for structures below grade.3) Horizontal joints are not permitted in slabs or footings.

c. No exceptions permitted to the above requirements unless written approval isgiven by the Engineer.

3. Bonding to New Concrete: Bond fresh concrete with hardened previously pourednew concrete in accordance with the following:a. Roughen and clean hardened concrete of foreign matter and laitance and

dampen with water, but with no standing water.b. Cover the hardened concrete with a heavy coating of grout to approximately

½ inch thickness. Use grout of same material composition and proportions ofconcrete being poured except coarse aggregate omitted. Use grout with aslump of 6 inches minimum.

c. Place new concrete on grout before it has attained its initial set.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line



d. Other bonding methods must be approved by Engineer prior to use.4. Bonding to Existing Concrete: Roughen existing concrete in the area of bonding

to produce exposed aggregate and an absolutely uncontaminated concrete surface.a. Apply Epoxy Bonding Compound over existing prepared concrete in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Embedded Items: Pre-position waterstops, expansion joint materials, anchors, andother embedded items in advance of new concrete pours.1. Embedded Pipes and Conduits: Material not harmful to concrete may be

permitted to be embedded in concrete upon approval by the Engineer. Itemsembedded shall satisfy the following:a. Maximum outside dimension not greater than one-third the overall thickness

of the member in which it is embedded.b. Minimum spacing between items not less than 3 widths on center nor 3

inches clear between items.c. Item shall not impair strength of member.d. Provide 2-inch minimum clearance to face of slab.e. Cutting, bending, or displacement of reinforcement will not be allowed.f. The item(s) to be embedded shall not cross expansion joints within the slab

depth.g. The item(s) to be embedded shall not be made of aluminum.

2. Anchor Rod Placement:a. Install anchor rods accurately, vertically and horizontally, in the formwork as

shown on the Contract Drawings.b. Ensure rods are firmly held in the correct position and elevation by suitable

templates during placement of concrete.c. The variation in location of anchor rods and other embedded items from the

dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings shall meet the tolerances listedin AISC 303: “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”(March 2010).

C. Anchoring Reinforcement Dowels into Existing Concrete.1. Drill holes for each dowel to the size and depth indicated on the Drawings with

carbide tip bit or star bit, core drilling not permitted. Do not drill into or cut orotherwise damage existing reinforcement bars. If existing reinforcement bars areencountered during the drilling operation, relocate the hole to clear the existingreinforcement as directed by the Engineer.

2. Blow clean each finished hole with an oil free air jet and then flush with a jet ofclean water.

3. Immediately prior to the grouting operation, remove all water from the hole andfrom the walls of the hole.

4. Pump dispensing gun for proper mixture. Insert nozzle and pump epoxy adhesiveinto the hole and insert reinforcement dowels. Mix and place the epoxy adhesivecompletely around the dowel bar in strict accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations, with particular attention given to manufacturer’s specified timelimit within which the material must be placed after mixing. Do not retempergrout that has begun to stiffen; discard such grout.



5. Plug unused holes as directed by the Engineer.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction of Concrete Elements:1. Construct the concrete elements indicated on the Contract Drawings or in the

specifications; including but not limited to beams, columns, slabs, foundations, in-ground encasement of piping and conduit, reaction backings for piping, concretebackfill, and the reinforced concrete bases for equipment and piping providedunder this contract.

2. Provide only Class A concrete in the project except for those cases whereindicated otherwise on the Drawings or specified otherwise.a. Where in-ground encasement of piping is required, provide Class B concrete

1) Encase pipes under structures and buildings or where indicated on theContract Drawings; encase in concrete for the full length of the pipe rununder the structure and as indicated.

b. Where in-ground encasement of conduit runs is required, provide Class Bconcrete.1) Encase conduit runs indicated on the Contract Drawings.

c. Provide Class B concrete for backfilling of overexcavated foundation area,foundation voids, and cavities.

B. Production of Concrete1. Ready-Mixed Concrete:

a. Batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.b. Add admixtures to the mix in accordance with ACI 301.c. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to the "Plant Certification Check

List for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" of theNational Ready Mixed Concrete Association.

C. Placing1. General: Conduct placement work in accordance with ACI 304R and such

additional requirements as specified herein.a. Complete discharge of the concrete within 1½ hours or before the mixing

drum has revolved 300 revolutions; whichever comes first, after theintroduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or theintroduction of the cement to the aggregates.

2. Preparation:a. Prepare formwork:

1) Remove snow, ice, water, and debris from within forms in advance ofconcrete pours in accordance with Section 03 10 00.

b. Pre-position reinforcement in advance of concrete pours in accordance withSection 03 20 00.

c. Pre-position waterstops, expansion joint materials, anchors, and embeddeditems in advance of concrete pours.

d. Sprinkle subgrades sufficiently to eliminate water loss from concrete inaccordance with ACI 301.



1) Subgrade shall be moist with no free water and no muddy or soft spots.e. Do not place concrete on frozen surfacesf. Place vapor barrier where indicated on Drawings.

3. Conveying:a. Handle concrete from mixer to final deposit rapidly by methods, which will

prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain required quality ofconcrete.

b. Do not convey concrete through aluminum or aluminum alloy.c. Do not place concrete by pumps or other similar devices without prior written

approval of the Engineer.d. Placing concrete by pumping methods shall conform to the applicable

requirements of ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R.e. Do not place concrete if concrete temperature exceeds 90º F.

4. Depositing:a. Do not drop concrete freely where reinforcing will cause segregation, nor

more than four (4) feet.b. Deposit concrete in approximately horizontal layers of 12 to 18 inches.c. Do not allow concrete to flow laterally more than three feet.d. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with

fresh concrete is still plastic.e. Do not deposit concrete on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause

the formation of seams or planes of weakness within sections.f. Do not use concrete, which has partially hardened or has been contaminated

by foreign materials.g. Do not subject concrete to procedures which will cause segregation.h. Do not place concrete in forms containing standing water.i. Make placement within sections continuously to produce monolithic unit.j. Do not bend reinforcement out of position when placing concrete.k. Do not begin placement of concrete in elevated slabs and beams until

concrete previously placed in walls or columns have attained initial set.5. Consolidation:

a. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading, rodding, or other manualmethods. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items, and intocorners; eliminate all air or stone pockets and other causes of honeycombing,pitting, or planes of weakness.

b. Use vibration equipment of internal type and not the type attached to formsand reinforcement.

c. Use vibrators capable of transmitting vibration to concrete in frequenciessufficient to provide satisfactory consolidation.

d. Do not leave vibrators in one spot long enough to cause segregation.Remove concrete segregated by vibrator operation.

e. Do not use vibrators to spread concrete.f. Have sufficient reserve vibration equipment to guard against shutdown of

work occasioned by failure of equipment in operation.6. Cold Weather Concreting: Perform cold weather concrete work in accordance

with ACI 306R and the following additional requirements:



a. Temperatures of the subbase and other surfaces that come in contact withconcrete must be above freezing. The subbase and concrete forms surfacemust be free of frost, snow, and ice.

b. Do not place concrete around any embedment which has a temperature belowfreezing.

c. Provide equipment for heating concrete materials and protecting concreteduring freezing or near-freezing weather. Do not use foreign materials ormaterials containing snow or ice.1) When using artificial heat, vent exhaust gases to the outside.

7. Hot Weather Concreting: Perform hot weather concrete work in accordance withACI 305R and the following additional requirements.a. Temperature of concrete delivered at the job-site shall not exceed 90º F.b. Cool ingredients before mixing to prevent temperature in excess of 90º F.c. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, or wet

cover when necessary.

D. Finishing:1. General: Finish concrete in the various specified manners either to remain as

natural concrete or to receive an additional applied finish or material.a. Concrete containing ground granulated blast furnace slag or fly ash material

may have longer time of set compared to 100 percent Portland Cementconcrete.

2. Formed Surfaces: Provide one or more of the following finishes to the surfaces ofthe concrete after removal of forms. The locations where these finishes arerequired are listed herein or specified on the Drawings. Allowable surfaceirregularities are designed as either "abrupt" or "gradual.” Check gradualirregularities using 10-foot straightedge; tie holes and defects shall be patched.a. "Rough Form" finish: Surface may include roughness and irregularities not

to exceed 1/2 inch.b. "Ordinary Wall" finish: Surface that is true and uniform without any

conspicuous offsets or bulges. Gradual irregularities not to exceed 1/2 inchand abrupt irregularities not to exceed 1/4 inch.

c. "Plywood" finish: Similar to the Ordinary Wall finish. Construct the surfaceof the forms using 5/8-inch plywood or boards lined with tempered hardboardnot less than 3/16 inch thick. Place the plywood or liner sheets in an orderlyand symmetrical arrangement using sheets as large as practicable. Do not usesheets showing torn grain, worn edges, patches of holes from previous use, orother defects, which will impair the texture of the concrete surfaces. Removegradual irregularities exceeding 1/2 inch and abrupt irregularities exceeding1/8 inch. Completely remove all fins on the surface. Rub all surfaces, whichcannot meet these requirements.

d. "Rubbed" finish: Apply to a freshly hardened "Plywood" finish. Completerubbing within one day of removal of forms. Wet surfaces and rub with acarborundum brick or other abrasive until all form marks, projections, andirregularities have been removed and a smooth uniform surface, texture, andcolor are produced. Wash the surface clean after rubbing.

3. Unformed Surfaces:



a. General1) In concrete having unformed surfaces, use just sufficient mortar to avoid

the necessity for excessive floating.2) Slope exposed unformed surfaces to provide quick, positive drainage and

to avoid puddles in low spots.3) Unless otherwise noted, set floor drains ½ inch below the normal floor

elevation and slope floor toward the drain. Slope all surfaces exposed toweather 1/4 inch per foot for drainage unless noted otherwise onDrawings.

b. "Floated" Finish: Place, consolidate, strike-off, and level concreteeliminating high spots and low spots; do not work further until ready forfloating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and when thesurface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation.

c. "Steel Trowel" Finish: Obtained by working a Floated finish with a steeltrowel. First troweling shall produce a smooth surface which is relativelyfree of defects, but which may still show some trowel marks. Performadditional trowelings by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently.Perform final troweling when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel ismoved over the surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweloperations. Produce finished surface essentially free of trowel marks.

d. "Broom or Belt" Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a Floatedfinish, give surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom orburlap across the surface.

e. "Nonslip" Finish: The surfaces shall be given a "dry shake" application ofnon-slip aggregate surfacer. The rate of application of such material not to beless than 25 pounds per 100 square feet. Apply in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

4. Application for Finishes: Except where the type of finish is indicated on thedrawings or under “Special Finish,” all concrete surfaces shall be finished asindicated below.a. "Rough Form" Finish:

1) All surfaces to be covered by earth and not exposed to view.b. "Ordinary Wall" Finish:

1) Interior and exterior wall surfaces not exposed to view.c. "Plywood" Finish:

1) All surfaces to be painted.d. "Rubbed" Finish:

1) All interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view which are not to bepainted.

2) All exterior surfaces to a point 6 inches below finished ground.3) Equipment pads.

e. "Floated" Finish:1) All unformed surfaces unless otherwise specified.

f. “Steel Trowel" Finish:1) Tops of exposed walls.

g. Broom or Belt Finish



1) Sidewalks, exterior ramps, and platforms.h. Non-slip Finish

1) Exterior stair treads and landings.

3.04 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Immediately after placement and finishing, protect concrete from prematuredrying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. Perform curing bywater curing, sheet form curing, or liquid membrane forming methods in accordancewith ACI 308. Cure concrete continuously in a moist condition for a minimum ofseven days at ambient temperatures above 50º F.

B. Hot Weather Curing: See Hot Weather Concreting this Section.

C. Cold Weather Curing: See Cold Weather Concreting this Section.

D. Application of Curing Compound: Compound shall restrict the loss of water to notmore than .039 g/cm2 of surface in 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTMC156 at the coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer.1. Submit letter from manufacturer stating coverage rate to meet this restriction in

loss of water.2. Finishing operations must be completed prior to application. Apply compound as

soon as the free water on the surface disappears and no water sheen is visible.Surface shall be capable of taking walking workmen without being marred.a. Apply compound in two (2) applications. Apply the second coat

perpendicular to the first coat.3. Do not apply curing compound to construction joint surfaces. Protect exposed

reinforcement during application of curing compound. Water cure those areas notcoated with compound.a. Where an area has been accidentally coated with curing compound or another

special coating, clean this excess coating from the surface by blast cleaningor using another method recommended by the manufacturer of the specialcoating.

4. Do not use liquid membrane-forming curing compound when the ambient airtemperature during placement and for 24 hours after placement is or will fallbelow 35º F.

5. Do not use liquid membrane-forming curing compounds on concrete surfaceswhich will receive later treatments, such as hardeners, special finishes, protectivecoating, dampproofing, waterproofing, future grout, grout fill, or coatings.

E. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to preventchecking and crazing.


A. The Engineer will determine the extent and manner of actions to be taken to repairdefective concrete.



1. Obtain approval from the Engineer before performing repair work other thanremoving imperfect texture and filling pin holes and insert holes.

2. Prior to repairing defects, submit proposed materials and repair methods to theEngineer for approval.

B. Repair of Formed Concrete Surfaces:1. As soon as the forms have been stripped from the concrete and the concrete

surfaces have been exposed, do the following:a. Remove fins and other projections, fill recesses left by the removal of form

ties, and repair surface defects which do not impair the structural strength ofthe concrete.

b. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining areas stained by theleakage of concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2. Repair tie holes and other small cavities by cleaning out the resulting cavities,wetting the cavity area, and then filling the cavity with a stiff mortar of the samematerial used in the concrete, but somewhat leaner.

3. Repair and patch other defective areas with cement mortar of mix proportions andmaterials identical to those used in the surrounding concrete.a. Produce a finish on the patch indistinguishable from the surrounding

concrete.4. Where honeycomb or voids are not excessive, and repairs are authorized by the

Engineer, sawcut a ½- to ¾-inch deep square outline around the area of defectiveconcrete, and chip out the defective concrete inside the outline to a depth not lessthan 2 inches until sound solid concrete is encountered.a. If chipping is necessary, make edges of the depression perpendicular to the

concrete surface or slightly undercut to provide a key at the edge of the patch.b. Thoroughly clean, dampen, and brush-coat the area to be patched with neat

cement grout; and follow this preparation by placing a cement mortar topatch the concrete.1) Other patching materials may be used if accepted by the Engineer in

writing prior to start of repair work.c. Keep the patch damp for 7 days at a temperature above 50º F.

C. Repair of Unformed Concrete Surfaces:1. Finished flatwork exceeding the allowable tolerances may be repaired provided

the strength or appearance of the flatwork is not adversely affected.a. Remove high spots with a terrazzo grinder.b. Fill in low spots with an approved patching compound.c. Perform other remedial measures as permitted by the Engineer.

2. Surface defects on unformed surfaces may be repaired provided the strength ofappearance of the item is not adversely affected.a. Remove high spots and surface irregularities with a diamond-disk or stone

grinder.b. Fill in low spots with an approved patching compound.




A. Site Tests and Inspections:1. During the period when concrete is being placed, the Approved Agency must

perform routine and other testing of materials.a. Advise the Approved Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow

testing personnel to be assigned and to provide sufficient time for qualitytests to be performed and completed.

b. Provide and maintain adequate and separate facilities for safe storage andproper curing of concrete test cylinders on the Work Site for the sole use ofthe Approved Agency.

c. Strength testing requirements are based on using 6-inch by 12-inch sizecylinders.

d. Provide containers for transporting concrete test cylinders to the testinglaboratory.

e. The Approved Agency will perform additional materials testing due tochanged in materials or proportions requested by the Contractor or testingrequired due to failure of material to meet specified requirements.

f. Failure of the Approved Agency to detect defective work will not prevent itsrejection later when the defect is discovered.

2. Concrete Slump Test:a. Test Procedure:

1) Determine the slump of a concrete sample from each truckload ofconcrete upon its arrival at the Work Site.

2) Determine the temperature of the concrete sample.3) Determine the slump according to the requirements of ASTM C143/

C143M.b. Acceptance Criteria:

1) Refer to Subparagraph 2.02F.3. Air Content Test:

a. Test Procedure:1) Determine the air content of the concrete for each concrete strength test

sample in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173/C173M, orASTM C138/C138M.

b. Acceptance Criteria:1) The Engineer will determine acceptability based on the results.

4. Concrete Strength Test for New Concrete:a. Test Procedure:

1) Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172.a) Obtain representative test samples from different batches of concrete

on a truly random basis by selecting a test batch number at randombefore commencing the placement of concrete.

b) When pumping or pneumatic equipment is used, obtain samples atthe truck and discharge ends.

c) Take samples for each concrete mix design not less than once a day,or not less than once for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, or notless than once for each 3,000 square feet of surface area placed.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line



2) Mold at least 5 concrete test cylinders in strict compliance with therequirements of ASTM C31/C31M for each strength test, and cure thecylinders for a 24-hour initial curing period.a) Have a responsible representative from the Approved Agency

observe the making of the concrete test cylinders by the Contractor,and immediately thereafter pack them in a sturdy containerfurnished by the Contractor.

b) Surround the concrete test cylinders with wet sand or sawdust andprotect them from freezing.

c) Sequentially number the concrete test cylinders and record thenumber, the date each cylinder was made, and the results of theslump test, air content, and the temperature for each sample on theproper form; forward the form to the Engineer, and then transportthe cylinders to the testing laboratory where they will be cured instrict compliance with ASTM C31/C31M until the time of the test.

3) Each strength test will be conducted in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M as follows:a) One 6-inch by 12-inch size concrete cylinder from the same sample

will be tested 7 days after the cylinders were made for information.b) An additional two 6-inch by 12-inch size concrete cylinders from

the same sample will be tested for acceptance 28 days after thecylinders were made.

c) Two 6-inch by 12-inch size concrete cylinders will be put on holdfor 56 days and tested only when the running average of threeconcrete cylinder tests falls below the acceptance criteria.

d) The result of the strength test is the average of the compressivestrength results for the 2 specimen cylinders tested at 28 days.

e) If one concrete test cylinder in a strength test manifests evidence ofimproper sampling, molding, or testing, it will be discarded, and thestrength of the remaining cylinder will be considered to be the testresult; if both specimen cylinders in a test for a single sample showany of the above defects, the entire test for those samples will bediscarded.

b. Acceptance Criteria:1) The test results for standard molded and cured test cylinders will be

evaluated separately for each specified concrete mix design bycomparing the test results to the minimum requirements for the Class ofconcrete as specified in Subparagraph 2.02.

2) The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so longas the average of all sets of 3 consecutive compressive strength testresults equal or exceed the specified strength f’c, and no individualstrength test result falls below the specified strength f’c by more than500 psi.



5. Concrete Strength Test for Concrete in Place:a. The Engineer will determine locations where the concrete in place is

potentially deficient, and where to obtain test cores to least impair thestructure’s strength.1) As an aid to evaluate in place concrete strength or for selecting areas to

be cored, the Engineer may permit concrete in place to be tested byimpact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device to determinethe relative strengths at various locations in the structure.

2) The preliminary non-destructive tests of concrete in place will not beused as a basis for accepting or rejecting the concrete; rather the coretesting will be the basis for accepting or rejecting the in-place concrete.

b. Concrete Core Test:1) Test Procedure:

a) The Engineer will determine the locations in each member or area ofconcrete in place where the required cores may be obtained.

b) At least 3 representative core samples will be taken from eachmember or area of concrete in place that is considered potentiallydeficient.(1) Each core sample will be at least 3 inches in diameter.(2) If the concrete in the structure will be dry under service

conditions, the cores will be air dried for 7 days before the testat a temperature of 60º F to 80º F and a relative humidity of lessthan 60 percent; the cores will be tested dry.

(3) If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficiallywet under service conditions, the cores will be tested aftermoisture conditioning them in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M.

c) The core samples will be tested in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M.(1) If one or more of the cores shows evidence of having been

damaged before the testing, it must be replaced eithersubsequent to or during its removal from the structure.

d) Solidly fill core holes with low slump concrete.2) Acceptance Criteria:

a) Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be consideredadequate if the average compressive strength of the cores is equal toat least 85 percent of the specified strength f’c, and if no single coreis less than 75 percent of the specified strength f’c.

b) If the core tests fail to demonstrate concrete strengths adequate forthe intended purpose of the member or members in question, or areinconclusive or impractical to obtain, or if structural analysis doesnot confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be required.(1) The results will be evaluated in accordance with ACI 318/318R.

6. Inspections:a. Concrete Surface Irregularities:



1) Evaluate floor flatness/levelness in accordance with criteria defined inASTM E1155 and on the Contract Drawings.

B. Non-Conforming Work:1. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements, and

which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as providedin this Section.a. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any or all items which do not meet

the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications.b. Remove items determined to be non-conforming, and replace the non-

conforming items removed with Work that conforms to the specifiedrequirements.

2. Concrete Compressive Strength:a. If concrete fails to meet the minimum specified compressive strength test

requirements, the concrete represented by such tests will be consideredquestionable and subject to further testing and other requirements as follows:1) Additional curing may be required as directed by the Engineer.2) Modifications may be required for remaining concrete work, including

changes in the concrete mix designs.3) When the strength of the structure is considered potentially deficient,

structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required.a) If in the opinion of the Engineer there is cause for concern over the

adequacy of the structure regardless of the results of any previoustests, additional tests of the hardened concrete may be required.(1) The additional testing of questionable concrete will be

conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C42/C42M.

(2) If the initial test acceptance requirements had been met, theContractor is not required to bear the costs of such additionaltests unless their results confirm that the concrete in place isdeficient.

3. Concrete Appearance:a. Repair defects which adversely affect the appearance of the specified finish

in concrete exposed to view if possible.1) If in the opinion of the Engineer the defect cannot be repaired, the

concrete may be accepted or rejected as provided in this Section.2) Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective

appearance.4. Location of Members:

a. Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if the strength,appearance, or function of the structure is adversely affected; or if themisplaced items interfere with other construction.

5. Dimensional Tolerances:a. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces which are exposed to view and do not

conform to the requirements of ACI 117/117R may be rejected.1) Repair, or remove and replace, the section as required.



2) If the outlines of formed concrete surfaces are smaller than required byan amount exceeding the requirements of ACI 117/117R, they will beconsidered deficient in strength.

3) If the outlines of formed concrete surfaces are larger than required by anamount exceeding the requirements of ACI 117/117R, they may berejected.a) The Engineer may require that the excess material be removed.b) If the excess material is to be removed, do so in a manner that

maintains the strength of the section and meets the other applicablerequirements of function and appearance.

3.07 CLEANING

A. At the end of each day, clean and remove waste sandblasting material from the Workarea.

B. After fiber-reinforced concrete has reached its 28-day design strength, burn off theexposed excess fibers.

3.08 ATTACHMENTS

A. The following attachments are appended to this Section following the “END OFSECTION” marker:1. Final Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form.2. Test Results Submittal Form.

END OF SECTION






FINAL CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM

(One for each required mix design)

PROJECT: _____________________ Location: ____________________________________ General Contractor: _____________________________________________________________ Mix design no.: ________________ Design strength: _______________________________

USE (Describe): Mix Design Preparation: Based on Standard Deviation Analysis: ____________________ (check one) or Based on Trial Mixture Test Data: ______________________

MATERIALS: Aggregates: (Provide size, type, source, specification) Coarse: _______________________________________________________________________ Fine: _________________________________________________________________________

Cement Type/Source: ___________________________________________________________

Admixtures: (Provide product, manufacturer) Water Reducer: Air Entraining:

Accelerator: Other:

CONCRETE PROPERTIES

Water/Cement Ratio: ____________ Slump: __________ inches Entrained Air: ____ % Density __________ pcf

SPECIFIC GRAVITIES

Fine Aggregate: ______________ Coarse Aggregate: ______________

ADMIXTURES

Accelerator _______ oz. per 100# cement W. R. __________ oz. per 100# cement A. E. __________ oz. per 100# cement Other __________ oz. per 100# cement

MIX PROPORTIONS

Weight Absolute Volume (lbs) (cubic feet)

Cement: ______ ______________

Fine Aggregate: ______ ______________

Coarse Aggregate: ______ ______________

Water: ______ ______________

Entrained Air: ______ ______________

Other: ______ _____________

TOTAL ______ ______________



TEST RESULTS SUBMITTAL FORM

METHOD 1 - STANDARD DEVIATION ANALYSIS (ACI 318-11 SECTION 5.3.2.1):

Number of Test Cylinders Evaluated: __________ Standard Deviation: ____________ (Attach Copy of All Test Results) Mix Designs Proportioned to Achieve Both of the Following:

f'cr = f'c + 1.34s = _________ psi f'cr = f'c + 2.33s - 500 = _________ psi Actual f'c = _________ psi (<= f'cr)Slump =_________ Air Content = _________ %

METHOD 2 - TRIAL MIXTURE TEST DATA (ACI 318-11 SECTION 5.3.2.2):

Age Mix 1 Mix 2 Mix 3 (days) (comp. str.) (comp. str.) (comp. str.)

7 _________ _________ __________

28 _________ _________ __________ 28 _________ _________ __________

28-day avg. _________ _________ __________

Mix Design Proportioned to Achieve the Following:

f'cr = f'c + 1200 psi (for f'c <= 5000 psi) or f'cr = f'c + 1400 psi (for f'c > 5000 psi)

Slump = ______ in. Air Content = ______ %

REMARKS:

Note: Fill in all blank spaces. Use -0- (zero) or N/A (not applicable). See Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures, Portland Cement Association, for assistance in filling out this form.

SUBMITTED BY:

Ready-Mix Supplier: Name _____________________________________________________ Address ___________________________________________________

Phone Number ______________________________________________


Contract No. HCC21002 GROUT03 60 00 - 1

SECTION 03 60 00

GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section specifies the grouts for the individual grouting requirements stated inother Sections of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings.


A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):1. AASHTO M6: Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Hydraulic Cement

Concrete.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. ACI 305R: Guide to Hot Weather Concreting.2. ACI 306R: Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.3. ACI 306.1: Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.4. ACI 308: Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.5. ACI 351.1R: Grouting between Foundations and Bases for Support of Equipment

and Machinery.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM C33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.2. ASTM C109: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. [50-mm] Cube Specimens).3. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.4. ASTM C827: Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of

Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures.5. ASTM C1090: Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of

Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout.6. ASTM C1107: Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement

Grout (Nonshrink).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:1. Submit the following for approval:

a. Product Data:1) Non-shrink metallic grout.2) Non-shrink non-metallic grout.



b. Certificates:1) Grout manufacturer non-shrink certification.

B. Informational Submittals:1. Submit the following for information:

a. Manufacturer’s Instructions:1) Manufacturer’s placing instructions.

1.05 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Non-Shrink Grout Performance Qualifications: Furnish the grout manufacturer'scurrent independent laboratory test results indicating the grout conforms to thefollowing:1. Early height change of 0.0% to 4.0%, according to ASTM C827.2. Hardened height change of 0.0% to 0.3% according to ASTM C1090.3. Compressive strength of 4,000 psi strength developed with a trowelable mix

within 24 hours when tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C109modified in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C1107.

4. Placement time based on initial set of not less than 60 minutes at 70º F.


A. Provide protective covering over materials to prevent moisture damage andcontamination of grout materials.

B. Store and pre-condition grout and grout materials in accordance with the groutmanufacturer’s requirements. Provide air-conditioned storage if required.

C. Store grout materials in undamaged condition with seals and labels intact as packagedby the manufacturer.


A. Environmental Requirements: Protect against high and low temperatures andunfavorable environmental conditions in accordance with American Concrete Institutestandards for placement of concrete (ACI 305R, 306R, and 306.1).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout:1. A factory-premixed material containing no corrosive irons, aluminums,

chemicals, or gypsums meeting ASTM C1107 Grades A, B, and C.a. Provide a ready-mix type of grout requiring only the addition of water.b. Do not add other materials to the grout.



c. For grout applications not in contact with sewage, provide groutmanufactured using Type I (Normal) cement as specified in Subparagraph2.01C this specification.

2. Acceptable manufacturers for non-shrink non-metallic grout include thefollowing:a. Five Star Products, Inc.b. Euclid Chemical Company.c. Or approved equal.

B. Non-Shrink Metallic Grout:1. A factory-premixed material containing no corrosive irons, aluminums,

chemicals, or gypsums meeting ASTM C1107 Grades A, B, and C.a. Provide a ready-mix type of grout requiring only the addition of water.b. Do not add other materials to the grout.c. For grout applications not in contact with sewage, provide grout

manufactured using Type I (Normal) cement as specified in Subparagraph2.01C this specification.

d. To enhance impact resistance, provide grout containing metallic aggregate.2. Acceptable manufacturers for non-shrink metallic grout include the following:

a. Five Star Products, Inc.b. Euclid Chemical Company.c. Or approved equal.

C. Portland Cement:1. Portland Cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150 Type I or Type

II as specified.a. Provide Type II (sulfate resistant) cement for applications in contact with

sewage.

D. Aggregates:1. Fine aggregate conforming to the material quality requirements of ASTM C33.

2.02 MIXES

A. Neat Cement:1. Use Type I Portland Cement and water in the same proportions specified in

Section 03 30 00 for Class A cast-in-place concrete, but omit the fine and coarseaggregates from the mix.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Preparation of Surface: Clean surfaces to be grouted to be free of oil, grease, laitance,dirt and other contaminants. Remove loose material. Remove rust, paint, and oil frommetal components in contact with grout.



1. Additional Preparation: Perform additional surface preparation in accordancewith manufacturer's instructions.

B. Formwork: Use forming procedures that allow proper and complete placement ofgrout.1. Pre-treat wood forms with forming oils so they do not absorb moisture.2. Anchor Support elements of formwork so no movement is possible. Remove

supports only after grout has hardened.

C. Grout Mixing: Use power operated mechanical mixer of sufficient capacity to carryout batch mixing without interruption.1. Mix Non-Shrink Grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide support for equipment and machinery by placing grout between thefoundations of supporting structures and the equipment and machinery bases inaccordance with the requirements of ACI 351.1R.

B. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout:1. Place non-shrink non-metallic grout in exposed and unexposed areas at locations

indicated on the Contract Drawings.2. Mix and place non-shrink non-metallic grout in accordance with the

manufacturer’s published instructions.

C. Non-Shrink Metallic Grout:1. Place non-shrink metallic grout in areas where grouting is subject to heavy

vibratory forces and at location indicated on the Contract Drawings.2. Mix and place non-shrink metallic grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s

published instructions.


A. Site Tests and Inspections:1. During the period when grout is being placed, the Testing and Inspection Agency

must perform routine and other testing of materials.a. Advise the Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow testing

personnel to be assigned and to provide sufficient time for quality tests to beperformed and completed.

b. Provide and maintain adequate and separate facilities for safe storage andproper curing of grout test samples on the Work Site for the sole use of theApproved Agency.

c. Provide containers for transporting grout test samples to the testinglaboratory.

d. The Approved Agency will perform additional materials testing due tochanges in materials or proportions requested by the Contractor or testingrequired due to failure of material to meet specified requirements



e. Failure of the Approved Agency to detect defective work will not prevent itsrejection later when the defect is discovered; neither does it obligate theEngineer or Owner to grant final acceptance of the Work.

2. Compressive Strength Test:a. Test Procedure:

1) A test sample will be obtained from the first placement of the day and forevery 3 cubic yards of grout placed each day.

2) The grout will be tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTMC109 modified in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C1107.

b. Acceptance Criteria:1) Grout meeting the requirements specified in Subparagraph 1.05 will be

acceptable.3. Inspections:

a. All grout placement will be visually inspected to verify if proper placementprocedures are being followed.

B. Non-Conforming Work1. Remove under-strength grout and replace the removed grout with grout meeting

the specified requirements.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section covers the fabrication, and installation of structural metal framing.


A. Section 09 91 00: Painting and Coating.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):1. AISC 360; Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.2. AISC 303; Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.3. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts (approved by

Research Council on Structural Connections, December 2009).

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI B18.22.1, Plain Washers.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless.3. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-

Finished.4. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products.5. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.6. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.7. ASTM A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.8. ASTM A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel.9. ASTM A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of

Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.10. ASTM A992, Standard Specifications for Structural Steel Shapes.11. ASTM E164, Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments.12. ASTM E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.13. ASTM F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.14. ASTM F959, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct

Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.



15. ASTM F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksiYield Strength.

16. ASTM F1852, Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension ControlStructural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksiMinimum Tensile Strength.

17. ASTM F2329, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot Dip, Requirementsfor Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, andSpecial Threaded Fasteners.

D. American Welding Society (AWS):1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.

E. SSPC ;The Society for Protective Coatings:1. SSPC Painting Manual.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Structural Steel Shop Drawings:1. Submit shop drawings identifying the details as indicated on Drawings, indicating

completely the location in the project, the size and weights of the members, themethods of joining various components, the quantity, finish, the location and typeof anchors and necessary measurements.

2. Provide easy-to-read markings on shop and erection drawings for shop assemblieswhich require markings for erection identification.

3. Note on shop drawings variations in tolerances or clearances between variousproducts.

4. Use standard welding symbols of the AWS on shop drawings; show size, length,and type of each weld.

5. Provide shop drawings prepared under the supervision of and sealed by aProfessional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvaniaexperienced in structural engineering.

B. Working Drawings:1. Furnish setting diagrams, templates, and directions for the installation of

structural framing anchor bolts, bearing plates, and other embedded items.

C. Product Data:1. Submit data for approval related to the following:

a. For items defined in Paragraph 2.01B this specification.b. Welding electrodes.c. Headed type studs.d. Paint primer.

D. Welding Certifications:1. Prior to commencing work requiring welding, submit the procedure which will be

used for prequalifying welders and welding procedures. For all procedures other

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



than those set forth in AWS D1.1, submit a copy of procedure qualification test records.

2. Submit certified copy of qualification test record showing each welder, weldingoperator, and tacker who will be employed in the work has satisfactorily passedAWS qualification tests for welding procedures.

3. Submit certified copy of reports for all analyses and tests required by referencedASTM Specifications, including test reports for filler metals for welding, andmechanical tests for high-strength threaded fasteners.

E. Test Results:1. Submit reports signed by the manufacturer certifying their products comply with

requirements specified.2. Submit test reports certifying material conforms to ASTM specification.3. Submit guarantee showing all steel used for this project is American-made.

F. Qualification Statement:1. Submit qualification statement denoting the requirements of this specification are

met by the following:a. Structural steel fabricator qualificationsb. Structural steel erector qualificationsc. Hot-Dip Galvanizing Company.

G. An Independent Testing and Inspection Agency shall submit inspection and testingreports required by this Section.


A. Qualifications:1. Fabricator: Company experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that

indicated for the project who has a successful in-service performance for aminimum of 5 continuous years and sufficient production capacity.a. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be

designated an AISC Certified Plant with Category STD at time of bid.b. Fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce and deliver

the materials on time to meet the approved construction schedule for thisContract.

2. Erector: Company experienced in erecting structural steel work similar to thatindicated for the project who has a successful in-service performance with aminimum of 5 continuous years of experience.

3. Welder, Tacker, and Welding Operator Qualifications: Use welders, tackers, andwelding operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in theStructural Welding Code, AWS D1.1 of the American Welding Society toperform type of work required.

4. Hot-Dip Galvanizing Plant Qualification:a. Company shall be a member of the American Galvanizers Association

(AGA).

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



b. Submit letter denoting plant location proposed for the defined work andnumber of years of experience performing galvanizing work similar to workdenoted in this Contract.

B. Comply with applicable provisions listed in those references stated in Paragraph 1.03of this specification unless otherwise indicated.

C. Structural Tests and Special Inspection1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill,

shop, and field by an Independent Testing and Inspection Agency2. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specifiedrequirements.a. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not

comply.b. Requirements for code-related Special Inspections are defined in Division 1

Specification Section.


A. Deliver materials to site at such times and intervals to ensure continuity of installationand uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store steel on platforms, skids, blocking or other supports to prevent dirt and debriscontact. Protect from exposure to conditions that produce rust.

C. Handle steel so no parts are bent, broken, or otherwise damaged and avoid damage toother material and work. Store beams with webs vertical. Exercise care to avoidscraping and over stressing the steelwork.

D. Mark weight on all members. Match-mark all shop pre-fitted members.

E. Ship small parts, such as bolts, nuts, washers, pins, fillers, and small connecting platesand anchors in boxes, crates, or barrels. Pack separately each length and diameter ofbolt and each size of nut and washer. Plainly mark an itemized list and description ofthe contents on the outside of each container.

F. Replace pieces bent or damaged unless repairs are authorized by the Engineer.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Provide anchor rods and other anchorage items to be embedded in or attached toconcrete, masonry, or other materials in ample time to not delay work.1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and installation directions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, ASTM A572 Grade 50, ASTM A992; as noted on

drawings.2. Structural Steel Rectangular (Square) HSS Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade C.3. Structural Steel Round HSS: ASTM A500, Grade C.4. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

B. Fasteners1. High-Strength Bolted Connections:

a. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325.b. Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts: ASTM A563.c. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1.d. Direct Tension Indicators (for use in slip-critical and pre-tensioned

connections): ASTM F959, Type 325.e. Twist-Off-Type Tension Control Bolt Assemblies: ASTM F1852.

2. Fastener Assemblies:a. Galvanized high-strength bolts and nuts are considered to be a fastener

assembly; both elements must be galvanized by the same process.b. Supply nuts that are lubricated.c. The bolt, lubricated nut, and washer assembly shall be tested prior to

shipment.d. Galvanize materials in accordance with the requirements specified in ASTM

F2329.3. Anchor Rods:

a. Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, 55, 105 as noted on drawings.b. Nuts: ASTM A563.c. Washers: ASTM F436.

4. Bolt Lubricant: Molybdenum disulfide base lubricant.5. Expansion Anchors and Adhesive Anchors:

a. As specified in Section 03 30 00.

C. Welding Electrodes:1. AWS D1.1, E70XX.2. Use low-hydrogen electrodes for field welding.

D. Paints and Coatings:1. Primer Coat:

a. Primer shall be compatible with selected finish coat.b. Provide a two-component, fast-curing, low volatile organic compound

(VOC), metallic zinc-rich epoxy primer complying with the requirementsspecified in SSPC Paint 20 to steel members that do not receive intumescentfinish paint coating.

2. Finish Coat: See Section 09 91 00.



3. Below Grade Coating: Coal tar epoxy.4. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize steel members and fabrications specified to be

galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.a. Coating Weight: Conform with Paragraph 6.1 of ASTM A123.b. Repair areas damaged by welding, flame cutting or during handling, transport

and erection by an approved method in accordance with ASTM A780.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with the Contract Drawings and the AISCstandards referenced in Paragraph 1.03A.

B. Perform shearing, flame cutting, and chipping carefully and accurately so as not toinduce residual stress in the metal being cut.1. Flame-cut the edges of members subjected to dynamic loading either by using a

mechanically guided torch or by hand, and remove all nicks.a. Fabricate the radii of re-entrant gas-cut fillets as large as practicable, but in

no case less than ¾ inch.b. Perform flame cuttings so that the metal is not carrying stress.c. Finish the exposed edges of members that were flame-cut by hand by

grinding.2. Add additional reinforcing as required where members are cut or coped to meet

framing conditions.

C. Bolt Holes:1. Punch, drill, sub punch, sub drill, and ream holes for bolts as required in

accordance with the requirements specified in the AISC Specifications referencedin Paragraph 1.03A.

D. Holes for Other Work:1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for

passage of other work through members as shown on final approved shopdrawings.a. Ream, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surface.b. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge by burning.

2. Do not make additional openings in members not shown on the final approvedshop drawings unless approval to do so is received from the Engineer.

E. Except where welded connections are shown, use ASTM A325 bolts for shopconnections.1. Install and tighten high-strength bolts in accordance with the requirements of the

RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.2. Arrange the bolts as indicated on the Contract Drawings; or if not indicated,

arrange the bolts so heads show in areas exposed to view.3. Clearly indicate the bolt arrangements on shop drawing submittals.

F. Welding:



1. Perform all welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 except as modified herein.2. Use a welding procedure and sequence of welding that prevents needless

distortion and minimize stresses.a. If it is necessary to straighten transverse warpage of flanges, use controlled

heating along outside face.b. Allow for expected weld shrinkage when laying out and assembling members

in the shop.c. Trim members to size only when most or all of welding has been completed.

3. Weld tabs for temporary bracing and safety cabling at points concealed from viewin the completed structure.

G. Properly mark and match-mark materials to facilitate handling and field assembly.1. Mark each member with its weight.2. Match-mark all shop pre-fitted members.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Cleaning:1. After fabrication, clean heavy deposits of oil and grease from unpainted steel

surfaces in accordance with AISC’s Code of Standard Practice.

B. Shop Priming:1. Surface Preparation:

a. Clean the surfaces in accordance with the requirements of SSPC-SP 3 PowerTool Cleaning following the SSPC Painting Manual.

2. Primer:a. Immediately after surface preparation, apply the fabricator’s standard rust-

inhibiting primer according to the manufacturer’s instructions at a rate asrecommended in the SSPC Painting Manual to provide a dry film thicknessof not less than 1.5 mils.

b. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, andexposed surfaces.

c. For members to receive intumescent paint, apply a primer compatible withthe finish coat.

3. Refer to additional requirements specified in Section 09 91 00.

C. Finish Coat:1. Apply finish coats of paint to structural steel in accordance with the requirements

of Section 09 91 00.

D. Galvanizing:1. For structural steel specified to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize the steel

members and fabrications in accordance with ASTM A123 and to the thicknessesspecified therein.

2. Repair galvanized areas damaged by welding and flame cutting and duringhandling, transport, and erection by using an approved repair method inaccordance with ASTM A780.



E. Do not paint the following surfaces of structural steel members:1. Surfaces that are within ½ inch of the toe of a weld prior to welding.


A. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests by anIndependent Testing and Inspection Agency in the mill and shop.1. Provide the Approved Agency with access to the places where structural steel

work is being fabricated or produced so the required inspections and testing canbe performed before the work is shipped.

B. Shop-Bolted Connections:1. The Approved Agency will inspect and test the shop-bolted structural steel

connections in accordance with the AISC specifications listed in Paragraph1.03A.a. Verify proper fastening components were used and the connected elements

were fabricated properly.b. For slip-critical and pretension connections, test 2 bolts per connection.

2. Acceptance Criteria:a. Verify proper fastening component used.b. Verify proper fabrication of connected elements.

C. Shop Welding:1. The Approved Agency will verify all welders and welding materials being

supplied under this Contract are properly certified and will conduct theinspections and tests specified.a. Inspect and test shop welds made during fabrication of structural steel

assemblies by performing a visual inspection of the full length of all weldsand inspecting and testing shop-welded connections in accordance with therequirements of ASTM E164 and the following:1) Ultrasonically inspect and test the entire length of all full penetration

welds in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E164.2) Inspect the entire length of fillet welds in accordance with the

requirements for the Magnetic Particle Method specified in ASTM E709and the following:a) For all other fillet weld locations, test a minimum of 5 percent of the

welds.b. Record both the type and location of all defects found in the work, and record

the work required and the work performed to correct deficiencies.2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Verify weld materials, locations, and types agree with ConstructionDocuments.

b. Verify welds comply with AWS D1.1.

D. Submit mill test reports certifying the material provided conforms to the appropriateASTM specification.



E. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not complywith specified requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Before proceeding to erect the structural steel, verify the elevations of concrete andmasonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages are in compliance with theContract Documents and ready to receive the work of this Section.

B. Ensure anchor rods and other embedded items, that vary in location from thedimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, are positioned within the toleranceslisted in the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

C. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.1. Immediately report errors in the structural steel, whether resulting from shop

fabrication or deformation resulting from handling or transportation, which willprevent the proper erection and fitting of parts.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keepstructural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loadsand loads equal in intensity to design loads.1. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety.

B. Erect steel structures plumb in the location and at the elevations shown on theContract Drawings and in accordance with the match marks, pertinent regulations, andthe AISC standards referenced in Paragraph 1.03A.1. Do not field cut or alter structural members without the approval of the Engineer.2. Allow concrete foundations to cure for a minimum of 14 days before tightening

anchor rod hardware.a. Do not tighten anchor rod hardware using impact torque wrenches.

C. Bolted Connections:1. For connections using high-strength steel bolts, conform to requirements of the

AISC Specifications referenced in Paragraph 1.03A.a. Assemble high-strength bolted parts so they fit solidly together when

assembled.1) Remove scale, dirt, and other defects liable to prevent proper seating

when joint surfaces are assembled, including joint surfaces adjacent towashers.

2) Do not use gaskets or any other interposed compressible materials.3) Only use drift pins for bringing members into position, not to enlarge or

distort holes.2. Ensure holes are not enlarged and the metal in the vicinity of the holes is not

disturbed by drifting during assembly.



a. Enlarge holes to admit bolts for connections only if approved by theEngineer.1) Make the enlargement by reaming and not by burning.2) Avoid hand reaming.

3. As erection progresses, install sufficient bolts in the work to resist dead loads,wind loads, and erection loads.a. Arrange and insert the bolts so bolt heads show in areas exposed to view.b. Perform permanent bolting when sufficient alignment has been completed to

ensure as much of the structure as possible will be supported by suchfastening work.

4. For bearing-type (snug-tightened) connections, tighten the ASTM A325 bolts to asnug tight condition by either applying a few impacts from an impact wrench orthe full effort of an ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench so all plies of theconnected material have been brought into snug contact.

D. Field Welding:1. Provide only where approved by the Engineer or as indicated in the approved

shop drawings.a. Securely tighten erection bolts used in welded construction and leave them in

place.b. Field welding rigid frame flange connection plates on columns may only be

performed if required for ease of erection and must be clearly indicated onthe approved shop drawings and approved by the Engineer.

E. After the supported members have been aligned, properly positioned, and the anchornuts have been tightened, dry-pack the entire area under bearing plates with non-shrink non-metallic grout.1. Do not place concrete on steel structure until the grout is in place and anchor bolts

have been tightened.

F. Prior to installing metal decking, clean all heavy rust, mill scale, dirt, or other materialfrom the unpainted top flanges of supporting beams.


A. An Independent Testing and Inspection Agency (Approved Agency) shall be engagedto inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections, to perform thespecified tests, and interpret the test results; to confirm that the structure is square,plumb, and level in accordance with AISC tolerances and to prepare and submit testreports for this work.

B. Field-Bolted Connections:1. The Approved Agency will inspect and test the field-bolted structural steel

connections in accordance with the AISC specifications listed in Paragraph 1.03Aand as specified.a. Verify proper fastening components were used and the connected elements

were fabricated properly.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



b. Slip-critical and pretension connections, test 2 bolts per connection.2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Verify connections comply with the requirements specified in AISC andRCSC specifications.

C. Field Welding:1. The Approved Agency will verify all welders and welding materials in the field

are properly certified and will conduct the inspections and tests specified.a. Inspect and test field welds, in accordance with the requirements of AWS

D1.1, made during erection of structural steel assemblies by performing avisual inspection of the full length of all welds and the following:1) Ultrasonically inspect and test the entire length of full penetration welds

in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E164:2) Inspect the entire length of fillet welds in accordance with the

requirements for the Magnetic Particle Method specified in ASTM E709and the following:a) For [beam connection plates (angles) welded to plates embedded in

concrete], test all welds.b) For all other fillet weld locations, test a minimum of 10 percent of

the welds.b. Record both the type and location of all defects found in the work, and record

the work required and the work performed to correct deficiencies.2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Verify welds comply with the requirements specified in AWS and ASTMspecifications will be acceptable.

b. Verify welders and welding materials are properly certified.


A. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and test reports have

indicated to be not in compliance with requirements.2. Additional tests performed by the Approved Agency to reconfirm any

noncompliant original work and verify compliance of corrected work will beperformed at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas whereshop paint is abraded; prime them with paint of the same quality as that used for theshop coat in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 09 91 00.1. Repair galvanized areas damaged by welding and flame cutting and during

handling, transport, and erection by using an approved repair method inaccordance with ASTM A780.

C. Repair galvanized areas damaged by welding and flame cutting and during handling,transport, and erection by using an approved repair method in accordance with ASTMA780.



3.05 NON-CONFORMING WORK

A. Non-Conforming Work1. Promptly remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified

requirements.a. Correct deficiencies in the Work that inspections and test reports have

indicated to be not in compliance with requirements.2. Record the work required and the work performed to correct deficiencies in field

welding.3. Depending on the amount of non-conforming work encountered, the amount of

testing required may be modified.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Section includes individual miscellaneous metal items as specifiedin this Section and in various other Sections of the Specifications, (except the otherDivision 05 Sections), and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Sections:1. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.2. Individual miscellaneous metal items as specified in various other Sections of the

general construction Specifications.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. American Institute of Steel Construction:1. AISC Specifications, Manuals, Technical and Fabricator Publications, Design

Guides.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials:1. ASTM A36, Structural Steel.2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated Welded and Seamless.3. ASTM A90, Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.4. ASTM A123, Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip.5. ASTM A143, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-

Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for DetectingEmbrittlement.

6. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron andSteel Hardware.

7. ASTM A167, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheetand Strip.

8. ASTM A276, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.9. ASTM A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.10. ASTM A320, Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service.11. ASTM A325, High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.12. ASTM A384, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion

During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.



13. ASTM A385, Standard Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (HotDip).

14. ASTM A480, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-RolledStainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

15. ASTM A489, Carbon Steel Eyebolts.16. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.17. ASTM A540, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Special

Applications.18. ASTM A563, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.19. ASTM A569, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent),

Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality.20. ASTM A603, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope.21. ASTM A668, Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use.22. ASTM A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of

Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings.23. ASTM B86, Standard Specification for Zinc-Alloy Die Castings.24. ASTM B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically

Deposited on Iron and Steel.25. ASTM C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete.26. ASTM D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.27. ASTM D2566, Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage of Cured

Thermosetting Casting Resins During Cure.28. ASTM F436, Hardened Steel Washers.29. ASTM F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi

Yield Strength.

D. American Welding Society:1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel.2. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.3. AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.

E. Federal Specifications:1. Fed. Spec. FF-S-92a, Screws, Machine: Slotted, Cross Recessed or Hexagon

Head.2. Fed. Spec. FF-S-107 C, Screws, Tapping and Drive.3. Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw

(Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) Group II (Shield, Expansion Bolt Anchor) Type 4(Wedge expansion anchors) Class 1 (One piece steel expander with cone taperintegral with stud).

4. Fed. Spec. FF-B-588 C, Bolts, Toggle and Expansion Sleeve (Screw).

F. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers:1. NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual.

G. Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation Specifications:



1. SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.2. SSPC-SP10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Fabrications are those metal items not forming part of the building structuralsupport system, or metal items providing direct bearing surfaces for the structuralsupport system. (The structural support system being defined as the roof and floorsupport system, and certain wall support systems as shown.)

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Anchor and Fastener Design Requirements:1. Sizing: Provide anchors and fasteners for product installations of such diameters

and lengths as recommended by the particular product manufacturer involved.a. When sizing recommendations are not obtainable, size fasteners in the largest

diameter that will pass through bolt holes as provided in the products foranchoring and fastening purposes.

2. Safety Factor: Determine the lengths of anchors and fasteners based on substratematerials at points of anchor installation and to provide a safety factor of four toone.

3. Materials Compatibility: Where anchors and fasteners contact dissimilar metalproducts, provide anchors and fasteners of compatible material so that neither willhave a deteriorating action on the other.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Metal fabrications shop drawings are to identify the detail asindicated on the project Drawings and be complete as to the detail of the product andlocation in the project, the size and weights of members, the methods of joiningvarious components, the quantity, finish, the location and type of anchors andnecessary measurements.1. Provide easy-to-read markings on shop and erection drawings for shop assemblies

which require markings for erection identification.2. Note on shop drawings variations in tolerances or clearances between various

products.3. Use standard welding symbols of the American Welding Society on shop

drawings.4. Furnish setting diagrams, templates, and directions for the installation of metal

fabrications.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature and specificationscovering manufactured products specified herein.1. Include complete information necessary for fabrication and erection of the

specified products.2. Indicate size and weight of shapes, type and location of shop and field

connections; the type, size and extent of welds and welding sequence when



required. Use standard welding symbols of the American Welding Society in shop drawings.

3. Submit product data on type of finish paint system for both shop painting andfield touch-up painting.

4. Submit current Approved ICC Evaluation Reports for all expansion and adhesiveanchors.

5. Submit anchor installer’s certification of training completion.


A. Welder Qualifications: Welds to be made only by welders, tackers and weldingoperators who are currently qualified by tests as prescribed in the Structural WeldingCode, AWS D1.1 of the American Welding Society to perform the type of workrequired.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage: For outside storage, store steel products above the ground surface onplatforms, skids, blocking or similar supports.1. Protect steel products from exposure to conditions that produce rust on the

product.2. Store steel beams with webs vertical.

B. Delivery and Handling: Deliver and handle steel items so no parts are bent, broken orotherwise damaged and avoid damage to other adjoining and surrounding material andwork during handling and erection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL

A. Miscellaneous Metal (Carbon Steel), Non-Architectural/Structural Applications:1. Steel Shapes: Material conforming to ASTM A572, Grade 50.2. Channel, Angles, Plates and Bars: Material conforming to ASTM A36.3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold formed structural tubing.4. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

B. Bollards (Guard Posts): Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53 andconcrete filled with 3,000 psi concrete conforming to the requirements as specified inSection 03 30 00.

2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Miscellaneous Screws and Bolts:1. Machine Screws: AISI Type 304, and Type 316 where indicated on the

Drawings, stainless steel conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-S-92a.



2. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Stainless steel conforming to ASTMA320 Grade B8, AISI Type 304, and Grade B8M, AISI Type 316 where indicatedon the Drawings.

3. Standard Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Carbon steel conforming to ASTMA540.

4. Toggle Bolts: Conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-B-588 C.5. Self-Tapping Drive Screws: Conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-S-107C.6. U-Bolts: Carbon steel with National Coarse Threads and zinc coated finish

conforming to ASTM A489.7. U-Bolts: ASTM A320 Grade B8, AISI Type 304 stainless steel with National

Coarse Threads.8. Eyebolts: Carbon steel with National Coarse Threads and zinc coated finish

conforming to ASTM A489.9. Eyebolts: Drop forged from 18/8 Type 304 stainless steel with National Coarse

Threads.10. Galvanized Wire Rope: Conforming to ASTM A603.

B. High-Strength Structural Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers:1. Conforming to ASTM A325 Specification for Bolts.2. Conforming to ASTM A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.3. Conforming to ASTM F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers for Use

with High-Strength Bolts.

C. Headed Stud Type Connectors (Nelson Studs): Cold finished carbon steel conformingto ASTM A668, Class Designation B; similar to Nelson Stud Welding Systems, orequal.

D. Anchor Rods (Pre-Set): Where anchor rods are indicated or required as pre-set incast-in-place concrete, provide anchor bolts of headed (heavy hexnut) or bearing platedesign. Provide nuts and washers, and leveling nuts where indicated on the Drawings,all in materials matching the rod.1. Stainless Steel Anchor Rods: Stainless steel conforming to ASTM A320, Grade

B8, AISI Type 303 or Type 304, and Grade B8M, AISI Type 316 where indicatedon the Drawings.

2. Standard Anchor: Conforming to ASTM A307 for bolts and ASTM A563 fornuts and washers.

3. Steel Anchor Rods: Shapes as indicated, ASTM F1554 Grade 36.4. Galvanized Anchor Bolts: Conforming to ASTM A307 for bolts, nuts and

washers; and ASTM A153 and ASTM B695 for galvanizing.

E. Drilled-In Toggle Type Anchors and Fasteners: Use for applications in masonry andprecast concrete hollow-core structure components.1. Anchors: Provide anchors designed to accept both machine bolts or threaded

rods. Such anchors to consist of an expansion shield and expander nut containedinside the shield. Expander nut fabricated and designed to climb the bolt or rodthread and simultaneously expand the shield as soon as the threaded item, whilebeing tightened, reaches and bears against the shield bottom.



2. Shield Body: Consisting of four legs, the inside of each tapered toward shieldbottom (or nut end). The end of one leg is elongated and turned across shieldbottom. Outer surface of shield body ribbed for grip-action.a. Expander Nut: Square design with sides tapered inward from bottom to top.b. Material: Die cast Zamac No. 3 zinc alloy of 41,000 psi minimum tensile

strength. Shield and nut made in conformance with S.A.E. 903, ASTM B86.3. Fasteners: Machine bolts conforming to S.A.E. Grade 2, for use with above

anchors; nuts and washers conforming to ASTM A563.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. U.S.E. Diamond, Inc.; FORWAY System.b. Or Approved Equal.

F. Steel and Stainless Steel s Drilled-In Expansion Anchors and Fasteners: Provideanchors that meet ACI 318 Appendix D requirements for cracked concrete and have acurrent approved ICC Evaluation Report. Use for applications in cast-in-placeconcrete and solid precast concrete structure components.1. Standard Anchor/Fastener: UL Listed and one-piece stud (bolt) with integral

expansion wedges, nut and washer, and meeting physical requirements of Fed.Spec. FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1.

2. Stainless Steel Anchor/Fastener: UL Listed one-piece stud (bolt) with integralexpansion wedges, nut and washer, and meeting physical requirements of Fed.Spec. FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Stud of AISI Type 303 or Type 304stainless steel and nut and washer of AISI Type 316 stainless steel.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Hilti Corporation; Kwik-Bolt TZ www.hilti.comb. Simpson Strong Tie, Strong-Bolt.c. Or Approved Equal

G. Steel and Stainless Steel Undercut Anchors: Provide self-undercutting anchors withundercutting teeth which expands by tightening the nut. Anchors shall meet ACI 318Appendix D requirements for cracked concrete and have approved ICC-ES EvaluationReport.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hilti HDA Undercut Anchor; www.hilti.comb. Simpson Strong Tie; Torq-Cut, www.simpsonanchors.comc. Or Approved Equal

H. Adhesive Anchoring System: Provide anchors that meet ACI 318 Appendix Drequirements for cracked concrete and have a current approved ICC EvaluationReport. Adhesive anchor setting system is to be composed of anchors and fasteners asspecified, and a self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both epoxycomponents in the proper mixing ratio. Provide system designed for compatibilitywith hollow or solid base materials.1. Standard Anchor Rod Assembly: Chamfered end threaded stud rod of ASTM

A307 steel with nut and washer. Stud size as indicated on Drawings.2. Stainless Steel Anchor/Fastener: Chamfered end threaded stud rod of AISI Type

304 stainless steel, with nut and washer of AISI Type 316 stainless steel.

http://www.hilti.com/

http://www.hilti.com/

http://www.simpsonanchors.com/



3. Adhesive Cartridge: Provide a dual cartridge containing both hardener and resinand dispenses from the dual cartridge through a static mixing nozzle.a. Two-component, 100 percent solid, non-sag paste, insensitive to moisture

and meeting requirements of ASTM C881, Type IV, Grade 3. Class A, B,and C. Shrinkage during cure is limited to .00051 inch per inch maximum inaccordance with ASTM D2566. Compressive strength of 10,300 psiminimum in accordance with ASTM D695.

b. Inject the pre-mixed adhesive directly into the prepared anchor hole andinsert anchor/fastener in the adhesive in accordance with the adhesivemanufacturer’s installation instructions.

c. Only injection tools and static mixing nozzles as recommended bymanufacturer shall be used.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Hilti Corporation; HIT RE 500 V3b. Hilti HIT-HY 200; Max-SDc. Simpson Strong Tie; Simpson XPd. Or Approved Equal.

I. Hammer drive-type and explosive charge drive-type anchors and fastener systems notacceptable. Lead shields, plastic-inserts, fiber-inserts, and drilled-in plastic sleeve/naildrive systems also not acceptable.

J. Welding Electrodes: Conforming to the requirements of Table 4.1.1 of AWS D1.1 forapplicable base metals and welding process.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General Requirements: Insofar as possible, shop fit and shop assemble miscellaneousmetal fabrications ready for installation.1. Make fabrications square, plumb, straight and true and in conformity to the design

requirements indicated on the Drawings.2. Fabricate in accordance with details, approved shop drawings and referenced

standards.3. Make cuts true and smooth, and free from excessive burrs or ragged breaks.

Oxygen cutting of metal fabrications is not allowed.4. Make metal fabrications to be free of surface discoloration, scratches, burrs,

dents, warping and other fabrication defects.5. Make drilled and punched holes true and clean and free of drift, which may distort

the metal. Remove drill and punch chips between contacting surfaces beforeassembly. Burned holes are not acceptable.

B. Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements.1. Remove weld spatter and grind sharp corners and edges to a smooth surface.



2.04 FABRICATION FINISHES

A. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize steel products which are indicated on theDrawings or specified to be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with thefollowing standards: ASTM A123; ASTM A143; ASTM A384; ASTM A385.1. Control quality of galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A90.

B. Zinc-Rich Coating: A liquid compound containing 95 percent zinc in the dried film,and a compound that bonds to properly prepared iron, steel and aluminum surfacesthrough electrochemical action.1. The cured zinc-rich coating imparts cathodic action against corrosion in the

presence of moisture. When the coating is damaged it forms an insoluble zinc salton the exposed area.

2. Provide a single packaged, pre-mixed, liquid organic zinc compound conformingto Fed. Spec. DOD-P-21035A.

3. Acceptable Manufacturer:a. ZRC Worldwide; ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound.b. Or equal.

C. Dissimilar Surface Isolation Material: Where aluminum materials contact dissimilarsurfaces, provide an isolation material product as specifically required by thealuminum material or aluminum item manufacturer, or of the following materials asthe manufacturer approves:1. Aluminum to Metal Contact: Zinc Chromate Primer; conforming to Fed. Spec.

TT-P-645B.2. Aluminum to Concrete Contact: Mineral filled coal tar pitch; conforming to

Tnemec 46-465, MAB or Sherwin Williams.

2.05 SHOP PAINTING

A. Surface Preparation and painting in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to thepoint where this work may properly commence.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Verify measurements in field before fabrication.

3.03 ERECTION

A. Erect and install miscellaneous metal and metal fabrications in accordance withdetails, approved shop drawings and referenced standards aligning straight, plumb andlevel within a tolerance of one in 200.



B. Provide suitable temporary braces and stays to hold metal fabrications in position untilpermanently secured.

C. Draw threaded bolt connections up tight with lock washers or other means to preventloosening. Screw fasteners in exposed or finished surfaces may be slot or phillipshead type, but in either case, screws must be countersunk design.

D. Erect miscellaneous structural steel in accordance with the Drawings, pertinentregulations and referenced AISC standards.

3.04 ANCHOR AND FASTENER INSTALLATION

A. Draw threaded connections up tight with lock washers or other means to preventloosening. Screw type fasteners installed in exposed finished surfaces may be slothead or phillips head type, but in either case, use screws of countersunk design.

B. Drilled-In Expansion Anchor Installation: Install expansion anchors in strictaccordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the following.1. Drilling Holes: Use rotary hammer type drill and make drill holes to the required

diameter and depth as consistent with anchor manufacturer's instructions for sizeof anchors being installed.

2. Minimum Embedment: Embed expansion anchors to 6.5 bolt diameters, unlessotherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Drilled-In Adhesive Anchor Installation: Install adhesive anchors in strict accordancewith manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the following.1. Do not use adhesive anchor system for overhead applications.2. Drilling Holes: Use rotary hammer type drill and make drill holes to the required

diameter and depth as consistent with anchor manufacturer's instructions for sizeof anchors being installed.a. Prior to setting cartridge and anchor stud, clean drilled holes free of loose

material. Clean holes by blowing from the back of the borehole with oil-freecompressed air(min. 90 psi at 3.5 CFM), fully retracting the air extension 2times. Brush 2 times with properly sized round steel brush. Blow again withcompressed air 2 times or until return air stream is free of noticeable dust.

3. Anchor Rod Installation: Following cartridge installation in prepared drill holes,set anchor rod to the required depth. Set anchor rods truly perpendicular (normal)to the base plate of item being anchored.

4. Minimum Embedment Table:



Adhesive Anchor Diam. (Inches) 3/8 l/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 l

Embedment Depth (Inches) 4 5 6 7 8 10

3.05 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. General Requirements: Field paint bolt heads and nuts, field welds and areas withintwo inches of welds and touch up abrasions in the shop coat.

B. Painting: Surface Preparation and painting in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

C. Galvanizing Repair: Repair galvanized coating blemishes, scars, welding damage, andother such defects in accordance with ASTM A780 (Annex A2). Use Zinc-RichCoating as specified previously.1. Surface preparation for non-immersion service is to equal SSPC-SP6.

D. Surface preparation for immersion service is to equal SSPC-SP10.

END OF SECTION

Hagerstown Community College 7/21/2020ARCC Building HVAC Renovation Issued for Bid

Contract No. HCC21002 FINISH CARPENTRY06 20 00 - 1

SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Finish Carpentry Items: Interior wood trim on the sides and bottom of each newthrough-penetration duct opening in exterior masonry walls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 91 00 - Painting: Painting of finsh carpentry items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress;2015.


A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 8 inch long. Label with wood species andgrade.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specifiedin this section with minimum three years of experience.


A. Deliver factory-fabricated units to project site in original packages, containers orbundles bearing brand name and identification.

B. Store finish carpentry items inside, in a dry, well-ventilated area not exposed to heat orsunlight.

C. Protect from moisture damage.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



D. Handle materials and products to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Interior Woodwork Items:1. Miscellaneous Trim: Hardwood; prepare for paint finish.

2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Hardwood Lumber: Poplar, maple, or white birch species, plain sawn, maximummoisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, No. 1 Common or better grade.1. Grading: In accordance with NHLA G-101 Grading Rules; www.nhla.org.

2.03 FASTENINGS

A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit attachment of miscellaneous wood trim to masonry;concealed and countersunk.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: See Section 09 91 00 - Painting..

B. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. Alternatively, providewood plugs of same species as trim.

2.05 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS

A. Finishing: Field finished as specified in Section 09 91 00.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Plane wood trim thickness to align with exposed face of vertical leg on steel lintel at topof opening.

B. Ease exposed edges of trim.

C. Cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trimfor site cutting.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

B. Install trim with screws at 12 inch on center.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand worksmooth.

B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 91 00.

C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact withcementitious materials.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 FIRESTOPPING07 84 00 - 1

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Firestopping of through-penetrations where new utilities are installed through interiorwalls/partitions and in elevated floors. Utilites may include pipes (insulated oruninsulated), conduits, cabling. Scope includes:1. Provide minimum 1-hour rated firestopping at penetrations through elevated floors.2. Provide minimum 2-hour rated firestopping at penetrations through interior

partitions between the Mechanical Room and other interior spaces.3. Provide minimum 1-hour rated firestopping at penetrations through all other

interior partitions.

B. Contractor shall prepare a firestopping schedule and propose an appropriatefirestopping assembly for each different pentrant and through-penetration condition.


A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Cutting and patching; sealing of through-penetrations.


A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems;2013a (Reapproved 2017).

B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.

C. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.

D. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetratedassembly, and firestopping test or design number proposed for use.



C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's firestopping details corresponding to theproposed designs listed in the Schedule of Firestopping (prior paragraph) and data onproduct characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installationinstructions.

E. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company or personnel specializing in performing the work ofthis section and:1. Trained by manufacturer.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field verify construction and materials used for existing interior partition and elevatedfloor assemblies. Include on schedule of firestopping.

B. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature andconditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during,and for three days after installation of materials.

C. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Firestopping Manufacturers:1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.2. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.3. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements.

B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide typeof materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.



2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS

A. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTME814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to or greater than the fire rating ofpenetrated assembly.1. Listing by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or UL (FRD) in their certification

directories will be considered evidence of successful testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials thatcould adversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.

C. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material from leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Owner's designated representativeand authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Repair or replace penetration firestopping and joints at locations where inspectionresults indicate firestopping or joints do not meet specified requirements.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.



3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 JOINT SEALANTS07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.

B. Joint backings and accessories.


A. Section 13 34 19.13 - Minor Alterations to Existing Metal Building Systems: Sealantsapplied internally or externally as part of the alterations to the metal building system.


A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-TypeSealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015.

B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.

C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.

D. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by JointSealants; 2018.

E. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use withCold Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2018.

F. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of InstalledWeatherproofing Sealant Joints; 2019.

G. SWRI (VAL) - SWR Institute Validated Products Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for eachproduct to be used, that includes the following.1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness,

cure time, and color availability.2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.



3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it iscompatible.

4. Substrates the product should not be used on.5. Substrates for which use of primer is required.6. Substrates for which laboratory adhesion and/or compatibility testing is required.7. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended

backing materials and tools.8. Sample product warranty.9. Certification by manufacturer indicating that product complies with specification

requirements.10. SWRI Validation: Provide currently available sealant product validations as listed

by SWRI (VAL) for specified sealants.11. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet

for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installationinstructions, and recommended tools.

12. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submitmanufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection.

C. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start ofinstallation.

D. Field Quality Control Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start of installation.

E. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Reports: Submit filled out Preinstallation FieldAdhesion Test Reports log within 10 days after completion of tests; include bagged testsamples and photographic records.

F. Field Quality Control Log: Submit filled out log for each length or instance of sealantinstalled, within 10 days after completion of inspections/tests; include bagged testsamples and photographic records, if any.

G. Installer's Qualification Statement.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this sectionand with at least three years of documented experience.

B. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Plan: Include destructive field adhesion testing ofone sample of each combination of sealant type and substrate, except interior acryliclatex sealants, and include the following for each tested sample.1. Identification of testing entity.2. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Log Form: Include the following data fields,

with known information filled out.a. Substrate; if more than one type of substrate is involved in a single joint,

provide two entries on form, for testing each sealant substrate side separately.



b. Test date.c. Sealant used.d. Test method used.e. Date of installation of field sample to be tested.f. Date of test.g. Copy of test method documents.h. Age of sealant upon date of testing.i. Test results, modeled after the sample form in the test method document.j. Indicate use of photographic record of test.

C. Field Quality Control Plan:1. Visual inspection of entire length of sealant joints.2. Non-destructive field adhesion testing of sealant joints, except interior acrylic latex

sealants.a. For each different sealant and substrate combination, allow for one test every

12 inches in the first 10 linear feet of joint and one test every 24 inchesthereafter.

b. If any failures occur in the first 10 linear feet, continue testing at 12 inchesintervals at no extra cost to Owner.

3. Field testing entity's qualifications.4. Field Quality Control Log Form: Show same data fields as on Preinstallation Field

Adhesion Test Log, with known information filled out and lines for multiple testsper sealant/substrate combinations; include visual inspection and specified fieldtesting; allow for possibility that more tests than minimum specified may benecessary.

D. Field Adhesion Test Procedures:1. Allow sealants to fully cure as recommended by manufacturer before testing.2. Have a copy of the test method document available during tests.3. Take photographs or make video records of each test, with joint identification

provided in the photos/videos; for example, provide small erasable whiteboardpositioned next to joint.

4. Record the type of failure that occurred, other information required by test method,and the information required on the Field Quality Control Log.

5. When performing destructive tests, also inspect the opened joint for properinstallation characteristics recommended by manufacturer, and report anydeficiencies.

6. Deliver the samples removed during destructive tests in separate sealed plasticbags, identified with project, location, test date, and test results, to Owner.

7. If any combination of sealant type and substrate does not show evidence ofminimum adhesion or shows cohesion failure before minimum adhesion, reportresults to Architect.



E. Non-Destructive Field Adhesion Test: Test for adhesion in accordance with ASTMC1521, using Nondestructive Spot Method.1. Record results on Field Quality Control Log.

F. Destructive Field Adhesion Test: Test for adhesion in accordance with ASTM C1521,using Destructive Tail Procedure.1. Sample: At least 18 inches long.2. Minimum Elongation Without Adhesive Failure: Consider the tail at rest, not

under any elongation stress; multiply the stated movement capability of the sealantin percent by two; then multiply 1 inch by that percentage; if adhesion failureoccurs before the "1 inch mark" is that distance from the substrate, the test hasfailed.

3. If either adhesive or cohesive failure occurs prior to minimum elongation, takenecessary measures to correct conditions and re-test; record each modification toproducts or installation procedures.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achievewatertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS

A. Scope:1. Exterior Joints: Include the following items.

a. Joints between new ducts and new through-penetration opening trim inexisting metal building exterior walls.

b. Joints between new ducts and steel lintels at new through-penetration openingsin existing masonry.

c. Joints between new ducts and masonry at new through-penetration openings.d. Joints between new pipe sleeves and masonry at new through-penetration

openings.e. Joints around the edges of new pipe penetration wall seals in existing metal

building exterior walls.2. Interior Joints: Include the following items.

a. Joints between new ducts and new through-penetration opening trim inexisting metal building exterior walls.



b. Joints between new ducts and steel lintels at new through-penetration openingsin existing masonry.

c. Joints between new ducts and masonry at new through-penetration openings.d. Joints between new pipe sleeves and masonry at new through-penetration

openings.3. Do not seal the following types of joints under this Section 07 92 00:

a. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product tobe sealed.

b. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.

B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL

A. Sealants and Primers: Provide products with levels of volatile organic compound(VOC) content that do not exceed applicable federal, State, and local requirements.

B. Definition: "Nonsag" sealants allow application in joints on vertical surfaces withoutsagging or slumping.

2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expectedto withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum.2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored cast stone, natural

stone, or precast concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248.3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.4. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.6. Cure Type: Single-component, neutral moisture curing.7. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F.8. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Company:consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.

b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle.c. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.d. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.

B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component; notexpected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.



1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F.5. Manufacturers:

a. Master Builders Solutions by BASF:www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us/en-us/#sle.

b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle.c. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.d. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.e. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealantmanufacturers for specific application.1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330;

Type O - Open Cell Polyurethane.2. Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width.

B. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesiveresidue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.

C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealantmanufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

D. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.

C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.

D. Preinstallation Adhesion Testing: Install a sample for each test location indicated in thetest plan.1. Test each sample as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article.2. Notify Architect of date and time that tests will be performed, at least seven days in

advance.



3. Record each test on Preinstallation Adhesion Test Log as indicated.4. If any sample fails, review products and installation procedures, consult

manufacturer, or take whatever other measures are necessary to ensure adhesion;re-test in a different location; if unable to obtain satisfactory adhesion, report toArchitect.

5. After completion of tests, remove remaining sample material and prepare joint fornew sealant installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due tosealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation ofsurfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unlessotherwise indicated:1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.

D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, andwithout getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.

E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer'srecommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curingperiod, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.

F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove maskingtape immediately after tooling sealant surface.


A. Perform field quality control inspection/testing as specified in PART 1 underQUALITY ASSURANCE article.



B. Non-Destructive Adhesion Testing: If there are any failures in first 100 linear feet,notify Architect immediately.

C. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures asindicated for original installation.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PAINTING09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints.

C. Materials for backpriming woodwork.

D. Scope: Paint the following surfaces exposed to view on building exterior and interior,unless fully factory-finished or otherwise indicated.1. New steel lintels and through bolts.2. New structural steel framing.3. New metal framing and other metal components at roof opening infill patches.4. New galvanized steel ductwork and related metal support assemblies.5. New pipe sleeves.6. New pipes/pipe insulation/jackets.7. New conduits, boxes, and other components of electrical or communication

raceway systems and their support assemblies.8. Interior wood trim at new return air grille openings.9. Patched and repaired concrete masonry and gypsum board.

E. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts

of equipment.5. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.


A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Shop-primed items.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

C. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving: Painted pavement markings.



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. "Exposed to View": Not concealed within other construction, above continuousceilings, or below grade.


A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards forArchitectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

B. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).

C. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the followinginformation for each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product

category (e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include

description of each system.

C. Samples for Initial Selection of Colors: Submit two paper chip sample sets, minimum 2by 2 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surfacefinishing product scheduled.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inchesin size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.

E. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limitsspecified.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where eachproduct/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted andfinished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same productrun, store where directed.

3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of workspecified with minimum three years experience.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number,brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colordesignation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and amaximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer'sinstructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside thetemperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, includingtesting of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products, minor

exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using thespecified procedures for substitutions.

B. Paints:1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company:

www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.2. Benjamin Moore: www.benjaminmoore.com.3. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushingproperties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicatedunder conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturerbased on testing and field experience.

3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats,one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's workfrom a single production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless suchprocedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements

specified in the following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission

Standards for Architectural Coatings.b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint baseand water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will beselected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.

D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.2. Allow for minimum of two colors for each substrate, unless otherwise indicated,

without additional cost to Owner.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including galvanized steeland shop-primed steel.1. Primer Coat: Product and coating thickness recommended by finish coat

manufacturer for each substrate material.2. Two Finish Coats: S-W Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Gloss, B66-1500

Series (3.75-6.0 mils wet, 1.5-2.5 mils dry, each coat)

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including galvanized steeland shop-primed steel.1. Primer Coat: Product and coating thickness recommended by finish coat

manufacturer for each substrate material.2. Two Finish Coats: S-W Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-1560

Series (3.75-6.0 mils wet, 1.5-2.3 mils dry, each coat).

B. Interior Wood Surfaces:1. Primer Coat: S-W Premium Wall and Wood Primer (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry).2. Two Finish Coats: S-W Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-1560

Series (3.75-6.0 mils wet, 1.5-2.3 mils dry, each coat).

C. Interior Concrete Masonry Surfaces:1. Primer Coat: Block surfacer and coating thickness recommended by finish coat

manufacturer.2. Two Finish Coats: S-W Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-1560

Series (3.75-6.0 mils wet, 1.5-2.3 mils dry, each coat), or other sheen that mostclosely matches the existing adjacent undisturbed paint sheen.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths,sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of paintedsurfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properlyprepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Reportany condition that may potentially effect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving thebest result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects.

D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, lightfixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.

E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodiumphosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Masonry:1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or

alkalinity of surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted inmanufacturer's written instructions. Allow to dry.

2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.

H. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil.

I. Galvanized Surfaces:1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to

SSPC-SP 1.

J. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.Prime bare steel surfaces.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according toSSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant isapplied.



C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry beforenext coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, applyadditional coats until complete hide is achieved.

F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particlesjust prior to applying next coat.

H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittingsremoved prior to finishing.


A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for fieldinspection.

B. Inspect and test questionable coated areas in accordance with paint manufacturer'srecommendations.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metalcontainers, and remove daily from site.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING METAL BUILDING SYSTEM13 34 19.13 - 1

SECTION 13 34 19.13

MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING METAL BUILDING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cutting, patching, and altering existing metal building wall system to createweathertight framed and trimmed through-penetration openings for ducts.

B. Cutting and sealing existing metal building wall system for new pipe and conduitpenetrations.

C. Patching and repair of existing metal building system roof openings after removal ofmechanical equipment and through-penetration ductwork. Existing metal building roofhas a newer, single-ply membrane roofing system overlay. Coordinate patching ofmetal building roof openings with overlaid membrane roof opening patching.


A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: New structural steel tube framing oninside face of exterior metal building wall system.

B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between accessory components andwall system.


A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron andSteel Hardware; 2016a.

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a.

C. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-ZincAlloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015).

D. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with ImprovedFormability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2018.

E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.

F. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002(Ed. 2004).



1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions, fasteners.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members,connections and openings; general construction details, anchors and methods ofanchorage, and installation. Illustrate assembly sequence for exterior trim.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of precoated metal trim for each color selected (exteriorand interior), 2 by 6 inch in size illustrating color and texture of finishes.

E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement1. Include supporting data showing that manufacturer designs and fabricates metal

building system integrated components and assemblies, including but not limitedto secondary members, joints, roof and wall cladding components, trim and otherfeatures like those required for this project, specifically designed to support andtransfer loads, and is capable of designing and detailing the necessary alterationsand patches necessary for properly assembled components and repair of theexisting building shell.

F. Installer's Qualification Statement.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products ofthe types required for this project. Capable of detail design and fabrication of newcomponents for metal building assembly alterations, patching, and repair and to matchexisting components where required.1. Not less than ten years of experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this sectionwith minimum five years experience.

C. Field Verification: Prior to preparing shop drawings, field verify existing dimensions,components, materials (including base metal and finish of panels), profiles, and otherconditions pertinent to alterations. Disassemble and reassemble wall construction asnecessary.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line



C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for alterations.1. Include coverage for exterior pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat

against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading.2. Include coverage for weather tightness of new exterior trim after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ASSEMBLIES

A. Secondary Framing: Clips and cold-formed and/or hot-rolled metal framing, and otheritems detailed or required to frame new through-penetration duct openings, supportadjacent existing thermal insulation and metal wall panels, and support roof patches.

B. Alterations to Wall and Roof Systems: To the maximum extent practical, providealterations, including patches, that match the existing wall and roof system assemblies.


A. Maintain existing thermal resistance of surrounding wall where altered for newopenings and of surrounding roof where openings are in-filled and patched.

B. Alter exterior wall system for new openings in a manner that provides for the affectedwall area to withstand an imposed load of 30 psf, positive or negative, with maximumallowable deflection of 1/180 of span.

C. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wallsystem.

D. Permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stresson fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to minimum temperature rangeof 180 degrees F.

E. Size and fabricate wall trim systems free of distortion or defects detrimental toappearance or performance.

F. Patch openings remaining in roof system where exisiting mechanical and electricalconstruction is demolished and removed. Provide secondary framing for support ofmetal roof panel patches. Fabricate roof panel patches matching existing panel profiles.Design and detail patch components to integrate into roof assmbly and ensureweathertight enclosure. Coordinate with patching of overlaid membrane roof system.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. "C"-Shaped Secondary Framing Members: Provide components custom fabricatedfrom ASTM A1008/A1008M, designation SS (structural steel), of shape simlar to

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



ASTM C955 cold-formed metal studs. Match depth of existing internal wall cavitydimension. Provide minimum 2-1/2-inch wide flanges.1. Thickness: As required for local wall area structural performance, but no less than

18 gage.2. Finish: G60 galvanized in accrodance with ASTM A653/A653M.

B. Framing Connectors for Attachment of Secondary Framing Members: Formed steelsheet of thickness, finish and properties as the secondary framing members.

C. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts and washers. Hot dipgalvanized per ASTM A153/A153M. Alternatively, powder-actuated anchoragedevices may be used, upon review and approval by Owner and Engineer, forconnections to existing girts.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

2.04 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet for Panel Patches, Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings:1. Provide whichever of the following two sheet materials is compatible with the base

metal of the existing building wall and roof panels:a. Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, Designation SS

(structural steel), Grade 33 (230), with G60/Z180 coating; orb. Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M aluminum-zinc alloy coated to

AZ50/AZM150.2. The following requirements apply regardless of steel sheet type:

a. Thickness: 24 gage, minimum.b. Rolled or brake-formed to required profilesc. Exposed Finishes: Precoated enamel of modified silicone matching existing

finishes (exterior and interior are two different colors). Coordinate finishselection with Owner and review available colors on site prior to production ofsamples.

B. Insulation for Roof Opening Patches: Type, thickness, and facing to match existing.

C. Joint Seal and Closure Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type.

D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to comply with requirements ofASTM A153/A153M, finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.

E. Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric sealant with movement capability of at leastplus/minus 50 percent; 100 percent silicone; for exposed applications, match adjacentcolors as closely as possible.

F. Pipe and Conduit Penetration Wall Seals: Silicone pipe/conduit seals, selected to fitdiameters of penetrating conduits and insulated pipes, with gasketed base formable to



profile of surface to which seal assembly is attached. Complete with accessoryadhesives, clips, corrosion-resistant fasteners.1. Products: Dektite Silicone (deks.com) or Pipetite (csidesigns.com).

2.05 FABRICATION - FRAMING

A. Provide wall opening framing for new through-penetration ducts.

2.06 FABRICATION - WALL TRIM

A. Duct Opening Trim: Formed to profiles necessary to ensure capture of adjacent wallpanel edges. For exterior trim, form, fabricate, and seal to ensure drainage to exteriorwithout water penetration to wall interior.

B. Fasteners: To maintain load requirements and weather tight installation, same finish ascladding, non-corrosive type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WALLS FOR DUCT PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate duct penetration locations with HVAC trade.

B. Coordinate with structural tube steel framing work on interior side of wall, to followalterations of wall for new duct penetration openings.

C. Partially or entirely remove exterior and interior panels as necessary to alterconstruction for new through-penetration duct openings.

D. Carefully field cut existing exterior and interior metal wall panels for new openings.

E. Remove existing thermal insulation at new duct openings.

F. Erect new secondary framing members between the exterior and interior metal wallpanels. Attach jamb members to sill girt and girt above. Attach horizontal members attop and bottom opening edges to jamb members. After erection, prime abrasions.Conceal framing fasteners.

G. Reinforce cut edges of thermal insulation and capture edge of vapor retarder facing.Secure thermal insulation edges to new framing on all sides of new openings.Re-secure any wire mesh facer reinforcement.

H. Install exterior trim and reinstall and reattach exterior wall panels. Install internalclosure gaskets at edges of panels. Install non-hardening internal concealed sealantbetween components as necessary. Install silicone sealant where exposed. Fasten trim



to new framing. Coordinate and sequence assembly to ensure drainage of water toexterior.

I. Install interior trim and reinstall and reattach interior liner panels. Fasten trim to newframing.

3.02 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WALLS FOR PIPE AND CONDUIT PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate pipe penetrations with HVAC trade. Coordinate conduit penetrations withelectrical trade.

B. Carefully cut openings in the existing exterior and interior metal wall panels.

C. Carefully puncture a hole through the in-place thermal insulation with methodrecommended by insulation manufacturer to achieve the cleanest cut and to minimizedisturbance of insulation and its facing.

D. Pipe and Conduit Penetration Wall Seals: Install silicone pipe/conduit seals to fitweathertight around penetrating conduits and insulated pipes. Form, adhere, and fastengasketed base to profile of cleaned metal wall panel surface. Apply silicone sealant toperimeter edge of base unless not recommended by manufacturer.

3.03 PATCHING AND REPAIR OF EXISTING ROOF OPENINGS

A. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical demolition work and patching/repair ofoverlay membrane roof system.

B. Patch openings in roof system where existing mechanical and electrical construction isdemolished and removed. Install secondary framing for support of metal roof panelpatches. Install metal roof panel patches matching existing panel profiles, mechanicallysecured, and lapped and sealed to ensure weathertight enclosure.

C. Infill insulation at patched areas to match existing adjacent existing thermal ceilinginsulation.

D. Under Section 09 91 00, paint new, exposed metal framing and related components.

E. Patch and repair overlay membrane roofing system to match adjacent undisturbedconstruction. Refer to patching and repair general requirements in Seciton 01 73 00.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb.



B. Trim: 1/8 inch from true position.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING22 05 19 - 1

SECTION 22 05 19

METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps.

B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.


A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.

B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2014.

C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers;2014, with Editorial Revision (2017).

D. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Metal Alloy Main Case;2015.

E. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

F. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit product data for but not limited to the following items:1. Thermometers2. Pressure Gauges3. Water Meters

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components andinstrumentation.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. for additional provisions.2. Extra Pressure Gauges: One of each type and size.




A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for requiredrough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Manufacturers:1. H.O. Trerice2. Marsh Instruments3. Taylor Instrument4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.1; 4 ½-inch diameter dial with cast aluminum case,stainless steel friction type ring and glass window. 300 stainless steel rotary typemovement with stainless steel bushing.1. Scale in black figures on white background. Scale shall indicate zero to 1-1/2

times the working pressure in the system in which gauge is installed, micrometeradjustable type pointer, +/- 0.50 scale range accuracy.

2. Needle Valve: LEAD FREE brass body, seat and stem, Teflon packing and brasshandle, 2000 PSI operating pressure and 300° F. maximum operating temperature.

3. Pressure Snubber: Install to prevent radical fluctuation of movement, LEAD FREEbronze body and core ¼-inch NPT; Model No. 872.

2.02 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers:1. H.O. Trerice2. Marsh Instruments3. Taylor Instrument4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Thermometers: ASME B40.3 and ASTM E1; Adjustable angle type, lens front,magnifying tube, 9 inch cast aluminum case and ultraviolet protective, one piece clearacrylic front window, brass stem, brass thermowell.1. Scale in black figures on white background, Fahrenheit/Celsius scale. Scale

graduated so as to show system design point temperature at midpoint of scale.

C. Where insulation thickness exceeds 2-inches a longer stem shall be used with anextension neck brass separable thermowell, minimum 2-inch long extension neck.

D. Blue colored organic fluid shall be used in lieu of mercury.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide one pressure gauge per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suctionand discharge of pump. Pipe to gauge.

C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipessmaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allowclearance from insulation.

D. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normaloperating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

E. Thermometer in Piping: Provide thermometer with 3/4-inch NPT separable socket ofnoncorrosive material and with 2 3/4-inch extension neck and stem of a length to reachthe pipe centerline.

F. Pressure Gauges in Piping: Provide pressure gauge with 1/4-inch NPT separable socketof noncorrosive material and with 1/4-inch brass nipple for installation of gauge cock.

G. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrateto zero.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturers.

B. Nameplates.

C. Tags.

D. Pipe markers.

E. Plastic Equipment Markers.


A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Identification painting.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and material2. Indicate manufacturer, trade names, and model numbers, components,

arrangement, and accessories being provided.3. Include applicable literature, catalog material or technical brochures.4. Lettering style and graphic representation required for each identification material

and device.5. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond

paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown ontag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves



intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Besides mounted copies,furnish copies for maintenance manuals.

6. Pipe Schedule: Schedule of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding forpiping identification.

C. Closeout Submittals:1. Record Documents; Record the actual locations of tagged valves.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing productsspecified in this Section with a minimum of 5 years experience.

B. Standards Compliance:1. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for

lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identificationdevices.

2. Color Coding and Nomenclature for Building Piping: Conform to ASME A13.1.


A. General: Comply with requirements of Section 01 60 00.

B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:1. Accept equipment, materials, and other Products on site in factory containers,

bundles, and shipping skids.

C. Delivery and Acceptance at Site:1. Inspect deliveries for damage.

D. Storage and Protection:1. Store all materials inside under cover and in a dry location.2. Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and construction

traffic and activity.

E. Handling:1. Handle material to prevent damage to edges, ends, surfaces, and finishes.

1.07 BASIS OF DESIGN AND ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listedfirst in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on theidentified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to utilize a manufacturer orproduct which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear allefforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to achieve finished workwhich is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted in



the Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/ortypes, new material and/or equipment, and changes to structural and/or architecturalfeatures (including room sizes). Approval by the Engineer of a proposed item shall notrelieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

B. The listing of specific manufacturers is solely intended to identify reputablemanufacturers who are known to provide quality products of the general type specified.Such listing is in no way intended to imply that the identified manufacturer’s product(s)have been verified to satisfy the specified requirements, or to be equivalent to anyidentified Basis of Design manufacturer. Nor does such a listing imply acceptance ofproducts which do not meet the specified requirements, ratings, features, dimensions,and functions as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names: The use of trade names on the drawings or other documents is toestablish a basis of design, constructibility, and level of quality. It is not intended toexclude other manufacturers whose products are equivalent to those named, subject tocompliance with contract requirements.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:1. Brimar Inc, (Pipemarker.com)2. Seton Identification Products3. Brady Corp.4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.

B. Control Panels: Nameplates.

C. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.

D. Instrumentation: Tags.

E. Major Control Components: Nameplates.

F. Piping: Pipe markers.

G. Pumps: Nameplates.



H. Relays: Tags.

I. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.

J. Tanks: Nameplates.

K. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.

B. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operatingand power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

C. Location: Accessible and visible.

2.04 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on lightcontrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter withsmooth edges.1. Letters:

a. Size:3/4 inch or 1/4 inch System ID over 1/2 inchb. Color: Black

C. Valve Tag Securing Devices: Number 6 brass bead chain; provide one securing devicefor each tag in accepted schedule, secure with brass S-hooks.

D. Valve Chart Frame: Aluminum frame, plastic window; sized to accommodate includedchart, 8-1/2 by 11 inches.

E. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

2.05 PIPE MARKERS

A. Comply with ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fitaround pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrowand identification of fluid being conveyed.



C. Pipe Markers for Indoor Use: material indicator on calendared vinyl sheet; snap-aroundtype for pipe sizes to 5-7/8 inches diameter, strap-around type with nylon ties for pipesizes 6 inches diameter and larger.

D. Pipe Markers for Indoor Use: Indicate fluid and direction-of-flow arrow onpressure-sensitive vinyl sheet.

E. Pipe Markers for Indoor Use: Roll-form pipe markers, indicate fluid anddirection-of-flow arrow on pressure-sensitive vinyl tape roll.

F. Color code as follows:1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.3. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.5. Combustible Fluids: Brown with white letters.6. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.

2.06 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on lightcontrasting background color. in the following color codes:1. Green: Plumbing equipment and components.

B. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:1. Name and plan number.2. Equipment service.3. Design capacity.4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

C. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches forequipment.

2.07 CEILING TACKS

A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

B. Color code as follows:1. Plumbing Valves: Green.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clearlacquer.

B. Install valve tags in accordance with accepted shop drawings and manufacturer'sinstructions.

C. Identify pumps, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Smalldevices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

D. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plasticnameplates.

E. Install valve tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops andfaucets. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. tagged valves in valveschedule. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

F. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

G. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with accepted show drawings andmanufacturer's instructions.

H. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directlyabove buried pipe.

I. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and

drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure orenclosure, and at each obstruction.

J. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type, lay-in panel ceilings. Locate incorner of panel closest to equipment.



3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Do not use materials whichmay damage finished surfaces or adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION22 07 19 - 1

SECTION 22 07 19

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.

C. Jackets and accessories.

D. Vapor retarders.




C. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.


A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked AusteniticStainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate; 2014.

C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements andThermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2019.

D. ASTM C335 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties ofHorizontal Pipe Insulation.

E. ASTM C423 - Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficientsby the Reverberation Room Method.

F. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible ElastomericCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016.

G. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2019.



H. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation forCommercial and Industrial Applications; 2013 (Reapproved 2019).

I. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

J. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact withAustenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2018).

K. ASTM C919 - Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.

L. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.

M. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time ofBurning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

N. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

O. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials; 2016.

P. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic PolymericMaterials to Fungi; 2015.

Q. ASTM G22 - Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.

R. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and material2. Indicate manufacturer, trade names, and model numbers, components,

arrangement, and accessories being provided.3. Include applicable literature, catalog material or technical brochures.4. Certified test reports indicating compliance with specified performance

requirements.

C. Closeout Submittals:1. Record Documents




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with not less than five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Experience on at least 5 projects of a similar nature in past 5years, and acceptable to the Owner.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of workspecified in this section with minimum five years of experience.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings:1. Conduct pre-installation meetings in accordance with Section 01 30 00.





C. Delivery and Acceptance at Site:1. Deliver material in original packages, containers, skid loads, or bundles bearing

brand names and identification of source of manufacture or supply.2. Inspect deliveries for damage.

D. Storage and Protection:1. Store all materials inside under cover and in a dry location.2. Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and construction

traffic and activity.3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place

until installation.


F. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness.


A. Sequence installation to insure utility connections are made in an orderly and timelymanner.

B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.



C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.


A. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listedfirst in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on theidentified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to utilize a manufacturer orproduct which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear allefforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to achieve finished workwhich is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted inthe Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/ortypes, new material and/or equipment, and changes to structural and/or architecturalfeatures (including room sizes). Approval by the Engineer of a proposed item shall notrelieve the Contractor of this responsibility.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. MANUFACTURERS1. Use of Trade Names: The use of trade names on the drawings or other documents

is to establish a basis of design, constructibility, and level of quality. It is notintended to exclude other manufacturers whose products are equivalent to thosenamed, subject to compliance with contract requirements.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:a. Manville Corporation.b. Owens-Corning Fiberglass.c. Knauf.d. Certainteed.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric or Polyolefin InsulationMaterials:a. Armstrong AP.b. IMCOA.



c. Rubatex.4. Acceptable Manufacturers for Adhesives, Mastics, and Coatings:

a. Benjamin Foster.b. Insul-Coustic.c. Chicago Mastic.d. 3M Company.e. Childers.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers for Metal Jackets:a. Manville Metal-Loc.b. Childers.

6. Acceptable Manufacturers for Piping Safety Covers, Molded Closed Cell Vinyl:a. Brocar Products, Inc.b. Truebro.

7. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00.

B. COMMON INSULATION CHARACTERISTICS1. Specified insulation thickness based on R-values ranging from 4.0 to 4.6 per inch

at 75 degrees F. mean temperature.a. If insulation R-value is less than 4.0, increase indicated insulation thickness by

ratio of 4.0/R-value.b. If insulation R-value is greater than 4.6, decrease indicated insulation

thickness by ratio of 4.6/R-value.2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to

those specified in this Section according to ASTM E84, by a testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation andjacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriatemarkings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.a. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and

smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.b. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and

smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of

25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBER

A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.23 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminizedfilm; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of0.02 perm-inches.



2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying withASTM C534/C534M Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.1. K Value: 0.30 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

C. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.04 JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paperand aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stockready for shop or field cutting and forming.1. Connections: Tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape or perma-weld

solvent weld adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.2. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code to match connected piping jackets based on

materials contained within the piping system.

D. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209; Aluminum alloy, integrally bonded moisture barrierover entire surface in contact with insulation, 0.016 inch thick No. 5005 temperedaluminum secured with machine drawn 0.020-inch stainless steel bands.1. Finish: Smooth finish or Factory-painted finish.2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil hick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.05 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that arecompatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C534/C534M






























3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association(NAIMA) National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire systemincluding fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,and expansion joints.

E. Install cellular melamine with factory-applied jackets with a manufacturer-approvedadhesive along seams, both straight lap joints and circumferential lap joints.1. Install seal over seams with factory-approved room temperature vulcanization

(RTV) silicone sealant to ensure a positive vapor barrier seal in outdoor andsanitary washdown environments.

F. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material andthickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive orPVC fitting covers.

G. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges andunions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

H. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions atequipment.

I. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or

field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips withpressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness asadjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

J. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.











































5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy densityinsulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

K. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section07 84 00.

L. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feetabove finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.

END OF SECTION














Contract No. HCC21002 PLUMBING PIPING22 10 05 - 1

SECTION 22 10 05

PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.1. Domestic water piping.2. Gas piping3. Flanges, unions, and couplings.4. Pipe hangers and supports.5. Valves.6. Water pressure reducing valves.7. Strainers.




C. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

D. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.


A. ANSI A112.1.3 - Air Gap Fittings for Use with Plumbing Fixtures, Appliances andAppurtenances.

B. ANSI B2.1 - Pipe Threads.

C. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

D. ANSI B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series Including Hex CapScrews, and Lag Screws.

E. ANSI B18.2.2 - Square and Hex Nuts.

F. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

G. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.



H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings;2018.

I. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.

J. ASSE 1003 - Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves forDomestic Water Distribution Systems; 2009.

K. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999,with Editorial Revision (2018).

L. ASTM A48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

M. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018.

N. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2020.

O. ASTM A126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and PipeFittings.

P. ASTM A153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

Q. ASTM A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

R. ASTM A536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

S. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).

T. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2020.

U. ASTM B62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

V. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.

W. ASTM B117 - Standard practice for operating salt spray (fog) apparatus.

X. ASTM B283 - Standard Specification for copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings(Hot-Pressed).

Y. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering ofCopper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2016.

Z. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copperand Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016.

AA. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe andFittings; 2020.



AB. ASTM D1248 - Specification for polyethylene plastics extrusion materials for wire andcable.

AC. ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid CellularPlastics

AD. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

AE. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2018).

AF. ASTM D2000 - Classification for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

AG. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-RatedPipe (SDR Series); 2015.

AH. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

AI. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 40; 2017.

AJ. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 80.

AK. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012 (Reapproved 2018).

AL. ASTM D2657 - Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe andFittings.

AM. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) PlasticDrain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.

AN. ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings forOutside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2014.

AO. ASTM D2737 - 12A - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing

AP. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2019a.

AQ. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement)Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets; 2015.



AR. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2016.

AS. ASTM D3222 - Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) molding extrusion andcoating materials.

AT. ASTM D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) PlasticFittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

AU. ASTM D3311 - Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic FittingsPatterns.

AV. ASTM D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and FittingsMaterials

AW. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and ExtrusionMaterials.

AX. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers.

AY. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2015.

AZ. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(VinylChloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2017.

BA. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2019.

BB. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2015.

BC. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2019.

BD. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (VinylChloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2014.

BE. ASTM F1412 - Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings and CorrosiveWaste Drainage Systems.

BF. ASTM F1467 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed MechanicalCouplings for Use in Piping Applications.

BG. AWWA C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittingsfor Water.

BH. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; 2012.



BI. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe andFittings; 2017.

BJ. AWWA C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.

BK. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2017, with Errata (2018).

BL. AWWA C153 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings.

BM. AWWA C508 - Standard for Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-inThrough 24-in.

BN. AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; 2017.

BO. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.

BP. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2014.

BQ. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.

BR. AWWA C707 - Encoder-Type Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water Meters.

BS. AWWA C800 - Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.

BT. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

BU. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings forSanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2017 (Revised 2018).

BV. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2015.

BW. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) inMasonry Elements; 2015.

BX. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2015.

BY. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in ConcreteElements; 2016.

BZ. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and Installation; 2018.

CA. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013.

CB. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved andFlared Ends; 2010.



CC. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2019.

CD. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Light Duty: All grates and top rims having safe live load under 2000 lbs.

B. Medium Duty: All grates and top rims having safe live load between 2000 lbs. and4999 lbs.

C. Heavy Duty: All grates and top rims having safe live load between 5000 lbs. and 7499lbs.

D. Extra Heavy Duty: All grates and top rims having safe live load between 7500 lbs. and10,000 lbs.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings and accessories. Submit

manufacturer's catalog information.2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service.3. Clearly mark the products and accessories being submitted for review.4. Submittals shall clearly indicate compliance with the “Reduction of Lead in

Drinking Water Act” 2011

C. Product Data: Submit product data for but not limited to the following items1. Pipe and Fittings2. Solder and Flux3. Valves4. Unions and Flanges5. Strainers6. Flexible Connectors7. Regulators


A. Section 01 70 00: Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record the actual locations of valves and equipment.



C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views andrecommended maintenance intervals.


A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTMspecification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.

D. For drinking water service, provide valves and components complying with NSF 61.

E. Provide all components in the drinking water system to comply with the Federal“Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act” - 2011

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection with minimum three years of experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum threeyears of experience.

1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.







D. Storage and Protection:1. Store all materials inside the building, under cover and in a dry location.



2. Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and constructiontraffic and activity.

3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in placeuntil installation.


F. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00: Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (ifused), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe andfittings.



2.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN AND BEYOND 5 FEET OFBUILDING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers1. American (American Cast Iron Pipe Company)2. U.S. Pipe and Foundry.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C150 and AWWA C151.1. Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153; ductile iron, 350 psi working pressure,

standard thickness.2. Push-on Joints: AWWA C111; 350 psi working pressure rubber gasket.3. Restrained Joints: AWWA C111; 350 psi working pressure rubber gasket with

threaded rods and bolts.4. Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2.; Carbon steel hex bolts and

nuts5. Jackets (Non-Corrosive Soils): AWWA C151 1 mill asphaltic coating or AWWA

C105 polyethylene jacket.6. Jackets (Corrosive Soils): EN 545/ISO 2531; 1 mil zinc welded to exterior, 3 mil

blue epoxy coating over zinc surface.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Mueller Industries; Streamline2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

D. Copper Pipe (4-inch and smaller): ASTM B 88; Type K, annealed.1. Fittings: ANSI B16.18; Cast copper or ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.2. Joints: Compression or Brazed, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy

with melting range of 1190 to 1480 degrees F.3. Flux: NSF Certified, ASTM B813.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Mueller Industries; Streamline2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

F. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, Temper H80 hard drawn.1. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and

bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, ANSI/NSF61; Alloy Grade TC tin-copper-Selenium, or Alloy

Grade Sn95 tin-silver, LEAD FREE solder or AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 orBCuP-4 silver braze.

3. Flux: NSF Certified, ASTM B813



2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Mueller Industries; Streamline2. Wheatland Tube3. Cerro Flow Products4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, NSF-61; Type L, hard drawn, lead-free1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, NSF-61; cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22; wrought

copper and bronze, LEAD FREE.2. Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade TC tin-copper-Selenium, or Alloy Grade Sn95

tin-silver, LEAD FREE solder.3. Flux: NSF Certified, ASTM B8134. Nipples: ASTM B 88; Type L, hard drawn.5. Unions: ASME B16.18; Cast bronze or ASME B16.22; wrought copper sweat

type, LEAD FREE.

2.04 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Service Requirements:1. Natural Gas; 100 psig maximum operating pressure and 70 degrees F maximum

operating temperature

B. Pipe (3/4 inch thru 2 inch): ASTM A53; Black steel Schedule 40 and couplings.1. Joints: ANSI B1.20.1; Threaded.2. Nipples: ASTM A53; Black steel Schedule 80.3. Fittings: ASTM A47 and ANSI B1.20.1; Malleable iron 150 lb. threaded.4. Unions: ASTM A197 and ANSI B2.1; Malleable iron 300 lb. threaded, ground

joint bronze to iron.5. Thread Lubricant: Graphite/Oil Compound or Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)

Tape, On Male Threads ONLY.

C. Pipe (2-1/2 inch and larger): ASTM A53; Black steel Schedule 40.1. Joints: Welded.2. Fittings: ASTM A234 and ANSI B16.9; Wrought carbon steel standard weight

welding Grade WPB or WPC.3. Unions: ASTM A181 and ANSI B16.1; Forged carbon steel welding-neck 150 lb.

raised-face (except against cocks) flanges.4. Gaskets: ANSI B16.21; 1/16 in. thick mineral fiber composition (Non-Metallic).5. Bolts: ASTM A307; Carbon steel hex bolts and nuts, Grade B.

D. Regulator Vent Piping:1. Indoors: Same as natural gas piping, above grade.



2. Outdoors: UL 651; PVC pipe, tubing, and fittings.

E. Gaseous Fuel shut-off valves:1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Nibco. GB1Ab. Conbracoc. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Ball Valve (1 in. and smaller): ANSI Z21.15.CGA9.1; Forged brass or bronze2-piece body, chrome plated brass ball, brass stem, aluminum handle, threadedends.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Nibco. T-FP-600A-LFb. Conbracoc. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

4. Ball Valve (1/4 in. thru 4 in.): UL 842; Forged copper alloy 2-piece body, chromeplated brass ball, brass stem, steel plated handle, PTFE ball seat, threaded ends.

F. Gas Pressure Regulators:1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Maxitrol Company, 325 Seriesb. Or Equal.

2. General:a. CSA Certified; Designed for multi-poised mounting, self-aligning valve lever

action for dead-end lockup, capable of precise regulating control from fullflow to pilot flow, factory tested to 10 psi inlet pressure.

b. Regulator range up to 5 PSI inlet pressure and 2” w.c. to 48” w.c outletpressure, durable cast aluminum housing, self -aligning of nitrile rubber,corrosion resistant internal parts, synthetic rubber compound diaphragm.

2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges;

preformed neoprene gaskets.2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene

gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, coppersolder end, water impervious isolation barrier.



2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select

appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze

hangers.a. Cold and Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Double hangers.

3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.

B. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,

split ring.2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron

pipe roll, double hanger.5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought

steel clamp.7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and

wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.

2.07 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valves2. Grinnell Products3. Nibco, Inc4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600 psi CWP, bronzebody, 304 stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, regular port, PTFE seat and



stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lead free, zinc plated steel lever handle withvinyl grip, solder or threaded ends.

2.08 HORIZONTAL SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers (Valves):1. Apollo Valves; Model 161S-LF or Model 161T-LF2. Nibco3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Check Valves (2 in and smaller): MSS SP-80, ASME B1.20.1, ANSI/NSF 61-8; 200PSI CWP at 200°F, LEAD FREE, solid bronze body and cap, horizontal swing, bronzeseat, Y-Pattern, renewable seat disc, stainless steel Hinge Pin, solder or threaded ends.

2.09 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valves; Model PRH-T-LF2. Watts Regulator Company3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Up to 2 Inches:1. ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric

reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.

2.10 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions (2 inches and Smaller):1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered or brazed joints, LEAD

FREE.3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper

solder end, water impervious isolation barrier, LEAD FREE.4. PVC Piping: PVC.

2.11 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valve Co.; Series 59LF000-E1 or 59LF300-E12. Nibco; Model S-221 or T-2213. Spirax/Sarco.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



B. B. Strainers (4 in and smaller): AB 1953 Certified; 400 PSI CWP at 150°F., in-linedesign, solid bronze body and cap, Teflon O-ring, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, LEADFREE, solder or threaded ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurement: The Drawings are in general indicative of the Work, with symbolsand notations for clarity. However, the Drawings are not an exact representation of allconditions involved, therefore, layout piping to suit actual field measurements.1. No extra compensation will be made for Work due to difference between indicated

and actual dimensions.2. Submit to the Engineer for approval, details of proposed departures necessitated by

field conditions or other causes.

B. Interferences: Layout piping systems to compensate for structural interferences, topreserve headroom, and not to interfere with openings, passageways and equipment.Do not install piping with joints and fittings over motors, switchboards, panels, orsimilar electrical apparatus.

C. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

D. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

E. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. General Requirements: The schematic drawings do not necessarily indicate every pipingsize or alignment. Provide the required pipe sizes, fittings, adapters, etc. as required toconstruct complete piping systems.1. Install piping in accordance with ASME B31.92. Pipe Supports Installation: Place and support piping runs as specified in Section 22

05 29.3. Install piping concealed in those areas of the structures having hung ceilings and

exposed in all other areas, except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings.4. Clean piping prior to and following the installation, prepare for painting. Keep

open ends of piping and pipe attachment openings on equipment capped orplugged until actual connections.



5. Remove all faucet aerators and shower heads prior to flushing the system.6. Construct pipe runs from full lengths of pipe using short sections only for runs of

less than full pipe length. Make changes in directions of pipe runs with fittingsonly.

7. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established in the field and assemble inplace without springing, forcing, excessive cutting or weakening of the structure.

8. Install unions and flanges in accessible locations and whether indicated or not,install union adjacent to equipment and wherever removal of equipment for repairor replacement is required.

9. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection of copper tubing and piping toferrous metal piping or equipment.

10. Provide reducing fittings where reduction in pipe sizes is necessary. Bushings willnot be accepted.

11. Install ball valves at inlets and outlets to each piece of equipment.12. Cross and Inter-Connections: Do not install piping in a manner which can create a

direct cross connection or an inter-connection between potable water and pollutedwater, or in a manner whereby a backflow of polluted water system could occur.

13. Extend relief pipe from valves, backflow preventers and drains to nearest floordrain.

14. Valve Installation: Install a valve where each branch leaves the main and atPlumbing Fixtures to facilitate repairs or replacements of such while the system isin operation. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings install gate valves inwater lines. Install globe valves in water lines where throttling, control or bypassis required.

15. Piping Pitch: Unless otherwise indicated pitch potable water piping one-inch infifty feet.

3.04 INSTALLATION - DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide water service complete with approved reduced pressure principle backflowpreventer, water meter with by-pass, pressure reducing valve and strainer.

B. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced-concretebridge. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make water tight with pliable material.

3.05 PIPE JOINING

A. General Requirements: Exercise care when making pipe joints and make joints inaccordance with the pipe material manufacturer's recommendations and the followingadditional requirements.1. In each instance of pipe joining, those portions of pipes involved must be

absolutely clean just prior to assembly.



2. If a joint is extremely difficult to assemble or is not completely sealed, disassemblethe joint and correct the difficulty if possible. Remake the joint using newmaterials when necessary.

B. Copper Tubing and Pipe Joints: Cut tubing and piping ends square, deburr and ream tosize of original bore.1. Solder: Prior to sweating, clean pipe ends and fitting surfaces involved in the

joint, to bright metal without marring surfaces. Finished joints shall show noevidence of hard-temper due to over-heating, no evidence of improper solder draw,and excess solder must be removed.

2. Flared: Cut tubing and piping ends square, deburr and ream to size of originalbore. Finished joints shall show evenness of flaring and proper seating of joiningparts.

3. Brazing: Prior to brazing, clean the surfaces involved in the brazing to removeoxides and surface soil. Exercise care so as not to remove excess material to resultin a loose fit of the joint. Perform brazing in accordance with recommendations ofthe Copper Development Association Inc. Copper, Brass, Bronze, ProductHandbook.

C. Ductile Cast Iron Pipe Joints:1. Push-On Joints: Properly seat sealing gasket, evenly and sufficiently lubricate the

spigot end of pipe, and fully enter joint until joint line is visible. Make deflection,if required, only after the joint has been assembled properly.

2. Mechanical Joints: Properly position sealing gasket and gland for bolting and thenenter the spigot into pipe bell end until joint line is visible. Tighten bolts evenlymaintaining approximate distance between gland and face of flange at all pointsaround the socket. Do not exceed pipe manufacturer's specifications for maximumtorque applied to bolts.

3. Flanged: Accurately face, install gaskets and draw up square and tight to ensurefull gasket flow and seal.

3.06 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING

A. Buried Piping: Perform earthwork including trenching for buried pipe runs as specifiedin Section 31 20 00.

B. Keep trenches dewatered until pipe joints have been made and concrete bedding andblocking, if any, have hardened. Under no circumstances lay pipe in water or on subgrade containing frost.

C. Rest each section of pipe on pipe bedding for the full length of its barrel, with recessesexcavated for pipe bells so joints can easily be made. Backfill recesses with beddingmaterial immediately following pipe joining operations.

D. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade true to line and grades given. Lay bell and spigot pipewith bell end upgrade.



E. Take up and relay pipe that is not laid true to required alignment or grade and/or has itsjoints disturbed after installation. No deviations from the required line and gradepermitted, except with approval of the Engineer.

3.07 INSTALLATION - EXPOSED PIPING

A. Install exposed piping parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building structure.

B. Install piping to compensate for structural interferences, to preserve headroom, and notto interfere with openings, passageways and equipment.

C. Install piping a sufficient distance from other work to permit clearance of not less thanone inch between the piping or insulated piping and adjacent work.

D. Install piping as close as possible to walls, overhead construction, columns, and similarto facilitate insulating work and removal of piping later.

3.08 INSTALLATION


B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel andperpendicular to walls.

C. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use ofspace.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings.

F. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brushclean, and apply one coat of zinc-rich primer to welding.

G. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, usingspecified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux alsocomplying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

H. Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over

4 inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.



5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and providethrough-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

I. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for

pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers.7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

3.09 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean.

B. Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali(caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form throughoutsystem to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual atminimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0mg/L.

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets andfrom water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

3.10 TESTING - DOMESTIC WATER

A. Test entire domestic water system in accordance with all applicable codes and localauthority having jurisdiction. Provide bacteria test from multiple outlets.

B. Testing (Underground outside structure and under on-grade slab):

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1. Hydrostatically test at 50 percent over system operating pressure but not less than100 psig.

2. Conduct testing and disinfecting in accordance with the Water Service utilityrequirements, or in accordance with the following requirements, whichever is morestringent.

3. Prior to testing, allow those installed sections of water piping protected by concretereaction blocking to stand undisturbed for at least seven days from concrete pour.Provide temporary blocking as required.

4. The Contractor may, at his option, completely backfill the trench or partiallybackfill the trench over the center section of each pipe length prior to performingthe pressure test.

5. Fill the section of installed water piping being tested with water a minimum oftwenty-four hours prior to testing. During filling insure the piping is free of air.Use potable water for filling.

6. Line Acceptance Test:a. After the water line is constructed, backfilled (as stated above), and

successfully cleaned, perform a hydrostatic line acceptance test as follows:1) Seal water line at downstream end with a suitable pipe plug.2) Fill water line with potable water (as stated above).3) Raise hydrostatic pressure to 150 psig.4) Maintain test pressure for a period of not less than one hour.

7. Also conduct a leakage test for a duration of two uninterrupted hours at the samepressure specified for the hydrostatic test and provide a means for measuringleakage. Piping being tested will not be accepted if leakage is greater than thatdetermined by the formula L = ND(sq. root)P in which L is the allowable leakage7400 in gallons per hour; N is the number of joints in the length of pipeline tested;D is the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches; and P is the average test pressurein pounds per square inch (based on test pressure indicated above, measured at thelow point).a. The leakage test may be conducted simultaneously with the pressure test,

provided a suitable means of measuring leakage is provided and a record ofwater added to the piping being tested is kept for the two-hour test period.

C. Testing (Aboveground inside structure):1. Hydrostatically test at 50 percent over system operating pressure but not less than

100 psig.2. Locate test pressure source on upstream sides on lines containing check valves and

set control valves in open position for test duration.3. Do not subject equipment, piping specialties or plumbing fixtures to test pressures.4. Isolate in-line items that may be damaged by test pressures.5. Maintain test pressure to within 3 psi of initial test pressure, without introduction

of additional pressure, until an examination is made to determine each joint andconnection leak free, but in no case less than four hours actual test time.

D. Testing of Backflow Preventers:



1. Perform testing after installation is complete.2. Perform test using a differential pressure gauge3. Perform testing in accordance with one of the following standards as listed in the

International Plumbing Code: ASSE 5013, ASSE 5015, ASSE 5020


A. General Requirements: Conduct tests specified under Part 3 Execution, Testing,Cleaning and Disinfection, so that each piping system installed in the Project is tested tothe Engineer's satisfaction.1. Provide tools, materials (including clean water), apparatus and instruments

necessary for piping system testing.2. Conduct tests of every kind in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.3. Free piping systems of trapped air for tests involving water.4. Perform tests involving water in the test only when there is no danger of water

freezing during the test time period.5. Repair and Retest: When a piping system fails to meet test requirements specified

herein, conform to the following:a. Determine source or sources of leakage.b. Repair or replace defective material and if a result of improper workmanship,

correct such.c. Conduct additional tests to demonstrate that piping system meets specified test

requirements.d. Perform repair and retest work at no increase in Contract Price.

6. Accuracy Proof: Furnish acceptable proof to the Engineer that testing apparatus,pressure gauges, etc. have been recently checked and calibrated, as applicable,prior to use on this Project.

7. Notification: Give the Engineer a minimum of three days advance notice of thetimes when piping system acceptance testing will be conducted.

3.12 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:1. Metal Piping:

a. Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches.

b. Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES22 10 06 - 1

SECTION 22 10 06

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Hydrants.

B. Backflow preventers.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Procedures for Owner-supplied products.

B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for AccessibleDesign; 2010.

B. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2019.

C. ASME A112.6.4 - Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2012).

D. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; 2017.

E. ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventers with an IntermediateAtmospheric Vent; 2009.

F. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle BackflowPreventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers; 2011.

G. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protectionand Freeze Resistance; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2016).

H. NSF 2 - Food Equipment; 2019.

I. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2019.

J. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.

K. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2017.



1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data required for but not limited to the following items:1. Drains2. Drain Accessories3. Floor Sinks4. Trap Primers5. Cleanouts, Cover Plates and Caps6. Acid Neutralization Systems7. Interceptors

C. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, andfinishes.

D. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicateassembly and support requirements.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflowpreventers, water hammer arrestors.

G. Test certificates for backflow preventers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with not less than five years documented experience.


A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content.



2.02 HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Arrowhead Brass & Plumbing, LLC2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company3. Murdock Manufacturing, Inc4. Zurn Industries, LLC5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Hydrants:1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose

thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker.

2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valves2. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies3. Zurn Industries, LLC4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Backflow Preventer - Reduced Pressure Principle (3/4 through 2-inch): ASSE 1013;internal pressure differential relief valve located between two positive seating checkvalves and captured springs, lead-free bronze body construction, ball type shut-offvalves, locking handles, bronze strainer, lead-free bronze test cocks, stainless steel trimand seats, 175 psi maximum operating pressure, 33°F to 140°F temperature range, airgap device, threaded ends; Series LF909-QT.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

3.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Prior to installation, thoroughly flush all pipes to remove any foreign matter.

B. Install backflow preventers in accessible indoor locations for servicing, testing andfreeze protection, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install a strainer ahead of each backflow preventer.



D. In dead-end service applications (boiler feed lines, cooling tower make-up or otherequipment with periodic flow requirements), install a check valve ahead of eachbackflow preventer.

E. Install an air gap device on drain connection of backflow preventer.

F. Pipe air gap device and relief valve connections on backflow preventers to nearest floordrain.

G. Installation of backflow preventers shall comply with all state and local codes.

H. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013 or 5015.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT22 30 00 - 1

SECTION 22 30 00

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Packaged water heating systems.

B. Diaphragm-type compression tanks.


A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

B. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.

C. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.

D. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.


A. ASHRAE 90 - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air ConditioningEngineers, Inc.; Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

B. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1:Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2019.

C. ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

D. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

E. NFPA 54 - National Fire Protection Association: National Fuel Gas Code

F. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: submittals required for the following items:1. Water Heaters



C. Plumbing Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes, capacities,rough-in requirements, service sizes and finishes

D. Balancing Report: Include final balancing, adjusting and testing report as part of theSubmittals in Section 01 30 00.

E. Clearly mark the products and accessories being submitted.

F. Submittals shall clearly indicate compliance with the “Reduction of Lead in DrinkingWater Act” 2011

G. Operations and Maintenance Data:1. Manufacturers of water heaters, gas vent, storage tanks, shall include complete

instructions with their products giving directions for replacing renewable parts oftheir products as well as instructions for cleaning the finished surfaces of suchproducts and maintaining the products.

2. Include above stated data as part of the Submittals of Section 01 30 00.3. Furnish complete service and maintenance pumps for one year from Date of

Substantial Completion. Submit copy of service call work order or report, andinclude description of work performed.

H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms havebeen completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Perform Work in accordance with Commonwealth of Pennsylvania standard codes.




bundles, and shipping skids.2. Prepare pumps and accessories for shipment to prevent entry of foreign matter into

product body.





D. Storage and Protection:1. Store all materials inside under cover and in a dry location.2. Protect from weather, direct sunlight, moisture, or possible damage, corrosion, and

construction traffic and activity. Do not store products directly on ground; handleproducts to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces.

3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in placeuntil installation.





1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for packaged water heating systems.

C. Provide manufacturer’s warranty under provisions of Division 1 for pumps and motors.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PACKAGED WATER HEATING SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:1. Patterson Kelley2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Heat Exchanger1. Each heat exchanger package shall contain one ASME Section VIII – Division 1

brazed-plate heat exchanger with a “U” stamp designed for a maximum allowingworking pressure of not less than 150 PSIG and a maximum allowable temperatureof not less than 300°F.

2. Each brazed-plate heat exchanger shall be of the double-wall type and provide atrue air gap between heat exchanger plates and a visible leak path to atmosphere.

3. Each heat exchanger shall consist of 316 Stainless Steel plates with a Copperbrazing material (or approved equal) oriented in a counter-flow arrangement.Plate-and-frame type heat exchangers are not acceptable.

4. Each heat exchanger shall have staggered / offset connection ports to avoidcollision between the boiler water pipe / fittings and the domestic water pipe /fittings.

C. Cabinet Enclosure/Base1. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature a fully assembled cabinet

enclosure and structural base fabricated from Carbon Steel or Aluminum sheetmetal (minimum 16 Gauge) with powder coat finish.

2. The completed cabinet enclosure and structural base shall not exceed 15” width x52” length x 44” height, and the completed heat exchanger package shall fitthrough a standard 32” wide doorway.

3. The structural base shall feature holes designed for easy maneuvering with aforklift or pallet jack.

4. The cabinet enclosure shall eliminate the use of refractory or other insulatingmaterials.

5. The cabinet enclosure shall prominently display all required safety, instruction,compliance and factory runout labels.

6. The cabinet enclosure shall be designed to provide full visibility and access topressure gauges, temperature gauges, drain valves, strainers, isolation valves,control valves, control panel, etc.

D. Boiler Water Pipe & Fittings1. All pipe fittings and trim devices in contact with boiler water shall be carbon steel,

ductile Iron, cast Iron, brass or bronze.2. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature 2” Schedule 40 steel piping

on the boiler water supply & return connections.



3. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature 2” grooved couplings /unions with removable EPDM gaskets to connect the steel pipe to the heatexchanger connection ports.

4. Each completed heat exchanger package shall terminate with 2” isolation valves onthe boiler water supply & return connections.

5. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature a wye-type strainer on thelower incoming boiler water piping.

E. Boiler Water Electronic Control Valve1. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature one (1) electronically

actuated 3-way control valve with a maximum full-range positioning time of 2seconds and a minimum stroke resolution of 1000:1.

2. Each completed heat exchanger package shall include an isolation valve on theboiler water piping upstream of the control valve’s lower “B” port. Closing thisisolation valve allows for 2-way control valve operation (“A” à “AB”).

3. The electronic control valve shall be user-selectable for linear or equal-percentagecharacteristics.

4. The electronic control valve shall provide full bypass fail-safe operation (“B” à“AB”) when de-energized.

5. The electronic control valve shall provide the ability to manually actuate thevalve’s stroke.

F. Domestic Water Pipe & Fittings1. All pipe fittings and trim devices in contact with domestic water shall be stainless

steel, copper, lead-free bronze or lead-free brass and comply with the NSF-61requirements for pipe, pipe fittings & fixtures.

2. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature 2” Type L copper tubing onthe domestic water supply & return connections.

3. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature dielectric pipe fittingsbetween the copper tubing and the heat exchanger connection ports.

4. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature 2” grooved couplings /unions with removable EPDM gaskets to connect the copper tubing to the heatexchanger connection ports.

5. Each completed heat exchanger package shall terminate with 2” isolation valves onthe domestic water supply & return connections.

6. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature a wye-type strainer on theupper incoming domestic water piping. This strainer shall be equipped with a 1/2”manual isolation / blowdown valve.

7. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature a 1/2” manual isolation /blowdown valve on the lower outgoing domestic water piping installed betweenthe 3:00 and 6:00 position for ease of use.

G. Domestic Water Recirculation Pump



1. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature one (1) lead-free bronzedomestic water recirculation pump that complies with the NSF-61 requirements forpipe, pipe fittings & fixtures.

2. The domestic water recirculation pump shall feature 3 speed settings, allowing theuser to adjust the recirculation flow.

3. The domestic water recirculation pump improves the accuracy and responsivenessof the heat exchanger package by maintaining constant water flow over thedomestic hot water supply temperature sensor. This action also keeps the domestichot water supply “primed” at the desired temperature.

4. The domestic water recirculation pump shall provide constant water flow throughthe heat exchanger(s) at all times to help prevent scale formation and bacterialgrowth due to stagnant water conditions.

H. Electronic Control System & Control Panel1. Each completed heat exchanger package shall feature a control panel configured

for 110-120 VAC, single phase (w/ Neutral), 60 Hz.2. The completed control panel shall feature a PID temperature controller capable of

maintaining the desired domestic hot water supply temperature within ± 2°F underconstant load conditions, and within ±4°F under normal fluctuating loadconditions.

3. At a minimum, the PID temperature controller and control panel shall display thefollowing information:a. Domestic water supply temperature.b. Domestic water temperature setpoint.c. High temperature limit.d. Alarm condition.

4. The PID temperature controller shall provide native MODBUS communication inorder for the DDC / BMS to remotely command or monitor the following:a. Enable / Disable the heat exchanger package.b. Adjust the desired domestic hot water supply temperature setpoint.c. Monitor the operating status of the heat exchanger package.d. Monitor the alarm status of the heat exchanger package.e. Monitor the domestic hot water supply temperature.

5. The PID temperature control shall also be capable of interfacing with an optionalprotocol converter in order to provide the same remote functions through BACnet,LONWORKS, or Metasys N2 protocols.

6. The completed heat exchanger package shall contain an automatic reset hightemperature limit aquastat which will immediately de-energize the electroniccontrol valve and illuminate a red HIGH TEMP light if the domestic hot watersupply temperature exceeds the user-adjustable high temperature setpoint.

7. The control panel shall provide convenient terminal connections for the incomingpower supply and communication signals to/from the electronic temperaturecontroller.



8. Each completed heat exchanger package shall be capable of easy integration intoany hydronic boiler system, regardless of boiler manufacturer.

I. Safety and Trim Devices1. Each completed heat exchanger package shall be equipped with a high temperature

limit safety aquastat installed in the domestic hot water supply piping. If the hightemperature limit trips, the control panel shall immediately remove power from theelectronic 3-way control valve, forcing all boiler to water to bypass the heatexchanger.

2. Each completed heat exchanger package shall be equipped with pressure gauges,temperature gauges, isolation valves, strainers, drain valves, couplings, and anautomatic air vent.

3. All pressure and temperature gauges on the domestic water piping shall beinstalled between the 12:00 and 3:00 position for improved access and visibility.All pressure gauges shall have a manual shutoff cock upstream of the gauge toimprove the accuracy of the reading.

2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers:1. Amtrol Inc2. Watts Water Technologies3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Welded steel outer shell, rigid polypropylene liner mechanically bonded,butyl rubber diaphragm, pre-charged air chamber.

C. Accessories: Stainless steel system connection and air-charging fitting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Condition of Rough-Ins: Inspect rough-ins and determine exact equipment locationswith respect to the Drawings.

B. Do not proceed until equipment locations are verified, or any adjustments in fixturelocations are approved by the Engineer.


A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting andbalancing.



B. Upon completion of installation, examine, adjust and test each pump for properoperation

C. Test each sump pump with clean water through minimum of four complete cycles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide necessary piping, fittings, and valves as indicated on drawings.

B. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as requiredby code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any.

C. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operatingsystem.

3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of the packagedwater heating system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of one day of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.4. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT23 05 13 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General construction and requirements.

B. Applications.

C. Single phase electric motors.

D. Three phase electric motors.

E. Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM).


A. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers.


A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015.

B. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors andGenerators; 2017.

C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections,lubrication, and wiring instructions.




A. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory coversand suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motorsfrom equipment and store separately.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Baldor Electric Company/ABB Group

B. General Electric Co.

C. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp.

D. U.S. Motors.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Nominal Efficiency:1. Open Motor with Two Poles: 82.5.2. Open Motor with Four Poles: 82.5.3. Open Motor with Six Poles: 50.0.4. Enclosed Motor with Two Poles: 75.5.5. Enclosed Motor with Four Poles: 82.5.6. Enclosed Motor with Six Poles: 50.0.

B. Construction:1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.2. Design for continuous operation in 104 degrees F environment.3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation

class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, fullload amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number,service factor, power factor, efficiency.



D. Wiring Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and

materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70,threaded for conduit.

2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, providethreaded conduit connection in end frame.

2.03 APPLICATIONS

A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipmentmanufacturer's standard and need not comply with these specifications.

B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type.

C. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.

D. Motors located in exterior locations, air cooled condensers, and direct drive axial fans:Totally enclosed type.

2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperaturerise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,automatic reset overload protector.

2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.

D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.

E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-runmotors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit atoperating speeds.



F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMAService Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.

G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 ServiceFactor, prelubricated ball bearings.

2.06 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.

C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA DesignB characteristics.

D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Comply with NEMA MG 1 forDesign B motors.

E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine freefrom electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with endbrackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistorsembedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay forwiring into motor starter; refer to Section 26 29 13.

I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped withplugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with beltcenter line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes onnameplate.

J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.

K. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotorstarting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current whileproviding approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.

L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressurewith rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shieldedwith waterproof non-washing grease.



M. Nominal Efficiency: As indicated at full load and rated voltage when tested inaccordance with IEEE 112.

N. Nominal Power Factor: As indicated at full load and rated voltage when tested inaccordance with IEEE 112.

2.07 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)

A. Manufacturers:1. US Motors, a brand of NIDEC Motor Corporation2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Applications:1. Commercial:

a. Power Roof Ventilator (PRV):1) Operating Mode: Constant cfm.2) Input: Motor manufacturer to coordinate control requirements with the

control board of the PRV and/or specified sequence of operation.3) Shaft Extension: Single.4) Options: Remote mount control.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in anyposition.

C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING23 05 16 - 1

SECTION 23 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flexible pipe connectors.

B. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.


A. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping.


A. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved2014).

B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,

face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot andper assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and totalnumber of wires in braid.

2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, andmaximum expansion compensation.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, specialprocedures, and external controls.

D. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with UL (DIR) requirements.



2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING

A. Manufacturers:1. Mercer Rubber Company2. The Metraflex Company3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Inner Hose: Bronze.

C. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.

D. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F.

E. Joint: Flanged.

F. Size: Use pipe sized units.

G. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.

2.03 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING

A. Manufacturers:1. Mercer Rubber Company2. The Metraflex Company3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Inner Hose: Bronze.

C. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.

D. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F.

E. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.

F. Size: Use pipe sized units.

G. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.

H. Application: Copper piping.

2.04 EXPANSION LOOPS - HOSE AND BRAID

A. Manufacturers:1. Flex-Weld, Inc2. The Metraflex Company3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



B. Provide flexible loops with two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degreeelbows, and 180 degree return with support bracket and air release or drain plug.

C. Provide flexible loops capable of movement in the x, y, and z planes. Flexible loops toimpart no thrust loads to the building structure.

D. Flexible Connectors: Flanged, braided type with wetted components of stainless steel,sized to match piping.1. Maximum Allowable Working Pressure: 150 psig at 120 degrees F.2. Accommodate the Following:

a. Axial Deflection in Compression and Expansion: 4 inch.b. Lateral Movement: 4 inch.c. Angular Rotation: 15 degrees.d. Force developed by 1.5 times specified maximum allowable operating

pressure.3. End Connections: Same as specified for pipe jointing.4. Provide necessary accessories including, but not limited to, swivel joints.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Alignment Guides:1. Manufacturers:

a. Flex-Weld, Incb. The Metraflex Companyc. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe,frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation,minimum 3 inches travel.

B. Engineered Riser Anchor Clamps:1. Manufacturers:

a. The Metraflex Companyb. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Applications:a. Provide one clamp to serve as a riser clip.

1) Verify the total load of filled pipe to be supported will be a safety factorof one less than the maximum loading of the clamp per the manufacturer'sinstructions.

b. Provide one clamp above and one clamp below the slab to anchor pipe.1) Coordinate with the structural engineer to determine the maximum thrust

loading calculated for the slab or floor structure. Use the maximum thrustloading calculations to verify the clamps will be a safety factor of one lessthan the maximum loading of clamp per the manufacturer's instructions.



3. Provide two piece, ductile iron in compliance with ASTM A536. Use with metalpipes with an outer diameter of 2.5 inches to 8 inches.

C. Swivel Joints:1. Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber

(Buna-N) o-ring seals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment.Provide line size flexible connectors.

C. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement isdirected along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on castconnections or apparatus.

D. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping.Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING23 05 17 - 1

SECTION 23 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe sleeves.

B. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems.


A. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation andBlanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2016.

B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems;2013a (Reapproved 2017).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor andwall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and supportdetails, and piping connections.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specifiedthis section.1. Minimum three years experience.2. Approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver and store sleeve and sleeve seals in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel sleeves if shipped loose.



1.06 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Vertical Piping:1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor.2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle set in silicon adhesive

around opening.4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring or square set in silicone

adhesive around penetration.

B. Pipe Passing Through Concrete Beam Flanges, except where Brass Pipe Sleeves areSpecified:1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.

C. Penetrations in concrete beam flanges are permitted but are prohibited through ribs orbeams without prior approval from the Architect.

D. Clearances:1. Provide allowance for insulated piping.2. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 1 inch greater than external;

pipe diameter.

2.02 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Modular/Mechanical Seal:1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe

and wall/casing opening.2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintaingradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and otherwork.

C. Install piping and pipe sleeves to allow for expansion and contraction without stressingpipe, joints, or connected equipment.

D. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, and partitions. Seal pipeincluding sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separationrequired.1. Aboveground Piping:

a. Pack solid using mineral fiber in compliance with ASTM C592.b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch where penetrations

occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.2. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material in compliance with

ASTM E814 in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire,smoke, and gases.

3. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with lead and oakum or mechanicallyexpandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components.

E. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and

exterior concrete walls at piping entrances into building.2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and

sleeve inner diameter or penetration diameter.3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between

sleeve and piping.5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



F. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joiningfittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation.

B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge thatmay have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING23 05 19 - 1

SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps.

B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.

C. Test plugs.

D. Static pressure gauges.

E. Filter gauges.




A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.

B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2014.

C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers;2014, with Editorial Revision (2017).

D. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and locationfor manufactured components.


A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for requiredrough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Manufacturers:1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc2. Moeller Instrument Company, Inc3. Omega Engineering, Inc4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdontube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, blackscale on white background.1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.2. Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter.3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.4. Scale: Psi.

2.02 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS

A. Gauge Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi.

B. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 150 psi.

C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch connections.

D. Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern.

2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc2. Omega Engineering, Inc3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish.1. Size: 9 inch scale.2. Window: Clear Lexan.3. Stem: 3/4 inch brass.4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.5. Calibration: Degrees F.



C. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminumadjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontalplane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.1. Size: 9 inch scale.2. Window: Clear Lexan.3. Stem: 3/4 inch NPT brass.4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.5. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.04 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS

A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions asrequired, and with cap and chain.

B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal airducts, with brass perforated stem.

2.05 TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outsidediameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200degrees F.

B. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 2-1/2 inch diameterpressure gauges, one gauge adapters with 1/8 inch probes, two 1 inch dialthermometers.

2.06 STATIC PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Manufacturers:1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com/#sle.3. Veris Industries: www.veris.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on whitebackground, front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.

C. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, frontrecalibration adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.

D. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4inch diameter tubing.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Provide one pressure gauge per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suctionand discharge of pump. Pipe to gauge.

C. Install pressure gauges with pulsation dampers. Provide gauge cock to isolate eachgauge. Provide siphon on gauges in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons toallow clearance from insulation.

D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipessmaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allowclearance from insulation.

E. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.

F. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers,coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.

G. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.

H. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largestappropriate scale.

I. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normaloperating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

J. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrateto zero.

K. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING23 05 23 - 1

SECTION 23 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Applications.

B. General requirements.

C. Globe valves.

D. Ball valves.

E. Butterfly valves.

F. Check valves.

G. Chainwheels.


A. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

B. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping.


A. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013 (Reaffirmed 2018).

B. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250;2015.

C. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24Metric/Inch Standard; 2017.

D. ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves; 2017.

E. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.

F. ASME B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End; 2017.

G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.



H. ASME BPVC-IX - Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and FuzingProcedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators - WeldingBrazing and Fusing Qualifications; 2019.

I. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, andPipe Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2019).

J. ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable forFusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service; 2018.

K. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings;2017.

L. MSS SP-45 - Bypass and Drain Connections; 2003 (Reaffirmed 2008).

M. MSS SP-68 - High Pressure Butterfly Valves with Offset Design; 2017.

N. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2018.

O. MSS SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service;2010a.

P. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013.

Q. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.

R. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved andFlared Ends; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information.Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and pipingconnections.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completedin Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.


A. Manufacturer:1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.



2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, withnot less than three years of documented experience.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open

position.2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion.3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange

faces.4. Adjust globe, gate, and angle valves to the closed position to avoid clattering.5. Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position.6. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt.

a. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.b. Maintain caps in place until installation.

2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.a. Store valves indoors in dry environment.b. Store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures when indoor storage is not

an option.

C. Exercise the following precautions for handling:1. Handle large valves with sling, modified to avoid damage to exposed parts.2. Avoid the use of operating handles or stems as rigging or lifting points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on drawings:1. Throttling (Hydronic): Butterfly, Ball, and Globe.2. Isolation (Shutoff): Butterfly and Ball.3. Swing Check (Pump Outlet):

a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Bronze with bronze disc.b. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger: Iron with lever and weight, lever and spring,

center-guided metal, or center-guided with resilient seat.4. Dead-End: Butterfly, single-flange (lug) type.

B. Substitutions of valves with higher CWP classes or SWP ratings for same valve typesare permitted when specified CWP ratings or SWP classes are not available.



C. Required Valve End Connections for Non-Wafer Types:1. Steel Pipe:

a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends.b. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger: Grooved ends.

2. Copper Tube:a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends (Exception: Solder-joint valve-ends).b. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger: Grooved ends.

D. Chilled Water Valves:1. 2 NPS and Smaller, Brass and Bronze Valves:

a. Threaded ends.b. Ball: Full port, two piece, brass trim.c. Swing Check: Bronze disc, Class.d. Globe: Bronze disc, Class 125.

2. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger, Iron Valves:a. 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Flanged ends.b. Butterfly: High performance, single flange, Class 150.c. Swing Check: Metal seats, Class 125.d. Swing Check with Closure Control: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, lever and spring,

Class 125.e. Globe: Class 125.

E. Heating Hot Water Valves:1. 2 NPS and Smaller, Brass and Bronze Valves:

a. Threaded ends.b. Ball: Full port, two piece, brass trim.c. Swing Check: Bronze disc, Class 125.d. Globe: Bronze disc, Class 125.

2. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger, Iron Valves:a. 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Flanged ends.b. Ball: 2-1/2 NPS to 10 NPS, Class 150.c. Butterfly: High performance, single flange, Class 150.d. Swing Check: Metal seats, Class 125.e. Swing Check: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, lever and spring closure control, Class

125.f. Globe: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, Class 125.


A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required forsystem pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.



C. Valve Actuator Types:1. Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types.2. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS and smaller.3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator, of

size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"Article.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: Provide 2 NPS stem extensions and the following features:1. Gate Valves: Rising stem.2. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal ordisturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: Extended neck.4. Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed.

E. Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed.

F. Valve-End Connections:1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1.2. Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.3. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 NPS through 24 NPS: ASME B16.5.4. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18.

G. General ASME Compliance:1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME

B16.34.2. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9.

H. Bronze Valves:1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material.2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

J. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer.

2.03 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:.1. Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 1.2. Body: Bronze; ASTM B62, with integral seat and screw in bonnet.3. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.4. Stem and Disc: Bronze or PTFE.5. Packing: Asbestos free.

a. Handwheel: Malleable iron.



b. Manufacturers:1) Apollo Valves2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.04 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:, and Class 250: CWP Rating: 500 psig:.1. Comply with MSS SP-85, Type I.2. Body: Gray iron; ASTM A126, with bolted bonnet.3. Ends: Flanged.4. Trim: Bronze.5. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.6. Operator: Handwheel or chainwheel.7. Manufacturers:

a. Apollo Valvesb. Ferguson Enterprises Incc. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.05 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two Piece, Full Port and Regular Port with Stainless Steel Trim:1. Comply with MSS SP-110.2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.4. Body: Forged brass.5. Ends: Threaded.6. Seats: PTFE or TFE.7. Stem: Stainless Steel.8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.9. Manufacturers:


2.06 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two Piece, Regular Port and Full Port with Bronze or Brass Trim:1. Comply with MSS SP-110.2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.4. Body: Bronze.5. Ends: Threaded.6. Seats: PTFE .



7. Stem: Bronze or brass.8. Ball: Chrome plated brass.9. Manufacturers:

a. Apollo Valvesb. Viega LLCc. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.07 CARBON STEEL BALL VALVES

A. Class 300, Full Port, Stainless Steel Trim:1. Comply with MSS SP-72.2. CWP Rating: 720 psig.3. Body: Carbon steel, ASTM A216/A216M, Type WCB.4. Ends: Flanged.5. Seats: PTFE.6. Stem: Stainless steel.7. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.8. Manufacturers:

a. Apollo Valvesb. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.08 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Split Body, Full Port:1. Comply with MSS SP-72.2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Body: ASTM A126, gray iron.4. Ends: Flanged.5. Seats: PTFE.6. Stem: Stainless steel.7. Ball: Stainless steel.8. Manufacturers:


2.09 HIGH-PERFORMANCE SINGLE FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Lug type: Bi-directional dead end service without downstream flange.1. Comply with MSS SP-68.2. Class 150: CWP Rating: 285 psig, and Class 300: CWP Rating: 720 psig at 100

degrees F.3. Body: Provide carbon steel, cast iron, ductile Iron, or stainless steel.



4. Seat: Metal or reinforced PTFE.5. Offset stem: Stainless steel.6. Disc: Carbon steel.7. Manufacturers:


2.10 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) and Class 150: CWP Rating: 300 psig(2070 kPa).1. Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 3.2. Body Design: Horizontal flow.3. Body Material: Bronze, ASTM B62.4. Ends: Threaded.5. Disc: Bronze.6. Manufacturers:


2.11 IRON, FLANGED END SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) with Metal Seats.1. Comply with MSS SP-71, Type I.2. Design: Clear or full waterway with flanged ends.3. Body: Gray iron with bolted bonnet in accordance with ASTM A126.4. Trim: Bronze.5. Disc Holder: Bronze.6. Disc: PTFE or TFE.7. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valves2. Ferguson Enterprises Inc3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.12 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125:1. Comply with MSS SP-71, Type I.2. 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.4. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.5. Ends: Flanged.



6. Trim: Bronze.7. Gasket: Asbestos free.8. Closer Control: Factory installed, exterior lever, and spring or weight.9. Manufacturers:


2.13 CHAINWHEELS

A. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.2. Attachment: For connection to ball and butterfly valve stems.3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron include zinc coating.4. Chain: Hot-dip galvanized steel. Sized to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads andflanges, are completely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could resultin leakage.

B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.

C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and withoutdefects that could compromise effectiveness.

D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenancewhile maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing.

B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above centerof piping, maintaining unimpeded stem movement.

C. Install check valves where necessary to maintain direction of flow as follows:1. Swing Check: Install horizontal maintaining hinge pin level.

D. Provide chainwheels on operators for valves 4 NPS and larger where located 96 NPS ormore above finished floor, terminating 60 NPS above finished floor.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, piping, and other HVAC/hydronicwork.


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatingson Iron and Steel Products; 2017.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron andSteel Hardware; 2016a.

C. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General -Purpose Piping; 2014.

D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

E. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999,with Editorial Revision (2018).

F. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron andSteel; 2019.

G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials; 2016.

I. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

J. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and Installation; 2018.

K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets forchannel (strut) framing systems, nonpenetrating rooftop supports, post-installedconcrete and masonry anchors, and thermal insulated pipe supports.

C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials ormethods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.1. Application of protective inserts, saddles, and shields at pipe hangers for each type

of insulation and hanger.


A. Comply with applicable building code.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Comply with MSS SP-58.2. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of plumbing work.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,

where applicable.4. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select

in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shockloads where applicable.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supportsunless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environmentwhere installed.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless

otherwise indicated.



b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainlesssteel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with

ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metalchannel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required forfield-assembly of supports.1. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporationb. Ferguson Enterprises Incc. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Incd. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings,

accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.2. Provide factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated

fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.3. Comply with MFMA-4.4. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

5. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.6. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.

C. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.b. Piping up to 1 inch (27 mm) nominal: 1/4 inch diameter.c. Piping larger than 1 inch (27 mm) nominal: 3/8 inch diameter.d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Pipes: 3/8 inch diameter.

D. Thermal Insulated Pipe Supports:1. General Construction and Requirements:

a. Insulated pipe supports to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locationson pipe requiring insulation or additional support.

b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/smoke developed indexof 5/30, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

c. Pipe supports to be provided for nominally sized, 1/2 inch to 30 inch ironpipes.

d. Insulation inserts to consist of rigid polyisocyanurate (urethane) insulationsurrounded by a 360 degree, PVC jacketing.

2. PVC Jacket:a. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided with a ball bearing hinge and

locking seam.b. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.



c. Maximum Service Temperature: 200 degrees F.d. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.0071 perm inch, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96/E96M.e. Thickness: 60 mil.f. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

3. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided at the hanger points and guidelocations on pipes requiring insulation as indicated on drawings.

E. Pipe Supports:1. Liquid Temperatures Up To 122 degrees F:

a. Overhead Support: MSS SP-58 Types 1, 3 through 12.b. Support From Below: MSS SP-58 Types 35 through 38.

2. Operating Temperatures from 122 to 446 degrees F:a. Overhead Support: MSS SP-58 Type 1 or 3 through 12, with appropriate

saddle of MSS SP-58 Type 40 for insulated pipe.b. Roller Support: MSS SP-58 Types 41 or 43 through 46, with appropriate

saddle of MSS SP-58 Type 39 for insulated pipe.c. Sliding Support: MSS SP-58 Types 35 through 38.

F. Beam Clamps: MSS SP-58 Types 19 through 23, 25 or 27 through 30 based onrequired load.1. Material: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel or ASTM A181/A181M forged steel.2. Provide clamps with hardened steel cup-point set screws and lock-nuts for

anchoring in place.

G. Riser Clamps:1. Provide copper plated clamps for copper tubing support.2. For insulated pipe runs, provide two bolt-type clamps designed for installation

under insulation.

H. Offset Pipe Clamps: Double-leg design two-piece pipe clamp.

I. Insulation Clamps: Two bolt-type clamps designed for installation under insulation.

J. Pipe Hangers: For a given pipe run, use hangers of the same type and material.1. Material: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; or carbon steel, ASTM A36/A36M.2. Provide coated or plated hangers to isolate steel hangers from dissimilar metal tube

or pipe.

K. Nonpenetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs:1. Manufacturers:

a. Anvil Internationalb. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporationc. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



2. Provide steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber base that rest on top of roofingmembrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetratingthe roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

3. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation ofroofing assembly.

4. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type asindicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

5. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supportedcomponent to top of roofing.

L. Pipe Shields for Insulated Piping:1. General Construction and Requirements:

a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723.b. Shields Material: UV-resistant polypropylene with glass fill.c. Maximum Insulated Pipe Outer Diameter: 12-5/8 inch.d. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.e. Maximum Service Temperature: 178 degrees F.f. Pipe shields to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe

requiring insulation or additional support.

M. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and

fastener types indicated for the specified applications.2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.5. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.6. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.7. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts

specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.a. Comply with MFMA-4.b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support frompiping, ductwork, conduit, or other systems.

C. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support fromsuspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support fromroof deck.

E. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval ofStructural Engineer.

F. Provide thermal insulated pipe supports complete with hangers and accessories. Installthermal insulated pipe supports during the installation of the piping system.

G. Equipment Support and Attachment:1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to

support equipment as required.2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted

on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp

locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it

relies on its own weight for support.

H. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer-provided closure strips to inhibit concreteseepage during concrete pour.

I. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

J. Remove temporary supports.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Vibration isolation requirements.

B. Vibration isolators.


A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and OtherStructures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASCE 19 - Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings; 2016.

C. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; Most RecentEdition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

D. FEMA 412 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment; 2002.

E. FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment; 2004.

F. FEMA 414 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe; 2004.

G. FEMA E-74 - Reducing the Risks of Nonstructural Earthquake Damage; 2012.

H. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. ICC-ES AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testingof Nonstructural Components; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2015).

J. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

K. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems;2008.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate selection and arrangement of vibration isolation and/or seismic control

components with the actual equipment to be installed.



2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materialsrequired for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mountingsurfaces at the installed locations.

4. Seismic Controls:a. Coordinate the arrangement of seismic restraints with piping, conduit,

equipment, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or byothers.

b. Coordinate the work with other trades to accommodate relative positioning ofessential and nonessential components in consideration of seismic interaction.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete

has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Documents: Prepare and submit all information required for plan review andpermitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans,details, and calculations.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets forproducts, including materials, fabrication details, dimensions, and finishes.1. Vibration Isolators: Include rated load capacities and deflections; include

information on color coding or other identification methods for spring elementload capacities.


A. Comply with applicable building code.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the productsspecified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Design and provide vibration isolation systems to reduce vibration transmission tosupporting structure from vibration-producing HVAC equipment and/or HVACconnections to vibration-isolated equipment.

B. Comply with applicable general recommendations of ASHRAE (HVACA), where notin conflict with other specified requirements:

C. General Requirements:1. Select vibration isolators to provide required static deflection.2. Select vibration isolators for uniform deflection based on distributed operating

weight of actual installed equipment.3. Select seismic type vibration isolators to comply with seismic design requirements,

including conditions of equipment seismic certification where applicable.4. Select vibration isolators for outdoor equipment to comply with wind design

requirements.5. Select vibration-isolated equipment support bases and associated vibration

isolators to provide minimum 2-inch operating clearance beneath base unlessotherwise indicated.

D. Equipment Isolation: As indicated on drawings.

E. Piping Isolation:1. Provide vibration isolators for piping supports:

a. Located in equipment rooms.b. Located within 50 feet of connected vibration-isolated equipment and

pressure-regulating valve (PRV) stations.c. For piping over 2 inch located below or within 50 feet of noise-sensitive areas

indicated.2. Minimum Static Deflection:

a. First Three Supports Closest to Isolated Equipment: Same as static deflectionof equipment; maximum of 2 inch deflection required.

b. Remainder of Supports: 0.75 inch deflection unless otherwise indicated.3. Suspended Piping, Nonseismic Applications: Use resilient material isolator

hangers, spring isolator hangers, or combination resilient material/spring isolatorhangers.

4. Floor-Mounted Piping, Nonseismic Applications: Use open (unhoused) springisolators.

5. Use modular seal or approved resilient material where vibration-isolated pipingpenetrates building elements (e.g., walls, floors) arranged to prevent vibrationtransmission to structure.



F. Thrust Restraint Applications:1. Use thrust restraints to resist horizontal motion due to thrust for fan heads,

suspended fans, and base-mounted and suspended air handling equipmentoperating at 2.0 inches wg or greater total static pressure.

2. Minimum Static Deflection: Same as static deflection of equipment.3. Limit lateral movement to 0.25 inch or less unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Vibration Isolators:

a. Kinetics Noise Control, Incb. Mason Industriesc. Vibration Eliminator Company, Incd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Source Limitations: Furnish vibration-isolators and associated accessoriesproduced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

B. General Requirements:1. Resilient Materials for Vibration Isolators: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant.2. Spring Elements for Spring Isolators:

a. Color code or otherwise identify springs to indicate load capacity.b. Lateral Stability: Minimum lateral stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio of 0.8.c. Designed to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve

over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.d. Designed to provide additional travel to solid of not less than 50 percent of

rated deflection at rated load.e. Selected to provide designed deflection of not less than 75 percent of specified

deflection.f. Selected to function without undue stress or overloading.

C. Vibration Isolators for Nonseismic Applications:1. Open (Unhoused) Spring Isolators:

a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing,laterally stable steel spring(s) without a housing.

b. Bottom Load Plate: Nonskid, molded, elastomeric isolator material or steelwith nonskid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions for bolting to supportingstructure as required.

c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supportedequipment.

2. Resilient Material Isolator Hangers, Nonseismic:a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod

suspension system utilizing elastomeric (e.g., neoprene, rubber) or fiberglassisolator material for the lower hanger rod connection.



3. Spring Isolator Hangers, Nonseismic:a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod

suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stablesteel spring(s) in series with an elastomeric element for the lower hanger rodconnection.

b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short-circuiting of isolation.

4. Combination Resilient Material/Spring Isolator Hangers, Nonseismic:a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod

suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stablesteel spring(s) for the lower hanger rod connection and elastomeric (e.g.,neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material for the upper hanger rodconnection.

b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short-circuiting of isolation.

5. Thrust Restraints:a. Description: Assembly utilizing free-standing, laterally stable steel spring

designed for resisting horizontal motion due to thrust (e.g., air pressure from afan), and intended for installation in pairs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive vibration isolation and/or seismiccontrol components and associated attachments.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC(ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

C. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

D. Install felxible piping connections to provide sufficient slack for vibration isolationrelative displacements as indicated or as required.

E. Vibration Isolation Systems:1. Spring Isolators:



a. Position equipment at operating height; provide temporary blocking asrequired.

b. Lift equipment free of isolators prior to lateral repositioning to avoid damageto isolators.

c. Level equipment by adjusting isolators gradually in sequence to raiseequipment uniformly such that excessive weight or stress is not placed on anysingle isolator.

2. Isolator Hangers:a. Use precompressed isolator hangers where required to facilitate installation

and prevent damage to equipment utility connection provisions.b. Locate isolator hangers at top of hanger rods in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.3. Thrust Restraints:

a. Adjust restraint movement under normal operating static pressure.4. Clean debris from beneath vibration-isolated equipment that could cause

short-circuiting of isolation.5. Use elastomeric grommets for attachments where required to prevent

short-circuiting of isolation.6. Adjust isolators to be free of isolation short circuits during normal operation.7. Do not overtighten fasteners such that resilient material isolator pads are

compressed beyond manufacturer's maximum recommended deflection.


A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect vibration isolation and/or seismic control components for damage and defects.

C. Vibration Isolation Systems:1. Verify isolator static deflections.2. Verify vibration isolation performance during normal operation; investigate

sources of isolation short circuits.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective vibration isolation and/or seismiccontrol components.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Adhesive-backed duct markers.

D. Stencils.

E. Pipe markers.

F. Ceiling tacks.


A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Identification painting.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015.

B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2017.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanicalidentification.

C. Unique identification for ethylene glycol and propylene glycol is required.

D. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

E. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.

B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.

C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.

D. Control Panels: Nameplates.

E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.

F. Ductwork: Nameplates.

G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.

H. Instrumentation: Tags.

I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.

J. Piping: Tags.

K. Pumps: Nameplates.

L. Relays: Tags.

M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.

N. Tanks: Nameplates.

O. Thermostats: Nameplates.

P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

2.02 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:1. Advanced Graphic Engraving, LLC2. Brimar Industries, Inc3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Letter Color: White.



C. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.

D. Background Color: Black.

E. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGS

A. Manufacturers:1. Advanced Graphic Engraving2. Brady Corporation3. Brimar Industries, Inc4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on lightcontrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter withsmooth edges.

D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.04 ADHESIVE-BACKED DUCT MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brimar Industries, Inc2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Material: High gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film 0.0032 inch; printed with UVand chemical resistant inks.

C. Style: Individual Label.

D. Color: Yellow/Black.

2.05 STENCILS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co3. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:



1. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4inch high letters.

2. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field,1-1/4 inch high letters.

3. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2inch high letters.

4. Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field,3-1/2 inch high letters.

5. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 23, semi-gloss enamel, colors complyingwith ASME A13.1.

2.06 PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation2. Brimar Industries, Inc3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fitaround pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrowand identification of fluid being conveyed.

D. Color code as follows:1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red3. Heating, Cooling, and Boiler Feedwater: Green with white letters.

2.07 CEILING TACKS

A. Manufacturers:1. Craftmark Pipe Markers2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

C. Color code as follows:1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 91 23 for stencil painting.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Applywith sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

F. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and

drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure orenclosure, and at each obstruction.

G. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identificationnumber and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side ofpenetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

H. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate incorner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems.

C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.


A. AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition;2016.

B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of BuildingHVAC Systems; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2017).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancingstandard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Submit to Architect.2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.3. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiencymeasurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece ofequipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to begathered for each.

c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct andpiping drawings during the process.

d. Final test report forms to be used.e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and

distribution.

C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.



1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenancemanuals.

3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date ofcalibration.

4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends areport format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.3. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced andcomplete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, includingfire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing andinspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified

in this section.2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.3. Certified by one of the following:

a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; uponcompletion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty.

b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org/#sle.

E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization asTAB agency.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure thefollowing conditions:



1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition

to final filters.5. Duct systems are clean of debris.6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.10. Air outlets are installed and connected.11. Duct system leakage is minimized.12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.13. Pumps are rotating correctly.14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent propersystem balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or

balanced.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supplysystems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent ofdesign to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent ofdesign.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowingsettings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.



C. Mark on drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements weretaken and cross reference the location in the final report.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or thatsuch disruption has been rectified.

E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectionalarea of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free fromobjectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments donot create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by ductinternal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changesrequired. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outletor inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coilpressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percentloading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers fordesign conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers tocheck leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extremeconditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling,and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.



L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems toprovide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inchespositive static pressure near the building entries.

M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow settingindicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation forautomatic variable air volume temperature control.

3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages todetermine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are notinstalled, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transferelements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transferelements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperaturedifferential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transferelements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves,and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed forbalance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual systemparts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to otherparts.

3.08 SCOPE

A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:1. Plumbing Pumps.2. HVAC Pumps.3. Water Tube Boilers.4. Air Cooled Water Chillers.5. Air Coils.6. Air Handling Units.7. Fans.8. Air Inlets and Outlets.



3.09 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Electric Motors:1. Manufacturer.2. Model/Frame.3. HP/BHP.4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.5. RPM.6. Service factor.7. Starter size, rating, heater elements.8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

B. V-Belt Drives:1. Identification/location.2. Required driven RPM.3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.4. Belt, size and quantity.5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual.

C. Pumps:1. Identification/number.2. Manufacturer.3. Size/model.4. Impeller.5. Service.6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP.7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP.8. Discharge pressure.9. Suction pressure.10. Total operating head pressure.11. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures.12. Shut off, total head pressure.

D. Combustion Equipment:1. Boiler manufacturer.2. Model number.3. Serial number.4. Firing rate.5. Overfire draft.6. Gas meter timing dial size.7. Gas meter time per revolution.8. Gas pressure at meter outlet.



9. Gas flow rate.10. Heat input.11. Burner manifold gas pressure.12. Percent carbon monoxide (CO).13. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2).14. Percent oxygen (O2).15. Percent excess air.16. Flue gas temperature at outlet.17. Ambient temperature.18. Net stack temperature.19. Percent stack loss.20. Percent combustion efficiency.21. Heat output.

E. Chillers:1. Identification/number.2. Manufacturer.3. Capacity.4. Model number.5. Serial number.6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual.7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual.8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual.9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual.

F. Heat Exchangers:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Model number.6. Serial number.7. Steam pressure, design and actual.8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual.9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual.10. Primary water flow, design and actual.11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual.12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual.13. Secondary water flow, design and actual.14. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual.

G. Cooling Coils:1. Identification/number.2. Location.



3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Air flow, design and actual.6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual.9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.10. Water flow, design and actual.11. Water pressure drop, design and actual.12. Entering water temperature, design and actual.13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.15. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

H. Heating Coils:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Air flow, design and actual.6. Water flow, design and actual.7. Water pressure drop, design and actual.8. Entering water temperature, design and actual.9. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.10. Entering air temperature, design and actual.11. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.12. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

I. Air Moving Equipment:1. Location.2. Manufacturer.3. Model number.4. Serial number.5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.6. Air flow, specified and actual.7. Return air flow, specified and actual.8. Outside air flow, specified and actual.9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.10. Inlet pressure.11. Discharge pressure.12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.13. Number of Belts/Make/Size.14. Fan RPM.



J. Return Air/Outside Air:1. Identification/location.2. Design air flow.3. Actual air flow.4. Design return air flow.5. Actual return air flow.6. Design outside air flow.7. Actual outside air flow.8. Return air temperature.9. Outside air temperature.10. Required mixed air temperature.11. Actual mixed air temperature.12. Design outside/return air ratio.13. Actual outside/return air ratio.

K. Exhaust Fans:1. Location.2. Manufacturer.3. Model number.4. Serial number.5. Air flow, specified and actual.6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.7. Inlet pressure.8. Discharge pressure.9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.10. Number of Belts/Make/Size.11. Fan RPM.

L. Duct Traverses:1. System zone/branch.2. Duct size.3. Area.4. Design velocity.5. Design air flow.6. Test velocity.7. Test air flow.8. Duct static pressure.9. Air temperature.10. Air correction factor.

M. Duct Leak Tests:1. Description of ductwork under test.2. Duct design operating pressure.



3. Duct design test static pressure.4. Duct capacity, air flow.5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor.6. Test apparatus:

a. Blower.b. Orifice, tube size.c. Orifice size.d. Calibrated.

7. Test static pressure.8. Test orifice differential pressure.9. Leakage.

N. Flow Measuring Stations:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Size.4. Manufacturer.5. Model number.6. Serial number.7. Design Flow rate.8. Design pressure drop.9. Actual/final pressure drop.10. Actual/final flow rate.11. Station calibrated setting.

O. Air Distribution Tests:1. Air terminal number.2. Room number/location.3. Terminal type.4. Terminal size.5. Area factor.6. Design velocity.7. Design air flow.8. Test (final) velocity.9. Test (final) air flow.10. Percent of design air flow.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 DUCT INSULATION23 07 13 - 1

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct liner.


A. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.


A. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible ElastomericCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016.

B. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2020.

C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2019.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

E. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic PolymericMaterials to Fungi; 2015.

F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials andthickness for each service, and locations.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of thetype specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer'sidentification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, andmechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 DUCT LINER

A. Manufacturers:1. Armacell LLC2. CertainTeed Corporation3. Johns Manville4. Knauf Insulation5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Elastomeric Foam Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulationcomplying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1, in sheet form.1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 180 degrees F.3. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21.4. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.28 at 75 degrees F.5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:



a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30.b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.40.c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.50.d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.60.

6. Erosion Resistance: Does not show evidence of breaking away, flaking off, ordelamination at velocities of 10,000 fpm per ASTM C1071.

7. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.Comply with ASTM C916.

D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Test ductwork for design pressure prior to applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Insulated Ducts Conveying Air Below Ambient Temperature:1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.4. Insulate entire system, including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints.

C. Insulated Ducts Conveying Air Above Ambient Temperature:1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends

of insulation.

D. Slope exterior ductwork to shed water.

E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for

spacing.3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air-flow.Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 HVAC PIPING INSULATION23 07 19 - 1

SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.

C. Jackets and accessories.

D. Engineered wall outlet seals and refrigerant piping insulation protection.


A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

B. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Painting insulation jacket.

C. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

D. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.


A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate; 2014.

B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate (Metric); 2014.

C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;2007 (Reapproved 2013).

D. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible ElastomericCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016.

E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2019.

F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact withAustenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2018).

G. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and ThermoplasticElastomers--Tension; 2016.



H. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998(Reapproved 2018).

I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials; 2016.

K. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage ThroughExterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure DifferencesAcross the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000(Reapproved 2016).

M. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.

N. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic PolymericMaterials to Fungi; 2015.

O. ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatusfor Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2013.

P. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials andthickness for each service, and locations.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.


A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness.




A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturers:1. CertainTeed Corporation:2. Johns Manville Corporation; Micro-Lok HP Pipe Insulation:3. Knauf Insulation; Earthwool 1000 Degree Pipe Insulation:4. Owens Corning Corporation; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation ASJ:5. Owens Corning Corporation; VaporWick Pipe Insulation:6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible, withwicking material to transport condensed water to the outside of the system forevaporation to the atmosphere.1. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

D. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grainadhered to jacket.1. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F.2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

E. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminizedfilm; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of0.02 perm-inches.

F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.



G. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.1. Manufacturers:

a. Foster Brand.b. Childers Brand.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

H. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.1. Manufacturers:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

I. Fibrous Glass Fabric:1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville.b. Knauf Inssulation.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

J. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:1. Manufacturers:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

K. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible withinsulation, black color.1. Manufacturers:

a. Foster Brand.b. Childers Braand.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:1. Aeroflex USA, Inc; Aerocel Ultra-Low Perm (ULP)2. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex3. K-Flex USA LLC; K-Flex Titan4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying withASTM C534/C534M Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 180 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.



2.04 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation; Zestonb. P.I.C Plastics, Inc..c. Speedline Corp..d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective

liner.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

2.05 ENGINEERED WALL OUTLET SEALS AND REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATIONPROTECTION

A. Manufacturers:1. Airex Manufacturing, Inc2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Pipe Penetration Wall Seal: Seals HVAC piping wall penetrations with compressiongasket wall mounted rigid plastic outlet cover.1. Wall Outlet Size, Stucco and Masonry Applications: 7-1/2 inch wide by 10 inch

high.a. Elastomeric Sleeve Diameter: 1-11/16 inch.

2. Outlet Cover Color: Gray.3. Water Penetration: Comply with ASTM E331.4. Air Leakage: Comply with ASTM E283.5. Air Permeance: Comply with ASTM E2178.

C. Insulation Protection System: Refrigerant piping insulation PVC protective cover.1. PVC Insulation Cover Color: Black with full-length velcro fastener.



2. Weatherization and Ultraviolet Exposure Protection: Comply with ASTM G153.3. Water/Vapor Permeability: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M.4. Anti-Fungal and Anti-Microbial Resistance: Comply with ASTM G21.5. Flame Spread and Smoke Development Rating of 24/450: Comply with ASTM

E84 or UL 723.6. Carbon Arc Light Exposure: Comply with ASTM G153.7. Tensile Strength After UV Exposure and Water Immersion: Comply with ASTM

D412.8. Water Absorption of Plastics: Comply with ASTM D570.9. Adhesive free.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Test piping for design pressure, liquid tightness, and continuity prior to applyinginsulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C. Insulated Pipes Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:1. Insulate entire system, including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible

connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

D. Glass Fiber Insulated Pipes Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied; secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material andthickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive orPVC fitting covers.

E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges andunions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions atequipment.

G. Glass Fiber Insulated Pipes Conveying Fluids Above Ambient Temperature:

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied, orfield-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips withpressure-sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness asadjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

H. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section07 84 00.

J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feetabove finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.

K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valveswith insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glassmesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams locatedon bottom side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish forflexible elastomeric cellular insulation without jacketing.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC23 08 00 - 1

SECTION 23 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. See Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements for overall objectives;comply with the requirements of Section 01 91 13.

B. This section covers the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning; eachsubcontractor or installer responsible for the installation of a particular system orequipment item to be commissioned is responsible for the commissioning activitiesrelating to that system or equipment item.

C. The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioningactivities and provides Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures forContractor's use.

D. The entire HVAC system is to be commissioned, including commissioning activities forthe following specific items:1. Control system.2. Major and minor equipment items.3. Piping systems and equipment.4. Ductwork and accessories.5. Sound control devices.6. Variable frequency drives.7. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract

Documents as requiring commissioning.

E. The Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in this sectionare in addition to, not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections.


A. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC.

B. Section 23 09 13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.




A. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 - The HVAC&R Technical Requirements for theCommissioning Process; 2007, with Errata (2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes tocontrol system documentation made during programming and setup; revise andresubmit when substantial changes are made.

B. Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approval ofCommissioning Authority.

C. HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentationspecified elsewhere, compile and organize at minimum the following data on thecontrol system:1. Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions,

features, modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of thisspecification and other features of this system. Provide an index and clear table ofcontents. Include the detailed technical manual for programming and customizingcontrol loops and algorithms.

2. Full as-built set of control drawings.3. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment.4. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list submittal,

include a listing of all rooms with the following information for each room:a. Floor.b. Room number.c. Room name.d. Air handler unit ID.e. Reference drawing number.f. Air terminal unit tag ID.g. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID.h. Minimum air flow rate.i. Maximum air flow rate.

5. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of thesystem.

6. Full as-built print out of software program.7. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility.8. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and

HVAC drawings with their control system designations.9. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods

by sensor type, etc.10. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc.



11. Warranty requirements.12. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not

commissioning tests).13. Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of the

following data in the given order:a. Sequences of operation.b. Control drawings.c. Points lists.d. Controller and/or module data.e. Thermostats and timers.f. Sensors and DP switches.g. Valves and valve actuators.h. Dampers and damper actuators.i. Program setups (software program printouts).

D. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements.1. Submit updated version of control system documentation, for inclusion with

operation and maintenance data.2. Show actual locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and

building pressure) and air-flow stations on project record drawings.

E. Draft Training Plan: In addition to requirements specified in Section 01 79 00, include:1. Follow the recommendations of ASHRAE Guideline 1.1.2. Control system manufacturer's recommended training.3. Demonstration and instruction on function and overrides of any local packaged

controls not controlled by the HVAC control system.

F. Training Manuals: See Section 01 79 00 for additional requirements.1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual

from the O&M manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkoutand required functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testingequipment will NOT become the property of Owner.

B. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments arespecific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required inorder to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, andinstruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, andinstruments are to become the property of Owner.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the PrefunctionalChecklists and Functional Test Procedures.

B. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.

C. Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushing andcleaning, equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completionfor use by the Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.

D. Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushing,cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing willoccur; when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delayconstruction notify ahead of time and be proactive in seeing that the CommissioningAuthority has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute thecommissioning process.

E. Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation duringeach working day of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.

F. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measurements andair balancing; close with an approved plug.

G. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with Contract Documents.

3.02 INSPECTING AND TESTING - GENERAL

A. Submit startup plans, startup reports, and Prefunctional Checklists for each item ofequipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

B. Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each item ofequipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

C. Provide two-way radios for use during the testing.

D. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against

the control system readout.2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and

adjust output zero signal as required.



4. Command valve/damper open; verify position is full open and adjust output signalas required.

5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or

add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).7. Closure for Heating Coil Valves - Normally Open:

a. Set heating setpoint 20 degrees F above room temperature.b. Observe valve open.c. Remove control air or power from the valve and verify that the valve stem and

actuator position do not change.d. Restore to normal.e. Set heating setpoint to 20 degrees F below room temperature.f. Observe the valve close.g. Restore to normal.

8. Closure for Cooling Coil Valves - Normally Closed:a. Set cooling setpoint 20 degrees F above room temperature.b. Observe the valve close.c. Remove control air or power from the valve and verify that the valve stem and

actuator position do not change.d. Restore to normal.e. Set cooling setpoint to 20 degrees F below room temperature.f. Observe valve open.g. Restore to normal.

E. Coil Valve Leak Check:1. Method 1 - Water Temperature With 2-Way Valve:

a. Calibrate water temperature sensors on each side of coil to be within 0.2degree F of each other.

b. Turn off air handler fans, close outside air dampers. Keep pump running.Make sure appropriate coil dampers are open.

c. Normally closed valves will close.d. Override normally open valves to the closed position.e. After 10 minutes observe water delta T across coil. If it is greater than 2

degrees F (, leakage is probably occurring.f. Reset valve stroke to close tighter.g. Repeat test until compliance is achieved.

F. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not by coils.1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

G. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extracost to Owner.



3.03 TAB COORDINATION

A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.

B. Coordinate commissioning schedule with TAB schedule.

C. Review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system towardcompleting TAB.

D. Provide all necessary unique instruments and instruct the TAB technicians in their use;such as handheld control system interface for setting terminal unit boxes, etc.

E. Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations, startup and componentFunctional Tests of the system completed and approved by the CommissioningAuthority prior to starting TAB.

F. Provide a qualified control system technician to operate the controls to assist the TABtechnicians or provide sufficient training for the TAB technicians to operate the systemwithout assistance.

3.04 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Prefunctional Checklists for control system components will require a signed and datedcertification that all system programming is complete as required to accomplish therequirements of Contract Documents and the detailed Sequences of Operationdocumentation submittal.

B. Do not start Functional Testing until all controlled components have themselves beensuccessfully Functionally Tested in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the FunctionalTesting of the control system as required by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration and trend logging ofcontrol points monitored by the control system.1. The scope of trend logging is partially specified; trend log up to 50 percent more

points than specified at no extra cost to Owner.2. Perform all trend logging specified in Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test

procedures.

E. Functionally Test integral or stand-alone controls in conjunction with the FunctionalTests of the equipment they are attached to, including any interlocks with otherequipment or systems; further testing during control system Functional Test is notrequired unless specifically indicated below.



F. Demonstrate the following to the Commissioning Authority during testing of controlledequipment; coordinate with commissioning of equipment.1. Setpoint changing features and functions.2. Sensor calibrations.

G. Demonstrate to the Commissioning Authority:1. That all specified functions and features are set up, debugged and fully operable.2. That scheduling features are fully functional and setup, including holidays.3. That all graphic screens and value readouts are completed.4. Correct date and time setting in central computer.5. That field panels read the same time as the central computer; sample 10 percent of

field panels; if any of those fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail testall remaining units at no extra cost to Owner.

6. Functionality of field panels using local operator keypads and local ports (plug-ins)using portable computer/keypad; demonstrate 100 percent of panels and 10 percentof ports; if any ports fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test allremaining units at no extra cost to Owner.

7. Power failure and battery backup and power-up restart functions.8. Global commands features.9. Security and access codes.10. Occupant over-rides (manual, telephone, key, keypad, etc.).11. O&M schedules and alarms.12. Occupancy sensors and controls.13. All control strategies and sequences not tested during controlled equipment testing.

H. If the control system, integral control components, or related equipment do not respondto changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, as specified andaccording to acceptable operating practice, under any of the conditions, sequences, ormodes tested, correct all systems, equipment, components, and software required at noadditional cost to Owner.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements.

B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submissionto Owner.

C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authorityfor review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submissionto Owner.



3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. See Section 01 79 00 for additional requirements.

B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC system to Owner' personnel; ifduring any demonstration, the system fails to perform in accordance with theinformation included in the O&M manual, stop demonstration, repair or adjust, andrepeat demonstration. Demonstrations may be combined with training sessions ifappropriate.

C. These demonstrations are in addition to, and not a substitute for, PrefunctionalChecklists and demonstrations to the Commissioning Authority during FunctionalTesting.

D. Provide classroom and hands-on training of Owner's designated personnel on operationand maintenance of the HVAC system, control system, and all equipment itemsindicated to be commissioned. Provide the following minimum durations of training:1. HVAC Control System: ____ hours.2. Chillers and System: ____ hours.3. Boilers and System: ____ hours.4. Chemical Treatment: ____ hours.5. Air Handling Units: ____ hours.6. Variable Speed Drives: ____ hours.

E. TAB Review: Instruct Owner's personnel for minimum ____ hours, after completion ofTAB, on the following:1. Review final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type.2. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may

affect the proper delivery of air or water.3. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps

that are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.4. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not

finished.5. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to

TAB.

F. HVAC Control System Training: Perform training in at least three phases:1. Phase 1 - Basic Control System: Provide minimum of ____ hours of actual

training on the control system itself. Upon completion of training, each attendee,using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operationsand describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.a. This training may be held on-site or at the manufacturer's facility.b. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system

installation.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Rectangle



c. For off-site training, Contractor shall pay expenses of up to two attendees.2. Phase 2 - Integrating with HVAC Systems: Provide minimum of ____ hours of

on-site, hands-on training after completion of Functional Testing. Includeinstruction on:a. The specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this facility and

specific instruction for operating the installed system, including interfaces withother systems, if any.

b. Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restartroutines, changing setpoints and alarms and other typical changed parameters,overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional controlstrategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies and set points thatif changed will adversely affect energy consumption, energy accounting,procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc.

c. Trend logging and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization,etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular andgraphically and printing trends; provide practice in setting up trend loggingand monitoring during training session.

d. Every display screen, allowing time for questions.e. Point database entry and modifications.

3. Phase 3 - Post-Occupancy: Six months after occupancy conduct minimum of ____hours of training. Tailor training session to questions and topics solicitedbeforehand from Owner. Also be prepared to address topics brought up andanswer questions concerning operation of the system.

G. Provide the services of manufacturer representatives to assist instructors wherenecessary.

H. Provide the services of the HVAC controls instructor at other training sessions, whenrequested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipmentbeing discussed.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



Contract No. HCC21002 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC23 09 00 - 1

SECTION 23 09 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation systemincluding all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessaryto perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. Allcomponents of the system – workstations, servers, application controllers, unitarycontrollers, etc. shall communicate using the BACnet protocol, as defined by ASHRAEStandard 135-2007, or EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ protocol, or Modbusprotocol.

B. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all necessary EthernetNetwork Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors,transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and otheraccessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring tofill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system.Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if theequipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with thevarious Contractors.

C. The BAS contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entirespecification to familiarize themselves with the equipment and system operation and toverify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided.

D. All interlocking wiring, wiring and installation of control devices associated with theequipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS system isfully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Ownerwill review and check out the system – see System Acceptance and Testing section ofthis document. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of thesystem and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

E. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of the system incoordination with the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’srepresentative.

F. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with allgoverning codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications arein conflict with governing codes, the Contractor, with guidance from the engineer, shallsubmit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet coderestrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code



requirements, the specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for allnecessary construction permits and licenses.


A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary to extend the existingdistrict wide Building Automation and Operating Temperature Control System utilizingDirect Digital Controls, pneumatic/electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shownon the drawings and as described herein. System must interface seamlessly with theexisting Schneider Electric BMS System. System Interface must include thefollowing:1. Campus wide Monitoring and Override Capability.2. Read status and analog value point information from the existing Campus wide

BAS.3. Command new subsystem points to a digital state or to an analog value from the

BAS.4. Incorporate all new subsystem points within the BAS for schedule, trend, energy

management routines, and graphic displays.5. Provide alarm annunciation for existing and new BAS system points at the existing

Server location.6. Trended data shall be stored in the common existing Server database. This shall

allow the data to be viewed or manipulated in common reports or charts.7. All point data from the existing and new Client systems shall be viewed and

manipulated through one common format utilizing the district wide Ethernet WANtherefore, from the user's perspective, interaction with either the existing or newclient systems shall be identical in every way.

B. In accordance with the scope of work, the system shall also provide a graphical,web-based, operator interface that allows for instant access to any system through astandard browser. The contractor must provide PC-based programming workstations,operator workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providingdistributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/outputpoints and processing/control functions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Visio Professional or AutoCAD software. Inaddition to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a CD containing the identicalinformation. Drawings shall be B size or larger.

B. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers andworkstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individualschematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference totheir associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate.



C. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software productsrequired by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station schedules shallindicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment.

D. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation,program listings, point lists, and a complete description of the graphics, reports, alarmsand configuration to be furnished with the workstation software. Information shall bebound or in a three ring binder with an index and tabs. Diagrams shall be on 11-inch by17-inch foldouts. If color has been used to differentiate information, the printed copiesshall be in color.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRE-APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the followingpre-qualified manufacturers:1. Electric Components

a. Schneider-Electric IA Field Devices2. Electronic Components

a. Schneider-Electric IA Field Devices3. Direct Digital Control Systems Devices:

a. Schneider Electric I/A BACnet, LON series installed by Control Systems, Inc.Hagerstown, MD (301-791-1166).

2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of Network

Server/Controllers (NSCs), a family of Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs),Administration and Programming Workstations (APWs), and Web-based OperatorWorkstations (WOWs). The BAS shall provide control, alarm detection,scheduling, reporting and information management for the entire facility, and WideArea Network (WAN) if applicable.

2. An Enterprise Level BAS shall consist of an Enterprise Server, which enablesmultiple NSCs (including all graphics, alarms, schedules, trends, programming,and configuration) to be accessible from a single Workstation simultaneously foroperations and engineering tasks.

3. The Enterprise Level BAS shall be able to host up to 250 servers, or NSCs,beneath it.

4. For Enterprise reporting capability and robust reporting capability outside of thetrend chart and listing ability of the Workstation, a Reports Server shall beinstalled on a Microsoft Windows based computer. The Reports Server can beinstalled on the same computer as the Enterprise Server.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



5. The system shall be designed with a top-level 10/100bT Ethernet network, usingthe BACnet/IP, LonWorks IP, and/or Modbus TCP protocol.

6. Modbus RTU/ASCII (and J-bus), Modbus TCP, BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP,LonTalk FTT-10A, and WebServices shall be native to the NSCs. There shall notbe a need to provide multiple NSCs to support all the network protocols, norshould there be a need to supply additional software to allow all three protocols tobe natively supported. A sub-network of SDCUs using the BACnet MS/TP,LonTalk FTT-10A, and/or Modbus RTU protocol shall connect the local,stand-alone controllers with Ethernet-level Network Server Controllers/IP Routers.

B. TCP/IP Level1. The TCP/IP layer connects all of the buildings on a single Wide Area Network

(WAN) isolated behind the campus firewall. Fixed IP addresses for connections tothe campus WAN shall be used for each device that connects to the WAN.

C. Fieldbus Level with Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs)1. The fieldbus layer shall support all of the following types of SDCUs:

a. BACnet SDCU requirements: The system shall consist of one or more BACnetMS/TP field buses managed by the Network Server Controller. Minimumspeed shall be 76.8kbps. The field bus layer consists of an RS485, tokenpassing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs)for operation of HVAC and lighting equipment. These devices shall conformto BACnet standard 135-2007. The NSCs shall be capable of at least twoBACnet MS/TP field buses for a total capability of 254 SDCUs per NSC.

b. LonWorks SDCU requirements: The system shall consist of one or moreLonWorks FTT-10A field buses managed by the Network Server Controller.Minimum speed shall be 76.8kbps. The field bus layer shall consist of up to64 Lonworks SDCUs using peer-to-peer, event-driven communication foroperation of HVAC and lighting equipment. If using I/A MNL controllersonly, you may have up to 127 SDCUs per field bus level.

c. Modbus SDCU requirements: The system shall consist of one or moreModbus RTU (RS-485 or RS-232) field buses managed by the Network ServerController. The field bus layer shall consist of up to 31 SDCUs for operationof HVAC, power metering, and lighting equipment. If utilizing Modbus TCP,the field bus layer shall consist of up to 100 SDCUs for operation of HVAC,power metering, and lighting equipment. The NSCs shall be capable of atleast two Modbus RTU field buses for a total capability of 62 SDCUs perNSC.

2.03 NETWORK SERVER CONTROLLERS (NSC)

A. Network Router Controllers shall combine both network routing functions, controlfunctions, and server functions into a single unit.



B. The BACnet NSC shall be classified as a “native” BACnet device, supporting theBACnet Network Server Controller (B-BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesserprofile such as B-SA are not acceptable. NSCs shall be tested and certified by theBACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as BACnet Network Server Controllers (B-BC).

C. The Network Server Controller shall provide the interface between the LAN or WANand the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over thecontrol devices connected to the NRS.

D. The NSCs shall be capable of whitelisting IPs to restrict access to a pre-defined list ofhosts or devices.

E. They shall also contain graphics, trends, trend charts, alarm views, and other similarpresentation objects that can be served to workstations or web-based interfaces. Asufficient number of NSCs shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of thisspecification and the attached point list.

F. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:1. Calendar functions2. Scheduling3. Trending4. Alarm monitoring and routing5. Time synchronization by means of an Internet site including automatic

synchronization6. Native integration of LonWorks controller data and Modbus controller data or

BACnet controller data and Modbus controller data7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices

G. Hardware Specifications1. Memory:

a. The operating system of the controller, application programs, and all otherportions of the configuration database, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASHmemory. Servers/Controllers shall contain enough memory for the currentapplication, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additionalfree memory.

2. Each NRC shall provide the following on-board hardware for communication:a. One 10/100bT Ethernet for communication to Workstations, other NRCs and

onto the Internetb. Two RS-485 ports for communication to BACnet MSTP bus or serial

Modbus (software configurable)c. One TP/FT port for communication to LonWorks devices.d. One Device USB porte. Two host USB Ports

3. The NSC shall conform to a small footprint no larger than 100W x 125H x 75Dmm (3.94W x 4.92H x 2.95D in).



2.04 DDC SENSORS AND POINT HARDWARE

A. Temperature Sensors1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries or equal.2. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F

over a range of –30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurateto +/- 0.5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F.

3. Room Sensor: Standard space sensors shall be available in an (off white) (black)enclosure made of high impact ABS plastic for mounting on a standard electricalbox. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric MN Seriesa. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate an LCD display

for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectableparameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpointsdirectly from the sensor.

4. Duct Probe Sensor: Sensing element shall be fully encapsulated in potting materialwithin a stainless steel probe. Useable in air handling applications where the coilor duct area is less than 14 square feet. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric ETDSeries

5. Duct Averaging Sensor: Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which arelarger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube shall contain at least onethermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 6 feet. The averagingsensor shall be constructed of rigid or flexible copper tubing. Basis of Design:Schneider Electric ETA Series

6. Pipe Immersion Sensor: Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement oftemperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerantapplications. Provide sensor probe length suitable for application. Provide eachsensor with a corresponding pipe-mounted sensor well, unless indicated otherwise.Sensor wells shall be stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees Fand 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. Basis of Design: SchneiderElectric ETI Series

7. Outside Air Sensor: Provide the sensing element on the building's north side.Sensing element shall be fully encapsulated in potting material within a stainlesssteel probe. Probe shall be encased in PVC solar radiation shield and mounted in aweatherproof enclosure. Operating range -40 to 122 F, Basis of Design: SchneiderElectric EHO Series

8. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature.

B. Humidity Wall Transmitter1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. Transmitters shall be accurate to +/- 3 % at full scale.3. Transmitter shall have replaceable sensing element.4. Sensor type shall be thin-film capacitive.5. Sensor element shall contain multipoint calibration on-board in nonvolatile

memory



6. Operating range shall be 0 - 100% RH noncondensing, 50 to 95 F7. Output shall be field selectable 4-20 mA or 0-5/0-10 VDC.8. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power.9. Transmitter shall be available in an (off white) (black) enclosure made of high

impact ABS plastic for mounting on a standard electrical box.10. Transmitter shall have LCD display11. Transmitter shall be available with a certification of NIST calibration12. (Transmitter shall have integrated temperature sensor)13. Basis of Design: Veris CWE Series

C. Humidity Duct Transmitter1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. Transmitters shall be accurate to +/- 3% at full scale.3. Transmitter shall be fully encapsulated in potting material within a stainless steel

probe.4. Transmitter shall have replaceable sensing element.5. Sensor type shall be thin-film capacitive.6. Sensor element shall contain multipoint calibration on-board in nonvolatile

memory7. Operating range shall be 0 to 100% RH noncondensing, -40 to 122 degrees F8. Output shall be 4-20 mA or 0-5/0-10 VDC.9. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power.10. Transmitter shall be available with a certification of NIST calibration11. (Transmitter shall have integrated temperature sensor)12. Basis of Design: Veris CDE Series

D. Humidity Outdoor Transmitter1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. Transmitters shall be accurate to +/- 2% at full scale.3. Transmitter shall be fully encapsulated in potting material within a stainless steel

probe. Probe shall be encased in PVC solar radiation shield and mounted in aweatherproof enclosure.

4. Transmitter shall have replaceable sensing element.5. Sensor type shall be thin-film capacitive.6. Sensor element shall contain multipoint calibration on-board in nonvolatile

memory7. Operating range shall be 0 - 100% RH noncondensing, -40 to 122 degrees F8. Output shall be 4-20 mA or 0-5/0-10 VDC.9. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power.10. Transmitter shall be available with a certification of NIST calibration11. (Transmitter shall have integrated temperature sensor)12. Basis of Design: Veris HO Series

E. Carbon Dioxide Wall Transmitter:



1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. Sensor type shall be Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR).3. Accuracy shall be ±30 ppm ±2% of measured value with annual drift of ±10 ppm.

Minimum five year recommended calibration interval.4. Repeatability shall be ±20 ppm ±1% of measured value5. Response Time shall be <60 seconds for 90% step change6. Outputs shall be field selectable (Analog: 4-20mA or 0-5/0-10VDC) (Protocol:

Modbus or BACnet) with (SPDT Relay 1A@30VDC) (temperature setpoint slider)7. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power.8. Temperature Range: (32 to 122 degrees F (CO2 only)) (50 to 95 degrees F (with

humidity option))9. Output range shall be programmable 0-2000 or 0-5000 ppm10. Transmitter shall be available in an (off white) (black) enclosure for mounting on a

standard electrical box.11. Transmitter shall have LCD display for commissioning and provide additional

faceplate to conceal LCD display where occupants may misinterpret CO2 readings.12. (Transmitter shall have integrated (humidity sensor) (temperature sensor))13. Basis of Design: Veris CWE

F. Carbon Dioxide Duct Transmitter:1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. Sensor type shall be Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR).3. Accuracy shall be ±30 ppm ±2% of measured value with annual drift of ±10 ppm.

Minimum five year recommended calibration interval.4. Repeatability shall be ±20 ppm ±1% of measured value5. Response Time shall be <60 seconds for 90% step change6. Outputs shall be field selectable Analog: 4-20mA or 0-5/0-10VDC with SPDT

Relay 1A@30VDC7. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power.8. Temperature Range: 32 to 122 degrees F9. Output range shall be programmable 0-2000 or 0-5000 ppm10. Enclosure shall not require remote pickup tubes and make use of integrated

H-beam probe to channel air flow to sensor.11. Enclosure lid shall require no screws and make use of snap on features for

attachment12. Enclosure shall be made of high impact ABS plastic13. Transmitter shall have LCD display14. (Transmitter shall have integrated (humidity sensor) (temperature sensor))15. Basis of Design: Veris CDE

G. Air Pressure Transmitters.1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Schneider Electric2. Sensor shall be microprocessor profiled ceramic capacitive sensing element3. Transmitter shall have 14 selectable ranges from 0.1 – 10 inch WC



4. Transmitter shall be +/- 1% accurate in each selected range including linearity,repeatability, hysteresis, stability, and temperature compensation.

5. Transmitter shall be field configurable to mount on wall or duct with static probe6. Transmitter shall be field selectable for Unidirectional or Bidirectional7. Maximum operating pressure shall be 200% of design pressure.8. Output shall be field selectable 4-20 mA or 0-5/0-10 VDC linear.9. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power10. Response time shall be field selectable T95 in 20 sec or T95 in 2 sec11. Transmitter shall have an LCD display12. Units shall be field selectable for WC or PA13. Transmitter shall have provision for zeroing by pushbutton or digital input.14. Transmitter shall be available with a certification of NIST calibration15. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric model EPD.

H. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters:1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Schneider Electric2. Transmitter shall be microprocessor based3. Transmitter shall use two independent gauge pressure sensors to measure and

calculate differential pressure4. Transmitter shall have 4 switch selectable ranges5. Transmitter shall have test mode to produce full-scale output automatically.6. Transmitter shall have provision for zeroing by pushbutton or digital input.7. Transmitter shall have field selectable outputs of 0-5V, 0-10V, and 4-20mA.8. Transmitter shall have field selectable electronic surge damping9. Transmitter shall have an electronic port swap feature10. Transmitter shall accept 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC supply power11. Sensor shall be 17-4 PH stainless steel where it contacts the working fluid.12. Performance:

a. Accuracy shall be ±1% F.S. and ±2% F.S. for lowest selectable rangeb. Long term stability shall be ±0.25%c. Sensor temperature operating range shall be -4 to 185 degrees Fd. Operating environment shall be 14 to 131 degrees F; 10-90% RH

noncondensinge. Proof pressure shall be 2x max. F.S. rangef. Burst pressure shall be 5x max. F.S. range

13. Transmitter shall be encased in a NEMA 4 enclosure14. Enclosure shall be white powder-coated aluminum15. Transmitter shall be available with a certification of NIST calibration16. (Transmitter shall be preinstalled on a bypass valve manifold)17. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric EPW

I. Current Sensors1. Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical

loads. Current switches shall be available in split core models, and offer either a



digital or an analog signal to the automation system. Acceptable manufacturer isVeris Industries

J. Current Status Switches for Constant Load Devices1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries2. General: Factory programmed current sensor to detect motor undercurrent

situations such as belt or coupling loss on constant loads. Sensor shall store motorcurrent as operating parameter in non-volatile memory. Push-button to clearmemory.

3. Visual LED indicator for status.4. Split core sensor, induced powered from monitored load and isolated to 600 VAC

rms. Sensor shall indicate status from 0.5 A to 175 A.5. Normally open current sensor output. 0.1A at 30 VAC/DC.6. Basis of Design: Veris Model H608.

K. Control Valves1. Provide automatic control valves suitable for the specified controlled media

(steam, water or glycol). Provide valves which mate and match the material of theconnected piping. Equip control valves with the actuators of required input powertype and control signal type to accurately position the flow control element andprovide sufficient force to achieve required leakage specification.

2. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close offagainst the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves shouldbe sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximumdesign flow.

3. Trim material shall be stainless steel for steam and high differential pressureapplications.

4. Electric actuation should be provided on all terminal unit reheat applications unlesselectric heat is provided.

L. Dampers1. Automatic dampers, furnished by the Building Automation Contractor shall be

single or multiple blade as required. Dampers are to be installed by the HVACContractor under the supervision of the BAS Contractor. All blank-off plates andconversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are theresponsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor.

2. Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet steelmechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noiseas friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals and acetyl or bronzebearings shall also be provided.

3. Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches. Seals and 3/8 inch square steelzinc plated pins are required. Blade rotation is to be parallel or opposed as shownon the schedules.

4. For high performance applications, control dampers will meet or exceed the ULClass I leakage rating.



5. Control and smoke dampers shall be Ruskin, or approved equal.6. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for

two position control.7. Basis of Design: Ruskin

M. Damper Actuators1. Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft,

without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator shall have electronicoverload circuitry to prevent damage. For power-failure/safety applications, aninternal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuatorhousing. Non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release toallow positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

N. Airflow Measuring Stations1. Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated thermistor

sensors with thermistor temperature sensors.2. The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet/min with an accuracy

of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/- 10 ft/min for reading less than 500 feet/min.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. General1. Installation of the building automation system shall be performed by the Contractor

or a subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the personalsupervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall certify all work as proper andcomplete. Under no circumstances shall the design, scheduling, coordination,programming, training, and warranty requirements for the project be delegated to asubcontractor.

B. Demolition1. Remove controls which do not remain as part of the building automation system,

all associated abandoned wiring and conduit, and all associated pneumatic tubing.The Owner will inform the Contractor of any equipment which is to be removedthat will remain the property of the Owner. All other equipment which is removedwill be disposed of by the Contractor.

C. Access to Site1. Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be

permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with theOwner or the Owner’s Representative.

D. Code Compliance



1. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes andwill comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Should anydiscrepancy be found between wiring specifications in Division 17 andDivision 26, wiring requirements of Division 17 will prevail for work specified inDivision 17.

E. Cleanup1. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be

checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned aroundequipment provided under this contract.

3.02 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Installation Practices for Wiring

B. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer’s installationdocumentation.

C. The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be adedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral andground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuitwill not feed any other circuit or device.

D. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded orgalvanized pipe, or structural steel.

E. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring doesnot droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc.

F. Conduit in finished areas will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furredspaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used infinished areas on masonry walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be colormatched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors.

G. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavityspaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will runparallel to or at right angles to the building structure.

H. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, orcondensate piping.

I. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plasticinsert.

J. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas.



3.03 INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR FIELD DEVICES

A. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will beadjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

B. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system inwhich they are installed.

C. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metalstatic pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure portshall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tappedinto the ductwork.

D. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into thespace via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using words, letters, or numbersthat can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.

B. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a Bakelitenameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background.

C. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system.

D. All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled.

3.05 EXISTING CONTROLS

A. Existing controls which are to be reused must each be tested and calibrated for properoperation. Existing controls which are to be reused and are found to be defectiverequiring replacement, will be noted to the Owner. The Owner will be responsible forall material and labor costs associated with their repair.

3.06 LOCATION

A. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings.

B. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinerygenerating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams.

C. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outsideair. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building orsunlight is minimized.



D. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) towhich it is being interfaced.

3.07 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debugall system software as described in this section. This includes any operating systemsoftware or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

3.08 DATABASE CONFIGURATION

A. The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that arerequired by the points list and sequence of operation.

3.09 COLOR GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

A. Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphicdisplays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. Foreach system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified inthe point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the owner.

3.10 DOCUMENTATION

A. As built software documentation will include the following:1. Descriptive point lists2. Application program listing3. Application programs with comments.4. Printouts of all reports.5. Alarm list.6. Printouts of all graphics7. Commissioning and System Startup

3.11 POINT TO POINT CHECKOUT

A. Each I/O device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be inspectedand verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet itemizing eachdevice shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project Manager for submission tothe owner or owner’s representative.

3.12 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. All application software will be verified and compared against the sequences ofoperation.



1. Chiller control2. Boiler Control3. Single Zone Air Handlers4. Multi Zone Air Handlers5. Packaged Roof Top Control6. Cooling Only VAV7. Fan Powered VAV8. Fan Coil Control9. Heat Pump Control10. Unit Ventilator Control

B. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a setpoint shift of at least 10% andobserving whether the system successfully returns the process variable to setpoint.Record all test results and attach to the Test Results Sheet.

C. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the appropriatealarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed destinations (workstations orprinters), and that any other related actions occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels areinvoked, reports are generated, etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

D. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to verify that theitem exists, that the appearance and content are correct, and that any special featureswork as intended. Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

E. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been included as part ofthe automation system. Verify that all points are properly polled, that alarms have beenconfigured, and that any associated graphics and reports have been completed. If theinterface involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls thetransmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified information.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HYDRONIC PIPING23 21 13 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Hydronic system requirements.

B. Heating water piping, above grade.

C. Chilled water piping, above grade.

D. Equipment drains and overflows.

E. Pipe hangers and supports.

F. Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.


A. Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.

B. Section 23 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.

C. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.

D. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

E. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

F. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.

G. Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.


A. ASME BPVC-IX - Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and FuzingProcedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators - WeldingBrazing and Fusing Qualifications; 2019.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2016.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.



D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings;2018.

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.

F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018.

G. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought CarbonSteel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2019.

H. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).

I. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.

J. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);2018.

K. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers;1992, with Editorial Revision (2018).

L. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;2011 (Amended 2012).

M. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).

N. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.

O. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and Installation; 2018.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASMEBPVC-IX.

C. Product Data:1. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.2. Provide manufacturers catalog information.3. Indicate valve data and ratings.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joiningprocedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.



F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, explodedassembly views.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of thetype specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers, and supports as required, as indicated, and asfollows:1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings

that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the systemis not jeopardized.

2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.3. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58

unless indicated otherwise.

C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or groovedcouplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded,soldered, or threaded connections.

D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX.

E. Piping in gymnasium to be welded fittings only.



2.02 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, using one of the following jointtypes:1. Welded Joints: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; AWS

D1.1/D1.1M welded.2. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3, malleable iron fittings.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn, using one of thefollowing joint types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought

copper fittings.a. Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and

silver.b. Braze: AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP copper/silver alloy.

2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpledbranch tube.

3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type complying with ASMEB16.22, utilizing EPDM, nontoxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.a. Manufacturers:

1) Apollo Valves2) Grinnell Products3) Viega LLC4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black; using one of the following jointtypes:1. Welded Joints: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; AWS

D1.1/D1.1M welded.2. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3, malleable iron fittings.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), hard drawn; using one of thefollowing joint types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22, solder wrought

copper fittings.a. Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and

silver.2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved tube, fittings of same material, and

copper-tube-dimension mechanical couplings.3. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled

branch tube.



4. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type complying with ASMEB16.22, utilizing EPDM, nontoxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.a. Manufacturers:

1) Apollo Valves2) Grinnell Products3) Viega LLC4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.04 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn; using one of thefollowing joint types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought

copper fittings; ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tinand silver.

2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select

appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split

ring.3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Greater: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Greater: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron

roll, double hanger.6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Greater: Welded steel bracket and

wrought steel clamp.8. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Greater: Welded steel bracket and

wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.9. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.10. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,

floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.11. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,

lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.12. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Greater: Adjustable cast iron roll

and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.13. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.14. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous

threaded.



15. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug forthreaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs forattaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.06 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRICCONNECTIONS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Less:1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2 Inches and Greater:1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.2. Copper Piping: Bronze.3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick, preformed neoprene.

C. Dielectric Connections:1. Waterways:

a. Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.

b. Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600-volt breakdown test.c. Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match

connecting piping.d. Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.

2. Flanges:a. Dielectric flanges with same pressure ratings as standard flanges.b. Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1

percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.c. Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600-volt breakdown test.d. Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match

connecting piping.e. Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION


B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporaryplugs or caps.



E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 00 for additionalrequirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interference with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

F. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment. Refer to Section 23 05 16.

H. Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over

4 inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide

through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

I. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP-58.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inches minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for

pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple hangers.8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.



J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 23 07 19.

K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brushclean, and apply one coat of zinc-rich primer to welds.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.1. 1/2 Inch and 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. 1 Inch: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1-1/2 Inches and 2 Inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 2-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 3 Inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 4 Inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.7. 6 Inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.8. 8 Inches: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.9. 10 Inches: Maximum span, 18 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.10. 12 inches: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.

B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.1. 1/2 Inch, 3/4 Inch, and 1 Inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4

inch.2. 1-1/4 Inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. 1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 2 Inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 2-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 3 Inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. 4 Inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.8. 6 Inches: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.9. 8 Inches: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.10. 10 Inches: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.11. 12 Inches: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.12. 14 Inches: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.13. 16 Inches: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.14. 18 Inches: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.15. 20 Inches: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES23 21 14 - 1

SECTION 23 21 14

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Expansion tanks.

B. Air vents.

C. Air separators.

D. Strainers.

E. Suction diffusers.

F. Pump connectors.

G. Balancing valves.

H. Flow meters.

I. Relief valves.



B. Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.


A. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1:Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2019.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies requiredfor this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, andfinishes. Include product description and model.

C. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority havingjurisdiction.



D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joiningprocedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubricationinstructions, and replacement parts list.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.

C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers:1. Amtrol Inc2. ITT Bell & Gossett3. Taco, Inc4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASMEBPVC-VIII-1; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of125 psi, with flexible EPDM diaphragm or bladder sealed into tank, and steel supportstand.

C. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psi.

D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressuredouble check backflow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valvedby-pass.



2.02 AIR VENTS

A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2-inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber.

B. Float Type:1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float,

stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature andpressure; with isolating valve.

2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for systemoperating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

2.03 AIR SEPARATORS

A. Dip Tube Fitting (Where Not Provided By Boiler Manufacturer):1. For 125 psi operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from rising

into system.

B. Coalescing Air/Dirt Separators:1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong International, Incb. ITT Bell & Gossettc. Spirotherm, Incd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Tank: Fabricated steel tank; tested and stamped in accordance with ASMEBPVC-VIII-1; for 150 psi operating pressure and 270 degrees F maximumoperating temperature; subject to the requirements of the application and themanufacturer's standard maximum operating conditions.

3. Coalescing Medium: Provide structured copper or stainless steel medium fillingthe entire vessel to suppress turbulence and provide air elimination efficiency of100 percent free air, 100 percent entrained air, and 99.6 percent dissolved air at theinstalled location.

4. Air Vent: Integral float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank rated at 150 psi,threaded to the top of the separator.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for 2 NPS and smaller; Class 150 flangedconnections for 2-1/2 NPS and larger.

6. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.7. Size: Match system flow capacity.

2.04 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc2. Flexicraft Industries



3. Grinnell Products4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Size 2 inch and Under:1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch

stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch:1. Provide flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/16 inch

stainless steel perforated screen.

D. Size 5 inch and Larger:1. Provide flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8

inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.05 SUCTION DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Anvil International2. Grinnell Products3. ITT Bell & Gossett4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 175 psi working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinderstrainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings, disposable 5/32 inch mesh strainer to fit overcylinder strainer, 20 mesh startup screen, and permanent magnet located in flow streamand removable for cleaning.

C. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gauge tapping inside.

2.06 PUMP CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Anvil International2. Ferguson Enterprises Inc3. The Metraflex Company4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Flexible Connectors: Flanged, braided type with wetted components of stainless steel,sized to match piping.1. Maximum Allowable Working Pressure: 150 psig at 120 degrees F.2. Accommodate the Following:

a. Angular Rotation: 15 degrees.



b. Force developed by 1.5 times specified maximum allowable operatingpressure.

3. End Connections: Same as specified for pipe jointing.4. Provide necessary accessories including, but not limited to, swivel joints.

2.07 BALANCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc2. Hays Fluid Controls3. ITT Bell & Gossett4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Size 2 inch and Smaller:1. Provide ball calibrated style balance valve.2. Valve body shall be constructed out of lead free brass3. Valve shall include a ball valve constructed in 304 Stainless Steel.4. Valve shall be AB1953 and CSA certified and compliant with NSF/ANSI-372.5. Valve body shall include two pressure/temperature ports.6. Valve body shall include an optional drain valve port.7. Valve shall utilize a calibrated nameplate with a memory stop.8. Valve shall utilize a reduced port design that provides velocity head recovery.9. Valve temperature range shall be from -4°F to 250°F.

C. Size 2.5 inch and Larger:1. Provide ball or globe calibrated style balance valve.2. Valve body shall be constructed out of cast iron and rated for 175 PSIG working

pressure.3. Valve shall be a multi-turn globe style valve.4. Valve shall include a brass disc.5. Valve disc shall have a soft seat design made of EPDM.6. (Valves shall include ANSI Class 125# flanged connections.7. Valve body shall include two pressure/temperature ports.8. Valve shall utilize a calibrated nameplate with position indicator from 0 to 100%

open.9. Valve shall include a memory button to allow for positioning the valve to the

appropriate set position after closing.10. Valve temperature range shall be from -4°F to 250°F.

2.08 FLOW METERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc2. EMCO Flow Systems



3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Orifice principle by-pass circuit with direct reading gauge, soldered or flanged pipingconnections for 125 psi working pressure, with shut off valves, and drain and ventconnections.

C. Cast iron, wafer type, orifice insert flow meter for 250 psi working pressure, withread-out valves equipped with integral check valves with gasketed caps.

2.09 RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Apollo Valves2. Armstrong International, Inc3. ITT Bell & Gossett4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressureactuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

C. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect toexpansion tank.

D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blowdown connection.

E. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base-mounted centrifugal pumps whereindicated. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.

F. Support pump fittings with floor-mounted pipe and flange supports.

G. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low-pressure side of reducing valves, heatexchangers, expansion tanks, and chilled water system.

H. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducingvalve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connectedequipment.

I. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.



J. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross-sectional area equal to sum ofindividual vent areas.

K. Perform tests determining strength of glycol and water solution and submit written testresults.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating tomaintenance service.

B. Provide service and maintenance of glycol system for one year from date of SubstantialCompletion at no extra charge to Owner.

C. Perform monthly visit to make glycol fluid concentration analysis on site with refractiveindex measurement instrument. Report findings in detail in writing, including analysisand amounts of glycol or water added.

D. Explain corrective actions to Owner's maintenance personnel in person.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HYDRONIC PUMPS23 21 23 - 1

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Vertical in-line pumps.

B. Base-mounted pumps.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.

C. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

D. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping.

E. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.


A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.

B. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports;2013.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics withpump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned.



D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements andrecommendations.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views,lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, andfield performance of pumps, with minimum five years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Armstrong Fluid Technology, Inc

B. Bell & Gossett, a Xylem Inc. brand

C. TACO Comfort Solutions.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL

A. Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vaporbinding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, andoperate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

B. Minimum Quality Standard: UL 778.

C. Base Mounted Pumps: Aligned by qualified millwright.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testingagency acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specifiedand indicated.

2.03 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS

A. Type: Vertical, single stage, close coupled, radially or horizontally split casing, forin-line mounting, for 175 psi working pressure.

B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gauge port, casing wear ring, seal flushconnection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.

C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft or extension.



D. Shaft: Carbon steel with stainless steel impeller cap screw or nut and bronze sleeve.

E. Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

2.04 BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS

A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally splitcasing, for 125 psi maximum working pressure.

B. Casing: Cast iron, or ductile iron with suction and discharge gauge ports, renewablebronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction anddischarge.

C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.

D. Bearings: Oil lubricated roller or ball bearings.

E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve, with shaftgrounding ring.

F. Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.

H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum spacerecommended by manufacturer.

C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support pipingadjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close-coupled orbase-mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and dischargeline sizes 4 inches and over.

D. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.



E. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.

F. Check, align, and certify alignment of base-mounted pumps prior to start-up.

G. Install base-mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set andlevel, and grout in place. Refer to Section 03 30 00.

H. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 REFRIGERANT PIPING23 23 00 - 1

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping.

B. Refrigerant.

C. Moisture and liquid indicators.

D. Valves.

E. Strainers.

F. Pressure relief valves.

G. Filter-driers.

H. Solenoid valves.

I. Expansion valves.

J. Receivers.

K. Flexible connections.


A. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.


A. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; 2009.

B. AHRI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; 2007.

C. AHRI 760 - Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With VolatileRefrigerants; 2007.

D. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and Designation andClassification of Refrigerants ; 2019.

E. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; 2019.



F. ASME BPVC-IX - Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and FuzingProcedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators - WeldingBrazing and Fusing Qualifications; 2019.

G. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings;2018.

H. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; 2018.

I. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; 2020.

J. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.

K. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018.

L. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought CarbonSteel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2019.

M. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.

N. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);2018.

O. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioningand Refrigeration Field Service; 2020.

P. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;2011 (Amended 2012).

Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).

R. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and Installation; 2018.


A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Providenecessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing areconsistently provided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicatedotherwise.

C. Valves:1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.



D. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receivershut-off valve and expansion valve.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors.

F. Filter-Driers:1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic

expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturerscatalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Submit welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Filter-Dryer Cartridges: One of each type and size.3. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: One, each containing everything required to conduct

one test.


A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end capsand plugs in place until installation.

C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment,until connected into system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.

B. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.



2.02 PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black.1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Pipe Supports and Anchors:1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, selectappropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.7. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous

threaded.8. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for

threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs forattaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.03 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zeroand global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.

2.04 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Henry Technologies2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning3. Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends,sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge andplastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum workingpressure of 500 psi.



2.05 VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hansen Technologies Corporation2. Henry Technologies3. Flomatic Valves4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Packed Angle Valves:1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper

gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder orflared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperatureof 275 degrees F.

C. Ball Valves:1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube

extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ringstem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperatureof 300 degrees F.

2.06 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Hansen Technologies Corporation2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning3. Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of

stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressureof 430 psi.

2.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hansen Technologies Corporation2. Henry Technologies3. Sherwood Valve/Harsco Corporation4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealedand stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB, selected toASHRAE Std 15, with standard setting of 300 psi.



2.08 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning3. Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Performance:1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: As indicated in schedule, minimum, rated in

accordance with AHRI 710.2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator

capacity.3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum.

C. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant,activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondaryfiltration to 20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

D. Construction: UL listed.1. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.

2.09 SOLENOID VALVES


B. Valve: AHRI 760 I-P, pilot operated, copper, brass or steel body and internal parts,synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operationin case of coil failure), integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; formaximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2.10 EXPANSION VALVES




B. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body,internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inletstrainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulbwell.

C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine availablepressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressureand minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load andexcessively oversized at part load.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION


B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, andmaintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment.

E. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers.6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

F. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, andprovide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction offlow.



G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

H. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and fordisposal of refrigerant.

I. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.



B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 300 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inchesvacuum and 300 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakag

3.04 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size,

1/4 inch.2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 2-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 2-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. 3-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.8. 3-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.9. 4-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.1. 2-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. 3 inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. 4 inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 HVAC WATER TREATMENT23 25 00 - 1

SECTION 23 25 00

HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Materials.1. System cleaner.2. Closed system treatment (water).

B. By-pass (pot) feeder.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Owner furnished treatment equipment.


C. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.


A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipmentincluding electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems,piping configuration, and connection requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, andother equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs.Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full timeservice personnel.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. AmSolv-Amrep, Inc

B. GE Water & Process Technologies

C. Nalco, an Ecolab Company



A. Comply with applicable codes for addition of non-potable chemicals to buildingmechanical systems and to public sewage systems.

B. Comply with UL (DIR) requirements.

C. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations.

D. Provide certificate of compliance from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicatingapproval of installation.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. System Cleaner:1. Manufacturers:

a. AmSolv-Amrep, Incb. GE Water & Process Technologiesc. Nalco, an Ecolab Companyd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to removegrease and petroleum products; sodiumtripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate.

3. Biocide chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calciumhypochlorite or microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyltinoxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate).

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle



B. Closed System Treatment (Water):1. Manufacturers:

a. AmSolv-Amrep, Incb. GE Water & Process Technologiesc. Nalco, an Ecolab Companyd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate.3. Corrosion inhibitors; boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole,

low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulphites.4. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates.

2.04 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER

A. Manufacturers:1. Griswold Controls2. J. L. Wingert Company3. Neptune, a brand of the Dover Company4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 gal quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use watermeter to record capacity in each system.

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 CLEANING SEQUENCE

A. Concentration:1. As recommended by manufacturer.

B. Hot Water Heating Systems:1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and

maintain for 12 hours minimum.2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as

possible and refill with clean water.3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.



C. Chilled Water Systems:1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible.2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

D. Flush open systems and glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hourminimum. Drain completely and refill.

E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process iscompleted. Include disassembly of components as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION


3.04 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves andnecessary piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumpsunless indicated otherwise.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated bytest.

C. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 testspecimens.


A. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of chemical treatmentsystem.1. Provide minimum of two hours of instruction for two people.2. Have operation and maintenance data prepared and available for review during

training.3. Conduct training using actual equipment after treated system has been put into full

operation.

3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under thesupervision and in the direct employ of the equipment manufacturer or originalinstaller.



B. Provide service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date ofSubstantial Completion.

C. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make wateranalysis on-site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treatingrequirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service reportafter each visit.

D. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.

E. Provide on-site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown toproperly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations inwriting based upon these inspections.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS23 31 00 - 1

SECTION 23 31 00

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal ductwork.

B. Casing and plenums.

C. Duct cleaning.


A. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.

B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.

C. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.


A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a.

C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;2018.

D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, andconfiguration prior to start of work for supply and return systems.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience,and approved by manufacturer.


A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended bysealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of ductsealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with NFPA 90A standards.

B. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 3 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

D. Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

E. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653MFS Type B, with 1.5 mils minimum G60/Z180 coating.

B. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded oneend, or continuously threaded.

C. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.



C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of ducton centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provideair foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance withSMACNA (DCS).

2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection,interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, andcorner clips in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).1. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle HVAC Productsb. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Companyc. Elgen Manufacturingd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.05 CASINGS

A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operatingpressures indicated.

B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner ofgalvanized 18 gage, 0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers,turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.

C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenumsupporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access toequipment for cleaning and inspection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

B. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on openductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.



C. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes insidelining.

D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers andcontrollers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, completewith metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Whereopenings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metalring.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating andmaintenance activities.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulateddust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment thatcould be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES23 33 00 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct access doors.

B. Duct test holes.

C. Flexible duct connectors.

D. Volume control dampers.


A. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.


A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;2018.

B. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of CommercialCooking Operations; 2017.

C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume controldampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.






A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Acudor Products Inc, a Division of Nelson Industrial Inc2. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company3. Elgen Manufacturing, Inc4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quickfastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulationwith sheet metal cover.1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks.2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.3. Up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside

and inside handles.4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.02 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches,neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.1. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle HVAC Productsb. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Carlisle HVAC Products2. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company3. Elgen Manufacturing, Inc4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

C. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA

90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel.

D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in10 to 10,000 Hz range.

E. Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch.

2.04 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Nailor Industries, Inc2. NCA, a brand of Metal Industries Inc3. Ruskin Company4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

C. Splitter Dampers:1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages

heavier for sizes over 24 inches.2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with

continuous hinge or rod.3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action,

flanged bushing with set screw .

D. Single Blade Dampers:1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 by 30 inch.2. Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum.

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8by 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanizedchannel frame with suitable hardware.1. Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum.

F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. Onmultiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, orsintered bronze bearings.

G. Quadrants:



1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,

bases, or adapters.3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, andfollow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressureclass.

B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, andelsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance withNFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 by 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access,and as indicated. Provide 4 by 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locationsprior to fabrication.

C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

D. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible ductconnections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connectionsimmediately adjacent to the equipment.

F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wherebranches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2duct widths from duct take-off.

G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers,regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or registerassembly.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 DUCT SILENCERS23 33 19 - 1

SECTION 23 33 19

DUCT SILENCERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct silencers.1. Absorptive silencers.


A. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Connections to silencers.

B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible duct connections.


A. ANSI/ASA S1.4 PART 3 - American National Standard Specification forElectroacoustics - Sound Level Meters - Part 3: Periodic Tests; 2014.

B. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; Most RecentEdition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

D. NEBB (STDS) - Procedural Standard for Measurement of Sound and Vibration; 2015,with Errata (2017).

E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data,pressure losses, and acoustical performance.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary tomaintain integrity of sound isolation.

D. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Vibro-Acoustics2. Kinetics Noise Control3. Price Industries, Inc.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material,and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similarconstruction. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards.

C. General Requirements:1. Casing, sealants, adhesives, accessory materials, and packing materials to comply

with ASTM E84.2. Airstream surfaces installed in a return air plenum to comply with requirements in

ASHRAE Std 62.1.3. Factory-fabricated, field-installed products.

D. Geometry:1. Rectangular elbows with splitters or baffles.

E. Configuration: Rectangular with lined splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails,modular [_____] high, [_____] wide, [_____] long.

F. Materials:1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage, 0.0299 inch thick galvanized steel stiffened as

required, with mastic filled lock formed seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage, 0.1196 inchslip joints on both ends.

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage, 0.0239 thick perforated galvanizedsteel.

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft density.4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Support duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connections, lagged withleaded vinyl sheet on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 23 31 00 and Section 23 33 00.



B. Provide services of an independent testing agency to take noise measurements inaccordance with provisions of NEBB (STDS). Use meters meeting requirements ofANSI/ASA S1.4 PART 3.

C. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band soundmeasurements over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanicalequipment rooms, duct and pipe shafts, and other critical locations, as directed.

D. Provide one-third octave band measurements of artificial sound sources in areasindicated as having critical requirements.

E. Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS23 37 00 - 1

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Registers/grilles:1. Wall-mounted, exhaust and return register/grilles.

B. Fabric air distribution devices.


A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2020.

B. ISO 14644-1 - Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments - Part 1:Classification of air cleanliness by particle concentration; 2015.

C. UL 2518 - Standard for Safety Air Dispersion Systems; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

D. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;2018.

F. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-ConditioningSystems; 2018.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets andinlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule ofoutlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Manufacturers:1. Titus.2. Price.3. Krueger.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Streamlined blades, 1/2 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, withvertical face.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

D. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish.

E. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

F. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator,operable from face.

G. Gymnasiums: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to beimmobile.

2.02 FABRIC AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:1. DuctSox Corporation2. Durkee America Inc3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Basis of Design: DuctSox Corporation

C. General Requirements:1. Diffuser material to comply with ASTM E84, UL 723, UL 2518, NFPA 90A, and

NFPA 90B.2. Fabrics to comply with ISO 14644-1 for ISO Class 4 application (clean room,

non-shedding material).3. Provide fabric air distribution devices made of 100 percent post-consumer recycled

content polyester verified by a third party.4. Fabric air distribution devices must be designed in software which documents,

calculates and provides pressure loss, inlet velocity, turbulent condition warnings,throw capability, entrainment, deflection, flow models, sizing, installationmethods, sound generated and temperature corrections.



5. Textile material must be documented to have the ability to dissipate staticelectricity (anti-static properties).

D. Continuous Diffusers:1. Fabric: 100 percent flame retardant polyester treated with an antimicrobial agent

from manufacturer.2. Shape: Round.3. Frame: Provide framing per manufacturer's recommendations.4. Minimum Temperature: 0 deg F.5. Maximum Temperature: 200 deg F.6. Dimensions: As indicated on the drawings.7. Color: As indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position tocomply with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and registerassembly.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES23 40 00 - 1

SECTION 23 40 00

HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Bipolar ionization system.


A. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly andfilter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation, changing, andperiodic cleaning.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UnderwritersLaboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. The manufacturer shall have been in operation for a minimum of ten years and shallfurnish a list of comparable projects to the one being specified. All products shall bemanufactured in the USA and shall provide a certificate of origin on request.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BIPOLAR IONIZATION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:1. AtmosAir.2. Substitutions: No Substitutions.

B. A qualified representative from the manufacturer shall be available to inspect theinstallation of the air purification system to ensure installation in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendation.



C. The complete Air Purification System including the Bi-polar ionization unit asassembled, complete with power and control wiring, and housing The units shall possesthe following classifications:1. Underwriters Laboratories UL 1995 classification2. Underwriters Laboratories UL 867 classification3. Underwriters Laboratories UL 2043 classification4. EU Standard EN 60335-2-40:20035. EU Standard EN 61000-6-3:20016. EU Standard EN 61000-6-1:20017. EU Standard 60204-1:20068. USEPA Energy Star Certification9. OPA 2807-1010. OPA 2808-10

D. The bi-polar system shall have been 3rd party independently tested to ANSI / AHAMAC-1 2002 and provide a minimum performance of 125 Dust CADR (Clean AirDelivery Rate). The manufacturer of the equipment shall furnish proof of testing.Equipment that does not have independent testing to the above protocol shall not beaccepted.

E. The bi-polar system shall have been independently tested to show a 99% reductioneffectiveness on gram negative and gram positive bacteria and MS2 virus. Themanufacturer of the equipment shall furnish proof of testing

F. The bi-polar system shall be tested to and comply with UL 867 Standard 40 Revision2013 with respect to ozone emission. Proof of compliance by a certified independentlaboratory test result shall be furnished.

G. Each Bi-Polar Ionization system shall be capable of effectively killing microorganismsthroughout the ductwork and interior spaces served by the bi-polar system. (includingmold, bacteria, and viruses), controlling gas phase contaminants generated from humanoccupants, building structure and furnishings, and reducing static space charges.

H. The Bi-Polar ionization system shall be designed to increase ionization levels in theareas served by the air handling system the units are installed in. The acceptableionization level increase is between 500 and 1,500 ions cm3. System commissioningshall include ion level measurements to ensure these design increase levels has beenachieved.

I. The bi-polar ionization system shall operate in such a manner so that agglomeration orprecipitation of airborne particulate shall not be permitted to collect on occupants,walls, or furnishings by virtue of its operation.



J. Air Exchange Rate: Air exchange rates may vary through the full operating range of aconstant volume or VAV system. The quantity of air exchange shall not be increaseddue to requirements of the air purification system.

K. Velocity Profile: The air velocity through the plenum approaching the air purificationsystem shall not exceed 2,500 fpm in the Bi-polar Ionization Section.

L. Humidity: Ion tubes shall not require preheat protection when the relative humidity ofthe entering air exceeds 85%. Relative humidity from 0 - 99% shall not cause damage,deterioration or dangerous conditions within the air purification system. The ion tubesshall be rated at 200° F. Tubes not rated to this temperature range shall not be accepted.

M. Equipment Requirements: A schematic representation of the ionization system isindicated on the drawings. Each unit shall include mounting plate, ion tube(s), iongenerator, differential pressure switch and on/off switch with green LED powerindicator. Each ion generator shall be capable of providing an adjustable voltage outputto the electrodes of between 2,000 and 3,000 VAC by means of an internal transformerrated at 135 VA. Systems that do not provide a variable voltage output or transformercapacity as described above, shall not be accepted.

N. Electrode Specifications (Bi-Polar Ion Tubes) Each unit shall include the requirednumber of electrodes and power generators sized to the air handling unit capacity andcontaminant conditions. Electrodes shall be installed with insulators to create therequired dielectric. Glass Ion Tubes shall not be accepted. The dielectric shall consist ofsuitable inorganic non-corrosive insulation material so that the presence of water vapor,gasses or airborne particles will not affect the dielectric value. Electrodes of ferrous orcopper composition with or without plating are not acceptable due to uncontrolledcorrosion. Each electrode shall be capable of 100 cfm of airflow per inch of electrode.Electrodes that do not conform to this specification shall not be accepted. Electrodesshall also be rated to 200°F. Electrodes that are rated for less that 200°F shall not beaccepted.

O. Mounting: Electrodes and power generators shall be installed on the duct with a singlepoint wiring connection. It shall include one quick disconnect electrical connector forremoval from the power source without the use of hand tools.

P. The Bi-polar ionization system shall consist of ionization tubes, power generators,airflow switches, and other accessories required for safe and efficient operation.Needlepoint ion generators and glass ion tubes shall not be accepted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. A manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide start-up supervision andtraining of owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment.

C. Service: A manufacturer's authorized service representative shall provide servicesupport to insure satisfactory air purification system operation. The service programshall include at minimum, startup and commissioning per manufacturersrecommendations, and mandatory ionization tube replacements every two (2) years. Ionlevel measurements should be taken in accordance with the manufacturer’scommissioning and follow-up maintenance procedures.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS23 51 00 - 1

SECTION 23 51 00

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufactured breechings.

B. Type B double wall gas vents.

C. Double wall metal stacks.

D. Induced draft fans.


A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.


A. ANSI Z21.66 - American National Standard for Automatic Damper Devices for Usewith Gas-Fired Appliances; 2015.

B. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24Metric/Inch Standard; 2017.

C. ASME B16.21 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges; 2016.

D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.

E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018.

F. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless SteelBolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special PurposeApplications; 2019.

G. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a.

H. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with ImprovedFormability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2018a.

I. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2018.



J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

K. NFPA 82 - Standard on Incinerators and Waste and Linen Handling Systems andEquipment; 2019.

L. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-BurningAppliances; 2019.

M. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

N. UL 103 - Factory-Built Chimneys for Residential Type and Building HeatingAppliances; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 378 - Standard for Draft Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Breeching: Vent connector.

B. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoorsfrom a vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used.

C. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from theflue collar of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device.

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances to complywith NFPA 211 and be UL listed and labeled.

B. Vents and Chimneys to be metal only. Plastic vents will not be acceptable.


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the startof the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditiousmanner.



1.07 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensionaldetails of components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristicsand connection requirements. Vent static calculations to be submitted for review.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, dimensions, weights, support and layoutof breechings. Submit layout drawings indicating plan view and elevations wherefactory built units are used.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions, and indicate assembly,support details, and connection requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that refractory lined metal stacks meet or exceedspecified requirements.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. AMPCO by Hart & Cooley, Inc; Model VSI

B. DuraVent; DuraStack Pro (DIS2)

C. Selkirk Corporation; Model PS


2.02 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Comply with applicable codes for installation of natural gas burning appliances

and equipment.2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.



2.03 MANUFACTURED BREECHINGS

A. Provide factory-built, modular connector and manifold system, tested to UL 103 withpositive pressure rating.

B. Assembly to be UL listed for use with building equipment in compliance with NFPA211.

C. Fabricate with 1 inch minimum air space between walls and construct inner liner of 304stainless steel and outer jacket of 304 stainless steel.1. Protect aluminized steel surfaces exposed to the elements with a minimum of one

base coat of primer and one finish coat of corrosion resistant paint suitable forouter jacket skin temperatures of the application.

D. Design, fabricate, and install gas-tight preventing products of combustion leaking intothe building.1. Securely connect inner joints and seal with factory supplied overlapping V-bands

and appropriate sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.2. System design to compensate for all flue gas induced thermal expansion.

2.04 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS

A. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel,tested in compliance with UL 441.

B. Electrically Actuated Vent Dampers: Same size as draft hood collar, constructed ofstainless steel or galvanized steel, with corrosion-resistant components, in compliancewith ANSI Z21.66.

2.05 DOUBLE WALL METAL STACKS

A. Provide double wall metal stacks, tested to UL 103 and UL listed with positive pressurerating, for use with building heating equipment, in compliance with NFPA 211.

B. Fabricate with 1 inch minimum air space between walls and construct inner liner of 304stainless steel and outer jacket of AL29-4C stainless steel.1. Protect aluminized steel surfaces exposed to the elements with a minimum of one

base coat of primer and one finish coat of corrosion resistant paint suitable forouter jacket skin temperatures of the application.

C. Accessories, UL labeled:1. Ventilated Roof Thimble: Consists of roof penetration, vent flashing with spacers

and storm collar.



2.06 INDUCED DRAFT FANS

A. Induced Draft Type:1. Manufacturers:

a. US Draft Company.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Fabrication: Forward curved fan and scroll of mild steel with direct drive shadedpole motor with ball bearings, internal cooling fan, stainless steel shaft, andinternal centrifugal switch, tested to UL 378.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with NFPA 54.

C. Install breechings with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, withinternal surfaces smooth.

D. Support breechings from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangersand anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings,chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot spacing, to adjacent structural surfaces, or at floorpenetrations. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for equivalent duct support configuration andsize.

E. Pitch breechings with positive slope up from fuel-fired equipment to chimney or stack.

F. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances fromcombustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as required for complete installation.

G. Assemble and install stack sections in accordance with NFPA 82, industry practices,and in compliance with UL listing. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement.Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs.

H. Level and plumb chimney and stacks.

I. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris.

J. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances without removal ordismantling of breechings, breeching insulation, chimneys, or stacks.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS23 52 33.13 - 1

SECTION 23 52 33.13

FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Boilers.

B. Controls and boiler trim.

C. Hot water connections.

D. Fuel connection.


A. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.

B. Section 23 51 00 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks.


A. AHRI 1500 - Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers; 2015.

B. ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules forConstruction of Heating Boilers; 2019.

C. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1:Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2019.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.

E. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2018.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safetycontrols, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.



C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connectionrequirements, and include start up instructions.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance andrepair data.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.



1.06 WARRANTY


B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for heat exchangers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lochinvar Corporation

B. Raypak Division of Rheem Manufacturing Company

C. Patterson Kelley.



A. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Performance rating shall be in accordance with AHRI 1500.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Hot water natural draft boiler with horizontal grid, finned tube heat exchanger, gasburning system, refractory combustion chamber, controls, and boiler trim.



2.05 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Finned copper tube heat exchanger assembled within combustion chambercomplying with ASME BPVC-IV and BPVC-VIII-1 requirements, and tested formaximum working pressure of 160 psi.

B. Combustion Chamber: Line with interlocking refractory insulating panels ofvermiculite, high temperature cements, asbestos fiber and refractory clay for servicetemperatures to 2100 degrees F.

C. Exchanger: Fabricate of finned copper tubing with stainless steel baffles and sealedinto bronze, steel, or cast iron headers with silicone O-ring gaskets.

D. Jacket: Galvanized steel with factory applied baked enamel, insulated with foil facedfiberglass insulation.

2.06 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM

A. Induced Draft Gas Burner: Stainless steel burners for on-off firing and natural gas withadjustable combustion air supply, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm gas valves, manualshut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, thermistor flame sensing device, andautomatic 100% safety gas shut-off.

B. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, preventopening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure,energize blower motor, and after air flow proven allow gas valve to open.

2.07 TRIM

A. ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 80 psi.

B. Low water cut-off and inlet flow switch to automatically prevent burner operation whenwater falls below safe level or on low flow through boiler.

2.08 CONTROLS

A. Operating Controls: Pre-wired, factory assembled electric control including pilot safetyand thermocouple transformer, 24-volt gas valve, manual main and pilot valves, andjunction box.

B. Operating temperature controller with outdoor reset to control burner operation tomaintain supply water temperature.

C. Electronic operating temperature controller:1. NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with full cover for wall mounting.



2. Ambient temperature range minus 30 to 150 degrees F.3. Adjustable reset ratio of outside air temperature change to discharge control point

change 1:2 to 100:1.4. Integral set point adjustment 80 to 230 degrees F.5. Electronic primary and outdoor sensors.

D. High limit temperature controller with automatic reset for burner to prevent boiler watertemperature from exceeding safe system temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install boiler and provide connection of natural gas service in accordance withrequirements of NFPA 54 and applicable codes.

C. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.

3.02 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative for starting and testing unit.


A. Train operating personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

B. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative to conduct training.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS23 64 26 - 1

SECTION 23 64 26

ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Factory-assembled packaged chiller.

B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.

C. Controls and control connections.

D. Chilled water connections.

E. Starters.

F. Variable frequency drives.

G. Electrical power connections.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete housekeeping pads.

B. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

C. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC.

D. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping.

E. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.


A. AHRI 550/590 (I-P) - Performance Rating of Water-Chilling and Heat PumpWater-Heating Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle; 2015.

B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and Designation andClassification of Refrigerants ; 2019.

C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise ResidentialBuildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, IncludingAll Applicable Amendments and Supplements.



D. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1:Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2019.

E. IEEE 519 - IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic Control inElectric Power Systems; 2014.

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.

G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.

H. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination: Coordinate physical size, weight and location of major pieces ofequipment to be installed. Notify Architect of any major deviations from the equipmentoriginally specified prior to ordering equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electricalrequirements and wiring diagrams.

C. Manufacturer's Performance Data: Indicate energy input versus cooling load outputfrom 0 to 100 percent of full load at specified and minimum condenser watertemperature for water-cooled chillers and at specified and minimum outdoor airtemperature for air-cooled chillers.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, partslists, controls, and accessories; include trouble-shooting guide.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the productsspecified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. When required, provide certification of inspection in compliance with the requirementsof Authority Having Jurisdiction.



1.07 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide minimum five year warranty to include coverage formaterials only for compressor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier, a part of UTC Building and Industrial Systems, a unit of United TechnologiesCorp

B. Daikin Applied:

C. Trane, a brand of Ingersoll Rand:

D. York International Corporation/Johnson Controls, Inc:

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.1. The chilled water system has been designed based on specific capacities and

characteristics of equipment specified in this section and other sections.2. When substitution of a different manufacturer or model number is desired, submit

sufficient information to demonstrate to Architect that the substitute will have thesame or better performance as that specified AND that the related equipment in thesystem will perform acceptably with the substitute.

3. If the related equipment must be modified to perform acceptably with thesubstitute, the entity proposing the substitution is responsible for all additionalcosts due to re-design and provision of different related equipment.

2.02 CHILLER APPLICATIONS

A. Chiller: Air-Cooled.1. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of

zero and global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.2. Refrigerant: HFC-134a.3. Evaporator:

a. Remote barrel with economizers.b. Fouling Factor: 0.0001.

4. Packaged Air-Cooled Condenser:



2.03 CHILLERS

A. Chillers: Factory assemble and test chiller consisting of compressor(s), compressormotor(s), motor starter(s) or variable frequency drives as indicated, remote evaporatorbarrel and economizers, condenser, enclosure, refrigeration circuits(s) and specialties,interconnecting piping, microprocessor-based controls, readouts, and diagnostics.1. Rating: AHRI 550/590 (I-P).2. Safety: ASHRAE Std 15 and UL 1995.3. Construction & Testing: ASME BPVC-VIII-1.4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.5. Energy Efficiency: ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P.6. Enclosures:

a. Chiller Structural Framing:1) Mount structural steel on welded steel base.2) Factory apply hot-dip galvanized finish.

b. Steel Chiller Cabinets:1) Factory apply baked on enamel finish.

c. Steel Control Panels:1) Factory apply baked on powder paint or applied corrosion resistant paint

prior to assembly.2) Provide gasketing and weather-proofing to panels with fully opening

doors containing starters or variable frequency drives, terminal blocks,through-the-door type disconnects and circuit breaker with lockablehandles indicating "power-on" or "power-off".

3) Provide door stays.d. Electrical Equipment: NEMA 250.

7. Motors: NEMA MG 1. See Section 23 05 13 for additional requirements.

2.04 COMPRESSORS AND EVAPORATOR

A. Compressors: Rotary-screw type.1. Unit: Semi-hermetic type with two, variable speed drive compressors with

multiple independent refrigeration circuit(s), internal muffler, discharge, check,and suction service valves.

2. Oil Lubrication System: Positive pressure system, oil heater, oil separator, checkvalves, solenoid valves, and filtration devices.

3. Valves: Check valves in compressor discharge.4. Capacity Reduction System: Load/unload valve control down to 20 percent of full

load without the activation of hot gas by-bass.5. Motor: 3600 rpm, suction gas-cooled, hermetically sealed, squirrel cage induction

with variable frequency drive.



B. Evaporator: Shell and tube type.1. Two pass type, with two independent refrigeration circuits.2. Shell, Removable Heads and Tube Support Sheets: Carbon steel.3. Tubes: Mechanically expand and fasten, seamless, externally or internally

enhanced, copper tubes into intermediate tube support sheets along the length ofshell to avoid contact and relative motion between tubes with the capability ofbeing cleanable.

4. Tube Size: 1.0 inches diameter.5. Comply with ASME BPVC-VIII-1 as applicable.6. Refrigerant Working-Side Pressure Rating: 220 psig.7. Water Working-Side Pressure Rating: 300 psig.8. Connections: Flanged and designed for 150 psig waterside working pressure.

C. Insulation for All Cold Surfaces:1. Factory install on shell and all other cold surfaces.2. 0.75 inches minimum thick, closed cell, expanded polyvinyl chloride flexible foam

insulation with a maximum K value of 0.28.

D. Provide vents and water drain connections.

E. Provide fittings for temperature control sensors.

2.05 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER AND FANS

A. Heat Exchanger:1. Tubes: Round.2. Arrangement: Two pass.3. Mechanically bond aluminum fins to internally enhanced, seamless copper tubing

and protect with corrosion resistant materials or coatings.4. Clean, dehydrate and test.5. Leak Test: 506 psig.6. Seal: Nitrogen holding charge.

B. Coil Guards: Provide expanded metal with lint screens. Provide coil protection forshipping by enclosing entire condenser coil with heavy plastic to prevent inadvertentdamage to coil during shipping or rigging.

C. Fans and Motors:1. Fans: Dynamically balance propeller type, direct drive fans of reinforced polymer

corrosion resistant construction and equip with sealed, permanently lubricated ballbearings.

2. Discharge Fan Guards: Coated steel wire.3. Discharge Direction: Vertical.



4. Motors: Totally enclosed, high efficiency, suitable for outdoor use, three phase,permanent split capacitor, single speed with internal overload protection.

2.06 REFRIGERATION CIRCUITS

A. Provide two independent refrigeration circuit(s) with one compressor(s) per circuit.

B. Minimum Refrigerant Specialties per Circuit:1. Isolation and service valves for refrigerant removal and charging.2. Removable-core filter driers.3. ASHRAE Std 15 compliant relief valves.4. Liquid line sight glass with moisture indicator.5. Refrigerant expansion valves or metering devices.6. Complete operating charge of both refrigerant and oil.

2.07 STARTERS AND DRIVES

A. Starters: Design unit mounted, across-the-line starter to operate in temperatures up to104 degrees F.1. Provide incoming line provisions for aluminum, mechanical type incoming line

lugs based on the number and cable sizes shown on drawings.2. Provide properly sized, double break main contacts with weld resistant silver

cadmium faces and low resistance auxiliary interlocks with palladium silvercontacts for interlocks that interface with control panel.

3. Provide control power transformer with fused primary, secondary, and currenttransformers of the proper size, ratio and burden capacity.

4. Provide control relays to interface with control panel.5. Wiring:

a. Type MTW copper stranded 90 degree C for power and control wiring.b. 14 gage, 0.0641 inch, minimum, for control wiring.

6. Motor Protection System Attributes:a. Three phase overload protection.b. Startup overload protection.c. Phase imbalance, loss and reversal.d. Low voltage.e. Distribution fault protection.

B. Variable Frequency Drives: Completely assemble, wire, pipe, and factory test, factoryor field mounted variable frequency drive (VFD). Limit the field electrical connectionsfor compressor motor power to the main power leads to the VFD, wiring of liquidpumps and tower fans to the control panel.1. Characteristics:

a. Refrigerant cooled.



b. Microprocessor based pulse width modulation (PWM) with input/outputpower devices, DC voltage rectifier, and inverter/control regulator to convertDC voltage to sinusoidal PWM waveform.

c. Isolate low voltage control physically from main power sections.d. Control motor speed by integrated controls over wide range of operating

conditions.e. Provide short circuit interrupt and withstand rating suitable for available

current.2. Performance:

a. Do not exceed IEEE-519 requirements for voltage total harmonic distortion(THD) and harmonic current total demand distortion (TDD) using VFD circuitbreaker input terminals as the point of common coupling (PCC).

b. Full Load Efficiency: Minimum 97 percent at 100 percent VFD ratedcapacity.

c. Unity Displacement Power Factor: 0.99 minimum.d. Voltage Boost Capability: Full motor voltage at reduced line voltage

conditions.e. Soft start, linear acceleration, and coast to stop capabilities.f. Base Motor Adjustable Frequency Range: Control to 15 percent capacity at

nameplate voltage.g. Torque Generation: 150 percent instantaneous.

3. Heat Sink and Mating Flange:a. Design for 185 psig waterside working pressure.b. Meter to maintain temperature within acceptable limits.

4. Suitable Ratings:a. Operation at plus or minus 10 percent nameplate voltage.b. Continuous Operation at:

1) 100 percent of nameplate amperes and 5 seconds at 15 percent.2) Ambient temperature range of 40 to122 degrees F, 95 percent humidity

non-condensing for altitudes up to 6000 feet.c. Comply with NEMA 250 and NEMA MG 1.

5. User Interface for Programming and Display of the Following Parameters:a. Operating, configuration and fault messages.b. Hertz frequency.c. VFD load, line side voltage, and current.d. kW.e. Input/output power devices temperature.

6. Electrical Service (single point power):a. Input Circuit Breaker: Suitable for the available current indicated.b. Provide power for chiller oil pump via factory wired standard branch circuit

breaker.c. Provide power for oil heater, VFD and controls via 3 KVA control power

transformer and factory wired circuit breaker.



7. Provide protection for under/over-voltage, phase loss/reversal/unbalance, groundfault, single cycle voltage loss, programmable auto restart after power loss, andmotor overload/over temperature protection.

2.08 MICROPROCESSOR-BASED, PROPORTIONAL AND INTEGRAL CONTROLLER

A. Control Components for Preventing Shutdown:1. Provide high pressure limit with indicating light for each compressor, set lower

than factory pressure switch to automatically unload compressor and preventnuisance high pressure condenser control trip.

2. Provide one protector with indicating light for each compressor, with current limitset point of 120 percent of compressor running load amperage to automaticallyunload compressor preventing over-current trip.

3. Provide low refrigerant limit to automatically unload each compressor preventing alow evaporator temperature trip.

B. Chiller Operation in Abnormal Operating Conditions:1. Unloaded Running: Adequate chilled water production.2. Trip-out Limit Reached: Chiller goes off-line and manual reset is required for

continued operation.

C. Control Panel Display:1. Evaporator pressure.2. Condenser refrigerant pressure.3. Entering and leaving evaporator water temperature.4. Chilled water set-point.5. Electrical 3 phase current limit and percent RLA setpoint.6. Electrical 3 phase amp draw.7. Chiller operating mode.8. Condenser refrigerant temperature.9. Elapsed time and number of starts counter.10. Chiller compressor run status relay.11. Minimum of 20 diagnostics with time and date stamp.12. Identification of the fault, date, time and operating mode at time of occurrence,

type of reset required, and help message.

D. Points for BAS Control and Monitoring:1. Relay output energized upon detecting a fault requiring manual reset.2. Relay output energized whenever unit is operating in a limit mode for an extended

period of time.3. Analog input to control leaving chilled water temperature set-point based upon a

4-20ma or 0-10 VDC signal from the building automation system.4. Programmable soft during pull-down period via ramped current limit or fully

adjustable, temperature pull-down rate.5. Leaving chilled water reset based upon return water temperature.



6. Provide RS-232 for printer interface.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Align chiller package on steel or concrete foundations.

C. Install units on vibration isolators.

D. Connect to electrical service.

E. Connect to chilled water piping.

F. Connect to condenser water piping.

G. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning and removal.

3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Perform factory startup of the chiller by factory trained and authorized servicingtechnicians confirming equipment has been correctly installed prior to equipmentbecoming operational and covered under the manufacturer's warranty.

B. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil if not completely factory charged.

C. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance.




C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.4. Location: At project site.



3.04 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additionalrequirements relating to maintenance service.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS23 74 13 - 1

SECTION 23 74 13

PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outdoor modular air-handling unit.

B. Maintenance service.


A. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.

B. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.


A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015.

B. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001, withAddendum (2011).

C. AHRI 430 (I-P) - Performance Rating of Central Station Air-Handling Units; 2014.

D. AMCA (DIR) - (Directory of) Products Licensed Under AMCA International CertifiedRatings Program; 2015.

E. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2016.

F. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified AerodynamicPerformance Rating; 2016.

G. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.

H. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;2014.

I. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2018.

J. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2015.

K. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; Most RecentEdition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.



L. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise ResidentialBuildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, IncludingAll Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

M. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;2018.

N. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

O. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products andassemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electricalcharacteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and partslisting.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.




A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are inplace, ready for immediate installation of units.

1.07 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier, a part of UTC Building and Industrial Systems, a unit of United TechnologiesCorp

B. Trane, a brand of Ingersoll Rand

C. York International Corporation/Johnson Controls Inc


2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Units shall ship in the number of sections necessary to meet project requirements andshall ship in as many splits as specified in selection software. Split options as follows:1. Shipped in sections — shipping split.

B. Unit shall be factory-supplied, factory-assembled, outdoor, central station air handler.The air-handling unit may consist of a fan with the following factory-installedcomponents as indicated on the equipment schedule.1. Mixing Box2. Exhaust Mixing Box3. Plenum4. Angle Filter5. Chilled Water Coil and Plenum with Coil Connection Housing6. VFD Plenum7. Draw-thru Supply Fan

2.03 CASING

A. Construction:1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels.

Removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.2. All units shall be supplied with a perimeter, 14-gage or heavier, G-90 galvanized,

high tensile steel base rail with a pocket to accommodate roof curb. Perimeterlifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each shipping section.Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable.

3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside ofthe casing to the outside.

4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel (18gauge optional), and shall have one of the following exterior finishes as specified:



a. Pre-painted with a baked enamel finish passing 500-hour salt spray test(ASTM/ASME B-117) for pre-painted steel and 125-hour marine level 1prohesion test (ASTM G-85.A5) for pre-painted steel.

b. Unpainted G-90 galvanized steel.5. Roof shall be double-wall, pitched in four directions at a minimum roof slope of

1/4-in. per foot across the width of the unit. No penetrations shall be made inpressure sensitive panels. Roof shall incorporate a standing top seam. All seams inthe roof shall be gasketed and capped to prevent water infiltration into the unit.

6. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be one piece double-wall constructionwith foam insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assembliesshall not carry an R-value of less than 13.

7. Casing deflection shall not exceed an L/240 ratio when subject to an internalpressure of ±8-in. wg and shall exhibit no permanent deformation at ±9 in. wg L isdefined as the longest linear panel or cabinet length (measured to AHRI 1350 Cdlevel 2).

8. Casing leakage rate shall be less than 1% at ±8 in. wg of nominal unit airflow or 50cfm, whichever is greater. Leakage rate shall be tested and documented on aroutine basis on random production units. Optionally, factory witness leak testingand/or test reports shall be available.

9. Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and shall seal against a fullperimeter automotive style gasket to ensure a tight seal.

10. The panel retention system shall comply with UL 1995 which states all movingparts (for example, fan blades, blower wheels, pulleys, and belts) that, ifaccidentally contacted, could cause bodily injury, shall be guarded againstaccidental contact by an enclosure requiring tools for removal.

11. Base rail shall overhang the curb to facilitate water run-off and protection of thecurb to base connection from water intrusion.

12. Accessibility options shall be as follows:a. Hinged, lockable double-wall access door on either side with removable

access panel(s) on the other side.13. Depending on the options selected and the remaining available space inside each

section, the following op-tions may be available:a. Reinforced glass viewports shall be factory-installed on the access panel(s) or

door(s) of this section.b. Marine lights shall be factory-installed with or without GCFI convenience

outlets.14. Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless

aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material is used. Paintedwelds on unit exterior steel or galvanized steel are not acceptable.

15. All coil sections shall be double-wall construction with foam insulation sealedbetween the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value ofless than 13.

B. Access Doors:



1. Access doors shall be one piece, hinged, lockable, double-wall construction withfoam insulation sealed between the in-ner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shallnot carry an R-value of less than 13.

C. Drain Pans:1. Drain pans shall be foam insulated double-wall stainless steel construction (18

gauge optional). The pan shall be sloped toward the drain connection. Drain panshall have 1-1/2-in. MPT connection exiting through the hand side or opposite sideof the casing as specified. Drain connection shall be insulated from the drain pan tothe point at which it exits the casing. One drain outlet shall be supplied for eachcooling coil section. Drain pan shall allow no standing water and comply withASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016. Where 2 or more coils are stacked in a coil bank,intermediate drain pans shall be provided and the condensate shall be piped to thebottom drain pan. The bottom coil shall not serve as a drain path for the upper coil.

D. Hoods and Louvers:1. Outside air hoods:

a. Outside air hoods shall be constructed of 20-gage galvanized G-90 steel andsized for 100% of unit nominal cfm.

b. Hoods shall include easily accessible 1-in. moisture eliminators with amaximum velocity of no more than 500 fpm.

2. Exhaust air hoods:a. Exhaust air hoods shall be constructed of 16-gage galvanized G-90 steel and

shipped collapsed in place.b. Expanded metal bird screen shall be provided to prevent entry of unwanted

materials into air handler.3. Side intake louvers:

a. Frames and blades shall be 6063 alloy, 0.081 in. thick, mechanically fastenedwith stainless steel fasteners. Frame depth shall be 6 inches.

b. Vertical blades shall be designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill bymeans of a center rain hook and channels in jambs and mullions.

c. Louvers shall have 1/2-in. mesh removable aluminum bird screen.d. Visible mullions required for louver widths greater than 96 inches.e. Provide sill-flashing pans 4 in. high by full depth formed from minimum 0.060

in. thick aluminum.f. Louvers shall be designed to withstand a wind load of 25 lb per sq ft.g. Water penetration shall be no more than 0.01 oz per sq ft of free area at 1250

fpm per AMCA publication 511. The AMCA test was unable to determine thebeginning water penetration for this louver due to the fact that it lies above1250 fpm through free area.

h. Louver shall have a mill finish.

2.04 FANS

A. General:



1. Direct drive plenum fan sections shall have the option of one, two, four, or sixsingle width single inlet (SWSI) airfoil fan wheel(s). Airfoil blades shall be doublethickness design continuously welded to the back plate and the front plate. Fanwheel shall be constructed of aluminum. Airfoil blades shall be aluminumextrusions and shall be top welded to the back plate and front plate of the wheel.Fan wheel shall be dynamically balanced per ISO standard 1940 quality gradeG6.3.

2. Fan assembly vibration shall not exceed 0.248 in. per second when mounted onactive isolators. Vibration shall be measured in both vertical and horizontaldirections at the specified fan operating speed using specified motor. For testingpurposes, accelerometers shall be mounted on the motor near the bearing locationsand removed before shipment.

3. All fan sled components shall provide corrosion protection to pass 100-hour saltspray test per ASTM B-117.

4. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuousoperation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels andshafts shall be selected with a maximum operating speed 25% below the firstcritical.

B. Performance Ratings:1. Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with AHRI Standard

430.

C. Sound Ratings:1. Manufacturer shall submit first through eighth octave sound power for fan

discharge and casing radiated sound. Sound ratings shall be tested in accordancewith AHRI 260.

D. Mounting:1. Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a

common base assembly. The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing withfactory-installed isolators and vibration absorbent an discharge seal. A canvas styleduct connection between fan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable. Units shalluse 2-in. deflection spring isolators.

E. Fan Accessories:1. Direct Drive Plenum Fans:

a. Variable frequency drives.b. Motor protection box for motor current protection with a single VFD driving

multiple motors.c. Airflow measuring piezo ring.d. Piezo ring transducer.e. Motor shaft grounding ring.f. Inlet guard.

F. Flexible Connection:



1. The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory-installed isolatorsand vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection betweenfan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable.

2.05 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings:1. Self-aligning, grease lubricated, anti-friction with lubrication fittings extended to

drive side of fan section. Optional grease fittings extended to the exterior of thecasing are available. All bearing life calculations shall be done in accordance withABMA 9 for ball bearings and ABMA 11 for roller bearings.

2. Size 03 to 110 airfoil fans: Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-aligning, regreasableball or roller type bearings selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000hours or optionally for an (L50) of 500,000 hours.

B. Shafts:1. Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust

inhibitor.

2.06 COILS

A. All water coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance. All coilperformance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. All water anddirect expansion coils shall be tested at 450 psig air pressure. Direct expansion coilsshall be designed and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code forMechanical Refrigeration (latest edition). Factory-supplied 1/2-in. OD coils shall becovered under the standard product one-year limited warranty. All 5/8-in. OD coilsshall be warranted for a period not in excess of 12 months from their shipment from themanufacturer. Coil epoxy coating shall be covered under a 5-year limited warranty fromthe date of shipment from the manufacturer.

B. General Fabrication:1. All water and coils shall have minimum 1/2-in. OD copper tubes mechanically

expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow andpumping requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.016 inches.

2. Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars. Optional copper plate fins shall besupplied, if specified. Fin type shall be sine wave construction.

3. Aluminum-finned coils shall be supplied with die-formed casing and tube sheets ofmill galvanized steel or stainless steel as specified. Copper-finned coils shall besupplied with stainless steel casing and tube sheets.

C. Hydronic Cooling Coils:1. Headers shall be constructed of steel with steel MPT connections. Headers shall

have drain and vent connections accessible from the exterior of the unit. Optionalnon-ferrous headers and red brass MPT connections shall be supplied if specified.



2. Configuration: Coils shall be drainable, with non-trapping circuits. Coils will besuitable for a design working pressure of 300 psig at 200°F.

2.07 FILTER SECTION

A. Angle filter sections shall accept either 2-in. or 4-in. filters of standard sizes, arrangedin a horizontal V formation.

B. Differential Pressure Gages:1. Housing shall be constructed of a glass filled nylon case and acrylic lens. Exterior

finish shall be coated black.2. Accuracy shall be ±5% of full scale throughout range at 70°F.3. Pressure limits shall be 30 psig continuous to either pressure connection.4. Temperature limits shall be 20 to 120°F.5. Diameter of dial face shall be 2.33 in.6. Process connections shall be barbed, 3/16-in. for ID tubing.

2.08 DAMPERS

A. Factory-supplied dampers shall be warranted to be free from defects in material andworkmanship for a period of 12 months after being installed or placed in service, but inno instance shall the period of warranty be longer than 18 months from the date of theoriginal shipment by the manufacturer.

B. Mixing boxes, filter-mixing boxes, and exhaust boxes shall have parallel or opposedblades and interconnecting outside-air and return-air dampers. Bottom damper locationsshall be optionally available with a tool screen to prevent most objects from fallingthrough a bottom damper opening.1. Premium Dampers:

a. Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a double-skinairfoil design, with blade seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall bemechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self-lubricating syntheticbearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg differentialpressure.

2. Outside Air Measurement Dampers:a. Damper frame shall be nominal 4 in. x 1 in. x minimum 0.081 in. and

constructed of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.b. Airflow measuring blades shall be airfoil-shaped, heavy gage anodized

6063-T5 extruded aluminum and fixed in 10 in. x minimum 16 gagegalvanized steel frame.

c. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type along control dampersides.

d. Blade seals shall be neoprene along control damper blade edges.e. Bearings shall be molded synthetic.f. Linkage shall be galvanized steel, concealed in frame.



g. Axles shall be minimum 1/2-in. diameter plated steel, hex-shaped,mechanically attached to blade.

h. Operating temperature shall be –22 to 140°F.i. Air straightener section shall be aluminum alloy honeycomb contained in 5 in.

long, 16 gage galvanized steel sleeve attached to monitoring blade frame.j. Airflow range shall be 400 to 5,000 ft per minute face velocity.k. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg differential pressure.

2.09 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

A. Marine Lights and Convenience Outlets:1. Cast, non-ferrous metal, weatherproof, fixture.2. Cast, non-ferrous metal, weatherproof, electrical junction box.3. Gasketed, heat and shock resistant glass globe protects against moisture and debris.4. Cast, non-ferrous metal lamp guard to protect glass globe.5. UL and CSA listed.6. 100 watt type ‘A’ lamp maximum capacity.7. Each fixture is equipped with a 9.5 watt, 120 volt, 800 lumen LED lamp with an

average rated life of 25,000 hours, factory installed.8. Cast, non-ferrous metal, single gang, weatherproof, switch enclosure.9. With convenience outlet: Factory supplied and wired, SPST, toggle switch and 15

amp, 120 vac/60 Hz, NEMA 5-15 type, ground fault circuit interrupt (GFCI)receptacle, weatherproof, ‘In-Use’ type, lockable cover, UL listed.

10. Each fixture is factory wired to an externally mounted switch box. (Field powerconnections are made to the switch box mounted externally on the unit.)

11. All factory wiring penetrating through the panel is protected in ‘RIGID’ type metalconduit.

B. Variable Frequency Drives: See variable frequency drive section in Division 26.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install flexible duct connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork and airhandling unit sections. Ensure that metal bands of connectors are parallel withminimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

C. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.

D. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

E. Hydronic Coils:



1. Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflowarrangement).

2. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.3. Provide float operated automatic air vents at high points complete with stop valve.4. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points.

3.02 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Prepare and start equipment. Adjust for proper operation.




C. Demonstrate operation to Owner's maintenance personnel.

3.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year year from Dateof Substantial Completion.

B. Provide routine maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum timeperiod between calls.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenancedata, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan beltreplacement, and controls check-out, adjustments, and recalibration.

D. After each service call, submit copy of service call work order or report that includesdescription of work performed.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS23 82 00 - 1

SECTION 23 82 00

CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air coils.


A. Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.


C. Section 23 21 14 - Hydronic Specialties.

D. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.


A. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001, withAddendum (2011).

B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005(Revised 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and partslistings.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR COILS

A. Manufacturers:1. Water Coils:

a. Aerofin Corporationb. Trane, a brand of Ingersoll Randc. USA Coil & Aird. Greenheck.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Water Coils:1. Coils rated and tested in accordance with AHRI 410.2. Tubes: Material to consist of seamless copper, mechanically expanded to fins;

appropriate tube joining methods based on tube material.3. Fins: Material to consist of aluminum, continuous plate type with full fin collars

or individual helical finned tube type wound under tension.4. Casing: Heavy gage galvanized steel with mounting holes, including intermediate

tube supports if required by coil design and length.5. Headers (Manifolds): Construct of seamless copper pipe, cast iron, or nonferrous

material with tube connection appropriate to header material provided.6. Acceptable Factory Testing Methods:

a. Proof test at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure and leak test at themaximum operating temperature.

b. Leak test at minimum 300 psig air pressure under water.c. Perform hydrostatic testing for coils with removable headers in accordance

with approved shop drawings and normally accepted means and methods.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are suitable for installation.



B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Do not damage equipment or finishes.

C. Air Coils:1. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

a. Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angleframes and secure to casing.

b. Provide frames for maximum of three coil sections.c. Provide airtight seals between coil and casing or duct.

2. Coil Safeguards:a. Protect coils to prevent damage to flanges and fins.b. Comb out damaged fins.

3. Install all coils level except cleanable coils with 1:50 pitch.4. Make connections to hydronic and steam coils with unions and flanges.5. Hydronic (Drainable) Coils:

a. Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement).b. Locate supply water connection on leaving air side at bottom of supply header,

and return water connection at top.c. Provide manual air vents with stop valves at high points.

1) Install drain connections at low points of installation.



B. Provide manufacturer's field representative to test, inspect, instruct, and observe.

3.04 CLEANING

A. After construction and painting is completed, clean exposed surfaces of units.

B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of units.

C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets using finishmaterials furnished by the manufacturer.

D. Install new filters.






3.06 PROTECTION

A. Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during the balance of construction.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for basic electrical studies and reports, material handling, and other

basic electrical materials and methods.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 012. Section 09 91 00 – Painting.3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.4. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.5. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports Systems for Electrical Systems6. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.7. Section 26 05 33.19 – Wireways for Electrical Systems.8. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems9. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. America National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):1. ANSI/IEEE 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Buff Book.2. ANSI/IEEE 399, Recommended Practice for Power Systems Analysis - Brown

Book.3. ANSI/IEEE 1584, Guide for Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.4. ANI/IEEE C37.10, Guide for Diagnostics and Failure Investigation of Power

Circuit Breakers.5. ANSI/IEEE C37.13, Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures.6. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00, General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,

Power and Regulating Transformers.7. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.59, Standard for Dry-Type Transformer Through-Fault

Current Duration

C. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA):1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.

D. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).1. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.



E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)1. ANSI/NECA 100 Symbols for Electrical Construction Drawings.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).


A. Prepare and submit a Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, and Protective Device CoordinationStudy for new distribution and mechanical equipment installed as part of this projectas specified in this Article.1. Immediately after award of the Contract, collect all data needed to perform

calculations for the studies.a. Obtain, in writing, electrical utility source information and any other

information required from the utility to perform the necessary studies directlyfrom the serving utility.

b. The Owner and Engineer will provide, as available, information about theportions of the facility’s existing electrical system affected by the workperformed under this Contract.1) The Owner will provide two copies of the latest revision of the existing

facility record drawings and the facility equipment list to the Contractorfor use in defining existing equipment load requirements.

2) Base the contribution of motors on actual motor loads as indicated on theequipment list, system one-line diagrams, and panel schedules.

3) If the information provided is insufficient to perform the studies orrepresents unknown ratings of existing equipment, investigate and obtainthe information required.a) Employ qualified technicians to obtain the necessary data.

c. Obtain data for new equipment directly from suppliers and other contractorsworking on the project.

2. Once the data needed is obtained, perform a preliminary computerized ShortCircuit, Arc-Flash, and Protective Device Coordination Study and computerizedboth complete with calculations.a. At least two full calendar weeks prior to submitting Shop Drawings for

equipment included the respective studies, submit the preliminary studies andcorresponding computer printouts and annotated one-line distributiondiagram to the Engineer for review and comment.

b. After the Engineer provides his comments, submit four copies of the revisedand corrected preliminary studies.

3. Include the following types of information common to each study:a. Calculations and tabulations.

1) Ensure that the calculations in the Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, andProtective Device Coordination Study are sufficient to ascertaininterrupting and/or withstand ratings of the equipment.a) Identify items of distribution system equipment that are not rated for

the available fault current and provide corrective recommendationsfor consideration.



b. Data on the computer programs used to perform calculations and tabulations.c. An appendix to each report that includes the information obtained from

outside entities, agencies, electrical manufacturers, the serving utilitycompany, field inspections, and other field sources such as the following:1) Copies of letters.2) Photographic records.3) Nameplate tracings.4) Actual data sources from which the data and information was obtained.

B. Final Project Report:1. After the Engineer accepts the revised and corrected preliminary studies, prepare

a report summarizing the results of the individual studies; and submit this FinalProject Report to the Engineer for acceptance and approval.a. Include the following sections in the Final Project Report:

1) Description.2) Purpose.3) Basis and scope of the study.4) A single line diagram of that portion of the power system that is included

within the scope of the study.5) Computerized time versus current coordination graphs and

corresponding printouts for protective devices.a) Include the feeder cable damage curves associated with the items

being coordinated in these graphs.b) Include the ANSI/NEMA MG 1 damage points for the motors in the

system and the ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00 mechanical and electricaldamage points on the curves.

6) Tabulations of the relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection,and commentary regarding same.

b. Submit ten bound copies of the Final Project Report for review and approvaland two copies of record drawings showing the existing facility as it wasbefore the work of this Contract was performed.

c. Once the Final Project Report has been approved, forward one additionalbound final copy of the report to the Owner.

C. Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, and Protective Device Coordination Study:1. Prepare the Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, and Protective Device Coordination Study

under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Marylandor have a NETA certified electrical testing laboratory employing technicianscertified according to ANSI/NETA ETT prepare it.a. Perform the short circuit portion of the Study in accordance with ANSI/IEEE

C37.10, ANSI/IEEE C37.13, ANSI/IEEE 141, ANSI/IEEE 242, andANSI/IEEE 399.1) Calculate short circuit momentary duty values and interrupting duty

values on the basis of the following short circuit conditions at newdistribution equipment (e.g., transformer, switchboard, panelboard, etc.)and at the terminals of new utilization equipment (e.g., HVAC,



Plumbing, etc.) that is either 480V or 208V, 3-phase and rated 15 Amps or higher. Include: a) Single line to ground fault.b) Bolted three-phase line to ground fault.c) Double line (line to line) to ground fault.

b. Perform the arc flash portion of the Study for the electrical distributionequipment in accordance with NFPA 70E and ANSI/IEEE 1584.1) Perform the analysis under worst-case arc-flash conditions; and if

applicable, describe in the final report how these conditions differ fromworst-case bolted fault conditions.

2) Provide the following items for each circuit and arc location analyzed:a) Printed hardcopy of calculations performed.b) Arcing fault magnitude.c) Device clearing time.d) Duration of arc.e) Arc flash boundary distances.f) Working distance.g) Arc flash incident energy.h) Hazard risk category.i) Personal-protective equipment classes.j) Arc flash warning labels as specified in Section 26 05 23.k) Recommendations and potential options for arc flash energy

reduction to reduce the Incident Energy levels where they arecalculated to be over the 40 cal/cm2.

l) Maintenance procedures/guidelines in accordance with therequirements of NFPA 70E for the Owner.

c. Coordinate protective devices with systems and equipment by providing thenecessary calculations and logic decisions required to select or to check theselection of power fuse ratings, ratios and characteristics of associated currenttransformers, and breaker trip characteristics and settings and distributionsystem fuses.1) Provide coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices on a

system basis.a) Adhere to National Electrical Code restrictions and maintain proper

coordination.b) Provide a sufficient number of separate curves to clearly indicate the

coordination achieved.2) Computer-generate time-current characteristics of the specified

protective devices on log-log scale plots.a) Include complete titles, the respective one-line diagram and

identifying legends, associated relays or fuse characteristics,significant motor starting characteristics, complete operating bandsof low voltage circuit breaker trip curves and fuses.

b) Indicate the types of protective devices selected, proposed relaytaps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, transformermagnetizing inrush, through-fault current duration per ANSI/IEEE



C57.12.59, dry-type transformers withstand, cable thermal overcurrent withstand limits, symmetrical fault currents and motor full load current, locked-rotor current, and magnetizing inrush in the coordination plots.

3) Provide the selection and settings of the protective devices separately ina tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number,current transformer ratios and connection, manufacturer and type, rangeof adjustment, and recommended settings.a) Use the information from the Study to obtain optimum device

protective and coordination performance.2. In addition to the information common to the studies as listed in Subparagraph

1.04.A.3, include the following information specific to short circuit, arc-flash, andprotective device coordination distortion only in the Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, andProtective Device Coordination Study:a. Complete short circuit and protective device coordination studies, including

coordination plots, for the following electrical distribution systems servingthe entire facility:1) Utility low voltage service system.2) Low voltage 480Y/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire distribution systems.3) Low voltage 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire distribution systems.

b. Power company supply and network characteristics, including the following:1) The base quantities selected.2) Source impedance data and impedance diagrams.3) One-line diagrams.4) Calculation methods and tabulations.

a) Include short circuit tabulations of the fault impedance, X to Rratios, asymmetry factors, KVA, symmetrical and asymmetricalfault currents, and all multiplying factors.

5) Conclusions and recommendations.c. Motor starting characteristics for motors 50 HP and above.

1) Study reduced voltage motor timer settings to determine the correctcoordinated settings and the correct tap setting based on the motor torquecurve, load torque curve, and motor WK2 and load WK2 to minimizeundesirable influence on the distribution system.

d. Provide sufficient information in the study to ensure adequate protection ofthe cables, transformers, and other equipment; to indicate proper coordinationbetween fuses and circuit breakers; and to determine areas of the system inwhich additional coordination may be required.

3. Submit Short Circuit, Arc-Flash, and Protective Device Coordination Studyinformation with the equipment submittals for review by the Engineer.

D. Motor Overload Relay and Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protective Device Schedule1. Prepare and submit a Motor Overload Relay and Branch Circuit Overcurrent

Protective Device Schedule that provides all information needed to determineproper settings.

2. Obtain the actual horsepower, service factor, and full load running current foreach motor on the project that is rated over one-eighth horsepower.



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with submittalprocedures of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. Submit Product Data, including catalog cuts, for all products provided for theelectrical work of this Contract and as specified in other Sections.1) Clearly indicate the specific products proposed for the project by use of

arrow, circle or underline. Indicate usage of each product on eachsubmittal.

2. Shop Drawings:a. Submit Shop Drawings for the electrical work of this Contract as specified in

other Sections.3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data:1) Short Circuit, Arc Flash and Protective Device Coordination Study

Reports:a) Preliminary Short Circuit, Arc Flash and Protective Device

Coordination Study.b) Final Short Circuit, Arc Flash and Protective Device Coordination

Study.c) CD ROM disc containing:

(1) The complete computer program model(s) used in performingthe Short Circuit, Arc Flash, and Protective DeviceCoordination Study. Provide with both the Preliminary andFinal Study Reports.

(2) Spreadsheet in MS Excel format that tabulates all analyzedscenarios with accompanying results. Provide with both thePreliminary and Final Study Reports.

2) Final Project Report, with final Short Circuit, Arc Flash and ProtectiveDevice Coordination Study Reports.

3) Motor Overload Relay and Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protective DeviceSchedule.

b. Certificates:1) Testing agency quality verification that all products meet requirements or

manufacturer disclaimer statements.c. Qualification Statements:

1) Testing agency qualifications.4. Closeout Submittals:

a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.b. CD ROM disc containing the complete computer program model(s) used in

performing the Circuit, Arc Flash, and Protective Device Coordination,updated to reflect the final as-built condition.


A. Qualifications:



1. Testing Agency Qualifications:a. Use a NETA accredited testing agency, or approved equal, that is accredited

for the region in which the Contract work is performed.b. Submit the testing agency’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Perform all electrical work in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 70,

the National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications:1. Submit evidence with all Product Data that the products represented meet testing

agency quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labelingrequirements.a. Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a separate

listing card.b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not

provide evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an itemdoes not have quality assurance verification.1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are

subject to the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Deliver materials and equipment to the work site in accordance with the requirementsof Section 01 60 00.1. Deliver materials and equipment in a clean condition.

a. Provide packaging that plugs, caps, or otherwise seals openings both duringshipping and temporary storage.

2. Provide equipment needed for unloading operations and have such equipment onthe work site to perform unloading work when the material and equipment isdelivered.a. If possible, clearly identify pick-points or lift-points on electrical equipment

crating and packaging.b. In the absence pick-points or lift-points on equipment crating and packaging,

identify pick-points or lift-points on the equipment itself.

B. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of Division 01.1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.2. When unloading materials and equipment, provide special lifting harnesses or

apparatus as required by manufacturers.

C. Store electrical materials and equipment, whether on-site or off-site, in accordancewith Division 01 and the following:1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for storing the items.2. Store electrical equipment and products under cover.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



a. Except for electrical conduit, store electrical equipment and products inheated warehouses or enclosed buildings with auxiliary heat and that provideprotection from the weather on all sides.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:1. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the

requirements of Section 01 78 23, other Contract requirements, and as follows:a. Organize Operation and Maintenance Manuals by Specification Section and

equipment number as designated on the Contract Drawings.b. Include suppliers, supplier addresses, and supplier telephone numbers for the

equipment and products furnished.2. 60 days prior to the request for final payment, prepare and submit two copies of

the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for approval.3. Upon approval of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit six

corrected copies as follows:a. Submit one set to the Engineer.b. Place one set in the spare parts and fuse cabinet in the new electrical service

buildingc. Deliver the remaining four copies to the Owner.

4. Insert final record drawings in each set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals atProject Closeout.

1.08 TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN OF SERVICES

A. Coordination: In addition to the requirements listed herein, the Contractor shallprovide an additional notice of not less than 72 hours to the Owner of activities thatwill adversely affect Owner.

B. Conditions: This Contractor shall not proceed with any work related to the temporaryshutdown of services listed herein until all equipment is on site and all of theContractor’s personnel are available as required to facilitate a smooth transitionbetween new and existing services. Equipment on site shall include, but not be limitedto, the following:1. New equipment to replace existing equipment made obsolete during the

shutdown.2. Spare parts to replace crucial components found to be defective.3. All necessary accessories required to complete the shutdown as specified herein.

C. Electric Service:1. Scope: The existing switchboard shall be replaced with new as indicated herein

and as shown on the drawings.2. Shutdown: The Contractor shall coordinate the shutdown of the electrical service

for replacement of the switchboard with the Owner, the Owner’s UtilityContractor, and the Engineer in writing at least ten (10) business days in advance



of the proposed shutdown. No shutdown of the electrical service shall take place until all parties have agreed to a date and time. a. On the agreed upon day of the electrical service shutdown, the Contractor

shall notify the Owner at what time the shutdown is to occur. The Contractorshall not proceed with any work related to the shutdown until the Owner hasconfirmed that a shutdown can occur as previously planned.

b. Upon completion of the switchboard work and the required modifications tothe electric service, the Contractor shall notify the Owner that power has beenrestored to the building. The Owner will be responsible for notifying theirpersonnel as necessary.

3. All modifications and associated work involving the new switchboard / electricalservice shall be performed during a three (3) day / 72-hour continuous timeperiod.

4. Additional Shutdowns of the Switchboard: Separate shutdowns for connectingnew feeders shall be scheduled to occur after non-operating hours per thedirection of the Owner. The Owner's Utility Contractor is not required for theseshutdowns.

5. See drawings for additional requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Grounding and Bonding Materials:1. Provide grounding and bonding materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 26.

B. Hangers and Supports:1. Provide hangers and supports for electrical equipment in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 28.

C. Electrical Identification Materials:1. Provide electrical identification materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 53.

D. Wire and Cable:1. Provide low-voltage electrical wire, cable, and accessories in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 19.

E. Conduit and Raceway:1. Provide conduit and raceway as indicated, as appropriate for the application per

NFPA 70, and in accordance with the following:a. Conduit and Tubing: Provide electrical conduit and tubing in accordance

with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13.b. Wireway and Fittings: Provide electrical wireway and fittings in accordance

with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.19.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



F. Wiring Devices:1. Provide electrical wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 27 26.

2.02 SHOP FINISHING

A. For electrical equipment, factory-apply paint and coating systems that at a minimummeet the requirements of the NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the additionalrequirements specified in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field-Applied Finishes:1. Except for factory-finished items that have been completely finished with factory-

applied primer and final finish coatings, finish installed electrical materials,equipment, apparatus, and items in the field in accordance with the requirementsof Section 09 91 00.a. Apply paint material matching the composition of the factory-applied

products.1) Obtain factory-supplied paint for this work whenever available.

b. Comply with the paint manufacturer’s instructions for mixing, thinning,surface preparation, application, spreading rate, drying time, andenvironmental limitations concerning application of the paint.

c. Apply paint in such a manner so that the finished appearance will match asnearly as possible the factory finish.1) Poorly applied paint may be required to be repaired and re-applied by the

Contractor in accordance with Article 3.02 at no additional cost to theOwner.

2. Coordinate the painting of large areas with the Engineer to minimize the durationof exposure of other workers to toxic paint fumes.


A. If the factory finish of factory-finished items is damaged for any reason, refinish theitem.1. If an item that has several surfaces has damage on one surface, refinish the entire

damaged surface.a. Surface Preparation:

1) Outside the damaged area, lightly sand the entire surface and performadditional sanding to profile the damaged paint edge.

2) Prepare the surfaces of damaged areas in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.


A. Perform electrical testing as detailed in Section 26 05 63 and in each SpecificationSection.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



B. Have electrical work inspected as required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).1. Submit a copy of the certification of inspection with the final project closeout

documents and post the original in the electrical room on-site protected by a metalframe with a protective plate glass cover.

C. The quality of finishing and refinishing work is subject to approval by the Engineer.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment totest, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices asrecommended in the Final Project Report of the power system study.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 03 - 1

SECTION 26 05 03

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of services and work ofan administrative nature as well as general requirements concerning certain productsand operations, all common to the entire Division 26 Sections.

B. Related Sections:1. All Division 26 Sections.

1.02 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

A. This Section of the Specifications is provided for clarification of the responsibilities ofDivision 26 to the automatic temperature control wiring, safety disconnect switches,motor starters and variable frequency drives provided under Division 23.1. Energy management and automatic temperature control components, safety

disconnect switches, motor starters and variable frequency drives which arefurnished as part of Division 23 will be installed as work of Division 23.

2. All control wiring and conduit and final terminations, for energy management /automatic temperature control components shall be performed as work ofDivision 23.

3. Division 26 shall be responsible for connecting power wiring to all safetydisconnect switches, motor starters and variable frequency drives and from thesecontrol devices to the mechanical equipment. All control wiring for the variablefrequency drives or motor starters shall be by Division 23.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Basic electrical materials required for the work to be included in this Section are asspecified in other Sections of these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.

2.02 COORDINATION

A. Electrical Equipment:1. Unless otherwise indicated, this Contractor will provide the required safety

disconnect devices for BL-1 and BL-2. This contractor will provide a Thermalswitch with overloads for IWH-1.

B. Mechanical Equipment:1. Unless otherwise indicated, mechanical equipment control panel(s) will be

provided as part of the work of other Contracts.


Contract No. HCC21002 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 03 - 2

2. Electrical Contractor will provide only 120-volt power to respective control panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Electrical materials being installed for the connection of equipment shall be installedas specified in the applicable sections of these Specifications, and as indicated on theDrawings.

3.02 EQUIPMENT WIRING

A. Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Installation:1. Provide required wiring to items of equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 - 1

SECTION 26 05 05

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of material fordemolition and salvaging existing electrical systems, wiring, raceways, supports,equipment and minor repair of underlying structure.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01 – General Requirements

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit demolition plan.

1.04 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate all power outages with Owner.1. Switchboard Replacement.

B. Perform demolition in a manner not to delay or interfere with other operations of workin the Project and operations of the Owner.

1.05 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule all work with the Owner through the Owner’s designated representative.Start no work in an area until a schedule has been prepared, submitted and approved.1. Switchboard: Replacement of the existing switchboard with new shall be

performed over a 3-day period, preferably during the weekend. At the initial jobconference, the Contractor shall be prepared to discuss dates / times for theproposed for the work to occur. No work shall be performed until the Owner hasagreed to the proposed switchboard replacement schedule.

B. Coordinate the work schedule with the Owner, Engineer, and other Contractors.Coordinate the work so not to interfere or conflict with the use of the facility.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Demolition work, as specified herein, is not intended to be performed as a wreckingoperation but as work relative to the performance of the various constructionoperations of the Project.

B. Existing Conditions:1. Demolition information shown or otherwise indicated on the Drawings is based

on visual field examination and existing record documents. While theinformation provided is believed to be correct, no assurance is implied relative toits total completeness or accuracy. Report discrepancies to Construction Managerfor disposition of the Engineer before disturbing existing installations.

2. The Contractor hereby distinctly agrees that neither the Engineer nor the Owner isresponsible for the correctness or sufficiency of the information given and afterhis own Site Investigation:a. That he must have no claim for delay or extra compensation or damage on

account of the information given; andb. That he must have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility

under the Contract with respect to the above stated stipulations.

C. Protection: Exercise care during demolition work to confine demolition operations tothe areas as indicated on the Drawings. The physical means and methods used forprotection are at the Contractor's option. However, the Contractor will be completelyresponsible for replacement and restitution work, of whatever nature, at no expense tothe Owner.1. Additionally, if public safety is endangered during the progress of the demolition

work, provide adequate protective measures to protect public pedestrian andvehicular traffic on streets and walkways.

2. Conform signs, signals and barricades to requirements of Federal, State and locallaws, rules, regulations, precautions, orders and decrees.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as conduit, raceway, wire and cable,support devices, fasteners, and control devices as required for work of this Section arespecified in other Sections.

B. Equipment along with machinery and apparatus, motorized or otherwise, used toperform the demolition may be chosen at the Contractor's discretion. However, thechosen equipment shall perform the work within the limits of the Contractrequirements.

C. Patching Materials: Patching materials shall match, as nearly as practical, the existingmaterial for each surface being patched.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that measurements and existing circuiting arrangements are as shown onDrawings.

B. Equipment, machinery and apparatus, motorized or otherwise, used to perform thedemolition work may be used as chosen at the Contractor's discretion, but which willperform the work within the limits of the Contract requirements.

C. Verify that abandoned wiring and electrical equipment serve only the abandonedfacility.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removaloperations are the sole responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified.However, equipment used, and methods of demolition and removal will be subject toapproval of the Construction Manager and the Engineer.1. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new

construction as indicated and/or as required.2. Remove exposed abandoned conduit systems, including abandoned conduit

systems above accessible ceiling systems.3. Remove wiring in abandoned conduit systems to source of power supply.4. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify

installations and provide access panels or plates as appropriate.5. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with

existing electrical installations, and as specified in other Sections of theseSpecifications.

6. Wiring Devices:a. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned

outlets if conduits serving them is abandoned and removed. Provide blankcovers for abandoned outlets, which are not removed.

b. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilizationequipment that has been removed.

7. Lighting:a. Disconnect and remove abandoned lighting fixtures and floodlighting units.

Remove brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.8. Equipment:

a. Disconnect and remove electrical equipment where so indicated on theDrawings.

b. Disconnect and remove abandoned distribution equipment, panelboards,disconnect switches and motor starters as indicated on the drawings or asotherwise required due to the removal of associated equipment.

9. In exposed through-structure conduit locations, or where concealed conduitsbecome exposed by penetrating a structural floor, wall or ceiling, the abandoned



conduits must be cut below the finished structural surface in order to perform surface patching.

B. System De-activation: Prior to demolition and removal work, de-activate existingelectrical systems as indicated.

C. Use means and methods for permanent disconnection, which render the remainingelectrical systems and apparatus in conformity with NFPA 70.

D. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in serviceduring construction.1. Conform temporary wiring to the requirements of NEC Article 305, General

Requirements.2. Temporary electrical service work as specified in Division 1, General

Requirements.

E. Remove all wiring from disconnected circuits, feeders, and equipment unlessotherwise specified or indicated. Remove all exposed raceways and related supports.Cut all exposed raceways flush with floor and plug.

F. Coordinate electrical power outages with requirements in Section 26 05 00.

G. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removaloperations are the sole responsibility of the Contractor except as otherwise specified.Use equipment and methods that do not damage items to remain or salvaged and areasadjacent to demolition operations. Use methods that do not interfere with Owner’soperations and which do not cause excessive dust. Remove debris as it accumulates.

H. Cutting: Perform cutting work of existing structure materials by such methods as willprevent extensive damage beyond the immediate area of cutting.

I. Debris Removal: Dispose of demolition debris off site in a lawful manner.Containerize or otherwise store debris as work is in progress.

J. Patching: After demolition and removal work is performed patch the existingstructure as required to match surrounding finish and appearance including theappropriate surface decoration.

K. Abandoned Electrical Equipment and Apparatus: Existing electrical equipment andapparatus in or on the structures not claimed as salvage by the Owner shall become theproperty of the Contractor and may not be disposed of on the site but removed anddisposed of in a lawful manner off-site.

L. Salvage: The Owner shall have the right to claim as salvage any items and materialsremoved under the work of this Section. Should such right of salvage be exercised bythe Owner, move and neatly store removed items on the site in a location agreeable tothe Owner and in a manner approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning,

and protecting low voltage cable, shielded cable, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.3. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems4. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 13 - Standard for Power-Limited Circuit Cables.2. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.


A. Conductors in Raceway and Conduit Systems:1. Provide conduit systems for installing the wiring that is outside of equipment.2. Except for raceway or conduit for control wires or where otherwise indicated on

the Contract Drawings, design raceway and conduit systems so that the maximumnumber of low-voltage current carrying conductors (per NFPA 70, Article 310) ineach raceway or conduit does not exceed three, plus a ground.

B. Cable Tension Design Requirements:1. Design conduit runs so that the tension limits set by the wire and cable

manufacturers will not be exceeded.a. Provide additional pulling points as required to limit the tension to acceptable

levels.2. Generate and submit tension cable pulling calculations for all underground power

runs.a. Include pull loads, tension, and safety factors for all cables with the

calculations.



C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts:1. Submit low-voltage ground, power, and control wiring product data as listed

below for the products provided as the Work of this Section; and clearly indicatethe usage of each product on the data submitted.a. Wires and cables.b. Lugs.c. Connectors.d. Tapes.e. Pulling lubricant.f. Tools used to crimp connectors.

D. Use of Trade Names:1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the

basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required.a. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose

products are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contractrequirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with thesubmittal procedures of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. Wires and cables.b. Lugs


A. Qualifications:1. Installer Qualifications:

a. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensedelectricians.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in

NFPA 70, and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codesand regulatory requirements.

C. Certifications:1. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved

by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the ElectricalTesting Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and the applicationintended, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratoriesare not available or unless standards do not exist for the products.a. Provide copper conductors listed and labeled by UL for all wiring.




A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:1. Imprint insulated conductors with the date of manufacture, the wire type, and the

manufacturer.2. Protect items from damage during delivery, handling, and installation.

a. Comply with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for inspection,handling, storage, temperature conditioning, bending and training limits,pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installing cable.

B. Acceptance at Site:1. Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months before delivery to the Site is

unacceptable for use under this Contract, and will be rejected.

C. Storage and Protection:1. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets.2. Protect items from damage during storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS

A. Conductor Design Requirements:1. Provide conductors of the proper size and ampacity ratings based on Article 310

of NFPA 70.a. Provide copper conductors that have 98 percent conductivity.b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, at a minimum provide

conductors of the following American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes:1) For power and branch feeder circuits: 12 AWG.

a) For power and branch feeders, provide solid or stranded copper low-voltage conductors for sizes up to and including 10 AWG, providestranded copper low-voltage conductors for 8 AWG and larger sizes.

2) For control circuits: 14 AWG.3) For alarm and status circuits: 14 AWG.4) For single conductor instrument wiring: 14 AWG.5) For multiple conductor instrument wiring: 16 AWG.

B. Insulation Design Requirements:1. Provide low voltage ground, power, and control wiring having the proper

insulation types as follows:a. For exterior, wet, and damp locations, including NEMA 4X locations: Type

dual rated THHN/THWN.b. For underground wiring:

1) For sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG: Type THHN/THWN.2) For sizes 8 AWG and larger: Type RHW-2 or THHN/THWN.

c. For wiring that is wholly in dry indoor locations: dual-rated TypeTHHN/THWN.



2. Color Coding of Wiresa. Insulation shall be colored black and wrapped with colored tape per Tables

26 05 19-1.

C. Manufacturers1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Continental Wire & Cable Companyb. SouthWirec. General Cablea. CME Wire & Cable Inc.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. CABLE PULLING LUBRICATION AND LUBRICANT:1. Lubricant shall provide reduced tension on all types of cable jackets, dry to a thin

lubricating film that retains its lubricity for an extended period and won't cementin the cables.

2. The cable pulling lubricant shall produce a low coefficient of friction on a widevariety of cable jacket materials. The lubricant shall be UL listed. It shall be easyto handle and adhere well to the cable. Where appropriate, it shall also be testedand approved for use with CSPE (chlorosulfonated polyethylene) fire-retardantcable jackets where these materials are utilized.

3. The lubricant shall be UL or CSA Listed and Labeled and shall pass the IEEE1210, Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricantswith Wire and Cable. It shall pass physical compatibility tests on LLDPE, XLPE,CPE, and PVC cable jacket or sheath materials. It shall not stress crackpolyethylene per ASTM Standard 1693. There shall be no significant changes inthe conductive properties of XLPE and EPR semi-conducting compounds whenthe lubricant's effect on volume resistivity is tested according to IEEE Standard1210.

4. Lubricant to be specification-grade type that does not promote flame propagationwhen used with fire-retardant cables and systems, is harmless to humans,environmentally safe, and compatible with all common cable jacket materials

5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycoloils or waxes. The lubricant shall have less than a 6.0% solids residue afterdrying for 24 hours at 105°C.

6. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. PolyWater - DynaBlueb. 3M - Type WLc. Greenlee - Type GEL

B. Wire and Cable Connections:1. Grounding Connectors:

a. Provide grounding connectors conforming to the requirements of Section26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Connectors for Service Wires and Cables, and for Wires and Cables Larger ThanNumber 6:



a. Mechanical compression connectors:1) Provide mechanical compression connectors that are capable of

connecting single or multiple conductors, and of being installed with onewrench.a) Type: Compact, two-hole mechanical compression connectors

having two clamping bolts.(1) Connector Body: Provide a high copper bronze or brass alloy

body.(2) Bolts: Provide brass or bronze bolts; plated steel screws are

unacceptable.(3) Fasteners: Provide silicon-bronze fasteners for bolting

connectors to connections.3. Control Wiring Connections:

a. For control wiring connections at terminal boards, provide crimped nylon-insulated ring terminals.

b. For control wiring splices, provide nylon insulated butt splices withinsulation grips.

c. For joining more than two control wires, provide junction boxes withterminal boards.

4. Connectors for Other Conductors:a. Any of the applicable types listed for larger wire may be provided.b. Screw Terminal Connections:

1) For making terminal connections of stranded copper wire to screwterminals, provide nylon insulated crimped compression terminals withcopper barrel on the wire.

2) For making terminal connections of solid copper wire to screw terminals,provide screw lock connectors.

c. Wire Nuts:1) For making splices of copper wire, provide pre-insulated, UL-listed,

solderless connectors of the spring-lock or compression type that can beinstalled by hand or using tools.

d. Manufacturers:1) Thomas & Betts Corp.2) Tyco Electronics, AMP Inc.3) Ilsco Corp.4) FCI-Burndy® Products5) Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.



3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults, and handholes to verify that theyare clean, that they do not have burrs, that conduits are properly aligned, and that theyare complete.1. Ensure that on all conduits without threaded hubs, two locknuts are installed.2. Ensure that in all conduits with wires larger than No. 10, bushings are installed.3. Ensure that grounding bushings and fittings are installed at all places specified in

Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.4. Verify that proper sized boxes are installed.

B. Verify that boxes and conduit fittings conform to the bending requirements specifiedin Article 314 of NFPA 70 (NEC).

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Prepare conduits to receive wire and cable.1. Swab the conduits with a nylon brush and steel mandrel.2. Pre-lubricate the conduits for which the pulling tension calculations are based on

a coefficient of friction less than that of a dry conduit.

B. Verify that a means of controlling the pulling tension on the wire or cable is installedon the mechanical assist devices furnished for pulling cable.

C. Take the necessary precautions to prevent water, dirt, or other foreign material fromaccumulating in the conduits during the execution of wiring work.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Neutral Conductors:a. For each single-phase and each multi-phase feeder, provide separate neutrals.b. For branch circuits, except at three-phase wye-connected panelboards,

provide separate neutral conductors.2. Equipment Ground Conductors:

a. Provide a green equipment ground conductor with all runs.1) Provide the equipment ground conductor wire type as specified in

Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.

B. Pulling Cable:1. Establish a feed-in point at the manhole, handhole, or building located at the

highest elevation of the run, and pull cables down grade using flexible cable feedsto convey the cables into the duct runs through the feed-in point opening.a. Furnish quadrant blocks located properly along the cable run.b. Limit cable pulling tensions to the maximum pulling tensions recommended

by the cable manufacturer.1) Measure the cable pulling tension on all runs pulled with mechanical

assistance and for all cable runs where calculations are required to besubmitted by using a dynameter.



2) Remove cables subjected to excessive bending and tension and that arecracked or have damaged or nicked outer jackets from the Site, andreplace these cables with new undamaged cables.a) If pulling tension is exceeding during pulling, remove the affected

cables and mark them as not to be reused.c. Lubricate cables with lubricants during pulling.

C. Terminating Cable:1. Terminate cable using materials and methods indicated or specified herein, or in

accordance with the written instructions of the cable manufacturer or terminationkit manufacturer.a. For equipment connections, provide split bolt or compression type connectors,

mechanical compression connectors, or crimped compression type connectorsas specified and approved by the equipment manufacturer; for all other types ofconnections provide connectors of one of the types specified:

2. Protect insulated power and lighting cable terminations from accidental contact,deterioration of coverings, and moisture by using proper terminating devices andmaterials.

D. Splicing Wire and Cable:1. All new conductors shall be continuous from end to end without splices, except

where indicated on the drawings or with the special written permission of theEngineer on a case-by-case basis where the Contractor can demonstrate thatinstallation without splices is not practical.

2. If permitted as noted above, splice cables in accessible locations.3. Below-Grade Splices: Not permitted.4. Within outlet or junction boxes, make wire and cable splices that conform to the

requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC).a. Install these outlet or junction boxes in accessible locations.

E. Wiring Identification:1. Color code all feeder wires and cables as indicated in Table 26 05 19-1.

Table 26 05 19-1 Feeder Wire and Cable Color Coding Phase 480Y/277 Volts 208Y/120 Volts

A Brown Black B Orange Red C Yellow Blue

Neutral Gray or White with Yellow Tracer

White

Electrical Ground Conductor Green Green

2. Identify all power wiring by circuit and panelboard, switchboard, and motorcontrol center numbers.

3. Identify all control wiring with wire numbers.



4. Provide additional electrical identification of cabling and wiring as specified inSection 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.

F. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for requirements for measuring and recording of conductorlengths.


A. Site Tests:1. Prior to energizing wire and cable, field test the wire and cable as specified in

Section 26 05 63 Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line


Contract No. HCC21002 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning, and protecting

grounding and bonding systems.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables3. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 467, Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment.2. UL 486A-486B,Wire Connectors.3. UL 486C, Standard for Splicing Wire Connections.4. UL 486D, Standard for Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use

or in Damp or Wet Locations.5. UL 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum

and/or Copper Conductors.


A. Ground the conduit systems, metal enclosures, equipment frames, motors, andreceptacles in accordance with Article 250 of NFPA 70, Grounding.1. Ground all metallic conduits, wiring channels, and armored cables continuously

from outlet to outlet, and from outlets to cabinets, junction boxes, or pull boxes.a. Bond each run of raceways to form a continuous path for ground faults from

end to end.b. When liquid tight flexible metal conduit sizes larger than 1-inch or flexible

metal conduit are installed, provide external bond wires.2. Grounding Bushings:

a. Provide all 1-inch or larger metallic conduits with grounding bushings unlessthey enter metallic enclosures via integral threaded hubs.

b. Provide grounding bushings for conduits entering the bottom of freestandingequipment.



3. Provide insulated, internal equipment ground wire in all conduits.a. Bond the internal wire to all pull boxes, junction boxes, equipment

enclosures, and other enclosures as required by NFPA 70.

B. Equipment Grounds:1. Design all feeders and branch circuits to include an equipment grounding

conductor consisting of a copper wire within a raceway or cable and sized asspecified herein.a. Where conductors are run in parallel in multiple raceways, run the equipment

grounding conductor in parallel to the related conductors.b. Size each of the parallel equipment grounding conductors on the basis of the

ampere rating of the circuit overcurrent protecting device.2. Ground enclosing cases, mounting frames, rack mounted components, rack struts,

switches, breakers, control panels, motors, and other electrical or electricallyoperated equipment by providing an equipment grounding conductor with phaseconductors from an established equipment ground source.

C. Ground Wire Sizes:1. The minimum size for bonding jumpers and equipment ground conductors is as

follows:a. Under 600 volts:

1) Provide #12 AWG, minimum.2) Control power circuits, Provide #14 AWG, minimum.

2. When the ground wire size is not specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings,provide wire sized in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

D. Project Closeout:1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals that include the record drawings and

all Product Data in accordance with Division 01.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements ofDivision 01:1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s product data



a. Employ installers who specialize in the work of this Section, and who candemonstrate a minimum of three years documented experience.

2. All products are to be certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL),




A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:1. Transport materials, both on site and from Contractor's storage to site, in

accordance with the recommendations of the respective manufacturers.

B. Storage and Protection:1. Store materials, both on and off site, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.2. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Metal detectable polyester material, with minimum one-inch high lettering.Overcoated graphics to read, "CAUTION-BURIED ELECTRIC LINE" for electriclines.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Brady2. LEM Products, Inc3. Seton4. Or Approved Equal

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Conduit and Conduit Fittings:1. For conduit and conduit fittings that enclose single ground wires without

accompanying circuit conductors provide one of the following:a. Schedule 80, non-metallic conduit and fittings conforming to the

requirements of Section 26 05 33.13 and the conduit additionally conformingto the requirements of NEMA TC-2, and the fittings additionally conformingto the requirements of NEMA TC-3.

b. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) conduit and fittings conforming to therequirements of NEMA TC-14 and Section 26 05 33.13.

2. For other conduit and conduit fittings, provide conduit of the types specified orindicated and that conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Wire:1. Insulated Ground Wire:

a. Provide insulated Class B copper stranded wire rated for 600 volts thatconforms to the requirements of NEMA WC-7, and is green in color.Insulation type shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Continental Wire & Cable Companyb. SouthWirec. General Cable



d. Okonite Co.e. Or Approved Equal

C. Clamps and Non-Welded Connectors:1. Provide bronze or brass clamps and connectors that are UL listed for use below

grade.a. All bolts and other material must be bronze or brass, plated steel screws are

unacceptable.b. Fabricate multi-bolt, solderless compression clamps from high strength

electrical bronze, and provide silicon bronze clamping bolts and hardware.2. Provide bolts, nuts, lock-washers, and similar hardware designed not to damage

ground wire.3. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Ilsco.b. Framatone Connectors Inc. (FCI), Burndy.c. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Layout electrical work to suit actual field conditions and in accordance with acceptedstandard practice.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Construct each ground system and connection so it is mechanically secure andelectrically continuous.1. Secure grounds to boxes in such a manner that each system is electrically

continuous from the point of service to each outlet.2. Terminate conduits using double locknuts and bushings.

a. Unless a conduit run enters a metallic enclosure via integral threaded hubs,provide the conduit run with two locknuts.

3. Clean paint, grease and such other insulating materials from the contact points ofgrounds.

B. Equipment Grounds:1. Equipment Grounding Connectors:

a. Only use approved grounding connectors.1) Terminate grounds with closed lugs with star washers on both sides and

a 1/4-20 bolt and nut, minimum; spade lugs are not allowed.2) For portable electrical equipment, provide electric cords having an

equipment grounding conductor and a NEMA and UL approved cordcap.

b. Do not install grounding lugs on flanges, mounting screws, or standoffs inswitches, distribution boxes, or panels.

c. Cover or coat grounding clamps and connectors with coating compound.



2. Equipment Grounding Conductors:a. Unless using multi-conductor cable, run equipment grounding conductors

inside the same conduit or wiring channel enclosing the power conductors.b. In multi-conductor cable, locate grounding conductor inside the sheath or

cable.c. Do not use a system neutral or a current carrying conductor as the equipment

grounding conductor.1) Do not ground the electrical and electronic equipment neutral to chassis,

racks, equipment ground conductor, or any non-current carryingconductor on the equipment.

3. Grounding Motors:a. Install equipment grounding wire within conduit supplying power to motor.b. Install bonding connectors across the liquid tight flexible conduit supplying

motors.4. Grounding and Bonding Pumps:

a. Provide a bond from each pump to its motor using a conductor equal in sizeto the motor circuit equipment grounding conductors.


A. Inspection:1. Prior to completion of the Work of this Section, inspect the items provided for

conformity to the Contract Drawings and Specifications.a. Leave in-place "made grounds" open until they have been inspected and

approved by the Engineer.b. Clean the surfaces involved in "made grounds" before connecting the grounds

and finish the installation with touch up painting or another protective coatingto prevent corrosion.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 28 - 1

SECTION 26 05 28

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, cleaning, and protecting hanger and

support systems for electrical wiring, conduit boxes, and equipment.

B. Related Section:1. Division 012. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts maximum).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).2. NFPA 258 - Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation

of Solid Materials.

C. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):1. UL 635 - Standard for Insulating Bushings.2. UL 870 - Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.3. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.4. UL 2239 - Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing, and Cable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with therequirements of Division 01 and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Materials andMethods:1. Product Data:

a. Provide product data and catalog cuts for the products provided under thiscontract.


A. Packaging, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:1. Deliver, store, and handle the hangers and supports in accordance with Section

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as specified herein.2. Deliver material to Site in the original factory packaging.



B. Storage and Protection:1. Shelter and store the components under cover and supported off the ground and

floors on blocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Carbon Steel Shapes:1. Provide shapes of the sizes specified and as indicated on the Contract Drawings:2. Provide steel shapes complying with the following material specifications for the

type of steel shape listed:a. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A 36M.b. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.c. Plates: ASTM A 283/A 283M.d. Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.e. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Schedule 40, hot-dipped, zinc-coated.

B. Welding materials:1. Provide welding materials complying with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M

for the type of material being welded.


A. Metal U-Channel Electrical Support Framing Systems and Fittings:1. Carbon Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems:

a. Provide 1-5/8-inch nominal size U-channel supports fabricated from12 gauge carbon steel electrolytically galvanized with a zinc-coatingthickness commensurate with Service Condition SC 1 (mild) in conformancewith the requirements of ASTM B 633.1) For Type II ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framing from

steel complying with the requirements for Grade 33 specified inASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2) For Type III ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framingfrom steel complying with the requirements of ASTM A 575,ASTM A 576, ASTM A 635/A 635M, or ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Where combination members are required, spot-weld the members on 3-inchcenters.

c. Provide 1-3/8-inch or larger depths, except where supports are mounteddirectly to walls 13/16-inch or larger depths may be provided.

d. Provide metal framing systems and fittings for metal framing systems from asingle manufacturer.

e. Manufacturers:1) Unistrut Corporation, Unistrut® Metal Framing System2) Thomas & Betts, Kindorf®

3) Cooper B-Line®, Inc.4) Power-Strut



5) Approved Equal2. Stainless Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems:

a. Provide U-channel supports, fittings, threaded rod, and hardware fabricatedfrom Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Conduit Supports:1. Malleable Iron Conduit Supports:

a. Provide one-hole style galvanized malleable iron fasteners with pipe strapssimilar to those as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.

b. Provide support devices consisting of threaded rods, channel supports, andconduit straps/fasteners.

2. Stamped Steel Conduit Supports:a. Provide one-hole style galvanized stamped steel fasteners with pipe straps

similar to those as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.b. Provide support devices consisting of threaded rods, channel supports, and

conduit straps/fasteners.3. Special Finishes:

a. Where PVC-coated RGS conduits are to be installed, provide stainless steelconduit supports including the threaded rods, channel supports, and conduitstraps/fasteners.

4. Manufacturers:a. Thomas & Bettsb. Approved equal.

C. Cable Supports:1. Provide voltage rated cable supports fabricated from hot-dip galvanized malleable

iron with a threaded collar.2. Provide tapered wedging cable plugs fabricated from hard fiber, impregnated

hardwood, or canvas bakelite for the cable supports.3. Manufacturers:

a. EGS Electrical Group, O-Z/Gedney, Inc., Type "M"b. Approved equal.

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:1. For bolts, nuts, and washers smaller than 1/4-inch trade size, provide 316 stainless

steel fasteners complying with the requirements of ASTM A 325.2. For fastening galvanized components, provide galvanized bolts, nuts, and washers

galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 325.

E. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Drive (Deep-Pitch) Screws:

a. Provide Type 316 stainless steel self-tapping type drive (deep-pitch) screwsthat comply with the requirements of FF-S-107C(2).

2. Drilled-In Anchors and Fasteners:a. Provide drilled-in anchors and fasteners that comply with the requirements of

FF-S-107C(2).



b. Masonry Anchors:1) Provide masonry anchors designed to accept both machine bolts and

threaded rods as fasteners.a) Provide SAE J 429 Grade 2 machine bolt fasteners fabricated from

AISI Type 316 stainless steel.b) Provide nuts and washers conforming to the requirements of

ASTM A 563.2) Provide masonry anchors consisting of an expansion shield and expander

nut contained inside the shield.a) Expander Nuts:

(1) Fabricate square expander nuts with their sides tapered inwardfrom the bottom to the top.

(2) Design the expander nuts to simultaneously climb the bolt orrod thread and expand the shield as soon as the threadedexpander nut reaches and bears against the shield bottom whenbeing tightened.

b) Expansion Shields:(1) Provide expansion shield bodies consisting of four legs, the

inside of each tapered toward the shield bottom, or nut end.(2) The end of one leg shall be elongated and turned across shield

bottom. Outer surface of shield body shall be ribbed for grip-action.

3) Masonry Anchor Material:a) Provide die cast Zamac No. 3 zinc alloy having a 43,000 psi

minimum tensile strength.4) Manufacturers:

a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc., FORWAY Systemc. Concrete Anchors:

1) Carbon Steel Anchor/Fastener:a) Provide UL listed one-piece studs (bolts) with integral expansion

wedges, nuts, and washers.b) Provide carbon steel anchor/fasteners complying with the physical

requirements specified in FF-S-325 for Group II, Type 4, Class 1.2) Stainless Steel Anchor/Fastener:

a) Provide one-piece AISI Type 303 or 304 stainless steel studs (bolts)with integral expansion wedges, AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts,and AISI Type 316 stainless steel washers.

b) Provide stainless steel anchor/fasteners complying with the physicalrequirements of FF-S-325 for Group II, Type 4, Class 1.

3) Acceptable Manufacturers:a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc.; SUP-R-STUDb) Hilti Fastening Systems; KWIK-BOLTc) Molly Fastener Group; PARABOLT.d) Phillips; RED HEAD Wedge-Anchor

3. Hammer drive-type explosive charge drive-type anchors and fastener systems areunacceptable.



4. Lead shields, plastic-inserts, fiber-inserts, and drilled-in plastic sleeve/nail drivesystems are unacceptable.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Seals:1. Provide a hydrostatic seal to fill the annular space between conduit and through

structure openings.2. Manufacturer:

a. PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp., Link-Seal®

B. Fire Seals:1. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, floors, partitions, and ceiling, provide

approved fire seals to ensure that the fire rating is maintained.2. Provide a fire seal system which is UL-listed for the application.

a. Provide fire seal compound or a mechanical seal for fire rating of 2 hours orless.

3. Manufacturers:a. Compound Fire Seals:

1) Dow Corning Corporation2) 3M

b. Mechanical Fire Seals:1) PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp.

c. Through-Wall Barrier Fire Seals:1) Cooper Crouse-Hinds

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in the largest sections practical for delivery to the Site.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Prime paint non-galvanized steel items.1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with the requirements of SSPC-SP 2.

a. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.2. Prime Painting: Apply one coat of primer.

B. Galvanizing items specified above as galvanized.1. Galvanize the items after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM A 123/A 123M.2. Provide a minimum galvanized coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot (380 grams

per square meter).

C. Touch-Up Primer:1. For un-galvanized metal surfaces: Provide primer complying with the

requirements of SSPC-Paint 15 for Type I, Red Iron Oxide.2. For galvanized surfaces: Provide primer complying with the requirements of

SSPC-Paint 20 for Type I, Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurement:1. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field

measurements to verify actual conditions.a. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structuralobstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

2. Carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions, and other constructionwork, at the Site which may affect the work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-placeconstruction work, produce detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed departuresfrom the original design due to field conditions or other causes.1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade practice

to suit actual field measurements.2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve access

to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of the construction.3. Provide plan and profile views of duct banks, and show equipment backboards

and support structures not directly fastened to the walls on the Shop Drawings.4. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes on

the Shop Drawings.5. Submit the Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing the

Work of this Section.

B. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment, includingequipment being installed by both electrical and other construction trades.1. Set conduit and boxes only after receiving approved dimensions and checking

such equipment locations.2. Arrange electrical Work accordingly and furnish such fittings and apparatus as

required to accommodate such conditions and to preserve access to otherequipment, rooms, areas, and similar spaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical Work in conformance to the requirements of NFPA 70 for wiringmethods general requirements, and to other applicable Articles of the NEC governingmethods of wiring.

B. Installing Anchors and Fasteners:1. For anchoring or fastening applications in masonry and hollow-core precast

concrete structural elements, provide masonry anchors as specified herein.



2. For anchoring or fastening applications in cast-in-place concrete and solid precastconcrete structural elements, provide concrete anchors as specified herein.

3. Threaded Bolts:a. Draw threaded bolted connections up tight using 316 stainless steel lock

washers to prevent the bolt or nut from loosening.4. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors:

a. Install expansion anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and the following.1) Drill holes to the required diameter and depth in accordance with anchor

manufacturer's instructions for the size of anchor being installed.2) Minimum Embedment:

a) Embed expansion anchors to four and one-half bolt diametersminimum unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.

C. Installation of U-Channel Support Framing Systems in accordance with Table 26 0528-1 below:

Table 26 05 28-1 U-Channel Support Framing Selection Condition 1 Condition 2 Type

Aboveground Outside vertical support within 6” of concrete

Stainless Steel

Outside other locations

Stainless Steel

Interior NEMA 1/12 Carbon steel, Stainless Steel,

D. Installing Conduit Supports:1. For exterior locations provide malleable iron conduit supports.2. For interior locations, provide stamped steel conduit supports.

E. Panelboard/Enclosure Feed Risers:1. Furnish and install cable supports in feeder risers as required by the underwriters.

F. In areas designated as wet, NEMA 3, NEMA 3R, as defined in NEMA 250; secureequipment and conduit to no fewer than two 7/8-inch minimum depth, non-metallicchannels mounted vertically on the walls.

G. Field Fabrication:1. Fabricated Items:

a. Fabricate backboards, backboard supports, equipment supports, conduitsupports, and the other items as detailed on the Contract Drawings.1) Hot-dip galvanize mild-steel fabrications in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM A 153/A 153M.



b. Fabricate backboard posts as detailed on the Contract Drawings fromconcrete filled steel pipe with a crowned cap; and apply a prime paint finish.

c. Supply components required for the anchorage of fabrications.1) Except where specifically noted otherwise, fabricate anchors and related

components from the same material as the fabrication and apply thesame finish.

2. Tightly fit and secure joints.a. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline.b. Weld fabricated assemblies in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1) Continuously seal joined members using intermittent welds and plasticfiller.

2) Dress welds smooth and free of sharp edges and corners.c. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with the adjacent finish surface.

3. Ease exposed edges to a small uniform radius.a. Cut all backboard corners to a 1-inch radius.

4. For the attachment of work and for bolted connections, accurately drill or punchholes for the fasteners as required.a. Burned holes are unacceptable.b. Provide holes no more than 3/32-inch larger than the fasteners.

5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings:a. Except where specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents,

provide flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located, andconsistent with the design of the component.

6. Fabrication Tolerances:a. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.b. Maximum offset between faces: 1/16 inch.c. Maximum misalignment of adjacent members: 1/16 inch.d. Maximum bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.e. Maximum deviation from plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.


A. Coatings:1. Repair damage to coatings.

a. Touch up damaged coating surfaces using the specified primer for primedsteel surfaces, and using zinc-rich primer for galvanized steel surfaces.


A. Inspection:1. Verify the adequacy of coatings.2. Inspect the items provided under this Section for adherence to the fabrication

tolerances specified above, and correct any discrepancies:



3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect the items provided under this Section from damage during the work of othertrades.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.13 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, energizing, and testing conduit, tubing,

and fittings for communication lines and electrical transmission, distribution,and service lines.

B. Related Section:1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.3. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical.4. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).2. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated (GCR).3. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated (EMT).4. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated (IMC).

B. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):1. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):1. ANSI/UL 6 - Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit.2. UL 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in

Devices and Appliances3. ANSI/UL 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.4. ANSI/UL 498 - Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.5. ANSI/UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes.6. ANSI/UL 797 - Electric Metallic Tubing - Steel.7. ANSI/UL 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Conduit – Steel

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions for all items are as stated in NFPA 70, IEEE C2, and in other referencedocuments unless otherwise stated, specified, or noted.




A. Conduit Systems:1. Provide conduit of the type and material as noted below for the application

indicated, or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.2. Provide conduit fittings made of material identical to that of the conduit system

with which they are used.3. Buried – Schedule 40 PVC. This work includes trenching and backfill as shown

on civil site plans in the project documents. Site restoration by general tradescontractor.

4. Exterior above grade – Rigid Galvanized Steel.5. Interior branch circuit – Electrical Metallic Tubing. Minimum size 3/4 inch.6. Final connection to vibrating equipment – Flexible metal conduit. Minimum

size 3/4 inch.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance withsubmittal procedures of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. To facilitate power utility approval of the items installed from the utility’sservice poles to the main service panels, submit 4 more copies of theconduit submittals than the number required by Section 01330, SubmittalProcedures.

b. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.c. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).d. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC).e. Liquidtite flexible metal conduit.f. Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS).g. Fittings for non-metallic conduit systems.h. Fittings for metallic conduit systems.i. Wall and floor penetration seals.



a. Employ skilled licensed electricians to supervise the Work of this Section.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:1. Pack, ship, handle, and unload products in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.



B. Acceptance at Site:1. Acceptance products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.

C. Storage and Protection:1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00

Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.a. Store all products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit:1. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:

a. Provide high impact PVC conduit conforming to the requirements ofNEMA TC 2 at 90 degrees Celsius and made from compoundsconforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1784.1) Use material that at 78 degrees Fahrenheit has a tensile strength

exceeding 5500 psi, a flexural strength exceeding 11,000 psi, and acompressive strength exceeding 800 psi,

b. Provide PVC conduits that are UL listed, labeled, or approved for bothunderground and above ground use.

2. Manufacturers:a. JM Eagle,b. Queen City Plastics, Inc.,c. Prime Conduit Inc.,d. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduite. Approved equal.

2.02 METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):1. Provide electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to the requirements of

Article 358 in NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.3 andUL 797.

2. Provide galvanized steel tubing conduit lengths bearing the manufacturer’strademark.

3. Manufacturers:a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduitb. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Companyc. Or Approved equal.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):1. Provide intermediate metal conduit (IMC) conforming to the requirements of

Article 342 in NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.6 andUL 1242.



2. Fabricate intermediate metal conduit (IMC) from high strength low alloy sheetsteel meeting the requirements for ASTM A 568 piping, galvanized inside andoutside, and protected against corrosion by a dichromate rinse or a zincchromate coating.

3. Provide conduit furnished in 10-foot minimum lengths with both ends threadedand one end fitted with a coupling.

4. Manufacturers:a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduitb. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Companyc. Approved equal.

C. Liquidtite Flexible Metal Conduit:1. Provide PVC coated flexible metal conduit conforming to the requirements of

Article 350 of NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses and ANSI/UL 360.2. Provide conduit with interlocking spiral strip construction capable of bending to

a minimum radius of five times its diameter without deforming the spiral stripsboth inside and outside of the conduit.a. Provide conduit with a flexible, galvanized, interlocking spiral strip steel

core jacketed with smooth, liquid-tight polyvinyl chloride designed towithstand temperatures from minus 40 degrees Celsius to plus 60 degreesCelsius.

3. Finish the interior and exterior of flexible conduit smooth and free from burrs,sharp edges, and other defects that may injure wires; and place themanufacturer’s trademark on each length.

4. Furnish an integral continuous copper ground in 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inchPVC coated flexible metal conduit.

5. Acceptable Manufacturersa. Electri-Flex Company, Liquatite®, Type LAb. ANAMET Electrical, Inc., Anaconda Sealtite®c. Approved equal.

D. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):1. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS) conforming to the requirements of

Article 344 of NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.1, and UL 6.2. Fabricate the RGS from mild steel piping, galvanized or sherardized inside and

outside, and protected against corrosion by a dichromate rinse or a zincchromate coating.

3. Provide defect free conduit bearing the UL label, and furnished in 10-footminimum lengths with both ends threaded and one end fitted with a coupling.a. Provide tapered NTP 3/4 inch per foot threads complying with

ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduitb. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Companyc. Approved equal.



2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Non-Metallic Conduit Systems:1. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit:

a. Provide high impact non-metallic fittings conforming to samerequirements as for the plastic tubing and conduit as specified in Article2.01.

b. Non-Metallic Conduit Expansion Fittings:1) Provide a two-piece nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonconductive, UL

listed expansion fitting.c. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Lamson & Sessions, Carlon®2) Queen City Plastics, Inc.3) Approved equal.

B. Fittings for Threaded Metallic Conduit Systems:1. Construct conduit bodies/fittings from cast malleable iron or cast steel.2. For PVC coated raceway systems, provide PVC coated fittings of cast malleable

iron or cast steel from the same manufacturer that provides the uncoated conduitbodies/fittings.

3. Conduit Outlet Bodies:a. Provide malleable iron threaded entry type conduit outlet bodies with

neoprene gaskets and cast steel cover.b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney3) Approved equal.

4. Conduit Expansion Joints:a. Provide telescoping sleeve type galvanized, weatherproof, and vapor tight

conduit expansion joints designed for 4-inch maximum expansion with aninsulated bushing and lead-wool packing.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) EGS/Appleton Electric2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney3) Approved equal.

5. Conduit Unions:a. Provide conduit unions capable of completing a conduit run when neither

conduit end can be turned.b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, UNF and UNY Unions2) Thomas and Betts Company, Erickson® Coupling.3) Approved equal.

6. Conduit Outlet Boxes:a. Provide malleable or cast iron conduit outlet boxes conforming to the

requirements of UL 886, and having a cover with O-rings to keep outmoisture.



b. Acceptable Manufacturers:1) EGS/Appleton Electric, GRF outlets and covers2) EGS/O-Z Gedney3) Approved equal.

7. Conduit Device Boxes:a. Provide malleable iron conduit device boxes with internal grounding

screws and conforming to the requirements of UL 498 and UL 514A.b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, FD device boxes2) EGS/O-Z Gedney3) Approved equal.

C. Fittings for Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit Systems:1. Construct conduit bodies/fittings from cast steel.2. Fittings shall be compression type.3. Fittings shall be galvanized or zinc electroplated.

2.04 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION SEALS

A. Provide watertight mechanical seals capable of holding up to 20 psig, and sealingagainst water, soil, and backfill material.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Thunderline/Link-Seal2. Flexicraft Industries, PipeSeal3. Approved equal.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Cold Galvanize Coating:1. Provide a cold galvanize coating to provide protection against corrosion by

forming an insoluble zinc salt barrier from a cathodic reaction when the coatingis damaged by abrasion and exposed to weather.a. Provide a single component pre-mixed liquid organic zinc compound

producing 95 percent zinc in the dry film.b. Provide a coating that bonds to clean iron, steel, or aluminum through

electrochemical action.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. ZRC. Worldwideb. Clearcoc. Krylond. Rustoleume. Or Approved Equal



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take fieldmeasurements to verify actual conditions.1. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate all

offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions thatmay be encountered during the Work.

B. Inspect the condition of existing conduit that is required for the Work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-placeconstruction work, prepare and submit detailed Shop Drawings showing proposeddepartures from the original design due to field conditions or other causes.1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade

practice to suit actual field measurements.2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve

access to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of theconstruction.

3. Include plan and profile views of duct banks.4. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes.5. Submit these Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing

the Work of this Section.

B. Remove dirt, debris, and other obstructions from existing conduit required for theWork of this Section by blowing out and mandreling the conduits as applicable.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform the Work of this Section as specified in Section 26 05 00, Common WorkResults for Electrical.

B. Fabricate and install conduit and wireway systems in accordance with acceptedelectrical trade standard practice.1. Layout the electrical work of this Section to suit actual field measurements.

a. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of duct banks and theas-found locations of conflicting utility lines on the record drawingsspecified in Section 01780, Closeout Submittals, and submit the recorddrawings.

2. Install the electrical Work of this Section in conformance to the wiring methodsgeneral requirements of Article 300 in NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all otherapplicable Articles of NFPA 70 governing wiring methods.

3. Cut conduit and wireway square, and ream the cut ends according to therequirements of NFPA 70 (NEC) to deburr the openings so that they are notrestricted more than cuts made by the material manufacturer.



4. Avoid bending conduits as much as possible and practical; but if bends aremade, use an approved conduit bending tool or machine to make the bends.

5. Do not install crushed or deformed conduit, and remove crushed or deformedconduit from the Site.

6. On conduit that is installed outside, provide a second equipment groundconductor and use fittings with a built-in ground lug for bonding.

7. Provide flexible conduit only to the extent permitted by NFPA 70 (NEC).a. In flexible conduits that do not have an integral ground wire, install a

green insulated wire in addition to the neutral wire for groundingpurposes.1) Form a ‘J’ or ‘S’ hook with a drip loop to allow flexibility.2) Provide a second equipment grounding conductor on outside conduit

and provide fittings with built-in ground lug for bonding.b. In exposed areas, use PVC coated flexible metal conduit and fittings.c. Use flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final

connection to recessed lighting fixtures and rotating and vibratingequipment.1) Flexible Metal Conduit is only permitted for final connections to

lighting fixtures in dry, environmentally conditioned spaces.2) Liquid tight flexible metal conduit, as herein specified, for final

connection to recess mounted lighting fixtures in unconditionedspaces and to all rotating and vibrating equipment includingtransformers, motors, solenoid valves, pressure switches, limitswitches, generators, engine-mounted devices and pipe-mounteddevices.

3) Flexible conduit not to exceed 18 inches in length for motorconnections, 36 inches in length for equipment connections or 72-inches for lighting fixture connections.

8. Provide fittings and apparatus as required to construct the approved electricaldesign.a. Running threads on conduit are not permitted.

1) Where couplings and connectors are required for metal conduits, useapproved threaded couplings and connectors.

b. Provide conduit unions where necessary to complete a conduit run whenneither conduit end can be turned.

c. Where conduit and raceway runs cross building expansion joints, makeprovision for expansion in the conduit and raceway runs.

d. Provide sealing fittings with drain fittings in all lower runs and verticalruns.

e. Provide sealing covers for junction boxes where required.f. Provide weatherproof conduit hubs on all conduit connections exterior to

the building, and on instruments, process equipment, and pump motors.9. Installing RGS Conduit:

a. Installation of the RGS shall be performed in accordance with theManufacturer’s recommendations.



b. Threading Conduit:1) Field thread the conduits per the manufacturers’ instructions.

a) For PVC coated conduit, first use a cylindrical guide, oversizedto fit over the plastic coating, to neatly cut the coating off at theproposed end of the threads.

b) Do not damage or remove the coating beyond the proposed endof the threads.

2) Once the threading operation is complete, protect the newly cutthreads against corrosion by applying a "sealing" compound asrecommended by the manufacturer.

c. Assembling RGS:1) Just prior to assembling each conduit joint, apply the conduit

manufacturer's touch-up compound to the end of the conduit in thearea normally covered by the fitting sleeve.

2) Use cloth or other material over strap type wrenches to protect thecoating while tightening conduits.

10. Breathers and drains shall be provided at the low point(s) of all conduit runs inNEMA 3R, 4, 4X and 7 areas, and where otherwise subject to the accumulationof condensation. Conduits shall be arranged to drain away from dry areastoward damp or wet areas, and away from equipment and enclosures.

C. Exposed Work:1. In exposed work, run conduit and raceway parallel to centerlines and structure

surfaces; or perpendicular to centerlines where required, with right angle turnsconsisting of symmetrical bends or fittings.

2. Maintain at least 6 inches clearance between conduit and raceway runs andpipes, ducts, and flues of mechanical systems.

3. If a portion of a metallic conduit run, whether plastic-coated or not, extendsabove grade or is otherwise exposed to personnel, ensure that the conduit isproperly bonded to an equipment grounding conductor at both ends.a. Install the equipment grounding conductor either inside or outside the box.

D. Concealed Work:1. When performing electrical work in concealed spaces, provide the same quality

workmanship as in exposed work.2. Conceal conduits and raceways in the structure’s construction where practicable

unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings or required by theEngineer.a. Group conduit and raceway runs in concealed work as much as practical to

avoid congesting the concealed spaces.b. Do not weaken the structure by excessive or unnecessary cutting.

1) Only make cuts into the structure’s construction in conformance tothe applicable building codes.

3. Install below grade conduit in conformance with the requirements of Section33 71 19, Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.a. For conduits that pass under building support walls, provide a minimum of

3 inches of concrete encasement all around.



E. Hangers and Supports:1. Install auxiliary support structures, anchors, and fasteners as specified in

Section 26 05 28, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.a. Mount or suspend conduit and wireway systems directly on structural

members of the structures and walls.b. Do not attach conduit or raceway systems to suspended ceiling members

or to the suspending mediums.c. Securely attach anchors into walls.

2. At all conduit attachments, allow space between the mounting surfaces and theconduit by providing U-channel supports, clamp-backs, or spacers.a. Attach wall-mounted conduit runs close to the walls following the contour

of the walls, parallel to the walls and other building lines except at bends.

F. Structure Penetrations:1. Make penetrations in existing concrete structures by core-drilling.

a. Drill the penetrations true, clean, and free from spalling.2. At penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and similar assemblies, provide

firestopping as specified in Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.3. Make floor penetrations as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

a. Seal all conduit penetrations through floor slabs on grade in buildings witha floor penetration seal.

4. Install a wall penetration seal at all wall penetrations.a. Size wall penetrations to accommodate the conduit outside diameter plus

either 1/4 inch or a hole allowance to allow the installation of the wallpenetration seal.

5. For conduits that enter rooms from concrete floors or masonry, providecorrosion protection by using an RGS or PVC coated conduit that extends from12 inches inside the concrete or masonry to at least 6 inches into the room.

G. Wiring:1. Prior to the installation of any wire, verify that the conduit is clean and free of

debris.2. Install a separate ground conductor within every conduit.


A. Inspection:1. Inspect installed conduit runs for obstructions, proper support, proper

grounding, and completeness.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 WIREWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33.19

WIREWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of constructing themetallic raceway systems for the project.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical3. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts for the following materials:1. Wireway and Fittings.


A. Product Quality Control:1. Manufacturers shall fabricate their products in such a manner that all criteria for

appearance, fit and tolerances shall be complied with.2. Each manufacturer shall carefully control his operations to ensure that the

engineering, quality, safety and reliability of product are achieved.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIREWAY SYSTEM MATERIALS

A. Wireway (General Purpose, NEMA Type 1): Lengths, connectors and fittings ULListed and constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories StandardUL 870 for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.1. Screw cover design. Covers held firmly in place with captivated screw fasteners.2. Wireway constructed without knockouts.3. 16 gauge galvanneal sheet metal parts provided with corrosion resistant phosphate

primer and ASA-49 gray enamel finish.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman Engineering Company.b. Wiegmann.c. Or Approved Equal.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Carefully investigate the structural and finish condition, as well as other constructionwork, which may affect the work of this Section. Arrange Electrical Work accordinglyand furnish such fittings and apparatus as required to accommodate such conditionsand to preserve access to other equipment, rooms, areas, etc.

B. Prior to performance of work described above, make detailed drawings of proposeddepartures from original design due to field conditions or other cause, and submit forEngineer's approval.

C. Inspect installed wireways and remove obstructions, dirt and debris if present.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurement: The Drawings are generally indicative of the work, but due totheir small scale, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and apparatusrequired nor the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered.

B. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment being installed inother construction work. Set wireways only after receiving approved dimensions andchecking such equipment locations.

C. Layout electrical work to suit actual field measurements and according to acceptedTrade standard practice. However, electrical installations shall conform to NEC 300for wiring methods general requirements, and to all other applicable Articles of theNEC governing methods of wiring.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Methods of Wiring: Fabricate raceway systems in accordance with accepted Tradestandard practice. The following installation requirements are in addition torequirements set forth in Article 300 of the NEC and are included to complement thesame.1. Do not attach raceway systems to suspended ceiling members or to the

suspending mediums.2. Cut raceways square and deburr cuts to the same degree as cuts made by the

material manufacturer. Ream cuts of conduits per NEC requirements withopenings not restricted more than cuts made by the material manufacturer.

3. Mount or suspend raceway systems directly on structural members of thestructures, except where indicated as being wall mounted. Space supports inaccordance with NEC requirements.

4. Attach wall mounted raceway runs tight to walls, following contour of walls andsecurely attach anchors into walls.

5. Do not weaken the structure by excessive or unnecessary cutting.



6. Make provisions for expansion in raceway runs where same cross buildingexpansion joints.

B. Firestopping of penetrations through fire rated assemblies is provided by the GeneralContractor as specified in Section 07840 of the Contract documents.

C. Exposed Work: Make raceway runs in exposed work parallel to centerlines andstructure surfaces, and perpendicular to centerlines where required, with right angleturns consisting of symmetrical bends or fittings. Maintain at least 6 inches clearancebetween raceway runs and mechanical systems pipes, ducts, flues, etc.

3.04 ANCHOR AND FASTENER INSTALLATIONS

A. Auxiliary Support Fabrication: As specified in Section 26 05 28.

B. Threaded Bolts: As specified in Section 26 05 28.

C. Drilled-In Expansion Anchor Installation: As specified in Section 26 05 28.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33.23

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, cleaning, and protecting

electrical pull and junction boxes.

B. Related Section:1. Division 012. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.4. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding Electrical Systems.5. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.6. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).2. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for

Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with therequirements of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. Catalog cuts of the outlet boxes and control enclosures used on thisproject.



a. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensedelectricians.



B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified

in Articles 250, 300, and 370 of NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all other applicablestate, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.

C. Certifications:1. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory,

approved by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by theElectrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and listed andlabeled or approved for the application intended as indicated or specified, unlessproducts meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readilyavailable or unless standards do not exist for the products.a. Provide products that are approved, listed, and labeled for the short circuit

currents, voltages, and currents indicated or specified to be applied.b. Provide service entrance labeled products for all service entrance

equipment.

1.05 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Acceptance at Site:1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Storage and Protection:1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00,

Common Work Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names:1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish

the basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of qualityrequired.

2. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whoseproducts are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contractrequirements.


A. Steel Outlet and Device Boxes for General Purpose Applications:1. For general purpose applications in dry, flush (in-wall) locations only, provide

UL Listed galvanized steel outlet and device boxes conforming to NEMA OS 1.



a. Boxes shall be fabricated from steel not less than 0.062" thickness.b. Boxes shall have standard trade size knockouts to facilitate conduit and

cable connector attachments.c. Boxes shall be equipped with one 10-32 tapped hole for ground wire

attachment.2. Manufacturers:

a. Appleton Electricb. O-Z/Gedneyc. Crouse Hindsd. Thomas & Bettse. Or Approved Equal

B. Cast Outlet Boxes for General Purpose Applications:1. For Use with Steel Conduit Systems:

a. For use with steel conduit systems, provide UL Listed small cast steel orcast malleable iron outlet boxes with threaded hubs that meet theNEMA 250 requirements for Type 12 enclosures.

b. If covers are indicated or specified, provide cast steel or cast malleableiron covers with neoprene gaskets.

c. Provide captive Type 316 stainless steel mounting screws for the covers.d. Finish:

1) Provide outlet boxes, covers, and hangers with an electroplated zinccoating, followed first by a dichromatic prime, and then by analuminum polymer finish coating conforming to NEMA FB 1.

e. Manufacturers:1) Appleton Electric2) O-Z/Gedney3) Crouse Hinds4) Thomas & Betts5) Killark6) Or Approved equal.

C. Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications:1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull

and terminal boxes and covers that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type12 enclosures with continuously welded and ground smooth seams, and havingno holes or knockouts.a. Cover:

1) Provide overlapping sheet steel screw covers with captivated screwsfor each box.

2) Provide a means of bonding on the cover.b. Gasket: Provide an oil resistant cover gasket for each box.c. Mounting Brackets:

1) Provide 12-gauge steel wall-mounting brackets.d. Finish:

1) Provide polyester powder coating applied over phosphatizedsurfaces.



2) Color: ANSI Z55.1 Number 61 gray.2. Manufacturers:

a. Pentair, Screw Cover SC Junction Boxesb. Rittal Corpc. Milbank Manufacturingd. Or Approved Equal

D. Ground Lug/Bus Bar:1. Provide a copper ground lug or a 1/4-inch by 2-inch copper bus bar in large pull

and junction boxes.


A. Tests:1. Submit factory test reports to the Engineer as specified for the products in this

Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conduit stub-ups to be mated with electrical boxes and enclosures are thecorrect type and size and are at the proper location.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications:1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull

and terminal boxes that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12.2. Provide boxes that are fabricated from the same type of material as the conduit

with which the boxes are used.

B. Installing Boxes for Electrical Outlets and Devices:1. Install boxes level and plumb within 1/16-inch of vertical or horizontal over the

length of the box.2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, devices boxes for interior or

exterior wiring devices of buildings shall surface mounted on existingconstruction. Install device boxes at a uniform height as indicated on theContract Drawings.a. Mount all adjacent boxes in alignment at the same mounting height.b. Mount outlet boxes for equipment within 18-inches of the equipment

power connection.



3. When installing boxes outside or to exposed conduit, provide cast boxes.a. For interior unfinished locations mount these boxes on spacers to be

1/8-inch from wall unless box has built-in raised pads to perform the samefunction.

4. When installing boxes for single devices, two devices, or wall outlets, install4-inch square boxes.

5. Outlet boxes must be of the one-piece type, the use of expandable sheet metalboxes is prohibited.

6. Support cast boxes for outlet and device using one of the following methods:a. Mount the boxes directly to the structure using 4 or more anchors.

1) Attach mounting screws to feet located outside of the box interior.2) Provide 1/4-inch spacers behind the boxes unless the box has raised

pads.b. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which are supported within

12-inches of the box.c. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which exit from a poured

concrete floor no further than 18-inches from the box.

C. Installing Boxes for Other than Electrical Outlets and Devices:1. Accurately punch holes for conduit openings using a hydraulic punch and

punches sized for the conduit to be installed.2. Install a conduit breather in the top of the box and a conduit drain fitting in the

bottom of all boxes not located in bone-dry areas that are at least 100 feet froma hose-bib.

3. Support boxes for other than electrical outlets and devices using one of thefollowing methods:a. Mount the boxes directly to the structure using 4 or more anchors.

1) Attach mounting screws to feet located outside of the box interior. orseal the screw holes to prevent water penetration.

2) Provide 1/4-inch spacers behind the boxes unless the box has raisedpads.

b. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which are supported within12-inches of the box.

c. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which exit from a pouredconcrete floor no further than 18-inches from the box.

d. Mount the box on U-channel and structural supports conforming toSection 26 05 28, Hangers and Supports.

D. Make up all conduit connections to boxes in accordance with the requirements ofSection 26 05 33.13, Conduit and Tubing.

E. Install wiring in boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Wire, Cable, and Accessories.

F. Ground boxes in conformance with Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.




A. Touch up damaged coatings on electrical boxes and enclosures.


A. Inspection:1. Inspect flush boxes to verify that the opening between the box and the wall

finish is less than 1/16-inch.2. Inspect flush boxes to verify that each box is flush with the wall, or protrudes

less than 1/16-inch, and is not set behind the wall surface.3. Inspect surface mounted boxes to verify that they are level and plumb within

1/16-inch as specified.4. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of pull and junction boxes

on record drawings specified in Division 01.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Waste Management and Disposal:1. Clear and dispose of waste materials in accordance with the requirements of


3.07 PROTECTION

A. Except for surfaces to be painted, mask electrical boxes to protect them from paintoverspray or over-brushing during painting operations.

B. Protect boxes against damage from other work.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, and protecting identification signs and

labels for electrical systems.

B. Related Section:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 13 - Medium-Voltage Cables.3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors.4. Section 26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers5. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards.6. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards.7. Section 26 28 16.13 Low-Voltage Enclosed Switches

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).2. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee

Workplaces.3. NFPA 704, Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response

D. International Code Council1. International Fire Code (IFC)

E. U. S. Government: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

a. 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements ofDivision 01 and Section 26 05 00:



1. Product Data:a. Provide catalog cuts for the actual products provided and indicate clearly the

usage of each product.2. Shop Drawings:

a. Provide a schedule depicting all nametag legends.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Comply with the all applicable requirements of OSHA, but particularly those

stated in 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Comply with the requirements of NFPA 70E that are applicable to electrical

identification items as listed below in this Specification Section.


A. Protect items from damage during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance withSection 26 05 00 and as detailed below.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products meeting the specified requirements from one of the followingmanufacturers, unless otherwise indicated:1. Brady Worldwide, Inc.2. Seton Identification Products3. LEM Products, Inc.

B. To serve as examples of the quality required of the specified products, several BradyWorldwide, Inc. Product Numbers are listed for informational purposes only.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Laminated Phenolic or Plastic:1. Provide rigid, thermosetting resin or polymer material that is heat- and fire-

resistant, abrasion resistant, electronically non-conductive, and non-corroding.2. Extrude the thermosetting resin or polymer into sheets, and laminate the sheets

together so that colored top and bottom layers sandwich a contrasting color corein the middle.

B. Mounting Hardware:1. Provide number 10 hex-head machine screws and lock-washers, or hex-head

bolts, lock-washers, and nuts for mounting identification nameplates ontoelectrical equipment.

2. Provide either type 316 stainless steel or brass fasteners; however, all fastenersused on the same nameplate must be of the same material.



2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

A. Provide laminated phenolic or plastic equipment identification nameplates havingbeveled edges and engraved lettering.1. Drill holes for mounting hardware in the equipment identification nameplates as

follows:a. For nameplates that are more then 2 inches wide, drill four holes.b. For nameplates that are more than 1-1/2 inches high, drill four mounting

holes.c. For smaller nameplates, drill holes for two fasteners.

2. Provide equipment identification nameplates long enough to ensure that the headsof fastening hardware do not extend beyond the nameplate material, and come nocloser than 1/16-inch to the nearest letter of the nameplate legend and no closerthan 1/16-inch to the nearest edge.

B. Engrave the following information on each equipment identification nameplate,similar to that shown in Examples 1 and 2 below except appropriate for the specificequipment being identified:1. In the first line, indicate the equipment type and identification number.2. In the second line, indicate the equipment Voltage, the equipment current if

known, the phase, and the number of wires.a. If the current is listed, provide a description that further identifies the current,

such as “overload protection current”, full load amps (FLA), or otherinformation identifying the current indicated.

3. In the third line, indicate the words “SERVED FROM” followed by the servingequipment and the branch circuit.a. If multiple sources serve the equipment, list all sources on succeeding lines.

EXAMPLE 1:

POWER PANELBOARD PPB-2 208/120 VOLTS, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE

SERVED FROM PPB-1, CIRCUITS F1 THROUGH T1

b. If the equipment is supplied through automatic transfer switches andtransformers or other items without disconnects, include data on all upstreamdisconnects; and beneath the sources add the word “THROUGH” followedby the name of the equipment that the sources are connected through.



EXAMPLE 2:

POWER PANELBOARD PPB-2 480/277 VOLTS, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE

SERVED FROM BOTH EGS-2 AND MCC-1

THROUGH ATS-1

4. For motor starters, circuit breakers, transformers, and disconnect switches,provide an additional line with the word “SERVES” and the equipment served.

C. Engrave the following information on identification plate for any distributionequipment (i.e. switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, switchgear, etc).1. The conductor insulation color coding for feeder and branch circuit wiring

originating from each piece of distribution equipment per NFPA 70. Refer toSpecification Section 26 05 19 for wire and cable color coding requirements.

EXAMPLE for 208Y/120 volt equipment:

PHASE COLOR A BLACK B RED C BLUE

GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL) WHITE

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR GREEN

D. Engrave equipment identification nameplates with all capital, Helvetica Medium font,or equal, lettering.1. Provide black letters on a white background or white letters on a black

background, except for warning nameplates provide white lettering centered onred backgrounds.

2. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch border between the nameplate lettering and the topsand bottoms of the nameplates.

3. Use 3/8-inch high letters for the first line, and 1/4-inch letters for succeedinglines; except, in cases where the tag will not fit because the equipment is toosmall, use 3/16-inch letters for the first line and 1/8-inch letters for succeedinglines.



2.04 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS:

A. Arc Flash Warning Labels shall be prepared in accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 70E,IEEE-1584 latest editions and ANSI Z535.1. Minimum label size shall be 4" x 6" as provided by Duralabel or Brady with

applicable header information identifying both warning and danger based uponthe findings.

2. Minimum information to be included on the Arc Flash label shall consist of thefollowing:a. Prefaced electrical warning including universal symbol identification,

approved safety color, and preface description noting that arc and shockhazard are present. Note where dual labeling is provided/required with theuse of arc flash reduction maintenance settings within the equipment, suchlabels shall be uniquely identified by a different label safety color l, asapproved by the Owner. Consult the Owner for acceptable color schemes tobe used for the equipment.

b. Statement noting that personnel protective equipment (PPE) requirements arerequired. Also clearly identify all equipment as “Dangerous” where work onenergized equipment is otherwise prohibited and/or where no safe PPEprotection so exists.

c. Calculated arc flash hazard boundary, in inches.d. Calculated arc flash hazard at 18 inches, in calories/cm2.e. Arc flash hazard risk category, including descriptive summary of required

PPE items necessary for entry into energized equipment.f. Voltage classification and description of conditions present for shock hazard.g. Insulated glove classification rating, as required for contact conditions and

measurements.h. Limited approach boundary, in inches.i. Restricted approach boundary, in inches.j. Prohibited approach boundary, in inches.k. Available short circuit currentl. Name, address & phone number of the responsible engineer, engineering

company or agency contracted to perform the analysis. Also include thepreparer’s name, where prepared by a subcontract to the named company oragency contracted to perform the analysis report.

m. Respective contract (job) number for the analysis report.n. Preparation date of the issued/approved Arc Flash Study (analysis)

supporting the equipment labeling, as installed.o. Suffix cautionary warning that “Changes in equipment settings or system

configuration will invalidate the calculated values and PPE requirements.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing electrical identification items, verify with the Engineer that the dataon each is correct.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Identification:1. Identify wiring in conformance with the requirement s of Section 26 05 13 and

Section 26 05 19.

B. Electrical Box Identification:1. For each pull box and junction box, if it is not otherwise indicated, install a

laminated phenolic identification nameplate with 1/8-inch black letters on a whitebackground or white letters on a black background above or next to the boxidentifying its source of power; for example, indicate the panelboard and circuitnumber supplying power to a box with an identification nameplate.

2. For each device and outlet box used as a branch circuit junction or pull boxprovide a legible handwritten panel designation and circuit number on exterior ofbox cover. Utilize a permanent black marker.

3. For above ground pull boxes and junction boxes, install nameplates adjacent to orabove the item in a visible location.a. For NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250,

fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or anapproved equal.

b. For other than NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures, fasten the nameplate to theenclosure using Seton number15660 adhesive or an approved equal.

4. For in-ground pull boxes and junction boxes, install nameplates adjacent to orabove the item in a visible location and inside the box immediately below thecover.a. For NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250,

fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or anapproved equal.

b. For other than NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures, fasten the nameplate to theenclosure using Seton number15660 adhesive or an approved equal.

C. Wiring Device Faceplate Labeling1. Inside of faceplate:

a. On receptacle and lighting control device faceplates, provide a legiblehandwritten panel designation and circuit number tag. Utilize a permanentblack marker.

D. Electrical Equipment Identification:1. Provide identification nameplates and an approved mimic bus on the front of the

following electrical equipment:a. Surge Protective Devices (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13.

1) Place a nameplate to identify the line and load terminals of the contactsin medium-voltage switchgear.

b. Enclosed circuit breakers as specified in Section 26 28 16.19.c. Low-voltage enclosed switches as specified in Section 26 28 16.13.d. Low-voltage motor starter switches and controllers as specified in Section

26 29 13.



e. Low-voltage variable frequency controllers as specified in Section 26 29 23.f. AC distribution switchboards as specified in Section 26 24 13.g. Panelboards as specified in Section 26 24 13.

2. Install nameplates in the top center of the front face of the electrical equipment ina visible location.a. For NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA

250, fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws oran approved equal.

E. Arc-Flash Warning Signage:1. For each arc location or circuit analyzed as part of the Arc Flash Study in Section

26 05 00, provide Arc Flash Warning labels.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1

SECTION 26 22 00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of material forfurnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protectingtransformers.

B. Related Section:1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems3. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):1. NEMA ST 20 Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 2. NEMA TR 1 Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors.

B. Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL):1. UL 1561 Transformers, Dry-Type General Purpose and Power

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of terms are as indicated in NFPA 70, IEEE/ANSI C57.12.80 and NEMAST 20 unless otherwise indicated, noted or specified.


A. Design Criteria:1. Provide transformers with ratings as indicated.2. Provide transformers designed for the following conditions:

a. 40 degrees C. maximum ambient temperature.b. -20 degrees C. minimum ambient.c. 1,000 feet (300m) above sea-level.d. Indoors unless otherwise indicated or specified.

B. Provide transformers for connecting to the following systems with nominal voltagesand operating ranges as specified in IEEE/ANSI C84.1:1. 480 volt, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta primary to 208/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire grounded

wye.



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:1. Catalog cuts of all transformers and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for the following:1. Complete outline drawing, showing overall length, width, and height and

including ratings of equipment, impedance, and installation restrictions.

C. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual.


A. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved byFactory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical TestingLaboratory unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories arenot readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. Provideproducts that are listed and labeled or approved as stated above for the locationinstalled in and listed and labeled or approved as indicated and specified for theapplications the items are intended for.

B. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

C. Install work under supervision of skilled licensed electricians.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SECONDARY TRANSFORMERS

A. Provide transformers of the general purpose, indoor, double-wound, ventilated, dry-type designed and tested in accordance with NEMA Standard ST 20 and ANSIStandard C57.12.01, Underwriter's Laboratories Standard UL-1561, and ANSIC57.12.91 of capacities and mounting arrangements, (floor or wall) as indicated on theDrawings. Provide wall-mounted transformers with the wall bracket that is adequatefor the supporting weight.

B. Design transformers for continuous operation at rated KVA, 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI/IEEE C57.96. Provide atransformer which will make this performance obtainable without exceeding 150degree C. average temperature rise by resistance or 180 degree C. hot spot temperaturerise in a 40 degree C. maximum ambient and 30 degree C. average ambient. Do notexceed 220 degree C as the maximum coil hot spot temperature.

C. Provide proven 220 degree C. insulation systems.

D. Wind the coils with aluminum, which has insulated, proven, high temperatureresistant, 220 degree C. materials.



E. Use all materials in the transformer that are flame retardant and do not supportcombustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.

F. Totally immerse the transformer in an insulating varnish, which will maintain superiorbond strength, high dielectric strength, and outstanding power factors at temperaturesassociated with the 220 degree C. system as a final insulation treatment. Afterimmersion, cure the varnish at normal operating temperatures for such a period of timeas to assure complete curing of the varnish and scourging of volatiles in the varnishsolvent.

G. Construct transformers with core materials of a high quality, low loss nature as tominimize exciting current, no-load losses, and interlaminar vibrations.

H. The core and coil assembly shall be installed on vibration-absorbing pads.

I. Transformer average sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMAlevels for self-cooled ratings:1. 10 to 50 kVA: 45 db

J. Design the core-coil assembly and mechanically brace to withstand short circuit testsas defined in ANSI C57.12.91 by the use of full-scale testing. The coil constructionand mechanical bracing members shall be such as to prevent mechanical degradationof the insulation structures during short circuit.

K. Provide three phase transformers with two 2-1/2 percent ANFC and four 2-1/2 percentBNFC taps.

L. Provide transformer with enclosures removable front and back panels and must havescreened or grilled ventilation openings designed to prevent accidental access toelectrified parts.

M. The following factory tests shall be made on all transformers:1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections.2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection.3. Applied potential tests.4. Induced potential tests.5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.

N. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 whenoperated at 35 percent of full load capacity.

O. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Square D Company2. Eaton Electric3. ABB - General Electric4. Siemens Industry



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install, connect, and interconnect products where indicated, and in accordance withNEMA Standards, manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and this Section.Make connections in a manner, which will have electrical continuity and operability ofthe products.

B. Protect the equipment against foreign matter and moisture during installation.

C. Install a 3-foot length of liquid-tight flexible metal conduit between transformer andfixed conduit system in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13. Make power conductorconnections in accordance with manufacturer's drawings, and as indicated on theDrawings.

D. Ground in accordance with Section 26 05 26. Provide ground bond for enclosure andneutral, minimum size #6 AWG to nearest structural steel and nearest water pipes toconform with Section 26 05 26 and the NEC.


A. Dry out dry type transformers before they are energized.

B. Check transformer for tightness of external structural members and mechanical jointsin order to minimize audible sound levels. Check the ground connections.

C. Test as specified in Section 26 05 63.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line


Contract No. HCC21002 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 1

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for 480 Volt AC distribution switchboards,components and related installations.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems3. Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Circuits

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)/America National StandardsInstitute (ANSI):1. ANSI/IEEE C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering.2. ANSI C57.13 - Instrument Transformers.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.2. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.3. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.4. NEMA PB 2.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for

Equipment.5. NEMA Standard 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):1. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.2. UL 891 - Dead-Front Switchboards.3. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment.4. UL 1066 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Include shop drawings, manufacturer’s descriptive literature and publisheddetails with performance/capacity rating schedules or charts as applicable, and whererequired by the cited reference standards.



B. Manufacturers submitted by the bidder as equals or substitutions shall comply withspecification Section 26 05 00.

C. Shop Drawings: All mechanical and electrical equipment and components specifiedherein must be included to be considered a complete shop drawing.1. Product Data: For each mechanical and electrical component, include

manufacturers descriptive literature; product specifications; published details;technical bulletins; performance and capacity rating curves, charts, and schedules;catalogue data sheets; and other submittal materials as required to verify that theproposed products conform to the quality and functionability of the specifiedproducts.a. Identification - Clearly indicate by an arrow on submissions covering more

than one product type or style exactly which product is being submitted forapproval.

b. Manufacturer - Include the catalogue name, company name.2. Equipment Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned plan, elevations, and

cross-sections of system equipment and sub-assemblies. Shop drawings clearlyindicate enclosure size, gutter space, breaker frame sizes and trips, main bus typeand rating.

3. Layout Drawing: Submit an integrated, completely dimensioned drawing of theswitchboard equipment that includes anchor bolt size and patterns, supports,installation notes, and other pertinent setting details.

4. Details: Provide detail drawings of the switchboard equipment as specified in thisSection. Submit complete detail drawings of the main bus and all sub-assembliesincluding line and load connections, bus transitions, bus joints and bus sizes.

5. Product List: Provide a list of equipment and components on all drawings witheach product identified by legend reference. Include product name, manufacturer,and model number.

6. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical apparatus showingnumbered wiring terminals where applicable. In addition, submittal to containdetailed single line diagrams and assembly wiring diagrams. Submit controldiagrams indicating control devices mounted in each switchboard, interconnectingwiring, and remote-control devices, if any. In addition, submittal to containdetailed single-line diagrams.

7. Breaker coordination curves to be provided for all circuit breakers furnished ineach switchboard.

8. Detailed calculations of the bus bar selection and sizing submitted to ascertaincompliance with ANSI and NEMA requirements.

D. Submit Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals, which shall include detailedparts lists, lists of recommended spare parts, circuit diagrams, circuit breakercoordination curves, maintenance procedures, and operating instructions.



1.04 SHORT CIRCUIT, ARC-FLASH, AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. The computerized short-circuit, arc-flash, protective coordination and harmonic studywill be performed and submitted as outlined in Section 26 05 00 of thesespecifications.

B. The Contractor is responsible for supplying the necessary and required information inorder that this study may be completed and submitted at least two full calendar weeksprior to submitting Shop Drawings for equipment included the respective studies,submit the preliminary studies and corresponding computer printouts and annotatedone-line distribution diagram to the Engineer for review and comment.


A. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved byFactory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical TestingLaboratory (ETL) unless products meeting the requirements of these testinglaboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products.Provide products that are for the location installed and listed and labeled or approvedas indicated and specified for the short circuit currents, voltages, and currents appliedand listed and labeled or approved for the applications the items are intended.


C. Perform all electrical work under the supervision of a licensed electrician.

1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. 480/277 volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60 Hertz, grounded wye system voltage. Allcomponents in the system have adequate capacity, capability and bracing for the faultcurrent indicated on the Drawings.

1.07 FACTORY TESTS

A. Upon receipt of all approved shop drawings for the switchboards, the manufacturershall fabricate and factory test the equipment in question.

B. Upon completion of the factory tests, and prior to shipment, forward the following tothe Engineer for review and comments.1. Certified test report, or in lieu thereof certified letter, ascertaining that the

equipment in question was tested in strict conformance with all applicableStandards, and that the equipment met or exceeded all tests requirements.

2. A certified quality control report indicating the items checked, the date whenchecked and initialed by the individual performing the quality control.

3. Provide as part of this submittal the Operational and Maintenance Manuals for thereferenced equipment as specified herein in this Section of the Specifications.



C. Equipment not accepted at the job site without prior receipt of the associated certifiedtest report or the certified letter and the certified quality control report referenced toabove.

1.08 SPARE BREAKERS

A. Furnish spare breakers as indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Furnish all items of the materials, design, sizes and ratings shown on the Drawingsand herein specified.

B. Furnish materials and equipment bearing evidence of UL listing where UL standardsexist and manufacturer identification and customary size and rating data.

C. Provide products that are free from defects impairing performance, durability, orappearance, and of the commercial quality best suited for the purpose shown on theDrawings or specified herein.

D. Replacement switchboard shall fit on the same equipment pad utilizing the sameconduit entries and have approximately in the same footprint as the existingswitchboard.1. The breakers in distribution section shall be laid out so that feeders entering the

bottom of the switchboard do not need to be spliced or extended.2. Layout and bussing in the switchboard shall accommodate termination of the

existing 3000A service entrance cables so that no splicing or extensions areneeded regardless of the amp rating of the replacement switchboard.


A. Basic Electrical Materials: Provide Products such as conduit, wireways, wire andconnectors, cable, support devices, fasteners, and similar devices, as required forWork of this Section as specified in the various Sections of the Division 26Specifications.

2.03 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

A. Furnish, install, connect, adjust, test and place in proper working conditionsdistribution switchboards at locations where so indicated on the drawings.Switchboards are of the type classified as individually mounted circuit breakers asindicated herein and/or as indicated on the Drawings. Each switchboard rated 480volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz, grounded wye and be a dead front type, metalenclosed, self-supporting, free standing structure independent of wall supports of therequired number of vertical sections bolted together to form a front accessible rigidswitchboard 90 inch high, incorporating switching and protective devices of the



number, type and rating as noted on the drawings with the necessary interconnections, terminal blocks, mechanical solderless connectors, controls and instrumentation.

B. Provide switchboards meeting Underwriter's Laboratories and NEMA Standard 250enclosure requirements and furnished with a UL label as service entrance equipment.

C. Provide the switchboard framework consisting of steel channels welded or bolted tothe frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floormounting. Form the framework from code gauge steel, rigidly welded and boltedtogether to support all cover plates, bussing, and component devices during shipmentand installation.

D. Provide switchboard section with an open bottom and an individual removable topplate for installation and termination of all conduit runs. Top and bottom conduitareas are to be clearly shown and dimensioned on the shop drawings. All closureplates are screw removable and small enough for easy handling by one man. Thepaint finish is gray enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphate Primer.

E. Switchboard Bussing: Internal bus including ground bus of tin-plated copper. Bus tobe of sufficient cross-sectional area to carry the rated ampere load and not exceed themaximum heat rise above ambient temperature as specified by UL and NEMA. Inaddition, as a minimum, bus sized such that the current density at full rated load doesnot exceed 1000 amperes per square inch or a temperature rise of 50 degrees C abovean ambient of 40 degrees C in still but unconfined air, as per NEMA requirements.Bus joints and connections made with hardened steel bolts and Belleville pressurewashers. Maintain bus size as indicated on Drawings through all compartmentsincluding full size neutral and ground. Insulate neutral bus from ground bus andprovide removable link to ground bus.

F. The bus bars are rigidly braced to comply with the withstand rating of theswitchboard.

G. The main horizontal bus bars between sections are located at the back of theswitchboard to permit a maximum of available conduit area. The horizontal main busbar supports, connections, and joints are to be bolted with Grade 5 carriage bolts andBelleville washers to minimize maintenance requirements.

H. A ground bus, sized as required by all governing regulations and codes, and lugs arefurnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and extend the entire lengthof the switchboard.

I. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboardfurnished as required. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard providedwith terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide engraved terminals forexternal wiring between components and for internal wiring between removableassemblies; terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be short-



circuiting type. Mark control and metering conductors at each end. All hardware used on conductors have a high tensile strength and an anti-corrosive zinc plating.

J. The switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single withstand short circuitrating by the manufacturer. This rating shall equal or exceed the AIC rating indicatedon the Drawings. Switchboards shall be fully rated; series connected ratings are notpermitted. Such rating is established by actual tests by the manufacturer on equipmentconstructed similarly to the subject switchboard.

K. The main service disconnect shall be an individually mounted insulated case circuitbreaker with solid state trip unit. The circuit breaker element shall be electrically andmechanically trip-free. The circuit breaker shall be UL listed to UL 489. The circuitbreaker shall have provision for padlocking in the off position. Circuit breaker shallbe manually operated and shall utilize a stored energy closing mechanism. Frame andtrip ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings.1. Solid state trip unit shall digitally measure the current waveform in each phase to

determine the true RMS value of the current regardless of the wave shape. Thetrip unit shall include a digital liquid crystal display with a five-button keypad forlocal setup and readout of trip settings. The trip unit shall include a lithiumbattery for cold setup capability and viewing of targets without external power.The trip unit shall include a three-phase ammeter and trip indicators. The trip unitshall include a field-installable, interchangeable rating plug and adjustablesettings for long time pickup, long time delay, short time pickup, short timedisplay, instantaneous pickup, ground fault pickup and ground fault pickup andground fault display. Zone selective interlocking shall be provided for the groundfault and short time functions.a. Long Time Pickup: 0.5 through 1.1 times rating plug, in steps of 0.05.b. Long Time Delay: 2.4, 4.9, 9.8 and 20 seconds at 600 percent of current

setting at lower limit of bank.c. Short Time Pickup: 1.5 through 9.0 times long time pickup, in steps of 0.5.d. Short Time Delay: 0.4 seconds at 600 percent of current setting at lower limit

of band with I5t in; 0.10, 0.21 and 0.35 seconds at lower limit of band withI5t out.

e. Instantaneous Pickup: 1.5 through 15.0 times rating plug, in steps of 0.5.f. High-range instantaneous: 1.0 times frame short-time rating.g. Ground Fault Pickup: 0.20 through 0.60 times sensor rating, in steps of 0.01.h. Ground Fault Delay: 0.44 seconds at 200 percent of pickup at lower limit of

band with I5t in; 0.10, 0.21 and 0.35 seconds at lower limit of band with I5tout.

2. The circuit breaker shall include the following accessories:a. Auxiliary switch with two NO and two NC contacts.

3. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port foruse with a universal test set. Disassembly of the circuit breaker shall not berequired for testing. Test set shall be capable of verifying the operation of all tripfunctions with or without tripping the circuit breaker.

4. Apply ground fault protective devices in accordance with NEMA Standard PB2.2.



L. The feeder breakers shall be group mounted molded case circuit breakers with thermalmagnetic trip units. Molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed per UL 489.Breakers shall be constructed with an over-center, toggle handle-operated, trip-freemechanism with quick-make, quick-break action independent of the toggle handleoperation. The breaker design shall provide common tripping of all poles. Frame andtrip ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Breakers shall be suitable forreverse feed. Breakers shall be constructed with high-strength molded-glass-reinforced polyester cases and covers. Breakers shall include a push-to-trip button tomanually trip the breaker and exercise the mechanism and trip latch member.

M. Power Meters:1. The information provided by the Power Meter shall include the following

quantities:a. Current, per phase & neutralb. Volts, phase-to-phase & phase-neutralc. Real Power (kW), per phase & three phase totald. Reactive Power (kVAR), per phase & three phase totale. Apparent Power (kVA), per phase & three phase totalf. Power Factor (true), per phase & three phase totalg. Frequencyh. Demand Current, per phase & neutral, present & peaki. Real Power Demand (kWd), three phase total, present & peakj. Reactive Power Demand (kVARd), three phase total, present & peakk. Apparent Power Demand (kVAd), three phase total, present & peakl. Real Energy (kWh), three phase totalm. Reactive Energy (kVARh), three phase totaln. Apparent Energy (kVAh), three phase totalo. Energy Accumulation modes, signed, absolute, energy in, energy outp. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), voltage & current, per phaseq. Date and Time Stamping, peak demands, power up/restart and resets

2. The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.25 percent of reading plus 0.05% of fullscale for voltage and current sensing, and 0.5 percent of reading plus 0.05 percentof full scale for power and energy, accurate through the 31st harmonic.a. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.b. No annual recalibration by users shall be required to maintain these

accuracies.c. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure

high accuracy.3. The meter shall be UL listed per UL 508, FCC compliant per FCC Part 15, Class

A, and vibration and temperature tested. The meter module shall be rated for anoperating temperature range of 0-60 degrees C.

4. The Power Meter metering inputs shall utilize current transformers for the currentinputs. It shall be rated 5A nominal and 10A full scale. In addition, it shall beindustrially and utility hardened to have an overload withstand rating of 15Acontinuous and 500A for 1 second.



5. The device shall not require potential transformers or control power transformerswhen applied at 600V or less. The power meter shall accept control power over arange of 90-600Vac, 50 or 60 Hz, or 100-350Vdc.

6. Each Power Meter shall have built in RS-485 data communications to allowmultipoint communication to multiple computer workstations, programmablecontrollers, and other host devices, up to a data rate of 19,200 baud.

7. All information shall be available from the display or via RS-485communications. It shall be possible to perform the setup via the display. No dipswitches or other hardware adjustments shall be required for setup.

8. The data communications shall be optically isolated to provide reliable operation.9. When connected via network to a computer, the power meter shall provide

logging, trending, and alarming information.10. Each Power Meter shall be equipped with a two-line LCD display.11. The display shall scale readings automatically, without the need for multipliers.12. All setup information and reset commands shall be password protected.13. A KYZ pulse initiator for communication of kWh, kVARh, or kVAh information

to third-party energy management systems shall be provided.14. The power meter shall provide diagnostics to trouble shoot miswired installations.15. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Eatonb. ABB

N. Surge Protective Devices (SPD): Provide a Surge Protective Device as specified inSection 26 43 13. Factory install and wire SPD within the switchboard prior toshipment to the job site. Mount SPD audible alarm, alarm silence and test switches,and failure indicators (LEDs) on front of switchboard. Provide terminal blocks forexternal circuit connections.

O. As required by the 2014 NEC to meet the requirements of arc energy reduction, areduced energy let through (RELT) arc energy reduction maintenance switch shall bemounted locally to the breakers in the equipment lineup. The switch shall have three(3) positions (Test, Normal and Enabled). Each local RELT switch shall be lockableand tagged when in the enabled position so operation and maintenance personnel canmaintain control of the protection status as required in standard safe work practices.The indicating light shall provide a very clear and easy to understand indication of thestatus. The switch when enabled will illuminate "blue", after the trip unit hasresponded with RELT mode activation. The RELT switch, when turned off, shallprovide a 15-second delay before the function reverts to the normal protection setting.This extra time shall allow the operator, who may be wearing less PPE due to theimproved protection provided by the RELT function, to step away before the RELTprotection is deactivated and more PPE is needed.

P. Finish: Metal structural and unit parts completely factory finished using an electrodeposition process so that interior and exterior surfaces, as well as bolted joints, havecomplete finish coats on and between them, also see Drawings.1. Paint process consists of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, prepaint and post paint

rinses, bake-cure and cool down.



2. Finish switchboards with rust-inhibiting primers and a top coating of ANSI-61light grey baked acrylic enamel, meeting NEMA ICS 6-110.57.

3. UL recognized acrylic electrodisposition baked enamel paint and be able to passat least 300 hour salt spray per ASTM B117 with less than 1/8 inch loss of paintfrom a scribed line.

Q. Identification: Each main and branch circuit breaker shall be furnished with anameplate having 1/4-inch-high letters. Nameplates to be of engraved Bakelite orLamacoid and be fastened to bottom of each section. These engraved nameplatesindicates the equipment being served and its designation; such as "Main SwitchboardMSB”. Submit an identification nameplate schedule with the shop drawings.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST SET

A. Provide a universal test set to test and verify performance of solid state (electronictrip) circuit breakers. One test set is required for testing all mains and branch solidstate trip circuit breakers. Provide a test set capable of testing the following:1. Long Time Ampere Rating.2. Long Time Delay.3. Short Time Pickup.4. Short Time Delay.5. Instantaneous Pickup.6. Ground Fault Pickup.7. Ground Fault Delay.8. Trip Solenoid Operation.9. Rating Plug.

B. Design circuit breakers so neither disassembling of circuit breaker nor trip unitremoval is required for testing.

C. Furnish test set installed within a rugged carrying case.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer:1. General Electric by ABB – basis of design2. Eaton Electric

E. The contractor will be responsible for any alterations to the existing concretehousekeeping pad that are necessary for the new switchboard. This would includeextending the concrete pad to the left, right, and further into the room.

2.05 UNDERCOATING

A. Undercoat the underside of each enclosure coating all surfaces that contact the floorthoroughly with a rust and corrosion resistant mastic conforming to the manufacturer'sstandards, 4 mils thick.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line



2.06 SUPPORTING STEEL

A. Provide all steel floor channels and epoxy resin filler necessary and required for theinstallation of each distribution switchboard. Install steel floor channels flush with topof concrete pad.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 REPLACEMENT OF SWITCHBOARD

A. See Section 26 05 00 for shutdown and coordination requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products, connected, and interconnected, where indicated, and in accordancewith NEMA Standard PB2.1, manufacturer's printed instructions and as specifiedherein. Connections made in a manner, which will ensure electrical continuity andoperability of the products. Vertical lines made plumb, and horizontal lines madelevel. Verify the work of other trades is complete to the extent that substrates onwhich electrical apparatus is to be installed is ready to receive same.

B. Protect the equipment against foreign matter and moisture during installation.

C. Connect feeders to individual circuit breakers. The neutral wire of each feederdirectly connected to the neutral bar.

D. Over current and short circuit protection devices are of the sizes and types indicatedand install in a manner, which will ensure selective coordination of the devices.

E. Ground switchboards in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

3.03 TESTING

A. Test switchboards as specified in Section 26 05 63.

B. Test grounding as specified in Sections 26 05 26 and 26 05 63.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle


Contract No. HCC21002 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of all materials forfurnishing, installing connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting wall-mounted panelboards.

B. Related Section:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results2. Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables3. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems4. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250 Electrical Enclosures.2. NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.3. NEMA AB 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application.4. NEMA PB 1 Panelboards.5. NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Panelboards.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):1. UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 2. UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes 3. UL 67 Panelboards


A. Panelboards are connected to system voltages as follows:1. 480Y/277 Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.2. 208Y/120 Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of testingagency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data orby a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a written statement



indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Such statements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data for all products provided.Indicate clearly the usage and designation of each product.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all panelboards.

D. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for all panelboards.





A. Provide panelboards, which have been design tested in accordance with NEMA PB 1.

B. Provide panelboards which have been production tested in accordance with NEMAPB 1.

C. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

D. Install work under supervision of licensed electricians

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as conduit, wireways, wire andconnectors, cable, support devices, fasteners, and similar devices as required for workof this Section are as specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. Provide dead-front panelboards as follows:1. Accommodate bolt-on molded case circuit breakers as specified below.2. Conform to NEMA PB 1 and NFPA 70, Article 384.



3. Consist of interiors, matching enclosures and covers of a single manufacturer asspecified below.

4. Have circuit breakers of frame sizes, trip ratings, number of poles, and types asscheduled, indicated and noted.

5. Provide branch circuits phased in sequence vertically and numbered uniformlyleft to right, top to bottom.

B. Provide panelboards that are fully rated for a short circuit capacity as scheduled,indicated and noted on the Drawings.

C. Interiors: Provide interiors, as follows:1. Provide tin plated main, ground and neutral copper buses conforming to

ASTM B187 having not less than 98 percent conductivity.2. Mount interiors on galvanized steel backplate.3. Make provisions for future breakers and for circuit breakers in all future spaces as

indicated, scheduled or noted and so that additional breakers can be mountedwithout additional connectors or extension of busses.

D. Provide solderless type main, sub-feed, and through feed lugs rated for copper andaluminum conductors of size, number and type, as indicated, scheduled and noted onthe Drawings.

E. Enclosures:1. Provide enclosures conforming to NEMA 250 for the types as indicated,

scheduled, noted, and specified. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwiseindicated on the Drawings.

2. Fabricate from galvanized steel without knockouts.3. Provide side, bottom, and top gutters of minimum 4-inch width, of minimum

5-1/2 inch depth, and sized as indicated, scheduled, and noted and as required byNFPA 70 Article 312 for the actual entry point.

4. Provide circuit directory of sufficient size to allow 40-characters per circuit;indicate the source of service (i.e. upstream panelboard, switchboard, motorcontrol center, etc.) to the panelboard. Mount the directory in a transparentprotective covering.

F. Doors: Provide doors as follows:1. Provide door-in-door construction.2. Provide combination catch and master keyed, flat key lock with two keys for each

lock and common keying throughout each building of the facility.

G. Finishes:1. Factory finish enclosure cover completely using an electro-deposition process that

deposits a complete finish coat of paint on all interior and exterior surfaces as wellas bolted joints.

2. Include in the paint process cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, prepaint and postpaint rinses, bake-cure and cool down steps.



3. Finish switchboards with rust inhibiting primers and electro-disposition acrylicbaked enamel top coating of No. 49 medium light grey conforming to ANSIZ55.1.

4. Provide overall finish capable of passing a 300-hour salt spray per ASTM B117with less than 1/8 loss of paint from a scribed line.

H. Molded case circuit breakers:1. Provide inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics.2. Provide trip ratings, frame sizes, and number of poles as indicated, scheduled, and

noted on the Drawings.3. Provide full rated circuit breakers with short circuit ratings equal to the

panelboard installed as scheduled on the Drawings.4. Provide molded case circuit breakers conforming to NEMA AB 1, and UL 489.5. Provide circuit breakers of the same manufacture and type as the panelboard

installed.6. New circuit breakers for existing panelboards shall match the existing circuit

breaker type, manufacturer, and AIC rating. Circuit breakers that are added intoexisting equipment shall be new, unless noted on the drawings as existing to berelocated and/or reused; and shall be purchased from an authorizedmanufacturer’s distributor. Purchase of used, reconditioned, or brokered circuitbreakers is prohibited unless approved by the Engineer.

I. Provide SPD devices in all NEW panelboards.

J. Panelboard Types:1. Distribution - Square D I-Line.2. Branch Power and Lighting (208Y/120V) - Square D NQ.3. Branch Power and Lighting (480Y/277V) - Square D NF.4. Branch Power (480Y/277V) - Square D I-Line.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. ABB – General Electric2. Eaton Electric

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Painted surfaces, which will be covered by items of this Section have a prime andfinish coat of paint.

B. Ensure that all indoor areas are enclosed from the weather.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Space enclosures out from surfaces mounted on 1/4-inch spacers or U-channelsupports. Provide supports as specified in Section 26 05 28.



B. Install all panelboards and circuit-breakers in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Set enclosure top 6-feet 6-inches above finished floor or grade unless otherwiseindicated or specified.

D. Punch holes for conduit entries in the enclosures.

E. In all areas except dry areas, install conduit drain fitting in punched hole in bottom ofenclosure, conduit breather fitting in top of enclosure.

F. Interface with other work:1. Connect conduits to enclosure with watertight hubs, except in damp locations on

the bottom of enclosures a sealing locknut may be used in place of watertighthubs, and in dry locations two locknuts and bushings may be used.

2. Connect wiring to line and load terminals with lugs provided or approved bymanufacturer in conformance with Section 26 05 19. Remove interior or protectinterior components during wire pulling.

3. Identify in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

G. At the end of the project update the circuit directories to reflect as-built conditions.Circuit directions shall be typed.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After wiring, vacuum out interior and wipe clean of all foreign material.

B. After painting in areas, remove all over paint, drips and splashes.


A. Site Testing:1. Prior to Energizing:

a. Have insulation testing and setting of overcurrent protective deviceadjustments made in conformance of Section 26 05 63.

b. Ensure that all load side wiring is clear of shorts and has received and passedthe insulation tests of Section 26 05 63.

c. Open all downstream disconnects and open circuit breaker.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. During painting, mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, and all items not to be painted.

B. Protect all items during work of other trades including welding and cutting.

C. Protect panelboards against overloads, short circuits, and improper operation, padlockoff when work is being done on downstream circuits.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



Contract No. HCC21002 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


and protecting wiring devices and cover plates.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.3. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.4. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.5. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.6. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems.7. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 20 - Standard for Safety for General-Use Snap Switches.2. UL 231 - Standard for Power Outlets.3. UL 498 - Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.4. UL 943 - Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.5. UL 1681 - Standard for Safety for Wiring Device Configurations.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions for all items are as stated in NFPA 70 and the other references listed unlessotherwise stated, specified, or noted.

B. Wiring Devices: Yoke mounted switches and receptacles with indicated line ratingsof 300 Volts and 30 Amperes or less.


A. Provide electrical power outlets designed in accordance with the requirements ofUL 231 and UL 1681.



B. Product Data:1. Submit a list of the products and accessories proposed to satisfy the requirements

of this Section.2. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts of the materials and equipment proposed to

be used to satisfy the requirements of this Section.a. Clearly indicate the usage of each product on the submittal.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with thesubmittal procedures of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. Catalog cuts of the materials to be installed on the project.


A. Regulatory Requirements:1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in

NFPA 70, and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codesand regulatory requirements.

1.07 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



B. Acceptance at Site:1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Storage and Protection:1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00, Common

Work Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names:1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the

basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required.2. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose

products are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contractrequirements.

B. Provide the switches and receptacles of the same kind provided under this Contractfrom the same manufacturer; a mixture of manufacturers’ products is unacceptable.




A. Switches:1. Provide UL listed specification grade switches meeting the requirements of

W-S-896F, NEMA WD 1, and NEMA WD 6 for the voltage and currentindicated, and having screw terminals.

2. Toggle Handle Snap Switches:a. Provide quiet design, 20 Amp rated, single pole, 3-way or 4-way, toggle

handle snap switches as indicated in the Contract Documents.1) Provide switch with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire.

B. Receptacles:1. Provide UL listed specification grade receptacles complying with the

requirements of W-C-596/40D, W-C-596/41D, W-C-596/107A, NEMA WD 1,and NEMA WD 6 for the voltage and current indicated, and having screwterminals.a. Provide receptacles complying with the terminal identification requirements

of UL 498.2. Standard Face Design Receptacles:

a. Heavy Duty Specification Grade Receptacles:1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex receptacles rated for

125 Volts AC and 20 Amperes.2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire.3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, HBL5352 Seriesb) Pass & Seymourc) Leviton Manufacturing Co.d) Or Approved equal.

3. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles:a. Heavy Duty Specification Grade GFCI Receptacles:

1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex GFCI receptacles ratedfor 125 Volts AC and 20 Amperes; having solid state circuitry; and thatcomply with the requirements of UL 498 and UL 943.

2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire.3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, GFR5362TR Seriesb) Pass & Seymourc) Leviton Manufacturing Co.d) Approved equal.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Plates:a. For use with exposed stamped steel boxes and cast type boxes, provide heavy

cadmium-plated steel wall plates whose edges are flush with the edges of theassociated boxes.



b. For locations subject to wet or rain conditions, provide wet location wallplates marked with the words “Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use”.

B. Weatherproof While-In-Use Covers:1. Body, cover and plates shall be made of polycarbonate and be non-conductive and

non-corrosive.2. A gasket shall be pre-applied that is constructed of closed-cell foam, neoprene

blend regular density and UL rated HBF.3. Cover shall provide a water channel, which keeps water moving outside while

cord flap keeps the inside dry.4. Cover shall be able to mount either vertically or horizontally.5. Must provide a NEMA 3R protection level.6. Manufacturers:

a. EGS/Appleton Electricb. EGS/O-Z/Gedneyc. Hubbelld. Pass & Seymoure. Leviton Manufacturing Co.f. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect the surfaces of concrete foundations where wiring devices will be mounted toverify that the surface is level and complete.1. Verify that the required number of anchors of the correct type and size have been

placed in the proper locations.2. Verify that there are no concrete spalls, honeycomb areas, or other concrete

defects.

B. Verify that the pull and junction boxes installed are the correct type and size and are atthe correct location.1. Verify that flush boxes are plumb and level to within 1/8-inches of vertical and

horizontal; and are either flush with the finish surface or protrude no more than1/16 inch.

2. Verify that surface mounted boxes are plumb and level to within 1/16-inch ofvertical and horizontal.

3. Verify that the size of each box conforms to the requirements of Article 370 ofNFPA 70.

C. Verify that wiring pigtails within installed boxes are sufficiently long to re-terminatethe wiring twice and still allow 6 inches of slack.

D. Verify that ground wires are the correct type and size and are at the correct location.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Correct defects discovered during the examination1. Remove any extraneous paint from the interior of boxes and from wiring.2. Clean the interior of boxes to remove dirt and debris.

B. Provide outlet boxes and supports for wiring devices in accordance with therequirements of Section 26 05 33.23, Boxes, and Section 26 05 28, Hangers andSupports.1. Mounting Locations and Heights:

a. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Contract Drawings, locate wiringdevices by measuring the mounting heights from the finished floor to thecenterline of the wiring device.1) Electrical Duplex Convenience Outlets:

a) In Finished Areas:b) In Unfinished Areas:

(1) Locate electrical duplex convenience outlets 36 inches abovethe finished floor, unless this interferes with equipment oranother obstacle.

(2) If locating electrical duplex convenience outlets 36 inchesabove the finished floor interferes with equipment or anotherobstacle; then install the outlet above or below the obstructionas directed by the Engineer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printedinstallation instructions.1. Make connections to the devices in accordance with the requirements of Sections

26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors, and Section 26 05 33.13,Conduits for Electrical Systems.

2. Ground the devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 26.

B. Provide a wall plate for each switch, receptacle, and special purpose outlet.1. If the Contract Drawings show two or more switches or receptacles at the same

location, gang these devices together and cover them with a single wall or coverplate.

2. For multi-gang boxes, provide multi-gang outlet plates; sectional gang plates areunacceptable.

C. Identify the wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 53,Identification for Electrical Systems.


A. Correct the defects that are found in wiring devices during the specified inspectionsand tests and retest the devices after correcting the defects.




A. Site Tests:1. Test each receptacle with a plug-in tester that checks for reversed line and neutral

wiring, reversed ground and neutral wiring, open ground wiring, and open neutralwiring.

2. Verify that the GFCI receptacles work by using both the built-in integral testerand a plug-in tester which simulates a ground fault to test all receptacles.

3. Test the last receptacle in each branch circuit to ensure that the neutral and groundwiring resistance does not exceed 1 ohm between the receptacle and itspanelboard.

B. Inspection:1. Inspect boxes to verify proper operation, for visual appearance, and to verify

correct mounting height.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust the final position of switches and devices to be plumb and level, and set thefinal position of the wall plates for flush boxes flush to the wall.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Waste Management and Disposal:1. Clear and dispose of waste materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Mask electrical devices to protect them from paint overspray or over-brushing duringpainting operations.

B. Protect electrical devices against damage from other work.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 LOW-VOLTAGE ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.13 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16.13

LOW-VOLTAGE ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


and protecting low voltage enclosed disconnect switches, switches, and fuses.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.3. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.4. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA):1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).2. NEMA KS 1; Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600

Volts Maximum).

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70; National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 98; Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements ofDivision 01:1. Product Data:

a. Enclosed disconnect switchesb. Fuses


A. Qualifications:1. Employ licensed electricians to supervise installation of the work of this section.



B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Conform all work to NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications:1. Provide products that are either listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory,

approved by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by theElectrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and theapplication intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these testinglaboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products.

1.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:1. Provide one set of spare fuses for each point of use including all the ampere sizes

indicated for the location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names:1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the

basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required.


A. Enclosed Disconnect Switches:1. Provide enclosed disconnect switches that meet the requirements of NEMA KS l

and UL 98, and that are as shown on the Contract Drawings.a. Types:

1) Heavy duty fusible type.a) Provide positive pressure fuse clips.b) Provide fuses as specified

2) Heavy duty non-fusible type.b. Provide enclosed disconnect switches rated for the horsepower, voltage, and

amperage as indicated on the Contract Drawings.c. Provide enclosed disconnect switches with the number of poles and of the

type indicated on the Contract Drawings.2. Enclosure:

a. Provide enclosures consisting of a box and cover conforming to therequirements of NEMA 250 and of the type indicated or scheduled on theContract Drawings.1) If not otherwise specified, provide enclosures conforming to the

requirements of NEMA 250, type 1.b. Material:

1) Construct enclosures of code gauge sheet steel per the requirements ofUL 98.



c. Finish:1) Apply a rust-inhibiting phosphate coating to the enclosure’s sheet steel,

and then finish the enclosure in gray baked enamel.d. Provide a permanent label with the manufacturer's switch type, catalog

number, and horsepower rating on the enclosure.3. Switch Mechanism:

a. Provide a quick-make, quick-break operating handle and switch mechanismintegral to the box or body, not the cover.1) Provide dead front construction with permanent arc suppressors and dual

cover interlocks to prevent an unauthorized opening of the switchenclosure when the switch is in the ON position.

2) Provide the means to positively padlock the switch in the OFF position.b. Provide a switch designed so that the switch blades are visible in the OFF

position when door is open.c. Provide UL-listed switch lugs for front removable copper cables.d. Electroplate the switch’s current carrying parts to provide resistance to

corrosion.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Eaton Electricb. ABB – General Electric

B. Fuses:1. Provide current limiting type fuses rated for the voltage and amperage as

indicated on the Contract Drawings for those low-voltage switches requiringfuses.a. For non-motor loads, provide UL Class RK1 single element, fast-acting type

fuses.b. For motor, welder, and transformer loads, provide UL Class RK5 dual

element, time-delay type fuses.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Bussman1) UL Class RK1: Limitron.2) UL Class RK5: Fusetron.

b. Gould-Shawmut.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to painting operations, mask all nameplates, plastic parts, push buttons, operatingshafts, and other items not to be painted.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with the switch manufacturer’s instructions.1. Mount enclosures on 1/4-inch spacers or U-channel supports to provide a space

between enclosures and mounting surfaces.a. Provide supports as specified in Section 26 05 28, Hangers and Supports.



2. Set the top of enclosures 6’-6” above the finished floor or grade unless otherwiseindicated or specified.

B. Install the switch’s conduit and wiring:1. Punch holes in the disconnect switch enclosures for conduit entries enclosures.

a. Connect conduit to disconnect switch enclosures with water-tight hubs exceptas follows:1) In dry locations, either the watertight hubs or two locknuts and bushings

may be used to connect conduits to the disconnect switch enclosure.2. Use lugs provided by or approved by the disconnect switch manufacturer to

connect wiring to the disconnect switch’s line and load terminals in conformancewith Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Wire, Cable, and Accessories.

C. Identify low-voltage enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53, ElectricalIdentification.


3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect the items provided under this Section during the performance of workprovided under other Sections, especially during welding and cutting operations.

B. Protect the low voltage enclosed switches against overloads, short-circuits, andimproper operation.1. Padlock the low voltage enclosed switches in the off position when work is being

done on downstream circuits.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13-1

SECTION 26 29 13

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials forfurnishing; installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting enclosedlow-voltage individually mounted enclosed starters and related accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers And Supports for Electrical Systems3. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems4. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250 Electrical Enclosures2. NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches3. NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses4. NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements5. NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems: Contractors and starters6. NEMA ICS 4 Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks7. NEMA ICS 5 Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot devices8. NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures9. NEMA ST 1 Specialty Transformers.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence oftesting agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on thedata or by a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a writtenstatement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Suchstatements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data for all products provided.Indicate clearly the usage of each product.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all enclosed low voltage starters.

D. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for all enclosed starters and contactors.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



1.04 SHORT CIRCUIT, ARC-FLASH, PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND HARMONIC DISTORTION STUDY




A. Source Quality Control: Provide standard prototype and routine factory tests ofstarters conforming to NEMA Standard 250, NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2,NEMA ICS 4, NEMA ICS 5 and NEMA ICS 5 and UL 508.


C. Install work under supervision of skilled licensed electricians.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Manual Motor Starters: Provide starters in NEMA Standard 250 Type 1 enclosure,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, and having the correct number of polesneeded and sufficient horsepower, or fractional horsepower rating to operate theconnected motors.1. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starters: Starter consisting of a manually operated

quick-make, quick-break toggle switch equipped with melting alloy type thermaloverload relay. Thermal unit sized to suit imposed load and of one-piececonstruction and interchangeable. Starter rendered inoperative when thermal unitis removed. Starter contacts of double break silver alloy type in a trip-free switchmechanism.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Square D Companyb. Eaton Electricc. General Electricd. Siemens Industry for LV Power Distribution

2.02 OPERATING AND INDICATING DEVICES

A. Provide operating and indicating devices manufactured in accordance with currentNEMA ICS 1 and ICS 5 standards for heavy, duty control stations.



1. Pilot Lights: Single hole mounted, heavy duty, oiltight, watertight, industrial typetransformer pilot lights with interchangeable fresnel lenses. Lens color asindicated on the Drawings.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Square D Company2. Eaton Electric3. General Electric4. Siemens Industry for LV Power Distribution5. Or Approved Equal

2.03 WIRE MARKERS

A. Construction:1. Each internal and field wire shall be identified on both ends of the wire with tube

type wire markers. Do not use heat-shrink type makers; markers shall be loosefor to ease access to ID number.

2. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.3. The wire markers shall be white with black lettering. Hand marking of the label

is not acceptable.4. The wire marker number shall be a unique number, shall be easily cross

referenced with the approved shop drawings, and shall have the same number onends of the wire.

B. Manufacturers:1. Brady2. Or approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that painted surfaces which will be covered by items of this Section have aprime and finish coat of paint.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install all starters in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Punch holes for conduit entries in the enclosures.

C. In all areas except dry areas, install conduit drain fitting in punched hole in bottom ofenclosure, conduit breather fitting in top of enclosure.

D. Interface with other work:



1. Connect conduits to enclosure with watertight hubs except in damp locations onthe bottom of enclosures. A sealing locknut may be used in place of watertighthubs and in dry locations two locknuts and bushings may be used.

2. Connect wiring to line and load terminals with lugs provided or approved bymanufacturer in conformance with Section 26 05 19. Remove interior or protectinterior components during wire pulling.

E. Cleaning: Clean installed products of this Section where deposits of oil, grease, dirt,dust, mud, or debris is present after installation. Use detergent-water solution,solvents where necessary, or other liquid cleaners not harmful to material andequipment finishes.

3.03 TESTING

A. Perform field inspection and testing of motor starters in accordance withmanufacturer’s recommendations.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. During painting mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, pushbuttons, operating shaftsand all items not to be painted.


C. Protect motor controllers against overloads, short circuits and improper operation.Padlock off when work is being done on downstream circuits.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 29 23-1

SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of requirements for thefurnishing and installation of AC Variable Frequency Drives.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems3. Section 26 35 33 – Power Factor Correction Equipment

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).2. NFPA 79 - Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines/Industrial Machinery.

B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):1. IEC 60068 Part 2-3 - Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2: Tests - Test

Ca: Damp Heat2. IEC 60146.1 - Semiconductor Converters - General Requirements and Line

Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic Requirements3. IEC 60664-1 - Insulation Coordination for Equipment within Low-Voltage

Systems4. IEC 60447 - Man-Machine Interface Actuating Principles5. IEC 60439-1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies6. IEC 60947-1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Components7. IEC 60364-1 - Electrical Installation of Buildings8. IEC 60106 - Guide for Specifying Environmental Conditions for Equipment

Performance Rating9. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure10. IEC 61000 - Electromagnetic Compatibility11. IEC 60721 - Classification of Environmental Conditions12. IEC 60255-8 Overload Relays13. IEC 60801-2, -3, -4, -5 - Immunity Tests.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures2. NEMA ICS, Part 4 - Overload Relays3. NEMA Publication 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment4. NEMA ICS 2-321 - Electrical Interlocks5. NEMA ICS7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed Drives

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



6. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for SelectionInstallation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drives.

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI C84.1 - Voltage Tolerances for North America.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):1. UL 50 - UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment2. UL 98 - UL Standard for Disconnect Switches3. UL 507 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Fans4. UL 508 - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment5. UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment6. UL 991 - UL Standard for Safety Tests for Safety Related Controls Employing

Solid-State Devices.

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):1. OSHA® 1910.95 - AC Drive Controller Acoustical Noise.

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):1. IEEE 519 - IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic

Control in Electrical Power Systems2. IEEE C62.41- IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage

AC Power Circuits.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish copies of approval drawing for Engineers approval prior to the factoryassembly of the AC Drives. Provide drawings consisting of elementary power andcontrol wiring diagrams and enclosure outline drawings. The enclosure drawing shallinclude front and side view of the enclosure with overall dimensions, requiredclearances, weight, conduit entrance locations and nameplate legends shown.

B. Standard catalog sheets showing voltage, horsepower, maximum current ratings andrecommended replacement parts with part numbers shall be furnished for eachdifferent horsepower rated AC drive provided.

C. Submit Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals, which shall include detailedparts lists, lists of recommended spare parts, circuit diagrams, maintenanceprocedures, and operating instructions.

1.04 SHORT CIRCUIT, ARC-FLASH, PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND HARMONIC DISTORTION STUDY






A. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9001 facility.

B. The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be UL listed according toUL 508 C – Power Conversion Equipment. As verification, a UL label shall beattached on the inside of the combination enclosure.

C. Design, construct and test the AC Drive in accordance with NEMA, NEC, and ULStandards.

D. Test every AC Drive with an actual AC induction motor at 100% load and temperaturecycled within an environment chamber at 104 degrees F. Documentation shall befurnished at the request of the Engineer to verify successful completion of this test.

E. Test all Drive door mounted pilot devices to verify successful operation.Documentation shall be furnished upon the request of the Engineer.

F. Perform a Hi-Pot test on the AC Drive with all enclosed devices mounted and wired,prior to shipment.

G. VFD shall be the standard product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture ofthis product with a record of at least five years successful installations of VFDs similarin size and type to those required for this project.

1.06 FACTORY TESTS

A. Upon receipt of all approved shop drawings for the AC drives, the manufacturer shallfabricate and factory test the equipment in question.

B. Upon completion of the factory tests, and prior to shipment, forward the following tothe Engineer for review and comments.1. Certified test report ascertaining that the equipment in question was tested in strict

conformance with all applicable Standards, and that the equipment met orexceeded all tests requirements. The test report shall include the manufacturer’sfactory test plan.

2. A certified quality control report indicating the items checked, the date whenchecked and initialed by the individual performing the quality control.

3. Provide as part of this submittal the Operational and Maintenance Manuals for thereferenced equipment as specified herein in this Section of the Specifications.



C. Equipment shall not be accepted at the job site without prior receipt of the associatedcertified test report and the certified quality control report referenced to above.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. VFDs shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 24 months from the dateof certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment.

B. Warranty shall include parts, labor, travel time, and expenses incurred by themanufacturer to provide factory-authorized service to diagnose and repair or replaceVFDs that fail within the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. ABB, ACH550 series (Basis of Design)2. Allen-Bradley3. Eaton Corporation4. Schneider Electric/Square D

B. The VFD shall convert three-phase, 60 Hz input line power to proportionally variablevoltage and frequency, three-phase, ac power using the latest isolated gate bipolartransistor (IGBT) technology for stepless motor speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors. Drive shall include integral manual disconnecting means andshall provide means of overload and overcurrent self-protection and motor protection.1. The VFD power input stage shall convert three-phase ac line power to a fixed dc

bus voltage. This will be accomplished with a solid state three-phase full-wavediode rectifier with metal oxide varistor (MOV) three-phase protection.

2. The VFD output power shall vary frequency to the motor from 0 to 60 Hz withresultant motor speed varying at the motor nameplate rated speed, with outputvoltage variation from zero to motor rated voltage for optimum volts per hertz(V/Hz) ratio for fan and pump loads. The output must be a voltage source typegenerating a sine coded PWM waveform utilizing an asynchronous carrierfrequency (output transistor switching frequency is to be independent of driveoutput frequency). This carrier frequency shall be adjustable to minimizeharmonically induced noise or vibration.

3. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA Type 1 or Type 12; UL 508component recognized: cooling fan, with intake and exhaust grills.a. The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The

fans shall be designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFDfrom the wall or removal of circuit boards.

b. The cooling fans shall be controlled by the VFD to cycle on only as requiredto maintain safe operating temperature.



4. The VFD shall include a door interlocked, padlock-able, input power disconnectswitch that will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internallymounted options.

5. Application: Drives shall be capable of controlling and set up for either variableor constant torque loads, as follows:a. Variable Torque: Loads such as centrifugal fans, pumps, and compressors.b. Constant Torque: Loads such as positive displacement pumps and

reciprocating or screw compressors.

C. Service Conditions and Performance Ratings: Designed to operate continuouslywithin the following conditions:1. Input Ratings:

a. AC line voltage variation, -10% to +10% of nominalb. AC line frequency variation, 48 to 60 Hzc. Input voltage imbalance, not to exceed 3 percentd. Displacement power factor, not less than 0.95 throughout the speed range.

2. Output Ratings:a. Minimum efficiency, 97% at full load

1) The input current rating of the VFD shall be not more than 3% greaterthan the output current rating

2) VFDs with lower efficiencies (i.e. higher input current ratings) requiringupstream wiring, protection devices, or source transformers to beoversized per NEC 420.120 shall not be acceptable.

3) Input and output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate.b. Minimum short circuit current (withstand) rating, base VFD UL-Listed for

100,000 AIC, without the need for input fuses.c. Continuous output current, 100% of the nominal FLA ratingd. Overload capability, minimum short term of 110% of nominal FLA rating for

60 seconds every 10 minutes; minimum peak overload of 130% of nominalFLA rating for 2 seconds per minute.

D. VFD shall adhere to restriction of generated harmonics, as specified in this Section, onthe electrical system so that other electrical equipment is not adversely affected.

E. VFD shall not cause premature motor failure.

F. VFD shall not cause overheating or excessive vibration or require derating of thedriven motor when operating down to 25% of design motor speed.

G. VFD shall not increase audible noise from the motor by more than 5 dB/A (at adistance of 5 feet from the motor) above the noise level of the motor when operatedfrom a sinusoidal power source.

2.02 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures shall be Rated and Listed UL types. VFDs without these UL ratings shallnot be acceptable. NEMA-only type enclosures shall not be acceptable.



B. Enclosures shall be selected to provide protection of all internal components for theapplication and environmental conditions at the installed location.

2.03 PROTECTION

A. Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory,loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, DC-to-DC power supply,control power and pre-charge circuit.

B. The enclosure shall provide a fully coordinated AIC rating marked on the enclosurenameplate. AIC ratings shall be not less than indicated on the Drawings or as hereinspecified. Short circuit coordination to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment andNEMA ICS 7.1.

C. Subjecting the AC Drive to, at minimum, any of the following conditions shall notresult in component failure:1. Overloads, short circuits (between output phases and to ground), and open circuits

at controller output2. Input undervoltage and overvoltage3. Loss of input phase4. Phase reversal5. AC line switching transients6. Over-temperature.

D. Provide surge protection per IEEE 62.41 and IEEE 519 to protect the VFD systemfrom damaging transient voltage surges. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

E. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the useof fast acting semiconductor output fuses.

2.04 ADJUSTMENTS & CONFIGURATIONS

A. The AC Drive will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional devices.

B. The VFD shall include the following minimum adjustments inside the enclosure:1. Maximum Speed Limit, adjustable 50 to 200 percent base speed2. Minimum Speed Limit, adjustable 0 to 50 percent base speed3. Acceleration Time, adjustable from 0.1 to 1800 seconds4. Deceleration Time, adjustable from 0.1 to 1800 seconds; with override circuit to

prevent nuisance tripping if the deceleration time is set too short5. Current Regulation Limit, adjustable 0 to 130 percent6. Output Carrier Frequency, field selectable between 1 and 12 kHz in maximum

increments of 4 kHz.



2.05 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Include integral mounted components to mitigate harmonic distortion, provideprotection from input transients, and reduce EMI/RFI emissions as required for eachapplication. At minimum, drives shall include the following:1. VFDs shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the

power line and to add protection from ac line transients. The 5% impedance maybe from dual (positive and negative dc bus) reactors, or 5% ac line reactors.a. VFDs with only one dc reactor shall add an ac line reactor.

2. EMI/RFI Filters: All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filtersshall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked, and the VFD shall meet productstandard IEC/EN 61800-3 for the first environment restricted level with up to 100feet of motor cable. No exceptions.

2.06 CONTROL FEATURES

A. The VFD shall include the following control features; designed to operatecontinuously within the following conditions:1. The control pad shall include a backlit LCD multi-line display in plain English

text. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and faultdiagnostics; alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable. All VFD faults shall bedisplayed in plain English words.

2. The following display/control parameters shall be located on the front of theenclosure:a. Hand-Off-Auto selector to start and stop the motor. In the auto position, the

drive shall start/stop from a remote contact closure. In the auto position,motor speed shall be determined by the follower signal. In the manualposition, motor speed shall be determined by manual adjustment.

b. Power On indicator that the VFD is being supplied by line power.c. Drive Fault indicator that the VFD has tripped on a Fault condition.d. Display shall indicate load parameters such as motor speed (RPM or percent),

output frequency/voltage, running load amps, motor torque, motor power(kW), DC bus voltage, motor status, and fault or alarming status.

3. A set of Form C, Dry Contacts to indicate when the drive is in the Run mode.4. A set of Form C, Dry Contacts to indicate when the drive is in the Fault mode.

This fault output shall be hard-wired to the BAS independently of a serialcommunications interface so that it can be monitored even if the networkconnection has failed.

2.07 BAS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE

A. The VFD manufacturer shall include factory-installed hardware and software to enablethe BAS, primarily, to monitor and display VFD feedback, status, alarms and energyusage; and secondarily, to allow, but not be fully dependent upon, BAS controlcommands.



B. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third-partygateways and multiplexers is not acceptable.

C. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL listing forBACNET). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.

D. Allows the VFD to be used with an external system within a multidrop LANconfiguration; settings retained within VFDs nonvolatile memory.

E. The VFD / BAS interface shall comply with the requirements defined in the BASspecifications and sequences of operation.1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-485.2. Embedded BAS protocols for network communications shall include BACNET

protocol accessible via the communications ports.

F. Communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to:1. Run-Stop Control2. Speed Set Adjustment3. Proportional/Integral/Derivative PID Control Adjustments4. Current Limit5. Acceleration/Deceleration Time Adjustments6. Locking and Unlocking the keypad.

G. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the BAS to monitor feedback such asprocess variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque,power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drivetemperature. The BAS shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay outputstatus, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. Alldiagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serialcommunications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.

2.08 BYPASS CONTROLLER

A. Designed to operate continuously within the following conditions:1. The bypass controller shall be a complete, factory-wired and tested system that

safely transfers the motor load between VFD output and the bypass circuit;manually, automatically, or both.

2. User interface shall allow selection of modes and indicator lights shall indicate themode selected.

3. Motor driven equipment shall be capable of stable operation (starting, stopping,and running) with motor completely disconnected from VFD section. The bypasssystem shall not depend on the VFD in any way for bypass operation. The bypasssystem shall be designed for standalone operation and shall be completelyfunctional in both hand and automatic modes, even if the VFD has been removedfrom the system for repair / replacement.



a. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure shall be mechanicallyinterlocked such that the disconnecting device must be in the Off positionbefore either enclosure may be accessed.

b. The operator shall have full control of the bypass starter by operation of aVFD/Off/Bypass selector switch or the keypad

c. In the Automatic mode of operation, the isolation and bypass contactors shallbe sequenced by the Auto Start contact provided by the user

d. A Test/Normal selector switch shall provide test operation of the powerconverter while operating the motor in bypass.

e. The LED indicator lights, or keypad display indications, shall be providedwith a test mode or push-to-test feature.

B. Bypass Modes:1. Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between

power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operatorinterface or automatic control system feedback.

2. There shall be a keypad adjustment to select manual or automatic transfer bypass.The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults willresult in an automatic transfer to the bypass mode and which faults require amanual transfer to bypass.

3. The user may select whether the system shall automatically transfer from drive tobypass mode on the following drive fault conditions:a. Over Currentb. Over Voltagec. Under Voltaged. Loss of Analog Input.

C. Bypass Controller:1. Two-contactor-style bypass shall allow motor operation via either the VFD or the

bypass controller.a. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC-rated contactorb. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, IEC-rated contactor.

D. Control Features: The bypass shall include the following control features:1. Bypass I/O shall be available to the BAS even with the VFD removed.2. The bypass shall provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire,

smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shallremain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. Theremote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and Bypass modes. The terminalstrip shall allow for independent connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs.

3. There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless ofthe source of a run command (keypad command, time-clock control, digital input,or serial communications) the bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that willsignal the damper to open (motor does not operate). When the damper is fullyopen, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a bypass system input and allows motor operation. Up to fourseparate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When any safety is opened, the



motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. This feature will also operate in fireman's override / smoke control mode.

4. The bypass shall include a supervisory control mode. In this bypass mode, thebypass shall monitor the value of the VFDs analog input (feedback). Thisfeedback value is used to control the bypass contactor On and Off state. Thesupervisory mode shall allow the user to maintain automated cycled on-offcontrol over applications such as cooling towers and booster pumps even with theVFD out of service.

5. The on-board Form C relay outputs in the bypass shall include the minimumfollowing indications:a. Bypass Fault Statusb. System Startedc. System Runningd. Bypass Selectede. Bypass H-O-A Position.

E. Serial Communications: The manufacturer shall include factory-installed hardwareand software to enable the BAS, primarily, to monitor and display Bypass Modeselected, Start/Stop and Run Status, and Fault Alarms; and secondarily, to allow, butnot be fully dependent upon, BAS control commands.1. On-board communications protocol shall be BACNET2. Serial communication in Bypass shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Bypass Run-Stop Controlb. The ability to force the unit into Bypassc. The ability to lock and unlock the keypad.

3. The bypass shall be capable of allowing the BAS to monitor feedback, such as:a. Current (in Amps)b. Kilowatt Hours (resettable)c. Operating Hours (resettable)d. Bypass Logic Board Temperature.

4. The BAS shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relay output status and alldigital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall betransmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shallbe possible. Serial communications shall remain functional even with the VFDremoved.

5. The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted overthe serial communications bus and/or via a Form C relay output:a. Keypad “hand” or “auto” selectedb. Bypass selectedc. Broken Belt indication.

6. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFDmode or Bypass mode over serial communications. A minimum of 50 field serialcommunications points shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.



2.09 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE

A. Per 47 CFR 15, VFD shall be certified to comply with the requirements for Class Acomputing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15.

B. Electrical and electromechanical components of the variable frequency drive shall notcause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromagnetic equipmentwhile in operation.

2.10 WIRE MARKERS

A. Construction:1. Each internal and field wire shall be identified on both ends of the wire with tube

type wire markers. Do not use heat-shrink type makers; markers shall be loosefor to ease access to ID number.

2. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.3. The wire markers shall be white with black lettering. Hand marking of the label

is not acceptable.4. The wire marker number shall be a unique number, shall be easily cross

referenced with the approved shop drawings, and shall have the same number onends of the wire.

B. Manufacturers:1. Brady2. Or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated.

B. Do not install AC Drive until the building environment can be maintained within theservice conditions required by the manufacturer.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Before and during installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be protected from sitecontaminants.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, drawings andrecommendations.



3.04 TESTING AND MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. The AC Drive manufacturer shall provide a factory certified technical representativeto supervise the contractor’s installation, testing and start-up of the AC drive(s)furnished under this specification.

B. Test VFDs for functional operation and final system testing in accordance with thedrive manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW- VOLTAGE ELECRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

26 43 13 - 1

SECTION 26 43 13

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials forfurnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting enclosedsurge protective devices.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables3. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Underwriters Laboratories (ANSI/UL):1. ANSI/UL 1449 Surge Protective Devices (Fourth Edition)2. UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 285.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

B. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data within 60 days of contract awardfor all products provided.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all Surge Protective Devices.

D. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for all Surge Protective Devices.

E. Project Closeout: Include record drawings, shop drawings and product data withInstallation and Maintenance Manuals and submit at project closeout in accordancewith Section 26 05 00.





26 43 13 - 2



A. Conform all quality control work to Section 26 05 00.

B. Unless products meeting the requirements of nationally recognized testing laboratoriesare not readily available for a category of products, provide products that are:1. Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory.

C. Conform all work to regulatory requirements of all state, local, and national governingcodes and requirements, NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and the requirements ofSection 26 05 00.

D. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing work of this Section withminimum three years documented experience.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. SPD shall have a ten-year parts warranty with a 5 year in the field service warranty.Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical distribution equipmentmanufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field service division.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES EQUIPMENT

A. General Requirements:1. Provide only products satisfying the applicable requirements for testing and

reporting as established herein. Devices proposed for use on this project shall betested in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Fourth Edition, as prescribed byANSI/IEEE C62.45 - 2002. The voltage protection rating (VPR) or "clamping"voltages shall be recorded for all applicable mode of operation and for each of thetest standard waveforms referenced. The results of these tests shall be submittedto the Engineer with the product data sheets as outlined under in this Section.

2. Products furnished for use on this project are to incorporate protective elements inall applicable modes, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3. Install SPD equipment where so indicated on the Drawings. Voltage class andtype of unit to be compatible with distribution voltage being protected.

B. Integral device for switchboard.1. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Fourth Edition, Standard

for Safety, Surge Protective Devices.



26 43 13 - 3

2. All SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be aType 1 SPDs I-nominal 20kA. All SPDs installed on the load side of the serviceentrance disconnect shall be a Type 1, I-nominal 20kA or 2 SPD I-nominal 20kA.

3. SPD shall be modular in design. Each protection element shall be a userreplaceable surge current diversion Thermally Protected unimodule (MOVbased). Each surge current diversion module shall have a short circuit currentrating (SCCR) of 200 kA. Each surge current diversion module shall includesolid state status indicator lights.

4. SPD shall provide redundant surge current diversion modules for each mode ofProtection with a minimum of 7 MOV’s per phase of protection. Modes ofProtection shall be L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTAsystems.

5. SPD shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path. Small gaugeround wiring or plug-in connections shall not be used in the path for surge currentdiversion. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to thebus bars for reliable low impedance connections.

6. 250 kA SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application withinANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 - 2002 Category C (Type 1) environments.

7. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:a. Minimum surge current rating per mode shall be:

L-N 120 kA L-G 120 kA N-G 120 kA Per phase 250 kA

8. UL 1449 Fourth Edition Listed voltage protection ratings (VPRs) shall not exceedthe following:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V

9. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage(MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage for 480Y/277 V.

10. SPD shall be equipped with onboard visual LED lights and audible diagnosticmonitoring. Red and green LED indicator lights shall provide full time visualdiagnostic monitoring of the operational status of each phase as well as each surgecurrent diversion module. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way ofaudible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/offswitch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shallbe provided. The diagnostic monitoring circuits shall continually monitor theoperational status of the surge current diversion modules. No other testequipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or afterinstallation.

11. SPD shall be connected to the power bus through a dedicated circuit breaker ordisconnect.

12. SPD shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.13. SPD shall include Form C dry contacts to monitor the performance of each phase

and provide a summary alarm.



26 43 13 - 4

14. SPD shall include an event surge counter. The counter shall be equipped with amanual reset and a battery or flash memory to retain memory upon loss of ACpower. The surge counter display and reset switch shall be mounted on the frontof the SPD enclosure.

15. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Eaton Electricb. ABB - General Electric.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Grounding Materials: Conform to Section 26 05 26

B. Wiring, External to Equipment and Connectors: Conform to Section 26 05 19

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Painted surfaces, which will be covered by items of this Section, shall have a primeand finish coat of paint.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Space enclosures out from surfaces mounted on 1/4-inch spacers or u-channelsupports. Provide supports as specified in Section 26 05 28.

B. Install all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

C. Ground all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with Section 26 05 26, and themanufacturer’s instructions using wire as specified in Section 26 05 19, of size No.6 AWG or larger if otherwise indicated, recommended, or specified.

D. Connect all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with Section 26 05 19 and themanufacturer’s instructions. For service, Surge Protective Devices use No. 4 AWG orlarger if otherwise indicated or recommended.

E. Make all holes for conduit entries with punches.

F. In all areas except dry areas install conduit drain-fitting in punched hole in bottom ofenclosure, conduit breather fitting in top of enclosure.

G. Interface with other work:1. Connect wiring to line and load terminals with lugs provided or approved by

manufacturer in conformance with Section 26 05 19. Remove interior or protectinterior components during wire pulling.



26 43 13 - 5

2. Connect to wiring systems in conformance with Section 26 05 19.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. During painting mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, pushbuttons, operating shaftsand all items not to be painted.


C. Protect Surge Protective Devices against short circuits and improper operation.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1

SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements for general and emergency egress lighting equipment,

components, and related installation.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding.3. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.4. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.5. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. LED – An acronym for “Light-Emitting Diode” used to indicate a semiconductorlight source.


A. Design Criteria:1. The Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings constitutes the basis of

the lighting design for this Contract.a. The Lighting Fixture Schedule includes the lighting fixture descriptions,

fixture manufacturers, and corresponding model numbers.2. Provide lighting fixtures meeting the requirements of the basis of the lighting

design for this Contract, and which have the special details specified in thisSection.a. Provide fixtures for exterior installation that are designed to be completely

waterproof.b. Provide luminaire brackets designed to be compatible with configuration

of the luminaire.




A. Regulatory Requirements:1. The execution of work of this Section must satisfy the applicable requirements

of the latest edition of NFPA 70 (NEC), the National Occupational Safety andHealth Act as embodied in 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, and regulations oflocal jurisdictional authorities.

2. Comply with the requirements of the Energy Policy Act (EPACT) of 2005 andthe applicable version of the International Energy Conservation Code.

B. Certifications:1. All products must be Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed.2. Fixtures that are to be installed in areas subject to the weather must be UL listed

as "Enclosed and gasketed suitable for wet locations".

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with submittalprocedures of Division 01:1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.1) Lighting fixtures catalog cuts

b. Manufacturer’s photometric data, distribution curves, isolux charts, glarefactor data, and coefficients of utilization for each lighting fixture type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Conduit and Raceway:1. Provide electrical conduit and raceway in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 33.13, Section 26 05 33.16, Section 26 05 33.19, or Section 26 0536 as indicated and as appropriate for the application per NFPA 70.

B. Wire and Cable:1. Provide electrical wire and cable in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 19.


A. Light Fixtures:1. Provide those fixtures indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the

Contract Drawings or approved substitutions.a. The manufacturers’ fixture descriptions and corresponding fixture model

numbers are also listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.b. Additional manufacturers who can provide products comparable to those

provided by the manufacturers listed and whose products the Contractorproposes to use for this Contract must first be submitted to and receive the



approval of the Engineer prior to being substituted for the listed manufacturers.

2. Fixture Grounding Device and Conductor:a. Provide the housing of each fixture with a separate, factory-installed

grounding device and ground conductor.3. Exterior Fixtures:

a. Factory-equip fixtures intended for exterior installation with waterproofgaskets and anodized aluminum frames unless indicated otherwise on theContract Drawings.1) Provide outlet boxes, neoprene gaskets, and stainless steel hardware

to render the exterior fixture installation waterproof.b. Finish:

1) Provide fixtures for exterior installation with a finish free ofscratches and other surface blemishes.

c. Brackets:1) Provide brackets of the type and style indicated or scheduled on the

Contract Drawings and color matched to the light fixture.

B. LED Lighting Fixtures (excluding LED exit signs)1. Color temperature of any substituted fixture shall be within 10% of the specified

value shown on the drawings.2. Power consumption of any substituted fixture shall not exceed the specified

value shown on the drawings by more than 10%. If a substituted fixture issubmitted and approved at an increased wattage 9within 10% of the specifiedwattage), any power system modifications necessary to accommodate thefixtures will be the responsibility of the contractor (i.e. increased wire sizes,increased circuit breaker size, additional circuits/breakers, etc.)

3. LED Lumen Efficacy (Lumens/Watt) of a substituted fixture shall not be lessthan the specified fixture by more than 10%.

4. Characteristics of substituted fixtures shall have the same features as thespecified LED fixtures (i.e. redundant drivers, driver protection, etc.) whetherspecifically noted on the lighting fixture schedule or not.

5. Drivers shall not exceed 350mA unless specifically noted otherwise on thelighting fixture schedule. Drivers shall have a Class A sound rating.

6. LED Light fixtures shall have a minimum expected life of 50,000 hours. Theaforementioned life rating must be conducted with a 40 degrees calciumambient temperature.

7. Power Factor: The LED fixture shall have a power factor of 0.90 or greater.8. Total Harmonic Distortion induced into the AC power line by the luminaire

shall not exceed 20 percent.9. Surge Suppression: The LED fixture on-board circuitry shall include surge

protective devices to withstand high repetition noise transients as a result ofutility line switching, nearby lightning strikes, and other interference. TheSPD shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for common modetransient peak voltages up to 10 kV (minimum) and transient peak currents up to5 kA (minimum). SPD shall conform to UL 1449 depending of the components



used in the design. SPD performance shall be tested per the procedures in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1992 (or current edition) for category A (standard). The SPD shall fail in such a way as the Luminaire will no longer operate. The SPD shall be field replaceable.

10. Operational Performance: the LED circuitry shall prevent visible flicker.11. Thermal Management: The thermal management (of the heat generated by the

LED’s) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure the proper operation of theluminaire over the expected useful life. Thermal management shall be bypassive design – the use of fans or other mechanical devised is not allowed.

C. Boxes, Gaskets, Hardware, and Support Devices:1. Provide outlet boxes, neoprene gaskets, and stainless steel hardware to render

the installation of the lighting waterproof.2. Provide waterproof splice kits where required as specified in Section .3. Supply pendant stems, special mounting supports and hardware, and

miscellaneous materials and incidentals required to install the lighting andemergency battery unit products in place.

4. Provide neoprene spacers for maintaining clearance between lighting andemergency battery unit products and concrete, mortar, and other masonrysurfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Exposed Fixture Installation:1. Install surface mounted and exposed fixtures as indicated on the Contract

Drawings.a. Hang suspended fixtures plumb, with continuous rows of fixtures in

alignment.b. Install surface mounted fixtures tight up against the substrate to eliminate

gaps except where NFPA 70 (NEC) or local code restrictions require aseparation between the fixtures and substrate.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean new lighting fixtures by following the cleaning procedures as recommended bythe fixture manufacturer:1. Use only those products for cleaning as recommended in the fixture

manufacturer's literature.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00-1

SECTION 27 00 00

COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials forfurnishing, installing connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting astructured wiring system for voice and data.

B. Related Section:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems3. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications IndustryAssociation (TIA)/Electronics Industry Alliance (EIA):1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard – Part 1: General Requirements. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard – Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components.

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):1. IEEE 802.3ab Physical Layer Parameters and Specifications for

1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair of Category 6 Balanced Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T.

C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):1. ANSI/ICEA S-80-576 Communication Wire and Cable for Wiring of

Premises.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA WC 63.1 Telecommunications Cables

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):1. UL 444 Communications Cables.



2. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 3. UL 1863 UL Standard for Safety for Communications-Circuit

Accessories.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).


A. Provide a completely cabled and terminated extension of the existing communicationsystem (LAN) in a star topology.

B. Communications system cabling, raceways, pathways, and spaces shall at minimumcomply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, -568-B.2, -568-B.3, -569-A and -607.

C. Provide grounding and bonding per, at minimum, ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, NFPA 70 andUL 467.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence oftesting agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on thedata or by a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a writtenstatement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Suchstatements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Third Party Performance Testing: Provide with all product data evidence of third-party performance testing by a Nationally Recognized Independent TestingLaboratory.

C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Submit product data for all products provided.Indicate clearly the usage of each product.

D. Shop Drawings:1. Telecommunications Drawings: Provide drawings complete with wiring

diagrams and details required to prove that the distribution system shall properlysupport connectivity from the existing telecommunications equipment room to theequipment or work area outlets furnished under this Contract. Drawings shalldepict final telecommunications cabling configuration, including location, colorcoding, gauge, pair assignment, polarization, and terminating blocks layout atcross connect points and patch panels after telecommunications cable installation.

E. Installer Qualifications: Prior to installation, submit data of installer's experience andqualifications. Installers shall be a Building Industry Consulting Service International(BICSI) Registered Cabling Installation Technician or have experience that shallinclude 3 years on projects of similar complexity.



F. Test Plan: Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunicationscabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the UTP componentsand accessories. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.

G. Submit Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals which shall include detailedparts lists, lists of recommended spare parts, circuit diagrams, maintenanceprocedures, and operating instructions. Submittal shall include the requirements ofparagraph entitled “Telecommunications Drawings”.


A. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved byFactory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical TestingLaboratory unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories arenot readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. Provideproducts that are listed and labeled or approved as stated above for the locationinstalled in and listed and labeled or approved as indicated and specified for theapplications the items are intended for.

B. Provide products that have been third party performance tested by a NationallyRecognized Independent Testing Laboratory. Test results shall be provided uponrequest of the Engineer.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in the manufacture of products of thisSection with a minimum five years documented experience.

D. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

E. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing work of this Section with aminimum three years documented experience.

F. Install work under supervision of skilled licensed electricians.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONNECTORS

A. UTP Copper Cable (Voice, Data):1. Connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68.5, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B. UTP

outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 4-pair, constructed of highimpact rated thermoplastic housing and shall comply with Category 6requirements and be 1000BASE-T compliant. Connectors shall be terminatedusing a 110-style PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568Bwiring. Each jack shall be wired T568B. UTP connectors shall comply withEIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. The Siemon Company.



2. Leviton Voice and Data Division.3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.4. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 OUTLETS

A. Outlets consisting of box, wallplate and connectors.

B. Outlets shall include provisions for storage and bend radius protection of coppercabling.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. The Siemon Company.2. Leviton Voice and Data Division.3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.4. Or Approved Equal.

2.03 PATCH PANELS

A. UTP Copper Cable (Data):1. Terminate copper cabling on existing patch panels at location(s) as directed by the

Owner.

2.04 PATCH CORDS

A. UTP Copper Cable (Data):1. Factory assembled and tested, constructed with stranded wire, equipped with 8-

pin modular connectors and strain relief boots, and conforming to Category 6requirements and be 1000BASE-T compliant. Quantity and length as required.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. The Siemon Company.2. Leviton Voice and Data Division.3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.4. Or Approved Equal.

2.05 COPPER CABLE

A. Category 6 Horizontal Cable (Data):1. Comply with NFPA 70, NEMA WC 63.1, ANSI/ICEA S-80-576 and

performance characteristics in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 100 ohm. Provide four each individually twisted

pair, 24 AWG conductors, NFPA 70 CMG rated, with a blue PVC jacket. NFPA70 type CMP or CMR may be substituted for type CMG. Individual pairs shall beconstructed to contain a minimum two twists per foot per each pair. Overalldiameter of four pair cable shall not exceed 0.25 inches (6.32 mm). Ultimatebreaking strength shall be minimum 90 pounds (40.82 kg). Four pair cable shallwithstand a bend radius of one inch (25.4 mm) minimum at a temperature of



minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking. Conductors shall be color coded and polarized in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. Jacket sequentially marked at two-foot intervals. Shall conform to Category 6 requirements and be 1000BASE-T compliant.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Belden.b. CommScope.c. General Cable.d. Hubbell Premise Wiring.e. HCM (Hitachi Cable Manchester, NH)f. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that painted surfaces that will be covered by items of this Section have a primeand finish coat of paint.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Outside wire and cable shall be installed in ducts conforming to Section 33 71 19.Inside wire and cable shall be installed in conduit conforming to Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Cable Installation in Conduits and Ducts: During the installation of cables in conduitsand ducts, the cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tension shall not beexceeded. A suitable lubricating medium, harmless to the cable jacket, shall be usedwhen pulling cables into conduits, pipes or duct banks. No oil or grease substances notspecifically manufactured for cable installation will be permitted for such use on thisproject.

C. Cable Attachment and Support: Lengths of cables which are not installed in conduitsand are run inside equipment rooms shall be secured to cable trays or cable laddersusing nylon cable ties and attached to walls and backboards using nylon cable clampsor hangers or using a plastic wiring system such as manufactured by Panduit, orApproved Equal. Cables shall be attached or otherwise supported at intervals not toexceed 18 inches.

D. Strain Relief: Provide sufficient strain relief (slack) in all cables, cable conductors, andwiring to avoid stress on all cables, wires, and wiring connections.

E. Bends: Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than ten (10) times the diameter of thecable, or less than the manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius, duringinstallation or as finally installed.



F. Continuous Cable Sections: All cable runs shall be continuous without splicesbetween cable terminating locations.

G. All conduit and cable entrance openings into equipment rooms shall be sealed with apliable sealing compound after the cable is in place. Sealing compounds for rooms,walls, or other partitions shall be fire retardant per ASTM E 814. Sealing compoundshall be used to seal the area around the cable where the cable emerges from the end ofa conduit. All spare conduits shall be sealed or plugged in an approved manner.

H. Fire retardant pliable sealing compound shall be an intumescent firestop putty,reusable and repenetrable, conforming to ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, Nelson FSPFirestop Putty, or Approved Equal.

I. Conduit Bushings: At all transition points where a cable runs from inside a conduitinto a cable trough; or onto a cable tray or plywood backboard, the end of the conduitshall be fitted with a plastic bushing to prevent abrasive damage to the cable.

J. Cable Dress: Cable installed in trays or troughs shall be laid therein and not pulled inplace. Cables installed in trays and troughs shall have a minimum amount of crossoverand shall not be pulled tightly around bends.

K. Protection of Cables: Provide appropriate special protection for cables in areas wherethe cables are unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions, such as sharp corners onequipment. Cables damaged due to neglect by the Contractor, during installation, shallbe replaced by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. Cable Continuity and Integrity: All cables shall be continuous and without splicesbetween the specified termination locations. The cable termination points shall belocated within communication interface cabinets, equipment enclosures, splice cases,and equipment termination boxes as shown on the Drawings and as described in theSpecifications.

M. Cable and Wiring Identification: All cables shall be terminated in standard order,according to the EIA/TIA and ICEA color codes. Individual cables shall be identifiedat each cable termination with self-adhesive labels. All spare pairs in each cable shallbe terminated and identified.

N. All data and cables shall be installed in raceways as specified in Section 26 05 33.13.

O. Provide pull rope in all empty conduit runs with not less than 12 inches (30 cm) ofslack both ends.

P. Conduits shall be restricted to no more than two 90-degree bends or equivalentwithout a pull box.

Q. Maintain minimum bending radius of changes in direction as follows:1. 10 times diameter of 4” (100 mm) and larger conduits.2. 6 times diameter of smaller conduits.



R. Avoid bends in conduits from pull boxes.

S. Except as noted hereinafter for telecommunications cabling and pathways with coppermedia, keep conduit and cable tray minimum 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallelruns of electrical power equipment, flues, steam, and hot water pipes.

T. Telecommunications cabling and pathways with copper media shall be installed inaccordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interferencebetween power and telecommunications equipment.1. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the

usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.2. Pathways shall be installed in accordance with the following minimum clearance

distances of 4 feet (1.2 meters) from motors, generators, frequency converters,transformers, x-ray equipment or uninterruptible power system, 12 inches (300mm) from power conduits and cable systems, 5 inches (125 mm) from fluorescentor high frequency lighting system fixtures.

U. Install voice/data cabling and pathway system as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-Band -569-A. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated onplans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for coppercable terminations. Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch(12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide serviceloop on each end of the cable, 10 ft (3 m) in the telecommunications closet, 3.3 ft (1m) in the work area outlet for optical fiber and 12 inches (30 cm) for UTP. Do notexceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Providea device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds (110 N) pull tensionfor four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use onlylubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cableswith staples. For UTP cable bend radii shall not be less than four times the cablediameter.

V. All communications cables for the inside plant shall be terminated. Provide excesscable at both ends of horizontal cable to facilitate future re-termination. Provide allcross-connecting hardware and jumper cables, including 100% connection capabilityof all patch cords.1. Terminate all copper data cabling on Category 6 type data patch panels with

jacks. Terminate all fiber optic cabling using ST connectors on data patch panels.Data outlets shall be activated with cross-connect jumper cables between the

backbone cable patch panels and the horizontal cable patch panels. Patch panelsand equipment shall be rack mounted. Racks shall have a minimum of 39 inches(1 meter) clearance at front and back. Racks shall be permanently bolt anchoredto the floor per manufacturer’s recommendations.

W. Provide outlet box and jack at each voice/data outlet. Depth of outlet boxes shall besufficient to allow manufacturer’s recommended conductor bend radii.



X. Terminate UTP cable in accordance with ANSl/TIA/EIA-568-B and wiringconfiguration as specified.

Y. Telecommunications Grounding: Per ANSI/TIA/EIA standards, NFPA 70, andSection 26 05 26. Grounding conductors shall be compatible with raceways. Protectall grounding and bonding conductors from physical damage.

Z. Provide identification and labeling of communications cables, outlets and equipmentper ANSI/TIA/EIA-606.1. All cables shall be labeled at least at each end of each cable section, using cable

tags or labels. Inside plant cables shall be labeled using self adhesive waterprooflabels; outside plant cables shall be labeled using approved waterproof cable tags.

2. Proposed Plan:a. Each work area outlet shall be labeled with the Rack, Patch Panel, Port

Number (i.e. Rack No. 01, Patch Panel No. 03, Port No. 14 would be labeledas 01-03-14)

b. Each Patch Panel port shall be labeled with the Room and Jack Number (i.e.Room 127, Jack Number 016 would be labeled as 127-016)

3. A cable labeling table shall be developed based on this project. The table shall besubmitted for approval by the Owner prior to cable installation.

4. Cable Tags:a. Attach to cable using two nylon cable ties through holes in the tag.b. Use pre-printed plastic tags marked with a durable, abrasion resistant,

waterproof ink.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After wiring, vacuum out interior and wipe clean of all foreign material.

B. After painting in areas, remove all over paint, drips and splashes.


A. Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests inaccordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.

B. Inspection: Visually inspect cabling jacket materials for UL or third-partycertification markings. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for ULor third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations intelecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for tip and ringpin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance withANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, wallplates,connectors, and patch panels.

C. Perform testing after cables are terminated, but not cross connected.

D. Verification Tests:



1. UTP copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens,intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors andshield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of shorting bars in connectionblocks. Test cables after terminated but not cross connected. Perform 1MHz to100MHz scan attenuation test for Category 6 systems installations.

E. Performance Tests:1. Category 6 Links (Voice, Data): Perform UTP permanent link tests in accordance

with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. Tests shall include wire map, length, attenuation,NEXT, Power Sum NEXT, ELFEXT, Power Sum ELFEXT, return loss,propagation delay and delay skew. Each and every link shall be tested and shallpass the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for Category 6. Any failing linkshall be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed by anew test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. Thefinal and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in the test resultsdocumentation.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. During painting, mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, and all items not to be painted.


END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 1

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Verify requirements with Jurisdictional authorities, i.e.: Insurance authority orUnderwriter, Fire Department or Marshal, or Building Department. Provide systemcomplete, functional and acceptable to Jurisdictions without penalty of any type to theinsurance premium rate. This Contractor shall be completely responsible for allaspects of coordination with other sections of these specifications and drawings. Nochange will be issued for lack of coordination or lack of verification of requirementsof Jurisdictional Authorities.

B. Related Sections1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems3. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems4. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) Approval.

D. Local Code requirements where applicable.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representativeof the FACP manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required forthis Project. Installer shall be able to produce, upon request, references and proof offive (5) years minimum experience in the installation of systems of comparable sizeand performance to that specified.

1.04 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify requirements with jurisdictional authorities (i.e. Insurance Carrier orUnderwriter, Fire Department or Marshal, or local Building Code Department). Thiscontractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and functional system,acceptable to the jurisdictions involved.



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, product data and calculations to the AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction, Fire Department/Marshal, Owner’s Insurance Underwriter and/orother regulatory agency, and obtain approvals prior to submission to Engineer forreview. Include approval documentation with submission to Engineer. Engineer willnot review submittals without written documentation of approval by AuthoritiesHaving Jurisdiction.

B. Provide complete submittals, which shall include schematic wiring drawings of thecontrol panel showing internal and external control panel wiring and all devices.Floor plans/device layout drawings, sequence of operation, annunciator wiringschematics, battery calculations, and specification sheets for all equipment, all devicesshall be provided. Drawings shall be done on full size sheets and to scale (1/8”=1’-0”minimum). Partial submittals will not be accepted.


A. General: UL and FM listed. Complete, zoned, non-coded, addressable,microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm system with manual and automaticalarm initiation, intelligent analog addressable smoke detectors, and automatic alarmverification for alarms initiated by certain smoke detectors as indicated.

B. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm serviceonly.

C. System connections for alarm-initiation and alarm-indicating circuits: Class B(Style 4) wiring.

1.07 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEM

A. Total acceptance of the system will only be made after the required tests, completerecord document package and the instruction period have been provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for the fire alarm system:1. Components from the existing system manufacturer.

2.02 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General requirements:1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal.2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation

to restore them to normal operation.3. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated.

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



4. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation.5. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.6. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type with duct-mounted housing.

a. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by themanufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installationconditions where applied. Sampling tube shall be sloped downward fromthe detector housing. Sampling tube holes shall be oriented toward the airstream in the duct.

b. Smoke Detector: Shall be photoelectric type with UL listed air velocityrange of 300-4,000 feet per minute.

c. Relay Fan Shutdown: Isolated auxiliary contact, rated to interrupt fanmotor-control circuit.1) Wiring between aux. contact and ATC system provided by Mechanical

Contractor.7. Exterior Mounted, Watertight Duct Smoke Detectors:

a. Similar to Duct Smoke Detectors above but with the following additionalfeatures.

b. Housing and Cover: NEMA Type 4, UL Listed for non-hazardous indoorand outdoor locations; constructed of UV Resistant material. The housingshall be suitable for use in either a rectangular or a square configuration, asappropriate for each specific application.

c. Operating Temperature Range: -4 ⁰F to +158 ⁰F.d. Operating Humidity Range: 0% to 95%, non-condensing.e. Two (2) DPDT Form-C relay contacts.f. Built-in short circuit protection.g. Capable of providing a Trouble signal in the event that the front cover is

removed.

2.03 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES

A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readilyvisible, and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light isconnected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp isflush mounted in a single gang plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identificationplate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating thesignal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flowswitches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream fromthe water-flow switch.

B. Mounting: Mounted in ceiling/wall in close proximity to smoke detector.



2.04 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplexsystem address for alarm-initiating devices (with normally open contacts).

2.05 WIRE

A. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 degreesC, color-coded insulation.1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.3. Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended

by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. SCOPE1. The system shall electrically supervise all wiring between the control panel and

all initiating and indicating devices.

B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.2. Exact location of all automatic detectors shall be as directed by the manufacturer's

representative.3. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish duct smoke detectors, and the Mechanical

Contractor shall install them. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all firealarm wiring and interconnections. All power and/or control wiring required forthe operation of smoke dampers or for the shutdown of air handling units shall beprovided by the Mechanical Contractor.a. Mount exterior mounted, watertight duct smoke detector housings with

conduit entries facing downwards. Utilize liquidtight flexible metal conduitand fittings for final connections to detector housings.

4. The fire detection and alarm system shall be operational at all times, except thatwhen work is being performed on the system during normal working hours onlythose portions actually undergoing modification shall be out of service. Alldetectors in the construction area shall be bagged with plastic bags during theworking hours and de-bagged after working hours.

C. WIRING INSTALLATION1. All alarm initiating devices and supervisory initiating devices shall be connected

on Class B (Style 4) two (2) wire Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). Unsupervisedwiring (point wires) shall not be permitted. T-tapping and parallel branch circuitwiring shall be permitted on the addressable SLCs, in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations.



2. All alarm indicating devices shall be connected on Class B two (2) wireelectrically supervised circuits and on a minimum of two active circuits.

3. Wiring to initiating and supervisory devices and to fire alarm annunciators shallbe with two- (2) conductor, twisted solid copper UL listed fire alarm system wiresubject to manufacturer’s recommendations (#16 AWG minimum).

4. Wiring to alarm indicating devices shall be with two- (2) conductor twisted solidcopper UL listed jacketed fire alarm system wire subject to manufacturer'srecommendations (#14 AWG minimum).

5. All other wiring shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer.6. No splicing of wires is permitted except on terminal blocks in annunciators,

control panels or properly labeled terminal cabinets as shown on the drawings.The use of wire nuts or similar type devices is not permitted. All devices shallhave terminals for each wiring connection. No splicing of any type shall bepermitted in pull boxes, to include crimp terminals.

3.02 TESTS

A. Prior to the acceptance test of the project by the Owner, a factory-trained technicianfrom the equipment supplier shall inspect, test and adjust the complete Fire AlarmSystem according to NFPA-72, including, but not limited to, the following:1. Test the sensitivity of each smoke detector with a manufacturer's detector test set

(the fire alarm control panel shall be UL listed for this purpose). Retain a printedrecorded of all firing voltages. Correlate firing voltage records to the deviceaddresses as shown on the as-built drawings.

2. Check all end of line devices for proper installation and polarity.

B. The Owner’s acceptance test will only be made after the above tests are made and thecopy of the NFPA 72 Test Report/Certificate results is turned over to the Owner forevaluation. The Owner's test will be the same as the above Contractor’s tests.Demonstrate to the Owner that no wire nuts or similar devices have been used in thesystem. Perform these tests in the presence of the Owner or the Owner'srepresentative.

3.03 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS

A. Repair or replace at his expense any defective devices, equipment or wiring andperform additional testing required to demonstrate that the system is in fullcompliance with the drawings and specifications.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: Clearing, grubbing, and stripping topsoil from work areasto limits indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Requirements: Exercise necessary means and methods to controldust on site during performance of work. No work shall be started until all E&Scontrol devices are in place as specified in the E&S plans.

B. Burning: No on-site burning will be permitted.

C. Protection:1. Preserve structures and objects, including trees and shrubs located outside

the designated limits of disturbance. The means and methods used forprotection are discretionary.

2. Use required protective measures during felling of trees and debris removalto provide for safety of employees and others.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to performance of actual work, carefully inspect the entire Site and locatestructures, objects, and plant life designated to be preserved.

3.02 PERFORMANCE

A. Implement erosion control measures prior to and during performance of work onthis Section as specified on the Drawings.


Contract No. HCC21002 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2

B. Where embankment is intended, clear and grub area to a depth not less than 6inches below existing ground.

C. Where landscaping work is intended, clear and grub the area to a depth not lessthan 8 inches below the existing ground.

D. Stump Removal:1. Remove stumps and roots completely.2. Backfill stump holes in maximum 8-inch layers with fill material to a density

of the surrounding earth material.

E. Disposal:1. Burnable debris can be disposed of along with non-burnable debris off site in

a lawful manner.2. Dispose of clearing and grubbing debris at a site having current approval for

conducting solid waste disposal.3. Remove clearing and grubbing debris accumulations daily.4. When clearing and grubbing beyond normal working hours, do not allow

clearing and grubbing debris to accumulate for more than 48 hours.5. Combustible material may be reduced to chips of 1/2 inch maximum size.

Chips can be disposed of in areas where erosion control is required, as asubstitute for straw mulch.

6. Do not bury stumps, branches or brush in fill areas.

3.03 STRIPPING

A. Stripping consists of segregating approved topsoil encountered in the excavationof the project and stockpiling for future use.

B. Mow or otherwise remove heavy grass, weeds, or other vegetation over areasbefore stripping. Remove topsoil from the area prior to performance of the normalexcavation. Remove topsoil to its full depth, but adjust equipment and methods toavoid lifting subsoil or other unsuitable material.

C. Strip the topsoil from an area approved by the Engineer, and keep it separate fromother excavations and stockpile at locations within the Right-of-Way or propertylines.

D. Do not sell the topsoil.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTH MOVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section covers earthwork and shall include clearing and preparation of the site;removal and disposal of all debris; excavation as required; construction of fills andgrading, trenching for utilities, and other appurtenant work. The Contractor shallfurnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform allexcavation, dewatering, backfill, trenching, compaction and grading. The principalitems are soil excavation, placement and compaction of backfill, trenching, grading,dewatering of excavations, seeding and site cleanup.

B. With reference to the terms and conditions of the construction standard for excavationset forth in the OSHA “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”, ChapterXVII of Title 29, CFR, Part 1926, the Contractors shall act upon all pertinent mattersof the work of this section.

C. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shallnot be done except by permission of the Engineer. No fill, backfill, or embankmentmaterials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow, or icebe placed in any backfill, fill, or embankment areas.

D. Related Sections:1. Site Clearing: Section 31 10 00.

1.02 SUBMITTAL

A. The Contractor shall provide documents showing the source of all backfill material.The document shall also demonstrate that backfill material meet specification.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. ASTM D 698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil using Standard Effort.2. ASTM D 1556, Test Method for Density of Soil In Place by the Sand-Cone

Method.3. ASTM D 1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.4. ASTM 1586, Method for Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of Soils.5. ASTM D 2167, Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by

the Rubber Balloon Method.



6. ASTM D 2487, Test Method for Classification of Soils for EngineeringPurposes.

B. Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration, StandardSpecifications for Construction and Materials, latest edition.


A. The Contractor shall exercise due care to ensure that procurement, storage, andplacement of materials to be used at the site shall comply with requirements,specifications and standards set out herein. The Contractor may have tests andinspections performed by qualified personnel or independent testing services with theapproval of Owner. Material that is determined by Owner to be unsuitable will bereplaced by the contractor at no extra cost to Owner.

B. Structures, landscaping and other site improvements damaged by settlement, shall beremoved and replaced at no cost to Owner.

C. Owner shall be the on-site arbiter and judge of the acceptability of the work done.

D. Applicable Criteria, Tests, and Standards1. Unsuitable Material: Material deemed unsuitable for reuse on-site by the

Owner’s personnel and all material delivered for fill which cannot besatisfactorily compacted, shall be hauled off-site and disposed of in accordancewith applicable federal, state and local laws. Satisfactory soil materials aredefined as those complying with ASTM D2587 soil classification groups andshall be as approved by Owner and the Engineer. Unsuitable soil materials aredefined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups CH,OL, MH, OH, and PT. Material excavated from the site would be allowed to beused for backfilling, if deemed suitable by the Owner. If there is need to go offsite for additional backfill material, it shall be clean borrow material.

2. Backfilling against masonry is not permitted until seven days after completionof section. Backfilling is not permitted until curing is completed and theconcrete has achieved 80 percent of the specified compressive strength. Thebed for backfill shall be built up in horizontal layers so that at all times there ishorizontal berm of uniformly compacted material behind the structure for adistance equal to the height of the remaining wall to be backfilled, exceptinsofar as undisturbed material protrudes into this area. Jetting of fills or otherhydraulic methods involving liquid or semi liquid pressure within the berm areais prohibited.

3. Cleanup: The Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, temporary materials,and any waste excavated materials from the project site and dispose of inappropriate manner according to all applicable laws and regulations.

4. Compaction Methods: The backfill will be compacted in 8-inch lifts using amechanical method of compaction. Backfilled areas shall be compacted to 95%of the modified proctor.



E. Field in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 orASTM D 2167. A minimum of one density test per lift shall be performed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EARTH BACKFILL

A. All earth backfill shall be obtained from an off-site borrow area or from excavatedsoil associated with the site. The earth backfill shall be uncontaminated, free fromroots, trash, debris, rocks greater than 3 inch and other deleterious materials; and shallbe acceptable to Owner. Fill material shall be free of refuse, vegetable matter, frozenmaterial, and other objectionable material. Excavated material meeting requirementsstipulated herein shall be used, when approved by Owner. Otherwise the Contractorshall excavate, haul and place material from other approved sources. Fill materialshall be at a moisture content which will permit compaction to the density specified.During compaction, moisture content shall be maintained within 2 percentage point ofoptimum moisture content.

2.02 TOPSOIL

A. All areas disturbed by construction activities shall be restored, topsoiled and seeded.

2.03 WATER FOR COMPACTION

A. Under no circumstances shall the excavation be flooded with water for compaction.

2.04 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall use appropriate compaction equipment to satisfactorily compactbackfill materials to form a dense fill.

B. The mechanical compactor shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions and recommendations.

2.05 MOISTURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. A typical spray nozzle for applying water shall be of a type and quality adequate forthe work, shall not leak, and shall be equipped with approved sprinkler or nozzledevices to assure uniform application of water. Equipment for mixing and drying outmaterial shall include blades, discs, or other approved equipment.

2.06 Underground Metallic Detection Tapes: Underground Warning tapes to be marked with a continuous two-line message in bold lettering: CAUTION BURIED “NAME OF UTILITY” LINE BELOW. Printing to be black on 6-inch-wide, 0.035-inch-thick detection tape conforming to latest APWA and AASHTO specifications. Tape to be Catalog Style No. 37230 as supplied by Seton Identification Products or approved equal. Bury tape over



centerline of pipe approximately 1.5 feet below finished grade. Provide detection tape for the following pipelines and utilities as installed or encountered:

Electric: Red Water: Blue

2.07 PIPE BEDDING

A. Class A Bedding consisting of AASHTO No. 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Site Preparation1. All sites to be occupied by permanent construction or embankments shall be

cleared of all logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings, and other objectionablematerials and debris.

2. Subgrades for fills shall be cleaned and stripped of all surface vegetation, sod,and organic topsoil. All waste materials shall be removed from the site anddisposed of by and at the expense of the Contractor.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall comply with OSHA regulations for trench cut and slope stability.Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to beperformed therein.

B. Classification of Excavated Materials1. Excavation work shall include the removal and subsequent handling of all

materials excavated or otherwise removed in the performance of the work,regardless of the type, character, composition, or condition thereof.

2. Excavated granular soil determined as suitable by Owner shall be used asbackfill. Soil and other material excavated and classified as unsuitable forbackfill material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractorshall load, transport and dispose of such material off-site according to allapplicable federal, state and local regulations. The Contractor shall also restorethe excavation site, structures, and working utilities to their pre-excavationcondition or better as specified herein.

C. Preservation of Trees1. No trees shall be removed outside excavated or filled areas unless their removal

is authorized by Owner. Trees left standing shall be adequately protected frompermanent damage by construction operations.

D. Unauthorized Excavation



1. Except where otherwise authorized, indicated or specified, all materialsexcavated outside of the approved excavation shall be replaced, by and at theexpense of the Contractor.

E. Dewatering1. The Contractor shall prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from

flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.Water should not be allowed to accumulate in excavations. Any water in theexcavations should be removed in a timely manner to prevent softening offoundation bottom and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades andfoundations. Provide and maintain pumps, suction and discharge lines and otherdewatering system to convey water away from excavations.

2. The Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches andother diversions outside excavation limits to convey rainwater and waterremoved from excavations to collecting or run-off areas.

3.03 EARTHFILLS

A. Grading shall be constructed to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.

3.04 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Suitable soil excavated shall be used as backfill materials for excavations.

3.05 PLACING, SPREADING, AND COMPACTING FILL MATERIALS

A. All fill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8inches in uncompacted thickness. Each lift shall be compacted to at least 95 percentof maximum dry density. Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughlymixed during the spreading to obtain uniformity of material in each layer. After eachlayer has been placed, mixed, and spread evenly, it shall be compacted by theContractor. Compaction shall be continuous over the entire area. Similar compactionprocedure shall be utilized for subsequent layers.

B. Contractor personnel shall not enter excavation that is deeper than 5 feet. Mechanicalcompaction shall be used to compact the back fill.

C. The material in each layer shall be wetted or dried as required and thoroughly mixedto ensure uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. Each layer shall bethoroughly compacted to 95 percent of maximum density in accordance withAASHTO T180 at a moisture content rating from – 2 to +2 of the optimum moisturecontent as determined by ASTM D1557. If the material fails to meet the densityspecified, compaction or moisture control methods shall be altered.

3.06 TRENCHING FOR UTILITIES



A. Trench Width and Depth: For full depth of trench, maximum trench width is avertical plane as specified in Table A. If sheeting is required, following Table Adimensions apply to the inside face of sheeting.

TABLE A

Diameter of Pipe Maximum Trench Width

(Outside Diameter of Pipe at Barrel Plus)

3 through 36 inches 24 inches

Depth: Excavate below planned bottom of pipe, 4 inches in earth and 8 inches in rock. Excavate rock for manhole, chamber, catch basin or other structure installations 1 foot outside exterior lines of structure walls and to a depth of outside bottom.

B. Perform trench backfilling and backfilling excavations for other in line structures bymethods resulting in thorough compaction of backfill material without displacementof grade and alignment of pipeline and its appurtenances and minimum settlement ofbackfilled material. Displacement of pipeline and settlement of backfill will beconsidered evidence of improper workmanship or inclusion of unsuitable backfillmaterials, or both, and will require regrading and realigning pipeline and removingand recompacting settled material at no expense to Owner. Following pipe bedding,piping, and inline structure installation, backfill trenches in following manner:1. Unpaved Areas: Backfill trenches to a height at least 1 foot above top of outside

barrel of pipe with Select Backfill material placed in 4-inch layers. If vibratorycompaction equipment is used, lifts may be 8 inches. Carefully place thisbackfill in a manner not to damage or disturb pipe. Backfill remainder of trenchwith Approved Backfill compacted in 8-inch layers to bottom of topsoil.Replace topsoil to approximate depth of existing, as final refill operation andcrown to height required by Owner. Maintain crowned surface as required byOwner, during guarantee period.

C. Compacting: During course of backfilling and compacting work, Owner may, at anylocation or depth of trench, require Contractor to perform tests to determine whethercompaction operations are sufficient to meet specified requirements. Trenchexcavation and backfill on State Highways is subject to inspection by representativesof Maryland Department of Transportation (MDT). Perform work in accordance withrequirements of that department without additional payment regardless ifrequirements entail more labor or services than methods specified here. Similarinspection and requirements apply to township and borough street excavations.Compact trench backfill as follows:1. Solidly tamp each layer of required backfill around pipeline with proper

tamping tools made specially for this purpose.



2. Thoroughly compact aggregate backfill with a vibratory compactor of type andsize satisfactory to Owner and MDT. Compacting of aggregate backfill bypuddling or jetting is not permitted.

3. Use mechanical tampers to compact backfill materials in trench refill operationsto produce a density at bottom of each layer of not less than 95 percent ofmaximum density obtained at optimum moisture content as determined byASTM D698. Perform field determinations of density, in accordance withASTM D2922. Make a minimum of two field determinations for each lift ofbackfill for every 200 ft. length of trench.

4. From a point one foot above top of pipe to subgrade of paving (or below surfacewhere paving is not required), compact backfill by tamping. Use of Hydra-Hammer for compacting backfill in trenches is prohibited.

3.07 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

A. Except where specified in other sections, all material not used shall become theproperty of the Contractor and shall be properly removed from the site.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Assume responsibility for injury or damage resulting from lack of trench maintenanceduring guarantee period. If trench surfaces are not satisfactorily maintained or repairsbegun within seven days after written notice from Owner, repairs may be made byOwner and cost charged against Contractor.

3.09 CLEANUP

A. After trenches and other excavations are backfilled and work completed, removesurplus excavated materials, rubbish, or other materials from the work site. Disposeof materials off site in a lawful manner at no additional price to the Owner.

B. Furnish and place topsoil, fertilize and seed grassed areas, within and outside Rights-of-Way affected by construction. Reseed and re-fertilize areas that fail to show auniform stand of grass. Water, mow, rake, weed, and otherwise maintain grass untilfinal acceptance of Contract.

END SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 31 25 00 - 1

SECTION 31 25 00

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes the services required to implement sediment and erosioncontrol at the construction site. The work shall include, but is not limited to,construction and maintenance of silt fences, berms and dikes, temporary diversionbarriers, sediment traps, siltation ponds, temporary vegetation covers and othermeasures to prevent and control erosion and sedimentation. Related works aretopsoil, seeding, and mulching; earthwork, excavation, protection and backfill; andclearing and grubbing.

B. All work shown on the Drawings and specified herein shall be performed inaccordance with applicable State, County, and local ordinances.

C. The Contractor shall use the 2011 “Maryland Standards and Specifications for SoilErosion and Sediment Control” as the basis for the Sediment and Erosion control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

A. Geotextile Fabric Class C1. Geotextiles shall conform to the class specified in the Contract documents. The

geotextile shall be manufactured from fibers consisting of long chain syntheticpolymers, composed of minimum 85 percent by weight of polyolephins,polyesters or polyamides. The geotextile shall be able to resist deteriorationfrom ultraviolet exposure. Geotextile used in the construction of silt fence shallcontain sufficient amounts of ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to providea minimum of 12 months of expected usable construction life at a temperaturerange of 0 to 120 F.

2. All values specified are minimum or maximum roll values.3. Geotextile shall have a 0.010 cm/sec minimum permeability when tested in

conformance with D 4491, and an apparent minimum elongation of 20 percentwhen tested for conformance with the grab tensile strength requirementsspecified below. Geotextile shall also conform to the following additionalrequirements:



Maximum Apparent Opening size (mm)

Grab Tensile Strength lb (N) min

Minimum Burst Strength psi (Mpa)

0.30 200 (890) 320 (2.2)

B. Sewing of the geotextile will be allowed provided it conforms to the following:1. Seams shall be either “j” or “butterfly” type and shall utilize a lock stitch2. Seams shall conform to the tensile strength requirements for the geotextile when

tested across the seam.3. The thread for seaming shall be of equal or greater durability than the geotextile

itself.

C. Stone: As specified on the Contract Drawings

2.02 SILT FENCE

A. As shown on the Contract Drawings

2.03 SAND BAGS


2.04 SEEDING


2.05 MULCHING


PART 3 EXECUTION


A. All measures shall comply with the 2011 Maryland Standard and Specifications forSoil Erosion and Sediment Control. The Contractor shall conduct an Erosion andSediment Control meeting with DGS prior to start of construction.

3.02 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall follow the sequence of construction specified on the erosion andsediment control plans included in the Contract Drawings. In the event that thissequence requires modifications for any reasons, the Contractor shall notify DGS andMDE for approval.



3.03 EROSION CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall schedule his operation and perform the work in such a manner asto minimize soil erosion, from whatever cause, due to his operations. All constructionwork shall be conducted with a minimum disturbance of the affected land area.Erosion control measures shall be placed prior to, or as the first step, in grading. Alltemporary earth berms, diversions, and silt dams shall be machine compacted, seededand mulched for temporary vegetation cover immediately after being constructed. Alldisturbed areas shall be seeded and mulched for temporary or other approvedvegetation and mulched within 15 days after backfilling. All cut and fill slopes shallbe seeded and mulched within 10 days of completion of grading.

B. Any area denuded after November first shall be seeded with oats, Abruzzri rye, orother approved vegetation and mulched within 15 days after completion of grading.

C. No disturbed area will be denuded for more than 60 calendar days. Excavated soilsshall be stockpiled on a polyethylene plastic and covered with polyethylene plastic.The Plastic covered stockpile shall be secured in place with sand bags.

3.04 SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to perform work in such a manner as toprevent the washing of any soil, silt, or debris into any adjacent watercourse or ontoadjacent properties.

B. Sediment control measures as shown on the drawings and specified herein shall beinstalled as the first step in construction and shall not be removed until permanentcover is completely established and stabilized, and with the authorization of DGS andthe Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE) sediment control inspector.

3.05 STOCKPILED SOILS

A. Soil excavated during the grading activities shall be stockpiled by the Contractorwithin the limit of disturbance. Limited area is available and the Contractor mustplan earthwork activities accordingly. Waste and demolition materials must beremoved from the project site on a daily basis. Care must be taken by the Contractornot to litter the environment during the removal of the soil from the grading area tostockpile location.

3.06 STORAGE OF STOCKPILED SOILS

A. The excavated soil and construction debris shall be stockpiled on heavy plasticsheeting (30-mil minimum thickness). The stockpiled soils shall be completelycovered with a second layer of plastic anchored securely to protect against wind,precipitation, surface water run-on and runoff. Where several sheets of the plastic arenecessary to cover or line the stockpiles, the edges shall overlap a minimum of 2 ft.



The Contractor shall inspect, on a daily basis, the liners and covers for defects and damage. Should any tears, defects, or other damages found, the Contractor shall replace or repair the damaged plastic sheets at no addition cost to the Owner.

3.07 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall install and maintain all sediment erosion and sediment controlmeasures as specified on the Contract Drawings even when the project is temporarilyclosed down. As part of the maintenance activities, the Contractor shall on a dailybasis inspect the sediment and erosion control measures. Any damage to physicalmeasures shall be repaired as soon as possible with temporary repair and protectionfrom further damage completed by the close of the working day.

3.08 REMOVAL

A. When the construction is stabilized, the Contractor shall remove the sediment controlmeasure with the prior written approval of the MDE Sediment Control Inspector andpermanently stabilize the areas disturbed by this removal.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Paving or surfacing of access roads and parking areas including connection to

existing paved areas.2. Utility trench repair.

B. Related Sections:1. Trenching: Section 02324.2. Excavation and Fill: Section 02315.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Maryland Department of Transportation (MDT), State Highway Administration,Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, latest addition.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Street: The term Street as used in this Section is understood to mean a street,highway, avenue, boulevard, road, alley, lane, driveway, parking lot, or other areaused as a way for vehicles.

B. Specified Maximum Trench Width: Applicable maximum trench width specified inSection 02324.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:1. Submit traffic paint material manufacturer's technical information, including

paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed.

B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:1. Design Data: Submit job mix formula for approval.2. Certificates: Furnish certification from bituminous and aggregate producer

attesting that materials conform to requirements of Maryland Department ofTransportation Specifications.


A. Producer Qualifications:



1. Maintain quality of work by using products of a qualified bituminous concreteproducer and qualified plant operating workers.

2. Use products of a bituminous concrete bulk producer regularly engaged inproduction of hot-mix, hot-laid bituminous concrete conforming to referencedstandards.

3. Use materials conforming to requirements of Maryland Department ofTransportation Specifications.

B. Workmen Qualifications:1. Provide at least one person thoroughly trained and experienced in skills

required, readily understands design and is completely familiar with applicationof bituminous concrete paving work. This person is required to be presentduring progress of bituminous concrete paving work and direct performance ofwork.

2. Employ personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in skills required foractual finishing of bituminous concrete surfaces and operation of equipment.


A. Use means necessary to ensure safe storage and use of paint materials and prompt andsafe disposal of waste. Store paint products protected from weather when productsmay be affected by freezing.


A. Environmental Requirements:1. Dust Control: Provide effective dust control by sprinkling water, by the use of

calcium chloride, or by other methods as approved by the Engineer. Use dustcontrol measures where and when, and in a manner as required by the Engineer.

2. Weather Limitations: Terminate placement of bituminous concrete surfacecourses of permanent pavement between October 15 to 31, and do not resumeplacement prior to April 1 to 15. Interim days between date limits may be usedfor placement as determined by Engineer depending on weather conditions.a. Do not install aggregate courses when ambient temperature is below or is

expected to fall below freezing.b. Do not use aggregate containing frost nor place aggregate courses on

frozen subgrade.c. Do not place bituminous concrete surface courses of permanent pavement

when ambient temperature is 40 degrees F. or lower, or when temperatureof substrate, pavement base or binder is 40 degrees F. or lower.

3. Weather Limitations: Do not place HMA paving mixtures between October 31and April 1 unless permitted otherwise in writing by the Engineer.a. HMA Base Course: Do not place base course when surfaces are wet or

when the temperature of either the air or the surface on which the mixtureis to be placed is 35 degrees or lower.



b. HMA Wearing Course: Do not place base course when surfaces are wetor when the temperature of either the air or the surface on which themixture is to be placed is 40 degrees or lower.

4. Paint Application Limitations: Adhere to manufacturer's data on air and surfacetemperature limits and relative humidity during application and curing ofcoatings.a. Do not spray apply paint when wind velocity is above 15 mph.b. Schedule painting work to avoid dust and airborne contaminants.c. Apply paint during daylight hours only.

B. Time Requirements:1. Streets: Place permanent replacement of street roadway and shoulder pavement

as soon as trenches have been acceptably backfilled; however, in eventpermanent pavement cannot be placed due to weather limitations specifiedpreviously, provide a temporary pavement. No separate or additional paymentallowed for furnishing, placing and removing temporary pavement.

C. Protection:1. Protect and maintain cut pavement edges until permanent replacement pavement

is placed.2. Protect paved surfaces outside of pavement removal limits. Repair pavement

outside removal limits damaged by constructing operations at no additionalexpense to Owner.

3. Use means necessary to protect and maintain pavement materials before, during,and after installation to protect installed work and materials of other trades.

4. In event of damage or failure of work of this Section within Guarantee Period,immediately make repairs and replacements. Failure to perform maintenance orrepairs within three days after notice from Owner or Engineer, entitles Owner toperform maintenance or repairs and deduct cost from moneys due or to becomedue Contractor under this Contract.

5. Assume responsibility for injury or damage resulting from lack of requiredmaintenance or repairs during Guarantee Period. Indemnify and save harmlessOwner and Engineer from loss by reason of suit or action at law, based uponoccurrence or omission occurring during this period.

D. Completion Certificate not issued until work of this Section is completed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAVING MATERIALS

A. Subbase: Graded Aggregate – Base conforming to MDSHA Section 901.

B. HMA Base Course: Superpave PG 64-22, 160 Gyrations conforming to MDSHASection 504.



C. HMA Surface Course: Superpave PG 64-22, 160 Gyrations conforming to MDSHASection 504.

2.02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: PG 64-22.

B. Bituminous Tack Coat: Class AE-T Emulsified Asphalt.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Calcium Chloride: Conforming to MDSHA standards.

B. Traffic Paint: Zone Marking Traffic Paint as manufactured by:1. M. A. Bruder & Sons.2. Or Equal.

C. Pavement Sealer Coating: Provide a coal tar compound modified with an anioniclatex emulsion and emulsified into a homogenous sealant type coating for completecoverages of paved surfaces.1. Pavement sealer shall meet or exceed the requirements of Federal Specification

RP-355e and MIL-C-15203C.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. SealMaster, Inc.; SealMaster Coal Tar Sealer with Top Tuff LatexAdditive.

b. Or Equal.3. Mixing Water: Use potable water free from harmful soluble salts for mixing the

sealer slurry. Water temperature at time of mixing shall have a minimumtemperature of 50 degrees F.

2.04 PAVEMENT MIXES

A. Composition of Mixtures: Provide binder and wearing course mixture compositionconforming to requirements of MDSHA Category 500.1. Establish a job-mix formula prior to beginning work without changing during

progress of work except with Engineer's approval. Job-mixing tolerances not topermit acceptance of materials with gradations falling outside master ranges setin specified SHA Sections.

2. Approved job-mix formula to fall within specification limits and be suitable forlayer thickness and other conditions prevailing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Subsurface Preparation: Perform roadway grading and finish rolling just prior tosubbase installation as previously specified in Section 02315.



B. Pavement Removal:1. Cut paving to neat lines equidistant from centerline of trench.2. Cut paving with a mechanical saw.3. Remove pavement to a width equal to Specified Maximum Trench Width

specified in Section 02324, plus 2 feet and not less than l foot on each side oftrench.

4. For areas of failing pavement, remove pavement as marked by the Engineer.5. In addition to requirements specified above, where street roadway paving

consists of a concrete base course and a bituminous surface course, removebituminous surface course for a width equal to Specified Maximum TrenchWidth plus 3 feet and not less than 18 inches on each side of trench width asexcavated.

6. If pavement is removed or disturbed for a greater width without writtenauthorization of Engineer, Owner will require Contractor to replace greaterwidth pavement without compensation.

7. Remove temporary paving and backfill to required depth for installation ofpermanent replacement pavement. No additional payment will be made forremoving temporary pavement and backfill.

8. Milling of asphalt paving shall be performed in accordance with therequirements of Section 508 – Milling Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement, of theMaryland Department of Transportation, State Highway AdministrationStandard Specifications for Construction and Materials.

C. Subgrade: Backfill and compact trenches in accordance with requirements of Section02324.

D. Perform paving only after site grading, and trenching, have been completed andaccepted by Engineer.

E. Moisture content of subgrade material at time of compaction is not to be more than 2percentage points above optimum moisture content.

F. At joints between existing pavements and new paving work, cut and trim edges ofexisting pavements as approved by Engineer. Provide an application of BituminousTack Coat at locations where new bituminous paving joins existing bituminouspaving.

G. Prior to traffic line painting, clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, grease or other matter.

3.02 INSTALLATION (NEW PAVING)

A. Subbase Construction: Install Subbase to after compaction thickness indicated onDrawings.

B. Base Course Construction: Install Base Course to after compaction thicknessindicated on Drawings.



C. Bituminous Pavement Construction: Method of preparing mixture, placing mixture,compaction, and protection of in place bituminous concrete for paving to comply withMDSHA Category 500. Minimum thickness of bituminous concrete base course, andsurface course is indicated on Drawings.

3.03 INSTALLATION (OVERLAY PAVING)

A. Limits of Overlay Paving:1. Provide overlay pavement to limits indicated on the Drawings, and to such

additional limits as required by the Engineer.

B. Overlay Paving, HMA Wearing Course:1. Use materials, composition of mixture and methods to construct the superpave

asphalt overlay paving conforming to all applicable requirements of MDSHACategory 500 for HMA Wearing Course.

2. The minimum thickness of the overlay pavement after compaction to be asindicated on Drawings. The contours of the surface of the overlay pavementmay be the same as the existing street pavement.

3. Install a leveling course of HMA Base Course material in depressions ifnecessary.a. Include the cost of this extra thickness in the cost of the overlay paving.

There will be no additional payment made to the Contractor for installingany leveling course.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. General:1. Strictly follow paint manufacturer's label instructions for mixing, thinning,

proper spreading rate and drying time. Do not apply film thickness less thanmanufacturer's recommendations or exceed manufacturer's area coverage pergallon recommendations.

2. If material has thickened or needs diluted for application, build up coating tofilm thickness achieved with undiluted material. Do not use thinner to extendcoverage of paint.

3. Regardless of surface, it is painter's responsibility to achieve a suitable finish bydecreasing coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.

B. Roadway Traffic Lines and Markings: Apply in accordance with MarylandDepartment of Transportation, State Highway Administration Standards.

C. Parking Area Traffic Lines and Markings: Striping consists of white 4 inch widepainted lines of length and spacing indicated on Drawings. Paint lines accuratelywith sharp, clearly defined edges. Paint solid colored areas free of skips andholidays. Make linework straight and uniformly spaced.



D. Provide satisfactory barrier cones for at least 30 minutes, or until paint is dry andtrack free from vehicular traffic. Repaint marked or damaged areas, as directed byEngineer.

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Continuously maintain temporary paving without additional compensation untilreplaced with permanent paving.

B. Should Contractor fail to perform required maintenance or repairs within three daysafter written notice from Owner or Engineer, Owner may perform maintenance orrepairs and deduct cost from monies due or to become due Contractor.

END OF SECTION



Contract No. HCC21002 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1

SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Concrete Curbs.2. Concrete Sidewalks.3. Concrete Paving.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Maryland Department of Transportation (MDT), State Highway Administration,Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, latest addition.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):1. AASHTO M 85, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.2. AASHTO M 148, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Firming

Compounds for Curing Concrete.3. AASHTO M 182, Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or

Kenaf.4. AASHTO M 213, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers

for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and ResilientBituminous Types).

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. ACI 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.2. ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.3. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.4. ACI 308, Specification for Structural Concrete.5. ACI 308R, Guide to Curing Concrete.6. ACI 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.

D. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Field.2. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.



3. ASTM C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of CylindricalConcrete Specimens.

4. ASTM C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores andSawed Beams of Concrete.

5. ASTM C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.6. ASTM C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.7. ASTM C156, Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing

Materials.8. ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.9. ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete

by the Pressure Method.10. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for

Concrete.11. ASTM C309, Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane Forming Curing

Compounds and Curing and Sealing Compounds.12. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw Calcined

Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

E. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more ofblended hydraulic cement, expansion hydraulic cement, fly ash, and other pozzolansshall be used.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data for each type of manufactured material and productindicated. Include cementitious material, forming accessories, admixtures, jointsystem, and curing compounds.

B. Design Mixes: Submit for each concrete pavement mix and class. Include alternatemix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, testresults, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturers and Contractorcertifying that each of the following materials complies with or exceeds requirements.1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.2. Admixtures.3. Curing compounds.4. Applied finish materials.5. Bonding agent or adhesive.6. Joint fillers.7. Forming accessories.

D. Installer Qualifications: Submit ten (10) projects which the contractor has previouslyinstalled detectable warning surfaces.




A. Installer Qualifications: The installer experience shall include pavement work similarin material design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and shall have resultedin construction with a record of successful in-service performance. The work shall bedone by Contractors approved by Maryland Department of Transportation (MDT),State Highway Administration. The installer shall have installed concrete paving on atleast ten (10) previous projects.

B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of ready-mixed concreteproducts shall comply with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities andequipment.

C. The manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready-Mix ConcreteAssociation’s Plant Certification Program.

D. Source Limitations: The Contractor shall obtain each type of class of cementitiousmaterial of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant and shall obtain eachaggregate from one source.

E. ACI Publications: The work shall comply with ACI 301, “Specification for StructuralConcrete,” unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. The manufacturer of the detectable warning surface will be present at the installationto ensure quality and accuracy of the installation.


A. Traffic Control: The Contractor shall maintain access for vehicular and pedestriantraffic in accordance with all local, state, and federal regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Form materials shall be plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, orother acceptable panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight,smooth exposed surfaces. The Contractor shall use flexible or curved forms forcurves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form Release Agent: The form release agent shall be a commercially formulatedform-release agent with a maximum of 350 g/l volatile organic compound (VOCs)that shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and shall notimpair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.



2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: The Contractor shall use the same brand and type of cementitious materialfrom the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Portland Cement: Material shall comply with ASTM C150, type 1A.1. Fly Ash: Material shall comply with ASTM C618, Class F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Material shall comply with ASTM C33, class 4,uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as follows:1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½ inches nominal.2. Fine or coarse aggregate shall be free of substances which cause spalling.

D. Water: Potable, ASTM C94.

2.03 ADMIXTURES

A. General: The admixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer to contain no morethan 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and shall becompatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260, shall be certified by the manufacturer tobe compatible with other required admixtures.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.

D. High-Range Water-Reducing Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F orType G.

E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E.

F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.

2.04 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Material shall comply with AASHTO M 182, Class 2, with burlapcloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Material shall comply with ASTM C171, polyethylenefilm or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: The quality shall be Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: The material shall be a waterborne, monomolecular film-forming compound, manufactured for application to fresh concrete for temporaryprotection from rapid moisture loss.

E. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Material shallcomply with ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, Wax Free.



F. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Material shall complywith ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. Provide material that has a maximum volatileorganic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/l.

G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, material shall be one of thefollowing:1. Evaporation Retarder:

a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies.b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The)c. Spray-Film; ChemMasters.d. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation.f. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co.g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc.h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation.i. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.j. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries.l. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.m. Sika Film; Sika Corporation.n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation.o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

2. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:a. AH Curing Compound #2 DR; Anti-Hydro International, Inc.b. Res-X Cure All Resin; Burke group, LLP (The).c. RX Cure; Conspec Marketing & manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Day-Chem Rez Cure; Dayton Superior Corporation.e. Kurez DR; Euclid Chemical Co.f. Nitocure S; Fosroc.g. #64 Resin Cure; Lambert Corporation.h. L&M Cure DR; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.i. 3100-Clear; W.R. Meadows, Inc.j. Seal N Kure FDR; Metalcrete industries.k. Rich Cure; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.l. Resi-Chem C309; Symons Corporation.m. Horncure 30; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction

Chemicals North America, Inc.n. Uni Res 150; Unitex.o. Certi-Vex RC; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

3. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:a. AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB; Anti-Hydro International, Inc.b. Aqua Resin Cure; Burke Group, LLC (The).c. Safe-Cure Clear; ChemMasters.d. W.B. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.e. Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W); Dayton Superior Corporation.f. Nitocure S; Fosroc.g. Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corporation.



h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.i. 1100 Clear; W.R. Meadows, Inc.j. Resin Cure E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation.k. Rich Cure E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.l. Resi-Chem Clear Cure, Symons Corporation.m. Horncure 100, Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction

Chemicals North America, Inc.n. Hydro Cure; Unitex.o. Certi-Vex; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

2.05 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion-and-Isolation-Joint-filler-Strips: Material shall comply with ASTMD1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.06 CONCRETE MIXES

A. The design mixes shall be prepared and proportioned according to MarylandDepartment of Transportation (MDT), State Highway Administration, StandardSpecifications for Construction and Materials latest revision and all supplements foreach type and strength of concrete.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixdesigns for the trial batch method.

C. The mixes shall be proportioned to provide concrete with the following properties.1. Compressive strength (28 day): Class A - 3300-psi, Class AA - 3750 psi.2. Maximum Water-cementitious Materials Ratio: at Point of Placement, 0.45.3. Slump Limit: 3 inches

a. Slump Limit for concrete containing high-range-water admixture(superplasticizer): The slump shall not exceed 8 inches after addingadmixture to plant-or-site verified 2- to 3-inch slump concrete.

D. Cementitious Materials: The use by weight, of cementitious materials other Portlandcement in concrete shall be limited as follows:1. Fly Ash: 5 percent.

E. Add air-entraining admixtures at manufacture’s prescribed rate to result in concrete atpoint of placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent with a tolerance of plusor minus 1½ percent.

2.07 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Shall comply with ASTM C94 and the following:1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing

and delivery time from 1½ hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes,



2.08 CONCRETE CURBING

A. Concrete curb shall meet Maryland Department of Transportation (MDT), StateHighway Administration, Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials,3500-psi concrete curb where shown and as detailed on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared sub grade and base surfaces to check for unstable areas and verifyneed for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconformingconditions have been corrected and sub grade is ready to receive pavement.

B. Remove loose material from compacted base course surface immediately beforeplacing concrete.

C. Provide positive drainage away from buildings and structures. Ensure no ponding ofwater on-site.

D. Provide positive drainage away from accessible curb ramps. Ensure no ponding ofwater within ramp or at the bottom of curb along ramp.

3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides forpaving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuousprogress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concreteplacement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to the followingtolerances:1. Top of Form: Shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet.2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Shall not exceed ¼ inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensureseparation from concrete without damage.

3.03 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edging trueto line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transversejoints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated on the ContractDrawings.1. When joining existing pavement place transverse joints to align with previously

placed joints, unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.



B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving andat locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unlesspaving terminates at isolation joints.1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway section forms or

bulkheads forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated on the ContractDrawings. Embed keys at least 1½ inches into concrete.

2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against existing,hardened, or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concretecurbs, manholes, inlets, structures, sidewalks, other fixed objects, and whereindicated.1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated on the

Contract Drawings.2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.3. Terminate joint filler not less than ½ inch or more than 1 inch below finished

surface if joint sealant is indicated.4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated.5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever

possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-fillersections together.

6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, orother temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has beenplaced on both sides of joint.

D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on ContractDrawings. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concretebonding to one side of joint.

E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete intoareas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourthof the concrete thickness, as follows:1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and

finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a ⅜-inch radius unless shownotherwise on the Contract Drawings. Repeat grooving of contraction joints afterapplying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped withshatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut ⅛-inch wide joints intohardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwisedamage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

F. Edging: Tool edges of paving, curbs, and joints formed in concrete after initialfloating with an edging tool to a ⅜-inch radius unless shown otherwise on theContract Drawings. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.



3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, anditems to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of theirwork.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from base course surface before placing concrete.Concrete shall not be placed on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten base course to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete isplaced. Concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures after they are atthe required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring,mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. During delivery, at Project, or during placement of concrete, water shall not be added.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints.Concrete shall not be pushed or dragged. Vibrators shall not be used.

G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concreteaccording to recommendations in ACI 309R.1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with

an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement,or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading andconsolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating joint devices.

H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placementand to the required depth below finish surface. Place top layer of concrete, strike off,and screed.1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed

more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agentif approved by the Owner.

I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats ordarbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appearson the surface. Before beginning finishing operations concrete surface shall not bedisturbed.

J. Curbs: When automatic machine placement is used for curb placement, submitrevised mix design that meets or exceeds requirement. Produce curbs to requiredcross section, lines, grades, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. Removeand replace with formed concrete where results are not approved.



K. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submitrevised mix design that meets or exceeds requirement. Produce pavement to requiredthickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.1. Compact base course and sub grade of sufficient width to prevent displacement

of paver machine during operation.

L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, operate equipment onconcrete after pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306R and as follows: Protect concretework from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions, or low temperatures.1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F,

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixturetemperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F atpoint of placement.

2. Materials shall be free of ice or snow.3. Use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators that are specified or approved in mix designs.

N. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305Rand as specified when hot weather conditions exist.1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement to below 90 degrees F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice shall beused to control temperature, when an approved water equivalent of ice iscalculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to coolconcrete is Contractor’s option.

2. Fog spray forms and sub grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub grademoisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishingoperations is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed water sheen hasdisappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations.Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small orinaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within tolerance of ¼ inchin 10 feet as determined by a 10 foot long straightedge placed anywhere on thesurface in any condition. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surfaceimmediately to a uniform granular texture finish.1. Medium-to-Fine-textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-

finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform,fine-line texture.



C. Smooth Transitions: Provide a smooth and flush transition from existing concretesidewalk to proposed concrete sidewalk. Provide a smooth and flush transition fromproposed concrete curb to proposed concrete sidewalk. All transitions shall meet theAmericans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Standard Design Guidelines as enforced bythe Department of Justice.

3.06 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive coldand hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for coldweather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot weatherprotection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, orwindy weather conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft x h before andduring finishing operations. Apply according to manufactures written instructionsafter placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before floatfinishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared fromconcrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing,curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days

with the following materials.a. Water:

1) Continuous water-fog-spray2) Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacentabsorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, withsides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape oradhesive. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using covermaterial and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by powers sprayor roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areassubjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintaincontinuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4. Apply boiled linseed oil mixture no sooner than 28 days after placement toclean dry concrete surfaces free of oil, dirt, or other foreign material. Apply in2-sprayed applications at rate of 40 sq. yd per gallon for the first application and60 sq. yd per gallon for the second application. Allow complete drying betweenapplications.



3.07 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Pavement construction shall comply with the tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:1. Elevation: ¼ inch.2. Thickness: Plus ⅜ inch, minus ¼ inch.3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed ¼ inch.4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.5. Contraction: Joint Depth: Plus ¼ inch, no minus.6. Joint Width: Plus ⅛ inch, no minus.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection laboratory tosample materials, perform tests, and prepare reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be

obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply withASTM C 94.

2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type ofconcrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

4. Concrete temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40degrees F and below and when 80 degrees F and above, and one test for each setof compressive-strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M; one set of four standardcylinders for each compression-strength test, unless directed otherwise.Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens exceptwhen field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compression-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour of eachconcrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one for eachadditional 50 cu. yd. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimensat 28 days; and one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing ifrequired.a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-

strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted fromat least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer thanfive are used.

b. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd.,Inspector shall waive compressive-strength testing when adequateevidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

c. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages ofsets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceedspecified compressive-strength and no individual compressive-strength



test result falls below specified compressive-strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to Owner, within 24 hours of testing. Reportsof compressive-strength tests shall contain the Project identification name andnumber, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing laboratory, concretetype and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive-strength at28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, andtype of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive deviceare permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: Testing laboratory will make additional tests of concrete when testresults indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements havenot been met, as determined by the inspector or as directed by Owner. Testinglaboratory will conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinderscomplying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed.

3.09 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that has been broken, damaged, or defective, ordoes not meet the requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by the Owner when necessary to determine magnitudeof cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areaswith Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days afterplacement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean aspossible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days before scheduled for SubstantialCompletion inspections.

3.10 CURBING

A. Construct concrete curbing in accordance with Maryland Department ofTransportation (MDT), State Highway Administration, Standard Specifications forConstruction and Materials, for vertical face curbing.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


Contract No. HCC21002 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 13 - 1

SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section includes providing new site fencing and gates where shown onthe Drawings.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Continuing member of the Chain Link Fence ManufacturerInstitute (CLFMI).

B. Erector Qualifications: Provide at least one person in a supervisory capacity who isskilled and experienced in erecting chain link fence and who readily understands theproposed layout and is completely familiar with current erection practices of theCLFMI. The supervisory person must be present during progress of the fenceinstallation.

C. Design Criteria: Galvanized coated chain link type, with top rail and bottom tensionwire and single extension arms carrying three strands of barbed wire. Fabric heightshall be seven feet, and overall height, including barbed wire extension, shall beeight feet.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society For Testing and Materials:1. ASTM A 53; Specification for, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless.2. ASTM A 121; Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire.3. ASTM A 123; Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.4. ASTM A491 Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric5. ASTM A526 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-

Dip Process, Commercial Quality6. ASTM A569 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled

Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality7. ASTM A752 Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse

Round Wire, Alloy Steel8. ASTM A824 Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for

Use with Chain Link Fence9. ASTM F567 Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence



10. ASTM F626 Specification for Fence Fittings11. ASTM F900 Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates12. ASTM F1083 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Welded, for Fence Structures

B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI): CLFMI Publication, "Standards forChain Link Fence Installation"

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Manufacturer's published details modified to suitdesign and field conditions. Manufacturer's descriptive literature and specificationscovering the products specified. Descriptive literature shall include installationinformation.

B. Certificates: Include in Submittals certified mill certificates indicating materialconformity to yield strengths and coating requirements of these Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FENCE SYSTEM

A. Provide fence system supplied by single manufacturer, including fabric, posts, rails,braces, gates, fasteners and all other items required for complete installation. Allcomponents of fence system shall be black, PVC coated.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Anchor Fence, Inc.2. United States Steel, CYCLONE Fence.3. Allied Fence Products.4. Or Equal.

2.02 FABRIC

A. Type CL Fence Fabric: Zinc-coated steel fabric conforming to ASTM A392 with Class 2coating. Mesh size 2-inch square fabricated from No. 11 or No. 12 gage wire.1. The Contractor may furnish aluminum-coated steel fence fabric conforming to

ASTM A491, with 1-inch square mesh size fabricated from No. 11 or No. 12 gagewire.

B. Galvanized Tension Wire: No. 7 gauge marcelled wire conforming to ASTM A 824and galvanized according to ASTM A 824 Type II zinc-coating (Class 2) at 1.20ounces per sq. ft. Wire shall be PVC coated.

C. Privacy Slats: Color specified by the owner.



2.03 FRAME WORK AND GATES

A. Pipe Framework for Type CL Fencing: Posts and rails shall be standard weight galvanizedsteel pipe conforming to ASTM F1083. Sizes and weights shall be as follows:1. End and Corner Posts: Minimum nominal outside diameter of 2.875 inches, weighing

not less than 5.79 pounds per linear foot, for end, corner, and gate posts for gates 6feet wide and smaller. Gate posts for gate leaves from 6 feet to 13 feet wide shallhave minimum nominal outside diameter of 4.000 inches, weighing 9.11 pounds perlinear foot.

2. Line Posts: Nominal outside diameter of 2.375 inches, weighing not less than 3.65pounds per linear foot.

3. Rails and Braces: Nominal outside diameter of 1.660 inches, weighing not less than2.27 pounds per linear foot. Posts shall include galvanized bolted fittings to properlysecure rails and braces to posts.

B. Alternate Pipe Framework for Type CL Fencing:

1. Pipe for Posts and Rails: Posts and rails shall be high-strength pipe manufacturedfrom steel conforming to ASTM A569, cold-formed, high frequency or inductionwelded, and having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

2. End and Corner Posts: Minimum nominal outside diameter of 2.875 inches, weighingnot less than 4.64 pounds per linear foot, for end, corner, and gate posts for gates 6feet and smaller. Gate posts for gate leaves from 6 feet to 13 feet wide shall haveminimum nominal outside diameter of 4.000 inches, weighing not less than 6.56pounds per linear foot.

3. Line Posts: Nominal outside diameter of 2.375 inches, weighing not less than 3.12pounds per linear foot.

4. Rails and Braces: Nominal outside diameter of 1.660 inches, weighing not less than1.84 pounds per linear foot. Posts shall include galvanized bolted fittings to properlysecure rails and braces to posts.

5. External Pipe Coating: External surface shall be triple coated with 1.0 ounce plus orminus 0.1 ounce of zinc per square foot, 30 plus or minus 15 micrograms ofchromate per square inch, and a high-performance polymer. Pipe shall demonstratethe ability to resist 1,000 hours of exposure to salt spray with a maximum of fivepercent red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.

6. Internal Pipe Coating: Internal surface of pipe shall be coated, after welding, with azinc- rich based organic coating having a 91 percent zinc powder loading capable ofwithstanding 650 hours of exposure to salt fog with a maximum of five percent redrust when tested in accordance with ASTM B117. All coatings shall be applied inside and out after welding.

C. Tension Wire: Tension wire for top and bottom edge support of fence fabric shall be No. 7gage steel wire, conforming to ASTM A824, Class 3, with minimum tensile strength of80,000 psi, zinc-coated wire with zinc coating of not less than 0.80 ounce per square foot.



D. Post Caps and Fittings: Manufacturer's standard, pressed steel or malleable iron post caps,fittings, and accessories, meeting requirements of ASTM F626 galvanized for Type CLfencing. Post caps shall be designed to fit securely over the posts to exclude water and tocarry the top pipe rail and extension arms, where indicated. All other required fittings andhardware shall be provided to fasten to the pipe posts or concrete in the manner indicated.

E. Truss Rods: Alloy steel rods conforming to ASTM A752, with minimum tensile strengthof 80,000 psi, and minimum diameter of 5/8 inch. Provide rods with threaded ends andself- tightening galvanized turnbuckles and anchor plates. Secure anchor plates to postsand gate frames by welding.

F. Stretcher Bars: Provide one-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric with a minimumcross- section of 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post,and two for each corner and pull post.

G. Stretcher Bar Bands: Provide galvanized heavy pressed steel or malleable iron bands witha minimum cross section of 1/8 inch by 3/4 inch, spaced not over 15 inches on center, tosecure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull, and gate posts.

H. Accessories: Provide miscellaneous materials and accessories, clips, tie wires (9 gage),anchors, and fasteners as required for a complete installation. All items shall be galvanizedin accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 as applicable.

I. Barbed Wire Extension Arms: Pressed steel conforming to ASTM A526, hot-dipgalvanized after fabrication, complete with provision for anchorage to end, corner, and pullposts and for attaching three rows of barbed wire to each arm. Arms shall be 45-degreeangle or vertical as indicated, for three strands of barbed wire. Arms shall be integral withpost top weather cap. Intermediate arms shall have hole for passage of top tension wire.Arms shall be capable of withstanding 300 pounds downward pull at outermost end of armwithout failure.

J. Barbed Wire: Two-strand, zinc-coated, 12-1/2 gage steel wire with 14 gage, 4-point steelbarbs spaced 5 inches apart, conforming to ASTM A121. Zinc coating shall be Class 3,0.80 ounce per square foot for 12-1/2 gage wire and 0.65 ounce per square foot for 14-gagewire.

K. Gates: Gates shall be swinging type or sliding type as indicated, furnished complete withall hardware and accessories as required for a complete installation.1. Gate Frames: Frames shall be fabricated from zinc-coated steel pipe members (to

match posts in Type CL fencing) having a minimum outside diameter of 1.900 inchesand weighing not less than 2.72 pounds per linear foot.

2. Fabrication: Conform to applicable requirements of ASTM F900 and the following:a. Assemble gate frames by welding or with fittings and rivets for rigid

connections. Use same fabric as for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars atvertical edges, and tie wires at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars to



gate frame at not more than 15 inches on center. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means that will provide security against removal or breakage.

b. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gateoperation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories.

c. Provide diagonal cross bracing consisting of minimum 1/2-inch diameteradjustable length truss rods on gates where necessary to provide frame rigiditywithout sag or twist.

d. Provide privacy slats. Color specified by the Owner.3. Gate Hardware:

a. Swinging Gates: Provide gate hinges, latch, stop, and keeper for each gate leaf,conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM F900. Provide latch withprovision for locking gate with padlock.

2.04 CONCRETE

A. Provide concrete footings for fence posts under this Section. Concrete for posts shallhave a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi, using 1-inch maximumsize aggregate and five sacks of cement minimum per cubic yard, with a maximumslump of 4 inches. Concrete and grout materials, placing, and curing shall conform tothe applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Install new fence to maintain site security.

B. Remove vegetation and carefully prune adjacent trees as directed by the Engineer.Dispose of all vegetation off site.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not begin fence installation prior to completion of Site Grading.

B. Drill or dig holes for post footings in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shallhave a diameter equal to three times the diameter of the post. Excavate hole depthsapproximately three inches deeper than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not lessthan 36 inches in concrete base. Space posts a maximum of ten feet on center.

C. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour. Tamp concrete for consolidation.Check each post for vertical and top alignment. Crown top of post footings to shedwater.

D. Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories into concrete as required.



E. Construct continuous concrete mowing strip beneath entire fence alignment as shownon the Drawings.

F. Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rods are under proper tension.

G. Install tension wires before stretching fabric and tie to each post with ties or clips.

H. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails and tension wires. Install fabric on security sideof fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tensions after pullingforce is released.

I. Thread stretcher bars through fabric, and secure to posts with metal bands spaced notover 15 inches O.C.

J. Install three strands of barbed wire parallel on each extension arm on security side offence. Pull wire taut.

K. Swing Gate Installation: Install gates plumb, level and secure for full openingwithout interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage, asrecommended by the fence manufacturer and as detailed. Adjust hardware forsmooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

L. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Installground set items in concrete for anchorage, as recommended by fence manufacturerand as detailed. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

M. Install gate operator in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicatedin Contract Documents.

N. Ground fence and gates as shown on the Contract Drawings.

3.03 ADJUSTMENT

A. The Contractor and fence installer shall return to the project site approximately one(1) year after acceptance of the Contract by the Owner to inspect and adjust gates forsmooth operation.

END OF SECTION


Contract No. HCC21002 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS 33 71 19 - 1

SECTION 33 71 19

ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for underground electrical work, materials andproducts and raceway systems.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical2. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables3. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems4. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems5. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems6. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems7. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving: For utility trenching.


A. Equipment Manufacturer:1. In cases where the Contractor contemplates using equipment not made by the first

named manufacturer of these specifications, refer to Section 26 05 00 of thesespecifications for special requirements and/or substitution requirements.


A. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical, with the following additionsand modifications.

B. Factory Tests:1. Determine applicable soil-density relationships for underground electrical

installation bedding per applicable soil tests as defined in Division 31 of theSpecifications.

2. Determine soil-density relationships for compaction of backfill material asdefined in Division 31 of the Specifications.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval:1. Catalog Information:

a. Conduit. (All Types)

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Line



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as building wire, connectors, fittingsand similar devices as required for work of this Section are as specified in otherSections of these Specifications.

B. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL, when such equipment is listed orapproved.

C. Conduit: Conform to Section 26 05 33.13.

D. Wire and Cable: Conform to Section 26 05 13 and 26 05 19.

E. Grounding Material: Conform to Section 26 05 26.

2.02 WATERPROOFING OF CONDUIT JOINTS

A. General: Ensure that equipment and materials for waterproofing conduit jointscomplies with the following manufacturers for quality, installation procedures andguaranteed end results.1. Rigid Metal Conduit:

a. Thread sealant: As recommended and approved by the conduit manufacturer.b. Cleaning solvent: As recommended and approved by the conduit

manufacturer.2. Non-Metallic Conduit:

a. All weather, quick-set joint cement: Approved by the conduit manufacturer.b. Cleaning solvent: As recommended and approved by the conduit

manufacturer.

2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Metal detectable polyester material, with minimum one-inch high lettering.Overcoated graphics to read, "CAUTION-BURIED ELECTRIC LINE" for electriclines, “CAUTION - BURIED TELEPHONE” for telephone lines and/or “CAUTION -BURIED FIBER-OPTIC CABLES” for fiber-optic lines. APWA color to be red forelectric lines and orange for telecommunication or fiber-optic lines.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Brady2. LEM Products, Inc3. Seton4. Or Approved Equal



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: (For Underground Work)1. Install underground conduit systems in accordance with Article 300-5 of the NEC,

in accordance with previous requirements of this Section, and the followingrequirements exceeding NEC:a. Perform utility trenching earthwork for buried conduit as specified previously

for electrical work under Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.b. Where detailed on the Contract Drawings, underground conduits, both single

and banked as indicated on the Contract Drawings.c. Use of separators for direct buried conduits is prohibited. Maintain required

separation of direct buried conduits with screening materials and removableplacement forms.

d. Lay conduit lines to grade a minimum of three inches per 100 feet. Gradeconduit lines away from buildings, except conduit lines running betweenbuildings, without intervening handholes or manholes shall be level.

e. Construct underground conduit lines to be watertight. Stagger conduitcouplings in banks of conduits.

f. Unless otherwise indicated on drawing or details, where conduits changedirection or turn up at equipment, buildings, etc., use long sweep PVC coatedrigid galvanized steel conduit elbows.

g. Provide two feet minimum cover over conduits and over concrete encasementof conduit, unless indicated otherwise or specified.

h. Extend conduits 6 inches above concrete slab surface. Install insulatinggrounding bushing on all conduits. Perform concrete work as specified inDivision 3 "Cast-In-Place Concrete".

i. Provide underground conduit of the types indicated in Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Place duct bank lines with a continuous slope downward away from buildings with apitch of not less than 3 inches in 100 feet. Except at conduit risers, change direction ofbends in runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, by longsweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet. Sweep bends may bemade up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. Use onlymanufactured bends with a minimum radius of 18 inches for use with conduits of lessthan 3 inches in diameter and a minimum radius of 36 inches for conduits of 3 inchesin diameter and larger.

C. Backfilling: Provide a continuous plastic warning tape centered above the top of theunderground duct bank about 12 inches below grade. Conform concrete to thatspecified in Division 3 of this Contract. Progress backfilling as rapidly as theconstruction, testing and acceptance of the work permits. Ensure backfill is free fromroots, wood, scrap material, and other vegetable matter and refuse. Install andcompact backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00.



3.02 CONDUIT WATERPROOFING

A. Non-Metallic Conduit:1. Plastic PVC Conduit (Schedule 40): Liberally coat the end of the conduit with an

approved all weather, quick-set clear cement before joining. Insert joint into thecoupling, pushing firmly and rotating conduit until it reaches the pre-formedstopping ridge within the coupling.

3.03 EARTHWORK

A. Excavate to depths as required for manholes and handholes. Excavation for manholesand handholes shall conform to the requirements stipulated in Section 31 20 00 –Earth Moving.

B. Remove waste excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill on the projectfrom the site as directed. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection ofwork and safety of personnel. Remove water from excavation by pumping or otherapproved method.

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Provide non-current carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment with amaximum resistance to solid "earth" ground not exceeding the values indicated inSection 26 05 63 of these Specifications.

3.05 DISSIMILAR SURFACES ISOLATION

A. Paint aluminum surfaces at point of contact with wood, concrete or masonryconstruction with one coat (minimum dry mil thickness - 5.0 mils) of bituminouspaint.

B. Clean away excess or misplaced paint materials from aluminum surfaces andadjoining construction materials.

3.06 TEST

A. Field Tests: Field test of electrical equipment and conform systems to those specifiedin Section 26 05 63 of these Specifications.

END OF SECTION

catwood

Typewritten Text

B1

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line

catwood

Rectangle

catwood

Line